2022aisc360 Prone Draft PDF

SUMMARY OF MAJOR CHANGES IN PUBLIC REVIEW ONE OF AISC 360-22
Substantial changes to ANSI/AISC 360 in the 2022 edition that appear in Public Review One Draft
dated August 3, 2020:
• New shear lag factors are provided for slotted round and rectangular
• HSS members connected to a gusset plate and for rectangular HSS members connected two side
gusset plates.
• New provisions are provided compression members with lateral bracing offset from the shear
center (also known as constrained axis torsional buckling).
• Eurocode stress-strain-temperature equations have been incorporated in Appendix 4 (fire) so
users have clearer guidance on that material properties they can use for steel and concrete at
elevated temperatures.
• Appendix 4, Section 4.3, “Design by Qualification Testing,” now includes prescriptive steel fire
protection design equations and related information based on standard ASTM E119 fire tests,
which have also been contained in ASCE-29 and the IBC.
• Sections A4, Structural Design Documents and Specifications, has been expanded to list
information from the Code of Standard Practice that needs to be provided in the structural
design documents.
• A new Section A5, Approvals, has been added to address the review and approval of approval
documents.
• Chapter I, “Design of Composite Members,” has been expanded to include the coupled concrete
filled composite plate shear wall system.
• New provisions added to Chapter I, “Design of Composite Members,” has made this chapter the
single source standard for the design of composite members and systems.
• New provisions have been added for both filled and encased members.
• A new Appendix has been added to allow for the design of filled composite members with
higher strength materials (f’c ≤ 15,000 psi and Fy ≤ 100 ksi) ASTM F3148 (144 ksi) bolts have
been added to the Specification.
AISC 360-xx
_________________________
Specification
for Structural Steel Buildings
_________________________
Public Review Draft dated August 3, 2020
Supersedes the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

dated July 7, 2016 and all previous versions of this specification
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION

130 East Randolph Street, Suite 2000
PU
Chicago, Illinois 60601-6204

2
AISC © XXXX
by
American Institute of Steel Construction
All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof must not be
FOR COMMITTEE USE ONLY

reproduced in any form without the written permission of the publisher.
The AISC logo is a registered trademark of AISC.
20 NE
The information presented in this publication has been prepared by a balanced
committee following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) consensus
procedures and recognized principles of design and construction. While it is
20 O
believed to be accurate, this information should not be used or relied upon for any
specific application without competent professional examination and verification of
3, W
its accuracy, suitability and applicability by a licensed engineer or architect. The
publication of this information is not a representation or warranty on the part of
E
the American Institute of Steel Construction, its officers, agents, employees or
ST I
committee members, or of any other person named herein, that this information is
U EV
suitable for any general or particular use, or of freedom from infringement of any
patent or patents. All representations or warranties, express or implied, other than
as stated above, are specifically disclaimed. Anyone making use of the information
G R
presented in this publication assumes all liability arising from such use.
AU IC
Caution must be exercised when relying upon standards and guidelines developed
by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material may be
BL
modified or amended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this edition.
The American Institute of Steel Construction bears no responsibility for such
material other than to refer to it and incorporate it by reference at the time of the
PU
initial publication of this edition.
Printed in the United States of America
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xxxx,2022

DRAFT PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft dated August 3, 2020
Symbols-1
1 Symbols
2
3
4 Definitions for the symbols used in this standard are provided here and reflect the
5 definitions provided in the body of this standard. Some symbols may be used
6 multiple times throughout the document. The section or table number shown in the
7 right-hand column of the list identifies the first time the symbol is used in this
8 document. Symbols without text definitions are omitted.
9
10 Symbol Definition Section
11
12
13 ABM Area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2) .......................................................J2.4
14 Ab Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, in.2 (mm2) ....J3.6
15 Ab Nominal body area of undriven rivet, in.2 (mm2).................... App. 5.3.2a
16 Ac Area of concrete, in.2 (mm2) .............................................................. I2.1b
17 Area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (mm2) ................... I3.2d
20 NE
Ac
18 Ac Area of concrete in filled composite member, in.2 (mm2) ................... I4.2
19 Ae Effective area, in.2 (mm2) ................................................................... E7.2
20 Effective net area, in.2 (mm2) ................................................................ D2
20 O
Ae
21 Ae Effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2(mm2) ........................J4.1
22 Ae Summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on the
3, W
23 reduced effective widths, be, de or he, or the area as given by Equations
24 E7-6 or E7-7, in.2 (mm2) .......................................................................E7
E
25 Aev Effective area subjected to shear, in.2 (mm2) .......................................J4.3
ST I
26 Afc Area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2) ............................................. G2.2

U EV
27 Afg Gross area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section

28 B4.3a, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... F13.1
29 Net area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section B4.3b,
G R
Afn
30 in. 2 (mm2) ......................................................................................... F13.1
31 Area of tension flange, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... G2.2
AU IC
Aft
32 Ag Gross area of angle, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... F10.2
33 Ag Gross area of member, in.2 (mm2) .................................................... B4.3a
BL
34 Ag Gross area of eyebar body, in.2 (mm2) ............................................... D6.1

35 Ag Gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2) .................................... I2.1a
PU
36 Agv Gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2) ................................................J4.2

37 An Net area of member, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... B4.3b
38 Ant Net area subject to tension, in.2 (mm2) .................................................J4.3
39 Anv Net area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2) ....................................................J4.2
40 Apb Projected area in bearing, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... J7
41 As Area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)I1.5
42 Asa Cross-sectional area of steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2) ............. I8.2a
43 Asf Area on the shear failure path, in.2 (mm2).......................................... D5.1
44 Asr Area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2) ................................ I2.1a
45 Asr Area of developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the effective
46 width of the concrete slab, in.2 (mm2) ............................................. I3.2d.2
47 Asw Area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2) ....... I1.5
48 At Net area in tension, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... App. 3.4
49 AT Nominal forces and deformations due to the design-basis fire defined in
50 Section 4.2.1 ............................................................................. App. 4.1.4
51 Av Shear area of the steel portion of a composite member. The shear area
52 for a circular section is equal to 2As/π, and for a rectangular section is
53 equal to the sum of the area of webs in the direction of in-plane shear,
54 in.2 (mm2) ............................................................................................. I4.2
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft Dated August 3, 2020
Symbols-2
55 Aw Area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
56 ........................................................................................................... G2.1
57 Aw Area of web or webs, taken as the sum of the overall depth times the web
58 thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................................... G4
59 Awe Effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................J2.4
60 A1 Loaded area of concrete, in.2 (mm2) ................................................... I6.3a
61 A1 Area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, in.2 (mm2) . J8
62 A2 Maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that
63 is geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area, in.2
64 (mm2) ................................................................................................. J8
65 B Overall width of rectangular HSS main member, measured 90° to the
66 plane of the connection, in. (mm) ........................................... Table D3.1
67 Bb Overall width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate, measured 90°
68 to the plane of the connection, in. (mm) ............................................ K1.1
69 Be Effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for local
70 yielding of the transverse element, in. (mm) ..................................... K1.1
71 Bep Effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for punching
20 NE
72 shear, in. (mm) ....................................................... K1.1
73 B1 Multiplier to account for P-δ effects ............................................ App. 8.2
74 B2 Multiplier to account for P-Δ effects ........................................... App. 8.2
20 O
75 C HSS torsional constant ....................................................................... H3.1
76 Cb Lateral-torsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment
3, W
77 diagrams when both ends of the segment are braced ............................. F1
78 Cf Constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category .................... App. 3.3
E
79 Cm Equivalent uniform moment factor assuming no relative translation of
80 member ends ............................................................................. App. 8.2.1
ST I
U EV
81 Cv1 Web shear strength coefficient........................................................... G2.1

82 Cv2 Web shear buckling coefficient ........................................................ G2.2
83 Cw Warping constant, in.6 (mm6) ................................................................E4
G R
84 C1 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of encased composite

85 compression member ......................................................................... I2.1b
AU IC
86 C2 Edge distance increment, in. (mm) ........................................... Table J3.5

87 C3 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite
BL
88 compression member ......................................................................... I2.2b

89 D Diameter of round HSS, in. (mm) ................................................... B4.1b
90 D Outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm) ............................... Table D3.1
PU
91 D Outside diameter of round HSS main member, in. (mm) .................. K1.1
92 D Nominal dead load, kips (N) .............................................................. B3.9
93 D Nominal dead load rating .......................................................... App. 5.4.1
94 Db Outside diameter of round HSS branch member, in. (mm) ............... K1.1
95 Du A multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean installed bolt pretension to
96 the specified minimum bolt pretension ................................................J3.8
97 E Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) ... Table B4.1b
98 Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete = w1.5 c fc′ , ksi
99 ( 0.043w1.5 c fc′ , MPa) ......................................................................... I2.1b
100 Es Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) .............. I2.1b
101 EIeff Effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in.2 (N-mm2) ............... I2.1b
102 Fc Available stress in main member, ksi (MPa) ..................................... K1.1
103 Fca Available axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in
104 accordance with Chapter E for compression or Section D2 for tension,
105 ksi (MPa) .............................................................................................. H2
106 Fcbw, Fcbz Available flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in
107 accordance with Chapter F, ksi (MPa) .................................................. H2
108 Fcr Buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa) ......
109 ........................................................................................................... H3.3

Ballot Two Draft Dated August 3, 2020
Symbols-3
110 Fcr Critical stress, ksi (MPa)........................................................................E3

111 Fcr Lateral-torsional buckling stress for the section as determined by
112 analysis, ksi (MPa)............................................................................ F12.2
113 Fcr Local buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi
114 (MPa) ............................................................................................... F12.3
115 Fcr Critical buckling stress for steel element of filled composite members,
116 ksi (MPa) ........................................................................................... I6.2b
117 Fe Elastic buckling stress, ksi (MPa) ..........................................................E3
118 Fel Elastic local buckling stress determined according to Equation E7-5 or
119 an elastic local buckling analysis, ksi (MPa) ..................................... E7.1
120 FEXX Filler metal classification strength, ksi (MPa) .....................................J2.4
121 Fin Nominal bond stress, ksi (MPa) ........................................................ I6.3c
122 FL Nominal compression flange stress above which the inelastic buckling
123 limit states apply, ksi (MPa) ............................................................... F4.2
124 Fn Nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from Table J3.2, ksi
125 (MPa) ..................................................................................................J3.6
126 FnBM Nominal stress of the base metal, ksi (MPa) ........................................J2.4
20 NE
127 Fnt Nominal tensile stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa) ..............................J3.6
128 Fnt Nominal tensile strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
129 (MPa) ...................................................................................... App. 5.3.2a
20 O
130 F′nt Nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear stress, ksi
131 (MPa) ..................................................................................................J3.7
132 Nominal shear stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa) ................................J3.6
3, W
Fnv
133 Fnv Nominal shear strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi (MPa) .
134 ................................................................................................ App. 5.3.2a
E
135 Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa) .......................................J2.4
ST I
U EV
136 Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal in accordance with Chapter J, ksi
137 (MPa) K5
138 FSR Allowable stress range, ksi (MPa) ............................................... App. 3.3
G R
139 FTH Threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range for indefinite
140 design life from Table A-3.1, ksi (MPa) ...................................... App. 3.3
AU IC
141 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa) .................................... D2

142 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud anchor, ksi
BL
143 (MPa) ................................................................................................ I8.2a

144 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, ksi
145 (MPa) .................................................................................................J3.10
PU
146 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of HSS member material, ksi

147 (MPa) ................................................................................................. K1.1
148 Fy Specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa). As used in this Specification,
149 “yield stress” denotes either the specified minimum yield point (for those
150 steels that have a yield point) or specified yield strength (for those steels
151 that do not have a yield point) ........................................... Table B4.1b
152 Fy Specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
153 (MPa) ....................................................................................................E3
154 Fy Specified minimum yield stress of the column web, ksi (MPa).........J10.6
155 Fy Specified minimum yield stress of HSS main member material, ksi
156 (MPa) ................................................................................................. K1.1
157 Fyb Specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member or plate
158 material, ksi (MPa) ............................................................................ K1.1
159 Fyf Specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi (MPa) ..................J10.1
160 Fysr Specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing steel, ksi (MPa) ....... I2.1b
161 Fyst Specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi (MPa) .........
162 ........................................................................................................... G2.4
163 Fyw Specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi (MPa) ....... G2.3
164 G Shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11,200 ksi (77 200 MPa) ...........E4
165 Gc Shear modulus of concrete, ksi (MPa) ................................................. I1.5

Symbols-4
166 H Flexural constant ....................................................................................E4

167 H Maximum transverse dimension of rectangular steel member, in. (mm) ...
168 ........................................................................................................... I6.3c
169 H Total story shear, in the direction of translation being considered,
170 produced by the lateral forces used to compute ΔH, kips (N).... App. 8.2.2
171 H Overall height of rectangular HSS member, measured in the plane of the
172 connection, in. (mm) .......................................................................... K1.1
173 Hb Overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, measured in the
174 plane of the connection, in. (mm) ...................................................... K1.1
175 I Moment of inertia in the plane of bending, in.4 (mm4) ............. App. 8.2.1
176 Ic Moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neutral axis of
177 the composite section, in.4 (mm4) ........................................................ I1.5
178 Is Moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of the
179 composite section, in.4 (mm4) ......................................................... I1.5
180 Isr Moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral axis of the
181 composite section, in.4 (mm4) ............................................................ I2.1b
182 Ist Moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners about an axis in the web center
20 NE
183 for stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact with the web plate for
184 single stiffeners, in.4 (mm4) ............................................................... G2.4
185 Ist1 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for
20 O
186 development of the full shear post buckling resistance of the stiffened
187 web panels, in.4 (mm4) ....................................................................... G2.4
188 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for
3, W
Ist2
189 development of web shear buckling resistance, in.4 (mm4) ............... G2.4
190 I x, I y Moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 (mm4) .........................E4
E
191 Iy Moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4(mm4).................................... F2.2

ST I
Effective out-of-plane moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4) ............. App. 6.3.2a

U EV
192 Iyeff
193 Iyc Moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
194 ............................................................................................................ F4.2
G R
195 Iyt Moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4) .......
196 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.2a
AU IC
197 J Torsional constant, in.4 (mm4) ...............................................................E4

198 K Effective length factor ...........................................................................E2
BL
199 Kx Effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis .....................E4
200 Ky Effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis .....................E4
201 Kz Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the longitudinal axis .
PU
202 ...............................................................................................................E4
203 L Length of member, in. (mm) .............................................................. H3.1
204 L Laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm) ....................................E2
205 L Length of span, in. (mm) ........................................................ App. 6.3.2a
206 L Length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, in.
207 (mm) ......................................................................................................E5
208 L Nominal live load .............................................................................. B3.9
209 L Nominal live load rating ........................................................... App. 5.4.1
210 L Nominal occupancy live load, kips (N) .................................... App. 4.1.4
211 L Height of story, in. (mm) .......................................................... App. 7.3.2
212 Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement
213 of compression flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in.
214 (mm) ................................................................................................... F2.2
215 Lb Laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm) ............................... F10.2
216 Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement
217 of the compression region, or between points braced to prevent twist of
218 the cross section, in. (mm) ................................................................ F11.2
219 Lb Largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of load,
220 in. (mm) .............................................................................................J10.4
221 Lbr Unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm) ..............

Symbols-5
222 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1

223 Lbr Unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm). ............ App. 6.2.2
224 Lc Effective length of member, in. (mm) ...................................................E2
225 Lc Effective length of member for buckling about the minor axis, in. (mm) .
226 ...............................................................................................................E5
227 Lc Effective length of built-up member, in. (mm) ................................... E6.1
228 Lcx Effective length of member for buckling about x-axis, in. (mm) ...........E4
229 Lcy Effective length of member for buckling about y-axis, in. (mm) ...........E4
230 Lcz Effective length of member for buckling about longitudinal axis, in.
231 (mm) ......................................................................................................E4
232 Lc1 Effective length in the plane of bending, calculated based on the
233 assumption of no lateral translation at the member ends, set equal to the
234 laterally unbraced length of the member unless analysis justifies a small-
235 er value, in. (mm)...................................................................... App. 8.2.1
236 Lin Load introduction length, determined in accordance with Section I6.4,
237 in. (mm) ............................................................................................ I6.3c
238 Lp Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding, in.
20 NE
239 (mm) ................................................................................................... F2.2
240 Lr Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
241 torsional buckling, in. (mm) ............................................................... F2.2
20 O
242 Lr Nominal roof live load .............................................................. App. 5.4.1
243 Lv Distance from maximum to zero shear force, in. (mm) ........................ G5
244 L x, L y, L z Laterally unbraced length of the member for each axis, in. (mm) .........E4
3, W
245 MA Absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced segment, kip-
246 in. (N-mm) ............................................................................................. F1
E
247 MB Absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced segment, kip-in.

ST I
248 (N-mm) ................................................................................................. F1

U EV
249 MC Absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced

250 segment, kip-in. (N-mm ......................................................................... F1
G R
251 Mc Available flexural strength, φMn or Mn/Ω, determined in accordance with

252 Chapter F, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................................. H1.1
AU IC
253 Mc Available flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I3,

254 kip-in. (N-mm)........................................................................................ I5
BL
255 Mcr Elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. F10.2
256 Mcx Available lateral-torsional strength for major axis flexure determined in
257 accordance with Chapter F using Cb = 1.0, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. H1.3
PU
258 Mcx Available flexural strength about x-axis for the limit state of tensile
259 rupture of the flange, φMn or Mn/Ω, determined according to Section
260 F13.1, kip-in. (N-mm) .......................................................................... H4
261 Mlt First-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations, due to
262 lateral translation of the structure only, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. App. 8.2
263 Mmax Absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced segment, kip-in.
264 (N-mm) .................................................................................................. F1
265 Mn Nominal flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................ F1
266 Mnt First-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations, with the
267 structure restrained against lateral translation, kip-in. (N-mm) ... App. 8.2
268 Mp Plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm)Table B4.1b
269 Mp Moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over the composite
270 cross section, kip-in. (N-mm) ....................................................... I3.4b
271 Mpf Plastic moment of a section composed of the flange and a segment of the
272 web with a depth, de, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................ G2.3
273 Mpm Smaller of Mpf and Mpst, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................ G2.3
274 Mpst Plastic moment of a section composed of the stiffener plus a length of
275 web equal to de plus the distance from the inside face of the stiffener to
276 the end of the beam, except that the distance from the inside face of the

Symbols-6
277 stiffener to the end of the beam shall not exceed 0.84tw E Fy for
278 calculation purposes, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................ G2.3
279 Mr Required second-order flexural strength using LRFD or ASD load
280 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................................................... App. 8.2
281 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
282 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ................. H1.1
283 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I1.5,
284 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ...................... I5
285 Mr Required flexural strength of the beam within the panel under
286 consideration using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ...
287 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.1a
288 Mr Largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
289 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load
290 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)……………………................. App. 6.3.1b
291 Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in
292 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
293 positive for tension in the flange under consideration and negative for
20 NE
294 compression, kip-in. (N-mm) .......................................................... H4
295 Mbr Required flexural strength of the brace, kip-in. (N-mm) ........ App. 6.3.2a
296 Mro Required flexural strength in chord at a joint, on the side of joint with
20 O
297 lower compression stress, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................... Table K2.1
298 Mr-ip Required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load
3, W
299 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................. Table K4.1
300 Mr-op Required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD
E
301 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ......................................... Table K4.1
ST I
302 Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in
U EV
303 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations,

304 positive for tension in the flange under consideration,kip-in. (N-mm) ...... H4
305 My Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber, kip-in. (N-mm) ..... Table B4.1b
G R
306 My Yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension flange and first
307 yield of the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................... I3.4b
AU IC
308 My Yield moment about the axis of bending, kip-in. (N-mm) .................. F9.1
309 My Yield moment calculated using the geometric section modulus, kip-in.
BL
310 (N-mm) ............................................................................................. F10.2

311 Myc Yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm) ................. F4.1
PU
312 Myt Yield moment in the tension flange, kip-in. (N-mm).......................... F4.4
313 M1′ Effective moment at the end of the unbraced length opposite from M2,
314 kip-in. (N-mm)........................................................................ App. 1.3.2c
315 M1 Smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm) ............ F13.5
316 M2 Larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. F13.5
317 Ni Notional load applied at level i, kips (N) ......................................... C2.2b
318 Ni Additional lateral load, kips (N) ............................................... App. 7.3.2
319 Ov Overlap connection coefficient .......................................................... K3.1
320 Pa Required axial strength in chord using ASD load combinations, kips (N)
321 ................................................................................................. Table K2.1
322 Pbr Required end and intermediate point brace strength using LRFD or ASD
323 load combinations, kips (N) ...................................................... App. 6.2.2
324 Pc Available compressive strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accordance
325 with Chapter E, kips (N) H1.1
326 Pc Available tensile strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determine in accordance with
327 Chapter D, kips (N)............................................................................ H1.2
328 Pc Available compressive strength in plane of bending, kips (N) .......... H1.3
329 Pc Available tensile or compressive strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in
330 accordance with Chapter D or E, kips (N) ......................................... H3.2

Symbols-7
331 Pc Available axial strength for the limit state of tensile rupture of the net
332 section at the location of bolt holes φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accord-
333 ance with Section D2(b), kips (N) ........................................................ H4
334 Pc Allowable axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2, kips
335 (N)........................................................................................................... I5
336 Pc Design axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2, kips
337 (N)........................................................................................................... I5
338 Pcy Available compressive strength out of the plane of bending, kips (N)
339 H1.3
340 Pe Elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with Chapter C
341 or Appendix 7, kips (N) ..................................................................... I2.1b
342 Pe story Elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction of
343 translation being considered, kips (N) ....................................... App 8.2.2
344 Pe1 Elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of bending,
345 kips (N) .................................................................................... App. 8.2.1
346 Plt First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations, due to
347 lateral translation of the structure only, kips (N) ......................... App. 8.2
20 NE
348 Pmf Total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of moment
349 frames, if any, in the direction of translation being considered, kips (N) .. .
350 .................................................................................................. App. 8.2.2
20 O
351 Pn Nominal axial strength, kips (N) .......................................................... D2
352 Pn Nominal compressive strength, kips (N) ...............................................E1
353 Nominal axial compressive strength of zero length, doubly symmetric,
3, W
Pno
354 axially loaded composite member, kips (N) ...................................... I2.1b
355 Available compressive strength of axially loaded doubly symmetric
E
Pno
356 filled composite members, kips (N) ................................................... I2.2b
ST I
U EV
357 Pno Nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of length

358 effects, kips (N) ................................................................................. I6.2a
359 Pns Cross-section compressive strength, kips (N) ................................... C2.3
G R
360 Pnt First-order axial force using LRFD and ASD load combinations, with the
361 structure restrained against lateral translation, kips (N)............... App. 8.2
AU IC
362 Pp Nominal bearing strength, kips (N) ....................................................... J8

363 Pr Largest of the required axial strengths of the column within the unbraced
BL
364 lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD load combina-
365 tions, kips (N) ........................................................................... App. 6.2.2
366 Pr Required axial compressive strength using LRFD or ASD load
PU
367 combinations, kips (N)....................................................................... C2.3

368 Pr Required axial strength of the column within the panel under
369 consideration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ............. .
370 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
371 Pr Required second-order axial strength using LRFD or ASD load
372 combinations, kips (N)................................................................. App. 8.2
373 Pr Required compressive strength, determined in accordance with Chapter
374 C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ........................ H1.1
375 Pr Required tensile strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
376 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ............................. H1.2
377 Pr Required axial strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using
378 LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ...................................... H3.2
379 Pr Required axial strength of the member at the location of the bolt holes,
380 determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
381 combinations, positive in tension and negative in compression, kips (N) . .
382 ................................................................................................ H4
383 Pr Required axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I1.5,
384 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) .................................. I5
385 Pr Required external force applied to the composite member, kips (N).........
386 ........................................................................................................... I6.2a

Symbols-8
387 Pr Required axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
388 ...........................................................................................................J10.6
389 Pro Required axial strength in chord at a joint, on the side of joint with lower
390 compression stress, kips (N) .................................................... Table K2.1
391 Pstory Total vertical load supported by the story using LRFD or ASD load
392 combinations, as applicable, including loads in columns that are not part
393 of the lateral force-resisting system, kips (N) ........................... App. 8.2.2
394 Pu Required axial strength in chord using LRFD load combinations, kips
395 (N)............................................................................................ Table K2.1
396 Pu Required axial strength in compression using LRFD load combinations,
397 kips (N) .................................................................................. App. 1.3.2b
398 Py Axial yield strength of the column, kips (N) ....................................J10.6
399 Qct Available tensile strength, determined in accordance with Section I8.3b,
400 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I8.3c
401 Qcv Available shear strength, determined in accordance with Section I8.3a,
402 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I8.3c
403 Qf Chord-stress interaction parameter ...................................................J10.3
20 NE
404 Qg Gapped truss joint parameter accounting for geometric effects .................
405 ................................................................................................. Table K3.1
406 Qn Nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud or steel channel anchor,
20 O
407 kips (N) ........................................................................................... I3.2d.1
408 Qnt Nominal tensile strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N) ......... I8.3b
409 Nominal shear strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N) ........... I8.3a
3, W
Qnv
410 Qrt Required tensile strength, kips (N) .................................................... I8.3b
411 Required shear strength, kips (N) ...................................................... I8.3c
E
Qrv
412 R Radius of joint surface, in. (mm) .............................................. Table J2.2
ST I
413 Required strength using ASD load combinations ............................. B3.2

U EV
Ra
414 RFIL Reduction factor for joints using a pair of transverse fillet welds only .....
415 ..................................................................................................... App. 3.3
G R
416 Rg Coefficient to account for group effect ............................................. I8.2a

417 RM Coefficient to account for influence of P-δ on P-Δ .................. App. 8.2.2
AU IC
418 Rn Nominal strength ............................................................................... B3.1

419 Rn Nominal bond strength, kips (N) ....................................................... I6.3c
BL
420 Rn Nominal slip resistance, kips (N) .........................................................J1.8

421 Rn Nominal strength of the applicable force transfer mechanism, kips (N) ... .
422 ............................................................................................................. I6.3
PU
423 Rn Nominal strength of the connected material, kips (N) .......................J3.10

424 Rnwl Total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, as
425 determined in accordance with Table J2.5, kips (N) ............................J2.4
426 Rnwt Total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as determined
427 in accordance with Table J2.5 without the increase in Section J2.4(b),
428 kips (N) J2.4
429 Rp Position effect factor for shear studs ................................................. I8.2a
430 Rpc Web plastification factor, determined in accordance with Section
431 F4.2(c)(6) ............................................................................................ F4.1
432 Rpg Bending strength reduction factor....................................................... F5.2
433 RPJP Reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced transverse partial-joint-
434 penetration (PJP) groove welds .................................................. App. 3.3
435 Rpt Web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yielding
436 limit state ............................................................................................ F4.4
437 Ru Required strength using LRFD load combinations ........................... B3.1
438 S Elastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3) ........... F7.2
439 S Largest clear spacing of the ties, in. (mm) ......................................... I1.6b
440 S Nominal snow load, kips (N) .................................................... App. 4.1.4
441 Sc Elastic section modulus, in.3 (mm3) .................................................... F9.4

Symbols-9
442 Sc Elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the axis of
443 bending, in.3 (mm3) ........................................................................... F10.3
444 Se Effective section modulus determined with the effective width of the
445 compression flange, in.3 (mm3) ........................................................... F7.2
446 Sip Effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending, in.3
447 (mm3) .................................................................................................... K5
448 Smin Minimum elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending, in.3
449 (mm3) .................................................................................................. F12
450 Sx Elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F2.2
451 Sx Minimum elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) .......
452 .......................................................................................................... F13.1
453 Sop Effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending, in.3
454 (mm3) .................................................................................................... K5
455 Sxc, Sxt Elastic section modulus referred to compression and tension flanges,
456 respectively, in.3 (mm3) .......................................................... Table B4.1b
457 Sy Elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F6.1
458 T Elevated temperature of steel due to unintended fire exposure,°F (°C) ..... .
20 NE
459 ................................................................................................ App. 4.2.4d
460 Ta Required tension force using ASD load combinations, kips (kN) .......J3.9
461 Tb Minimum fastener tension given in Table J3.1 or J3.1M, kips (kN) ...J3.8
20 O
462 Tc Available torsional strength, φTn or Tn/Ω, determined in accordance with
463 Section H3.1, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................................ H3.2
3, W
464 Tn Nominal torsional strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ...................................... H3.1
465 Tr Required torsional strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
E
466 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ................. H3.2
467 Tu Required tension force using LRFD load combinations, kips (kN) .....J3.9
ST I
U EV
468 U Shear lag factor ..................................................................................... D3

469 U Utilization ratio ........................................................................ Table K2.1
470 Ubs Reduction coefficient, used in calculating block shear rupture strength ....
G R
471 .............................................................................................................J4.3
472 Up Stress index for primary members ............................................... App. 2.2
AU IC
473 V′ Nominal shear force between the steel beam and the concrete slab
474 transferred by steel anchors, kips (N) ................................................ I3.2d
BL
475 Vbr Required shear strength of the bracing system in the direction
476 perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, kips (N) .................
477 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
PU
478 Vc Available shear strength, φVn or Vn/Ω, determined in accordance with

479 Chapter G, kips (N)............................................................................ H3.2
480 Vc1 Available shear strength calculated with Vn as defined in Section G2.1 or
481 G2.2. as applicable, kips (N).............................................................. G2.4
482 Vc2 Available shear buckling strength, kips (N)....................................... G2.4
483 Vn Nominal shear strength, kips (N) .......................................................... G1
484 Vr Required shear strength in the panel being considered, kips (N) ....... G2.4
485 Vr Required shear strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using
486 LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ...................................... H3.2
487 V r′ Required longitudinal shear force to be transferred to the steel or
488 concrete, kips (N)................................................................................. I6.1
489 Yi Gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combination or ASD
490 load combination, as applicable, kips (N) ........................................ C2.2b
491 Z Plastic section modulus taken about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3) ........
492 ............................................................................................................ F7.1
493 Zb Plastic section modulus of branch taken about the axis of bending, in.3
494 (mm3) ................................................................................................ K4.1
495 Zx Plastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) ... Table B4.1b
496 Zy Plastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F6.1

Symbols-10
497 a Clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm) ..................... F13.2
498 a Distance between connectors, in. (mm) .............................................. E6.1
499 a Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured
500 parallel to the direction of force, in. (mm) ......................................... D5.1
501 a Half the length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of the
502 thickness of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm) ........................... App. 3.3
503 a′ Weld length along both edges of the cover plate termination to the beam
504 or girder, in. (mm) ............................................................................ F13.3
505 aw Ratio of two times the web area in compression due to application of
506 major axis bending moment alone to the area of the compression flange
507 components ......................................................................................... F4.2
508 b Full width of leg in compression, in. (mm)....................................... F10.3
509 b Largest clear distance between rows of steel anchors or ties, in. (mm)
510 ............................................................................................. I1.6a
511 b Width of compression element as shown in Table B4.1, in. (mm) .... B4.1
512 b Width of the element, in. (mm)........................................................... E7.1
513 b Width of compression flange as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
20 NE
514 ............................................................................................................ F7.2
515 b Width of the leg resisting the shear force or depth of tee stem, in. (mm)
516 .............................................................................................................. G3
20 O
517 b Width of leg, in. (mm) ...................................................................... F10.2
518 bcf Width of column flange, in. (mm) .....................................................J10.6
519 Effectivewidth, in. (mm) ..................................................................... E7.1
3, W
be
520 be Effective edge distance for calculation of tensile rupture strength of pin-
521 connected member, in. (mm) ............................................................. D5.1
E
522 bf Width of flange, in. (mm) .................................................................. B4.1

ST I
U EV
523 bfc Width of compression flange, in. (mm) .............................................. F4.2

524 bft Width of tension flange, in. (mm) ...................................................... G2.2
525 bl Length of longer leg of angle, in. (mm) .................................................E5
G R
526 bp Smaller of the dimension a and h, in. (mm)....................................... G2.4

527 bs Length of shorter leg of angle, in. (mm) ................................................E5
AU IC
528 bs Stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners; twice the individual stiffener
529 width for pairs of stiffeners, in. (mm) ..................................... App. 6.3.2a
BL
530 c Distance from the neutral axis to the extreme compressive fibers, in.
531 (mm) ...................................................................................... App. 6.3.2a
532 c1 Effective width imperfection adjustment factor determined from Table
PU
533 E7.1 ..................................................................................................... E7.1

534 d Depth of section from which the tee was cut, in. (mm) .......... Table D3.1
535 d Depth of tee or width of web leg in tension, in. (mm) ........................ F9.2
536 d Depth of tee or width of web leg in compression, in. (mm) ............... F9.2
537 d Nominal diameter of fastener, in. (mm) ...............................................J3.3
538 d Full depth of thesection, in. (mm) ..................................................... B4.1a
539 d Depth of rectangular bar, in. (mm) ................................................... F11.1
540 d Diameter, in. (mm) ................................................................................ J7
541 d Diameter of pin, in. (mm) .................................................................. D5.1
542 db Depth of beam, in. (mm) ....................................................................J10.6
543 db Nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), in. (mm) ............... App. 3.4
544 dc Depth of column, in. (mm) ................................................................J10.6
545 de Effective width for tees, in. (mm) ....................................................... E7.1
546 dh Nominal hole diameter plus 1/16 in. (2 mm), in. (mm) .......................J4.3
547 dsa Diameter of steel headed stud anchor, in. (mm) .................................. I8.1
548 dtie Effective diameter of the tie bar, in. (mm) ......................................... I1.6b
549 e Eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the
550 branches, in. (mm) ............................................................................. K3.1
551 emid-ht Distance from the edge of steel headed stud anchor shank to the steel
552 deck web, in. (mm) ............................................................................ I8.2a

Symbols-11
553 fc′ Specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa) ................... I1.3fra
554 Required axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in
555 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
556 (MPa) ................................................................................................... H2
557 frbw. frbz Required flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in
558 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
559 (MPa) ................................................................................................... H2
560 frv Required shear stress using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa) .
561 .............................................................................................................J3.7
562 g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines,
563 in. (mm) ........................................................................................... B4.3b
564 g Gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection,
565 neglecting the welds, in. (mm)........................................................... K3.1
566 h Width of compression element as shown in Table B4.1, in. (mm) .... B4.1
567 h Depth of web, as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm) ......................... F7.3
568 h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in. (mm)
569 ........................................................................................................... G2.1
20 NE
570 h For built-up welded sections, the clear distance between flanges, in.
571 (mm) ................................................................................................ G2.1
572 h For built-up bolted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in.
20 O
573 (mm) ................................................................................................ G2.1
574 h Width resisting the shear force, taken as the clear distance between the
575 flanges less the inside corner radius on each side for HSS or the clear
3, W
576 distance between flanges for box sections, in. (mm) ............................ G4
E
577 h Flat width of longer side, as defined in Section B4.1b(d), in. (mm) .. H3.1
578 hc Twice the distance from the center of gravity to the following: the inside
ST I
U EV
579 face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius, for rolled
580 shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the
581 inside faces of the compression flange when welds are used, for built-up
G R
582 sections, in. (mm) .............................................................................. B4.1

583 he Effective width for webs, in. (mm) ........................................................E7
AU IC
584 hf Factor for fillers ..................................................................................J3.8

585 ho Distance between flange centroids, in. (mm) .........................................E4
BL
586 hp Twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the nearest line of
587 fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression
588 flange when welds are used, in. (mm) ............................................. B4.1b
PU
589 k Distance from outer face of flange to the web toe of fillet, in. (mm).........
590 ...........................................................................................................J10.2
591 kc Coefficient for slender unstiffened elements ........................... Table B4.1
592 ksc Slip-critical combined tension and shear coefficient ..........................J3.9
593 kv Web plate shear buckling coefficient ................................................ G2.1
594 l Actual length of end-loaded weld, in. (mm) ........................................J2.2
595 l Length of connection, in. (mm) ............................................... Table D3.1
596 lb Bearing length of the load, measured parallel to the axis of the HSS
597 member (or measured across the width of the HSS in the case of loaded
598 cap plates), in. (mm) ......................................................................... K2.1
599 lb Length of bearing, in. (mm) ................................................................... J7
600 la Length of channel anchor, in. (mm)................................................... I8.2b
601 lc Clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the hole
602 and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, in. (mm) ..........
603 ...........................................................................................................J3.10
604 le Total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to HSS for weld
605 strength calculations, in. (mm).............................................................. K5
606 lend Distance from the near side of the connecting branch or plate to end of
607 chord, in. (mm) ................................................................................. K1.1

Symbols-12
608 lov Overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord beneath
609 the two branches, in. (mm) ................................................................ K3.1
610 lp Projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, in. (mm) ... K3.1
611
612 n Number of braced points within the span ............................... App. 6.3.2a
613 n Threads per inch (per mm) .......................................................... App. 3.4
614 nb Number of bolts carrying the applied tension ......................................J3.9
615 ns Number of slip planes required to permit the connection to slip .........J3.8
616 nSR Number of stress range fluctuations in design life ....................... App. 3.3
617 p Pitch, in. per thread (mm per thread) ........................................... App. 3.4
618 pb Perimeter of the steel-concrete bond interface within the composite cross
619 section, in. (mm) ................................................................................ I6.3c
620 r Radius of gyration, in. (mm) ..................................................................E2
621 r Retention factor depending on bottom flange temperature .... App. 4.2.4d
622 ra Radius of gyration about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg,
623 in. (mm) .................................................................................................E5
624 ri Least radius of gyration of individual component, in. (mm) .............. E6.1
20 NE
625 ro Polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (mm) ......................E4
626 rt Effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling. For I-shapes
627 with a channel cap or a cover plate attached to the compression flange,
20 O
628 radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus
629 one-third of the web area in compression due to application of major axis
3, W
630 bending moment alone, in. (mm) ........................................................ F4.2
631 rx Radius of gyration about the x-axis, in. (mm)........................................E4
E
632 ry Radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm) .............................................E4
633 rz Radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm) .................E5
ST I
U EV
634 s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive

635 holes, in. (mm) ................................................................................. B4.3b
636 t Distance from the neutral axis to the extreme tensile fibers, in. (mm) .....
G R
637 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.2a

638 t Plate thickness, in. (mm).................................................................... I1.6a
AU IC
639 t Thickness of wall, in. (mm) ................................................................ E7.2

640 t Thickness of angle leg, in. (mm) ...................................................... F10.2
BL
641 t Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of bending, in. (mm) ......... F11.1
642 t Thickness of connected material, in. (mm) ........................................J3.10
643 t Thickness of plate, in. (mm) .............................................................. D5.1
PU
644 t Total thickness of fillers, in. (mm).......................................................J5.2

645 t Design wall thickness of HSS member, in. (mm) ............................. B4. 2
646 t Design wall thickness of HSS main member, in. (mm) ..................... K1.1
647 t Thickness of angle leg or tee stem, in. (mm) ........................................ G3
648 tb Design wall thickness of HSS branch member or thickness of plate, in.
649 (mm) ................................................................................................ K1.1
650 tbi Thickness of overlapping branch, in. (mm) ............................. Table K3.2
651 tbj Thickness of overlapped branch, in. (mm) .............................. Table K3.2
652 tcf Thickness of column flange, in. (mm) ...............................................J10.6
653 tf Thickness of flange, in. (mm) ............................................................. F3.2
654 tf Thickness of the loaded flange, in. (mm)...........................................J10.1
655 tf Thickness of flange of channel anchor, in. (mm) .............................. I8.2b
656 tfc Thickness of compression flange, in. (mm) ........................................ F4.2
657 tp Thickness of tension loaded plate, in. (mm) ................................ App. 3.3
658 tsc Thickness of composite plate shear wall, in. (mm) ............................ I1.6b
659 tst Thickness of web stiffener, in. (mm) ...................................... App. 6.3.2a
660 tw Thickness of web, in. (mm) ................................................................ F4.2
661 tw Smallest effective weld throat thickness around the perimeter of branch
662 or plate, in. (mm) .................................................................................. K5
663 tw Thickness of channel anchor web, in. (mm) ...................................... I8.2b

Symbols-13
664 tw Thickness of column web, in. (mm) ..................................................J10.6

665 w Width of cover plate, in. (mm) ......................................................... F13.3
666 w Weld size, in. (mm) ...........................................................................J2.2b
667 w Subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending ................... H2
668 w Width of plate, in. (mm) .......................................................... Table D3.1
669 w Leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if any, in the direction of
670 the thickness of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm) ..................... App. 3.3
671 wc Weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or
672 1 500 ≤ wc ≤ 2 500 kg/m3) .................................................................. I2.1b
673 wr Average width of concrete rib or haunch, in. (mm) ........................... I3.2c
674 x Subscript relating symbol to major axis bending ............................... H1.1
675 xo, yo Coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, in. (mm) ......
676 ...............................................................................................................E4
677 x Eccentricity of connection, in. (mm) ....................................... Table D3.1
678 y Subscript relating symbol to minor axis bending............................... H1.1
679 ya Bracing offset distance along y-axis, in. (mm) ......................................E4
680 z Subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis bending .................. H2
20 NE
681 β Length reduction factor given by Equation J2-1 ................................J2.2b
682 β Width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter for round
683 HSS; the ratio of overall branch width to chord width for rectangular
20 O
684 HSS ................................................................................................ K1.1
685 βT Overall brace system required stiffness, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad) .............
3, W
686 ..................................................................................... App. 6.3.2a
687 βbr Required shear stiffness of the bracing system, kip/in. (N/mm) ................
E
688 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
689 βbr Required flexural stiffness of the brace, kip/in. (N/mm) ........ App. 6.3.2a
ST I
U EV
690 βeff Effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch
691 members in a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width .........
692 ........................................................................................................... K1.1
G R
693 βeop Effective outside punching parameter ..................................... Table K3.2

694 βsec Web distortional stiffness, including the effect of web transverse
AU IC
695 stiffeners, if any, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad) ............................... App. 6.3.2a

696 βw Section property for single angles about major principal axis, in. (mm) ...
BL
697 .......................................................................................................... F10.2

698 Δ First-order interstory drift due to the LRFD or ASD load combinations,
PU
699 in. (mm) .................................................................................... App. 7.3.2

700 ΔH First-order interstory drift, in the direction of translation being
701 considered, due to lateral forces, in. (mm) ................................ App. 8.2.2
702 γ Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
703 thickness for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall thickness
704 for rectangular HSS ........................................................................... K3.1
705 ζ Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-
706 connection to the width of the chord for rectangular HSS ................. K3.1
707 η Load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio of
708 the length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of the
709 connection to the chord width ........................................................... K3.1
710 λ Width-to-thickness ratio for the element as defined in Section B4.1.........
711 ............................................................................................................ E7.1
712 λpf Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for compact flange, as defined in Table
713 B4.1b F3.2
714 λpw Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for compact web, as defined in Table
715 B4.1b .............................................................................................. F4.2
716 λr Limiting width-to-thickness ratio as defined in Table B4.1a
717 .............................................................................................. E7.1

Symbols-14
718 λrf Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for noncompact flange, as defined in

719 Table B4.1b ........................................................................................ F3.2
720 λrw Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for noncompact web, as defined in
721 Table B4.1b ........................................................................................ F4.2
722 μ Mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, or as
723 established by tests ..............................................................................J3.8
724 φ Resistance factor ................................................................................ B3.1
725 φB Resistance factor for bearing on concrete .......................................... I6.3a
726 φb Resistance factor for flexure ................................................................... I5
727 φc Resistance factor for compression .......................................................... I5
728 φc Resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns ................... I2.1b
729 φd Resistance factor for direct bond interaction ..................................... I6.3c
730 φsf Resistance factor for shear on the failure path .................................. D5.1
731 φT Resistance factor for torsion .............................................................. H3.1
732 φt Resistance factor for tension .............................................................. H1.2
733 φt Resistance factor for tensile rupture ..................................................... H4
734 φt Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension .................. I8.3b
20 NE
735 φv Resistance factor for shear ................................................................... G1
736 φv Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ..................... I8.3a
20 O
737 Ω Safety factor ....................................................................................... B3.2
738 ΩB Safety factor for bearing on concrete ................................................. I6.3a
739 Ωb Safety factor for flexure ......................................................................... I5
3, W
740 Ωc Safety factor for compression ................................................................. I5
741 Ωc Safety factor for axially loaded composite columns .......................... I2.1b
E
742 Ωd Safety factor for direct bond interaction ............................................ I6.3c

ST I
U EV
743 Ωt Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension ......................... I8.3b
744 Ωsf Safety factor for shear on the failure path ......................................... D5.1
745 ΩT Safety factor for torsion ..................................................................... H3.1
G R
746 Ωt Safety factor for tension ..................................................................... H1.2

747 Ωt Safety factor for tensile rupture ............................................................ H4
AU IC
748 Ωv Safety factor for shear .......................................................................... G1

749 Ωv Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ........................... I8.3a
BL
750 ρw Maximum shear ratio within the web panels on each side of the
751 transverse stiffener……………………………………………. ........ G2.4
752 ρsr Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcing ................. I2.1
PU
753 θ Angle between the line of action of the required force and the weld
754 longitudinal axis, degrees ....................................................................J2.4
755 θ Acute angle between the branch and chord, degrees ......................... K3.1
756

Glossary-1
1 GLOSSARY
2
3
4 Notes:
5 (1) Terms designated with † are common AISI-AISC terms that are coordinated
6 between the two standards development organizations.
7 (2) Terms designated with * are usually qualified by the type of load effect, for
8 example, nominal tensile strength, available compressive strength, and design
9 flexural strength.
10 (3) Terms designated with ** are usually qualified by the type of component, for
11 example, web local buckling, and flange local bending.
12
13 Active fire protection. Building materials and systems that are activated by a
14 fire to mitigate adverse effects or to notify people to take action to
15 mitigate adverse effects.
16 Allowable strength*†. Nominal strength divided by the safety factor, Rn/Ω.
17 Allowable stress*. Allowable strength divided by the applicable section
20 NE
18 property, such as section modulus or cross-sectional area.
19 Anchor rod. A mechanical device that is either cast or drilled and chemically
20 adhered, grouted or wedged into concrete and/or masonry for the purpose
20 O
21 of the subsequent attachment of structural steel.
22 Applicable building code†. Building code under which the structure is
3, W
23 designed.
24 Approval documents. The structural steel shop drawings, erection drawings,
E
25 and embedment drawings, or where the parties have agreed in the contract
ST I
26 documents to provide digital model(s), the fabrication and erection models.

U EV
27 A combination of drawings and digital models also may be provided.

28 ASD (allowable strength design)†. Method of proportioning structural
29 components such that the allowable strength equals or exceeds the required
G R
30 strength of the component under the action of the ASD load combinations.
31 ASD load combination†. Load combination in the applicable building code
AU IC
32 intended for allowable strength design (allowable stress design).

33 Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Organization, political subdivision, office
BL
34 or individual charged with the responsibility of administering and enforcing

35 the provisions of this Specification.
PU
36 Available strength*†. Design strength or allowable strength, as applicable.

37 Available stress*. Design stress or allowable stress, as applicable.
38 Average rib width. In a formed steel deck, average width of the rib of a
39 corrugation.
40 Beam. Nominally horizontal structural member that has the primary function of
41 resisting bending moments.
42 Beam-column. Structural member that resists both axial force and bending
43 moment.
44 Bearing (local compressive yielding)†. Limit state of local compressive
45 yielding due to the action of a member bearing against another member or
46 surface.
47 Bearing-type connection. Bolted connection where shear forces are transmitted
48 by the bolt bearing against the connection elements.
49 Block shear rupture†. In a connection, limit state of tension rupture along one
50 path and shear yielding or shear rupture along another path.
51 Bolting assembly. An assembly of bolting components that is installed as a
52 unit.
53 Bolting component. Bolt, nut, washer, direct tension indicator or other element
54 used as a part of a bolting assembly.

Glossary-2
55 Box section. Square or rectangular doubly symmetric member made with four
56 plates welded together at the corners such that it behaves as a single
57 member.
58 Braced frame†. Essentially vertical truss system that provides resistance to
59 lateral forces and provides stability for the structural system.
60 Bracing. Member or system that provides stiffness and strength to limit the out-
61 of-plane movement of another member at a brace point.
62 Branch member. In an HSS connection, member that terminates at a chord
63 member or main member.
64 Buckling†. Limit state of sudden change in the geometry of a structure or any of
65 its elements under a critical loading condition.
66 Buckling strength. Strength for instability limit states.
67 Built-up member, cross section, section, shape. Member, cross section, section
68 or shape fabricated from structural steel elements that are welded or bolted
69 together.
70 Camber. Curvature fabricated into a beam or truss so as to compensate for
71 deflection induced by loads.
20 NE
72 Charpy V-notch impact test. Standard dynamic test measuring notch toughness
73 of a specimen.
74 Chord member. In an HSS connection, primary member that extends through a
20 O
75 truss connection.
76 Cladding. Exterior covering of structure.
77 Cold-formed steel structural member†. Shape manufactured by press-braking
3, W
78 blanks sheared from sheets, cut lengths of coils or plates, or by roll forming
79 cold- or hot-rolled coils or sheets; both forming operations being performed
E
80 at ambient room temperature, that is, without manifest addition of heat such
ST I
81 as would be required for hot forming.

U EV
82 Collector. Also known as drag strut; member that serves to transfer loads
83 between floor diaphragms and the members of the lateral force-resisting
G R
84 system.
85 Column. Nominally vertical structural member that has the primary function of
AU IC
86 resisting axial compressive force.

87 Column base. Assemblage of structural shapes, plates, connectors, bolts and
88 rods at the base of a column used to transmit forces between the steel
BL
89 superstructure and the foundation.

90 Combined method. Pretensioning procedure incorporating the application of a
PU
91 prescribed initial torque or tension, followed by the application of a

92 prescribed relative rotation between the bolt and nut.
93 Compact section. Section that can reach the plastic moment before local
94 buckling occurs as defined by the element width to thickness ratio less than
95 or equal to λp.
96 Compartmentation. Enclosure of a building space with elements that have a
97 specific fire endurance.
98 Complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove weld. Groove weld in which weld
99 metal extends through the joint thickness, except as permitted for HSS
100 connections.
101 Composite. Condition in which steel and concrete elements and members work
102 as a unit in the distribution of internal forces.
103 Composite beam. Structural steel beam in contact with and acting compositely
104 with a reinforced concrete slab.
105 Composite component. Member, connecting element or assemblage in which
106 steel and concrete elements work as a unit in the distribution of internal
107 forces, with the exception of the special case of composite beams where
108 steel anchors are embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on
109 formed steel deck.

Glossary-3
110 Concrete breakout surface. The surface delineating a volume of concrete

111 surrounding a steel headed stud anchor that separates from the remaining
112 concrete.
113 Concrete crushing. Limit state of compressive failure in concrete having
114 reached the ultimate strain.
115 Concrete haunch. In a composite floor system constructed using a formed steel
116 deck, the section of solid concrete that results from stopping the deck on
117 each side of the girder.
118 Concrete-encased beam. Beam totally encased in concrete cast integrally with
119 the slab.
120 Connection†. Combination of structural elements and joints used to transmit
121 forces between two or more members.
122 Construction documents. Written, graphic and pictorial documents prepared or
123 assembled for describing the design (including the structural system),
124 location and physical characteristics of the elements of a building neces-
125 sary to obtain a building permit and construct a building.
126 Contract documents. The documents that define the responsibilities of the
20 NE
127 parties that are involved in bidding, fabricating, and erecting structural
128 steel. These documents normally include the design documents, the
129 specifications, and the contract.
20 O
130 Cope. Cutout made in a structural member to remove a flange and conform to
131 the shape of an intersecting member.
132 Cover plate. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of a member to increase cross-
3, W
133 sectional area, section modulus or moment of inertia.
134 Cross connection. HSS connection in which forces in branch members or
E
135 connecting elements transverse to the main member are primarily equili-
ST I
136 brated by forces in other branch members or connecting elements on the

U EV
137 opposite side of the main member.

138 Design. The process of establishing the physical and other properties of a
G R
139 structure for the purpose of achieving the desired strength, serviceability,
140 durability, constructability, economy and other desired characteris-
AU IC
141 tics. Design for strength, as used in this Specification, includes analysis to
142 determine required strength and proportioning to have adequate available
143 strength.
BL
144 Design-basis fire. Set of conditions that define the development of a fire and
145 the spread of combustion products throughout a building or portion
PU
146 thereof.
147 Design documents. The graphic and pictorial portions of the contract
148 documents showing the design, location, and dimensions of work. These
149 documents generally include, but are not necessarily limited to, plans,
150 elevations, sections, details, schedules, diagrams, and notes. Where the
151 parties have agreed in the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a
152 dimensionally accurate 3D digital model of the structure that conveys the
153 structural steel requirements given in AISC Code of Standard Practice for
154 Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 3.1. A combination of drawings and
155 digital models also may be provided.
156 Design load†. Applied load determined in accordance with either LRFD load
157 combinations or ASD load combinations, as applicable.
158 Design strength*†. Resistance factor multiplied by the nominal strength, φRn.
159 Design wall thickness. HSS wall thickness assumed in the determination of
160 section properties.
161 Diagonal stiffener. Web stiffener at column panel zone oriented diagonally to
162 the flanges, on one or both sides of the web.
163 Diaphragm†. Roof, floor or other membrane or bracing system that transfers
164 in-plane forces to the lateral force-resisting system.

Glossary-4
165 Direct bond interaction. In a composite section, mechanism by which force is

166 transferred between steel and concrete by bond stress.
167 Distortional failure. Limit state of an HSS truss connection based on distortion
168 of a rectangular HSS chord member into a rhomboidal shape.
169 Distortional stiffness. Out-of-plane flexural stiffness of web.
170 Double curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with one or more inflection
171 points within the span.
172 Double-concentrated forces. Two equal and opposite forces applied normal to
173 the same flange, forming a couple.
174 Doubler. Plate added to, and parallel with, a beam or column web to increase
175 strength at locations of concentrated forces.
176 Drift. Lateral deflection of structure.
177 Effective length factor, K. Ratio between the effective length and the unbraced
178 length of the member.
179 Effective length. Length of an otherwise identical compression member with the
180 same strength when analyzed with simple end conditions.
181 Effective net area. Net area modified to account for the effect of shear lag.
20 NE
182 Effective section modulus. Section modulus reduced to account for buckling of
183 slender compression elements.
184 Effective width. Reduced width of a plate or slab with an assumed uniform
20 O
185 stress distribution which produces the same effect on the behavior of a
186 structural member as the actual plate or slab width with its nonuniform
187 stress distribution.
3, W
188 Elastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the assumption that the structure
189 returns to its original geometry on removal of the load.
E
190 Elevated temperatures. Heating conditions experienced by building elements

ST I
191 or structures as a result of fire which are in excess of the anticipated

U EV
192 ambient conditions.

193 Encased composite member. Composite member consisting of a structural
G R
194 concrete member and one or more embedded steel shapes.

195 End panel. Web panel with an adjacent panel on one side only.
AU IC
196 End return. Length of fillet weld that continues around a corner in the same
197 plane.
198 Engineer of record. Licensed professional responsible for sealing the design
BL
199 documents and specifications.

200 Erection documents. The field-installation or member-placement drawings that
PU
201 are prepared by the fabricator to show the location and attachment of the
202 individual structural steel shipping pieces. Where the parties have agreed in
203 the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a dimensionally accurate
204 3D digital model produced to convey the information necessary to erect the
205 structural steel, which may be the same digital model as the fabrication
206 model. A combination of drawings and digital models also may be provided.
207 Expansion rocker. Support with curved surface on which a member bears that
208 is able to tilt to accommodate expansion.
209 Expansion roller. Round steel bar on which a member bears that is able to roll
210 to accommodate expansion.
211 Eyebar. Pin-connected tension member of uniform thickness, with forged or
212 thermally cut head of greater width than the body, proportioned to provide
213 approximately equal strength in the head and body.
214 Fabrication documents. The shop drawings of the individual structural steel
215 shipping pieces that are to be produced in the fabrication shop. Where the
216 parties have agreed in the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a
217 dimensionally accurate 3D digital model produced to convey the infor-
218 mation necessary to fabricate the structural steel, which may be the same
219 digital model as the erection model. A combination of drawings and digital
220 models also may be provided.

Glossary-5
221 Factored load †. Product of a load factor and the nominal load.
222 Fastener. Generic term for bolts, rivets or other connecting devices.
223 Fatigue†.Limit state of crack initiation and growth resulting from repeated
224 application of live loads.
225 Faying surface. Contact surface of connection elements transmitting a shear
226 force.
227 Filled composite member. Composite member consisting of an HSS or box
228 section filled with structural concrete.
229 Filler metal. Metal or alloy added in making a welded joint.
230 Filler. Plate used to build up the thickness of one component.
231 Fillet weld reinforcement. Fillet welds added to groove welds.
232 Fillet weld. Weld of generally triangular cross section made between
233 intersecting surfaces of elements.
234 Finished surface. Surfaces fabricated with a roughness height value measured
235 in accordance with ANSI/ASME B46.1 that is equal to or less than 500.
236 Fire. Destructive burning, as manifested by any or all of the following: light,
237 flame, heat or smoke.
20 NE
238 Fire barrier. Element of construction formed of fire-resisting materials and
239 tested in accordance with an approved standard fire resistance test, to
240 demonstrate compliance with the applicable building code.
20 O
241 Fire resistance. Property of assemblies that prevents or retards the passage of
242 excessive heat, hot gases or flames under conditions of use and enables the
243 assemblies to continue to perform a stipulated function.
3, W
244 First-order analysis. Structural analysis in which equilibrium conditions are
245 formulated on the undeformed structure; second-order effects are neglect-
E
246 ed.
ST I
247 Fitted bearing stiffener. Stiffener used at a support or concentrated load that fits
U EV
248 tightly against one or both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load through
249 bearing.
G R
250 Flare bevel groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by a member with a curved
251 surface in contact with a planar member.
AU IC
252 Flare V-groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by two members with curved
253 surfaces.
254 Flashover. Transition to a state of total surface involvement in a fire of
BL
255 combustible materials within an enclosure.

256 Flat width. Nominal width of rectangular HSS minus twice the outside corner
PU
257 radius. In the absence of knowledge of the corner radius, the flat width is
258 permitted to be taken as the total section width minus three times the
259 thickness.
260 Flexibility. The ratio of the displacement (or rotation) to the applied force (or
261 moment), which is the inverse of the stiffness.
262 Flexural buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member deflects
263 laterally without twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
264 Flexural-torsional buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member
265 bends and twists simultaneously without change in cross-sectional shape.
266 Force. Resultant of distribution of stress over a prescribed area.
267 Formed steel deck. In composite construction, steel cold formed into a decking
268 profile used as a permanent concrete form.
269 Fully-restrained moment connection. Connection capable of transferring
270 moment with negligible rotation between connected members.
271 Gage. Transverse center-to-center spacing of fasteners.
272 Gapped connection. HSS truss connection with a gap or space on the chord
273 face between intersecting branch members.
274 Geometric axis. Axis parallel to web, flange or angle leg.

Glossary-6
275 Girder filler. In a composite floor system constructed using a formed steel
276 deck, narrow piece of sheet steel used as a fill between the edge of a deck
277 sheet and the flange of a girder.
278 Girder. See Beam.
279 Gouge. Relatively smooth surface groove or cavity resulting from plastic
280 deformation or removal of material.
281 Gravity load. Load acting in the downward direction, such as dead and live
282 loads.
283 Grip (of bolt). Thickness of material through which a bolt passes.
284 Groove weld. Weld in a groove between connection elements. See also AWS
285 D1.1/D1.1M.
286 Gusset plate. Plate element connecting truss members or a strut or brace to a
287 beam or column.
288 Heat flux. Radiant energy per unit surface area.
289 Heat release rate. Rate at which thermal energy is generated by a burning
290 material.
291 High-strength bolt. An ASTM F3125 or F3148 bolt, or an alternative design
20 NE
292 bolt that meets the requirements in RCSC Section 2.13.
293 Horizontal shear. In a composite beam, force at the interface between steel and
294 concrete surfaces.
20 O
295 HSS (hollow structural section). Square, rectangular or round hollow structural
296 steel section produced in accordance with one of the product specifications
297 in Section A3.1a(b).
3, W
298 Inelastic analysis. Structural analysis that takes into account inelastic material
299 behavior, including plastic analysis.
E
300 Initial tension. Minimum bolt tension attained before application of the
ST I
301 required rotation when using the combined method to pretension bolting
U EV
302 assemblies.
303 In-plane instability†. Limit state involving buckling in the plane of the frame or
G R
304 the member.

305 Instability†. Limit state reached in the loading of a structural component, frame
AU IC
306 or structure in which a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry produces

307 large displacements.
308 Introduction length. The length along which the required longitudinal shear
BL
309 force is assumed to be transferred into or out of the steel shape in an

310 encased or filled composite column.
PU
311 Issuing entity. Any party on a project that issues structural design documents
312 and specifications provided by the engineer of record.
313 Issued for construction. The engineer of record’s designation that the design
314 documents are authorized to be used to construct the steel structure
315 depicted in the design documents, and that these design documents
316 incorporate the information that is to be provided per the requirements of
317 Section A4.
318 Joint†. Area where two or more ends, surfaces, or edges are attached.
319 Categorized by type of fastener or weld used and method of force transfer.
320 Joint eccentricity. In an HSS truss connection, perpendicular distance from
321 chord member center-of-gravity to intersection of branch member work
322 points.
323 k-area. The region of the web that extends from the tangent point of the web
324 and the flange-web fillet (AISC k dimension) a distance 12 in. (38 mm)
325 into the web beyond the k dimension.
326 K-connection. HSS connection in which forces in branch members or
327 connecting elements transverse to the main member are primarily equilib-
328 riated by forces in other branch members or connecting elements on the
329 same side of the main member.

Glossary-7
330 Lacing. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in a lattice configuration, that connects
331 two steel shapes together.
332 Lap joint. Joint between two overlapping connection elements in parallel
333 planes.
334 Lateral bracing. Member or system that is designed to inhibit lateral buckling
335 or lateral-torsional buckling of structural members.
336 Lateral force-resisting system. Structural system designed to resist lateral loads
337 and provide stability for the structure as a whole.
338 Lateral load. Load acting in a lateral direction, such as wind or earthquake
339 effects.
340 Lateral-torsional buckling†. Buckling mode of a flexural member involving
341 deflection out of the plane of bending occurring simultaneously with twist
342 about the shear center of the cross section.
343 Leaning column. Column designed to carry gravity loads only, with
344 connections that are not intended to provide resistance to lateral loads.
345 Length effects. Consideration of the reduction in strength of a member based on
346 its unbraced length.
20 NE
347 Lightweight concrete. Structural concrete with an equilibrium density of 115
348 lb/ft3 (1 840 kg/m3) or less, as determined by ASTM C567.
349 Limit state†. Condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for
20 O
350 service and is judged either to be no longer useful for its intended function
351 (serviceability limit state) or to have reached its ultimate load-carrying
352 capacity (strength limit state).
3, W
353 Load†. Force or other action that results from the weight of building materials,
354 occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential
E
355 movement, or restrained dimensional changes.

ST I
356 Load effect†. Forces, stresses and deformations produced in a structural

U EV
357 component by the applied loads.

358 Load factor. Factor that accounts for deviations of the nominal load from the
G R
359 actual load, for uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a
360 load effect and for the probability that more than one extreme load will
AU IC
361 occur simultaneously.

362 Load transfer region. Region of a composite member over which force is
363 directly applied to the member, such as the depth of a connection plate.
BL
364 Local bending** †. Limit state of large deformation of a flange under a

365 concentrated transverse force.
PU
366 Local buckling**. Limit state of buckling of a compression element within a

367 cross section.
368 Local yielding**†. Yielding that occurs in a local area of an element.
369 LRFD (load and resistance factor design)†. Method of proportioning structural
370 components such that the design strength equals or exceeds the required
371 strength of the component under the action of the LRFD load combina-
372 tions.
373 LRFD load combination†. Load combination in the applicable building code
374 intended for strength design (load and resistance factor design).
375 Main member. In an HSS connection, chord member, column or other HSS
376 member to which branch members or other connecting elements are
377 attached.
378 Member imperfection. Initial displacement of points along the length of
379 individual members (between points of intersection of members) from their
380 nominal locations, such as the out-of-straightness of members due to
381 manufacturing and fabrication.
382 Mill scale. Oxide surface coating on steel formed by the hot rolling process.
383 Moment connection. Connection that transmits bending moment between
384 connected members.

Glossary-8
385 Moment frame†. Framing system that provides resistance to lateral loads and
386 provides stability to the structural system, primarily by shear and flexure of
387 the framing members and their connections.
388 Negative flexural strength. Flexural strength of a composite beam in regions
389 with tension due to flexure on the top surface.
390 Net area. Gross area reduced to account for removed material.
391 Nominal dimension. Designated or theoretical dimension, as in tables of section
392 properties.
393 Nominal load†. Magnitude of the load specified by the applicable building
394 code.
395 Nominal rib height. In a formed steel deck, height of deck measured from the
396 underside of the lowest point to the top of the highest point.
397 Nominal strength*†. Strength of a structure or component (without the
398 resistance factor or safety factor applied) to resist load effects, as deter-
399 mined in accordance with this specification.
400 Noncompact section. Section that is not able to reach the plastic moment before
401 inelastic local buckling occurs as defined by element width to thickness
20 NE
402 ratio greater than λp and less than or equal to λr.
403 Nondestructive testing. Inspection procedure wherein no material is destroyed
404 and the integrity of the material or component is not affected.
20 O
405 Notch toughness. Energy absorbed at a specified temperature as measured in
406 the Charpy V-notch impact test.
407 Notional load. Virtual load applied in a structural analysis to account for
3, W
408 destabilizing effects that are not otherwise accounted for in the design
409 provisions.
E
410 Out-of-plane buckling†. Limit state of a beam, column or beam-column

ST I
411 involving lateral or lateral-torsional buckling.

U EV
412 Overlapped connection. HSS truss connection in which intersecting branch

413 members overlap.
G R
414 Panel brace. Brace that controls the relative movement of two adjacent brace
415 points along the length of a beam or column or the relative lateral dis-
AU IC
416 placement of two stories in a frame (see point brace).

417 Panel zone. Web area of beam-to-column connection delineated by the
418 extension of beam and column flanges through the connection, transmitting
BL
419 moment through a shear panel.

420 Partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove weld. Groove weld in which the
PU
421 penetration is intentionally less than the complete thickness of the connect-
422 ed element.
423 Partially restrained moment connection. Connection capable of transferring
424 moment with rotation between connected members that is not negligible.
425 Percent elongation. Measure of ductility, determined in a tensile test as the
426 maximum elongation of the gage length divided by the original gage
427 length expressed as a percentage.
428 Pipe. See HSS.
429 Pitch. Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of fasteners. Center-to-center
430 spacing of bolt threads along axis of bolt.
431 Plastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the assumption of rigid-plastic
432 behavior, that is, that equilibrium is satisfied and the stress is at or below
433 the yield stress throughout the structure.
434 Plastic hinge. Fully yielded zone that forms in a structural member when the
435 plastic moment is attained.
436 Plastic moment. Theoretical resisting moment developed within a fully yielded
437 cross section.
438 Plastic stress distribution method. In a composite member, method for
439 determining stresses assuming that the steel section and the concrete in the
440 cross section are fully plastic.

Glossary-9
441 Plastification. In an HSS connection, limit state based on an out-of-plane

442 flexural yield line mechanism in the chord at a branch member connection.
443 Plate girder. Built-up beam.
444 Plug weld. Weld made in a circular hole in one element of a joint fusing that
445 element to another element.
446 Point brace. Brace that prevents lateral movement or twist independently of
447 other braces at adjacent brace points (see panel brace).
448 Ponding. Retention of water due solely to the deflection of flat roof framing.
449 Positive flexural strength. Flexural strength of a composite beam in regions
450 with compression due to flexure on the top surface.
451 Pretensioned bolt. Bolt tightened to the specified minimum pretension.
452 Pretensioned joint. Joint with high-strength bolts tightened to the specified
453 minimum pretension.
454 Properly developed. Reinforcing bars detailed to yield in a ductile manner
455 before crushing of the concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions of ACI
456 318, insofar as development length, spacing and cover are deemed to be
457 properly developed.
20 NE
458 Prying action. Amplification of the tension force in a bolt caused by leverage
459 between the point of applied load, the bolt, and the reaction of the connect-
460 ed elements.
20 O
461 Punching load. In an HSS connection, component of branch member force
462 perpendicular to a chord.
463 P-δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the deflected shape of a member between
3, W
464 joints or nodes.
465 P-Δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the displaced location of joints or nodes in
E
466 a structure. In tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting on
ST I
467 the laterally displaced location of floors and roofs.

U EV
468 Quality assurance. Monitoring and inspection tasks to ensure that the material
469 provided and work performed by the fabricator and erector meet the
G R
470 requirements of the approved construction documents and referenced

471 standards. Quality assurance includes those tasks designated “special
AU IC
472 inspection” by the applicable building code.

473 Quality assurance inspector (QAI). Individual designated to provide quality
474 assurance inspection for the work being performed.
BL
475 Quality assurance plan (QAP). Program in which the agency or firm
476 responsible for quality assurance maintains detailed monitoring and
PU
477 inspection procedures to ensure conformance with the approved construc-

478 tion documents and referenced standards.
479 Quality control. Controls and inspections implemented by the fabricator or
480 erector, as applicable, to ensure that the material provided and work
481 performed meet the requirements of the approved construction documents
482 and referenced standards.
483 Quality control inspector (QCI). Individual designated to perform quality
484 control inspection tasks for the work being performed.
485 Quality control program (QCP). Program in which the fabricator or erector, as
486 applicable, maintains detailed fabrication or erection and inspection
487 procedures to ensure conformance with the approved design documents,
488 specifications, and referenced standards.
489 Reentrant. In a cope or weld access hole, a cut at an abrupt change in direction
490 in which the exposed surface is concave.
491 Registered design professional in responsible charge. A registered design
492 professional engaged by the owner or the owner’s authorized agent to
493 review and coordinate certain aspects of the project, as determined by the
494 authority having jurisdiction, for compatibility with the design of the
495 building or structure, including submittal documents prepared by others,
496 deferred submittal documents, and phased submittal documents.

Glossary-10
497 Required strength*†. Forces, stresses and deformations acting on a structural

498 component, determined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD or ASD
499 load combinations, as applicable, or as specified by this specification or
500 Standard.
501 Resistance factor, φ†. Factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the
502 nominal strength from the actual strength and for the manner and conse-
503 quences of failure.
504 Restrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
505 buildings where the surrounding or supporting structure is capable of
506 resisting significant thermal expansion throughout the range of anticipated
507 elevated temperatures.
508 Reverse curvature. See double curvature.
509 Root of joint. Portion of a joint to be welded where the members are closest to
510 each other.
511 Rupture strength†. Strength limited by breaking or tearing of members or
512 connecting elements.
513 Safety factor, Ω†. Factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from
20 NE
514 the nominal strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal load,
515 uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect, and
516 for the manner and consequences of failure.
20 O
517 Second-order effect. Effect of loads acting on the deformed configuration of a
518 structure; includes P-δ effect and P-Δ effect.
3, W
519 Seismic force-resisting system. That part of the structural system that has been
520 considered in the design to provide the required resistance to the seismic
E
521 forces prescribed in ASCE/SEI 7.
522 Seismic response modification factor. Factor that reduces seismic load effects
ST I
U EV
523 to strength level.

524 Service load combination. Load combination under which serviceability limit
525 states are evaluated.
G R
526 Service load†. Load under which serviceability limit states are evaluated.
527 Serviceability limit state†. Limiting condition affecting the ability of a structure
AU IC
528 to preserve its appearance, maintainability, durability, comfort of its

529 occupants, or function of machinery, under typical usage.
BL
530 Shear buckling†. Buckling mode in which a plate element, such as the web of a
531 beam, deforms under pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
532 Shear lag. Nonuniform tensile stress distribution in a member or connecting
PU
533 element in the vicinity of a connection.

534 Shear wall†. Wall that provides resistance to lateral loads in the plane of the
535 wall and provides stability for the structural system.
536 Shear yielding (punching). In an HSS connection, limit state based on out-of-
537 plane shear strength of the chord wall to which branch members are
538 attached.
539 Sheet steel. In a composite floor system, steel used for closure plates or
540 miscellaneous trimming in a formed steel deck.
541 Shim. Thin layer of material used to fill a space between faying or bearing
542 surfaces.
543 Shop drawings. Drawings of the individual structural steel shipping pieces that
544 are to be produced in the fabrication shop.
545 Sidesway buckling (frame). Stability limit state involving lateral sidesway
546 instability of a frame.
547 Simple connection. Connection that transmits negligible bending moment
548 between connected members.
549 Single-concentrated force. Tensile or compressive force applied normal to the
550 flange of a member.
551 Single curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with no inflection point within the
552 span.

Glossary-11
553 Slender-element section. Section that is able to only reach a strength limited by
554 local buckling of an element defined by element width to thickness ratio
555 greater than λr.
556 Slip. In a bolted connection, limit state of relative motion of connected parts
557 prior to the attainment of the available strength of the connection.
558 Slip-critical connection. Bolted connection designed to resist movement by
559 friction on the faying surface of the connection under the clamping force of
560 the bolts.
561 Slot weld. Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an element to another
562 element.
563 Snug-tightened joint. Joint with the connected plies in firm contact as specified
564 in Chapter J.
565 Specifications. The portion of the construction documents that consist of the
566 written requirements for materials, standards and workmanship.
567 Specified minimum tensile strength. Lower limit of tensile strength specified for
568 a material as defined by ASTM.
569 Specified minimum yield stress†. Lower limit of yield stress specified for a
20 NE
570 material as defined by ASTM.
571 Splice. Connection between two structural elements joined at their ends to form
572 a single, longer element.
20 O
573 Stability. Condition in the loading of a structural component, frame or structure
574 in which a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry does not produce
575 large displacements.
3, W
576 Steel anchor. Headed stud or hot rolled channel welded to a steel member and
577 embedded in the concrete of a composite member to transmit shear, tension
E
578 or a combination of shear and tension, at the interface of the two materials.
ST I
579 Stiffened element. Flat compression element with adjoining out-of-plane

U EV
580 elements along both edges parallel to the direction of loading.

581 Stiffener. Structural element, typically an angle or plate, attached to a member
G R
582 to distribute load, transfer shear or prevent buckling.

583 Stiffness. Resistance to deformation of a member or structure, measured by the
AU IC
584 ratio of the applied force (or moment) to the corresponding displacement
585 (or rotation).
586 Story drift. Horizontal deflection at the top of the story relative to the bottom of
BL
587 the story.

588 Story drift ratio. Story drift divided by the story height.
PU
589 Strain compatibility method. In a composite member, method for determining

590 the stresses considering the stress-strain relationships of each material and
591 its location with respect to the neutral axis of the cross section.
592 Strength limit state†. Limiting condition in which the maximum strength of a
593 structure or its components is reached.
594 Stress. Force per unit area caused by axial force, moment, shear or torsion.
595 Stress concentration. Localized stress considerably higher than average due to
596 abrupt changes in geometry or localized loading.
597 Strong axis. Major principal centroidal axis of a cross section.
598 Structural analysis†. Determination of load effects on members and
599 connections based on principles of structural mechanics.
600 Structural component†. Member, connector, connecting element or assemblage.
601 Structural Integrity. Performance characteristic of a structure indicating
602 resistance to catastrophic failure.
603 Structural steel. Steel elements as defined in the AISC Code of Standard
604 Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges Section 2.1.
605 Structural system. An assemblage of load-carrying components that are joined
606 together to provide interaction or interdependence.

Glossary-12
607 Substantiating connection information. Information submitted by the fabricator

608 in support of connections either selected by the steel detailer or designed
609 by the licensed engineer working for the fabricator.
610 System imperfection. Initial displacement of points of intersection of members
611 from their nominal locations, such as the out-of-plumbness of columns due
612 to erection tolerances.
613 T-connection. HSS connection in which the branch member or connecting
614 element is perpendicular to the main member and in which forces trans-
615 verse to the main member are primarily equilibrated by shear in the main
616 member.
617 Tensile strength (of material)†. Maximum tensile stress that a material is
618 capable of sustaining as defined by ASTM.
619 Tensile strength (of member). Maximum tension force that a member is capable
620 of sustaining.
621 Tension and shear rupture†. In a bolt or other type of mechanical fastener, limit
622 state of rupture due to simultaneous tension and shear force.
623 Tension field action. Behavior of a panel under shear in which diagonal tensile
20 NE
624 forces develop in the web and compressive forces develop in the transverse
625 stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt truss.
626 Thermally cut. Cut with gas, plasma or laser.
20 O
627 Tie plate. Plate element used to join two parallel components of a built-up
628 column, girder or strut rigidly connected to the parallel components and
629 designed to transmit shear between them.
3, W
630 Toe of fillet. Junction of a fillet weld face and base metal. Tangent point of a
631 fillet in a rolled shape.
E
632 Torsional bracing. Bracing resisting twist of a beam or column.

ST I
633 Torsional buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member twists

U EV
634 about its shear center axis.

635 Transverse reinforcement. In an encased composite column, steel reinforce-
G R
636 ment in the form of closed ties or welded wire fabric providing confine-
637 ment for the concrete surrounding the steel shape.
AU IC
638 Transverse stiffener. Web stiffener oriented perpendicular to the flanges,

639 attached to the web.
640 Tubing. See HSS.
BL
641 Turn-of-nut method. Procedure whereby the specified pretension in high-

642 strength bolts is controlled by rotating the fastener component a predeter-
PU
643 mined amount after the bolt has been snug tightened.
644 Unbraced length. Distance between braced points of a member, measured
645 between the centers of gravity of the bracing members.
646 Uneven load distribution. In an HSS connection, condition in which the stress
647 is not distributed uniformly through the cross section of connected
648 elements.
649 Unframed end. The end of a member not restrained against rotation by
650 stiffeners or connection elements.
651 Unstiffened element. Flat compression element with an adjoining out-of-plane
652 element along one edge parallel to the direction of loading.
653 Unrestrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
654 buildings that are assumed to be free to rotate and expand throughout the
655 range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
656 Weak axis. Minor principal centroidal axis of a cross section.
657 Weathering steel. High-strength, low-alloy steel that, with sufficient
658 precautions, is able to be used in typical atmospheric exposures (not
659 marine) without protective paint coating.
660 Web local crippling†. Limit state of local failure of web plate in the immediate
661 vicinity of a concentrated load or reaction.

Glossary-13
662 Web sidesway buckling. Limit state of lateral buckling of the tension flange
663 opposite the location of a concentrated compression force.
664 Weld access hole. An opening that permits access for welding, backgouging, or
665 for insertion of backing.
666 Weld metal. Portion of a fusion weld that has been completely melted during
667 welding. Weld metal has elements of filler metal and base metal melted in
668 the weld thermal cycle.
669 Weld root. See root of joint.
670 Y-connection. HSS connection in which the branch member or connecting
671 element is not perpendicular to the main member and in which forces
672 transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated by shear in the
673 main member.
674 Yield moment†. In a member subjected to bending, the moment at which the
675 extreme outer fiber first attains the yield stress.
676 Yield point†. First stress in a material at which an increase in strain occurs
677 without an increase in stress as defined by ASTM.
678 Yield strength†. Stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting
20 NE
679 deviation from the proportionality of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
680 Yield stress†. Generic term to denote either yield point or yield strength, as
681 applicable for the material.
20 O
682 Yielding†. Limit state of inelastic deformation that occurs when the yield stress
683 is reached.
684 Yielding (plastic moment)†. Yielding throughout the cross section of a member
3, W
685 as the bending moment reaches the plastic moment.
686 Yielding (yield moment)†. Yielding at the extreme fiber on the cross section of
E
687 a member when the bending moment reaches the yield moment.
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

Abbreviations-1
1 ABBREVIATIONS
2
3 The following abbreviations appear in this Specification. The abbreviations are
4 written out where they first appear within a Section.
5
6 ACI (American Concrete Institute)
7 AHJ (authority having jurisdiction)
8 AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)
9 AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute)
10 ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
11 ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers)
12 ASD (allowable strength design)
13 ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
14 ASNT (American Society for Nondestructive Testing)
15 AWI (associate welding inspector)
16 AWS (American Welding Society)
17 CJP (complete joint penetration)
20 NE
18 CVN (Charpy V-notch)
19 ENA (elastic neutral axis)
20 EOR (engineer of record)
20 O
21 ERW (electric resistance welded)
22 FCAW (flux cored arc welding)
3, W
23 FR (fully restrained)
24 GMAW (gas metal arc welding)
E
25 HSLA (high-strength low-alloy)
26 HSS (hollow structural section)
ST I
U EV
27 LRFD (load and resistance factor design)

28 MT (magnetic particle testing)
29 NDT (nondestructive testing)
G R
30 OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

31 PJP (partial joint penetration)
AU IC
32 PNA (plastic neutral axis)

33 PQR (procedure qualification record)
BL
34 PR (partially restrained)
35 PT (penetrant testing)
36 QA (quality assurance)
PU
37 QAI (quality assurance inspector)

38 QAP (quality assurance plan)
39 QC (quality control)
40 QCI (quality control inspector)
41 QCP (quality control program)
42 RCSC (Research Council on Structural Connections)
43 RT (radiographic testing)
44 SAW (submerged arc welding)
45 SEI (Structural Engineering Institute)
46 SFPE (Society of Fire Protection Engineers)
47 SMAW (shielded metal arc welding)
48 SWI (senior welding inspector)
49 UNC (Unified National Coarse)
50 UT (ultrasonic testing)
51 WI (welding inspector)
52 WPQR (welder performance qualification records)
53 WPS (welding procedure specification)
54

A-1
2 CHAPTER A
3 GENERAL PROVISIONS
4
5 This chapter states the scope of this Specification, lists referenced specifications,
6 codes and standards, and provides requirements for materials and structural design
7 documents.
8
9 The chapter is organized as follows:
10
11 A1. Scope
12 A2. Referenced Specifications, Codes and Standards
13 A3. Material
14 A4. Structural Design Documents and Specifications
20 NE
15
16 A1. SCOPE
17
20 O
18 The Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC 360), hereafter
19 referred to as this Specification, shall apply to the design, fabrication,
3, W
20 erection, and quality of the structural steel system or systems with structural
21 steel acting compositely with reinforced concrete, where the steel elements
E
22 are defined in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
23 Buildings and Bridges (ANSI/AISC 303), hereafter referred to as the Code of
ST I
U EV
24 Standard Practice.
25
26 This Specification includes the Symbols, the Glossary, Abbreviations,
G R
27 Chapters A through N, and Appendices 1 through 8. The Commentary to this

28 Specification and the User Notes interspersed throughout are not part of this
AU IC
29 Specification. The phrases “is permitted” and “are permitted” in this document
30 identify provisions that comply with this Specification, but are not mandatory.
31
BL
32 User Note: User notes are intended to provide concise and practical guidance
33 in the application of the Specification provisions.
PU
34
35 This Specification sets forth criteria for the design, fabrication, and erection of
36 structural steel buildings and other structures, where other structures are
37 defined as structures designed, fabricated, and erected in a manner similar to
38 buildings, with building-like vertical and lateral load-resisting-elements.
39 Wherever this Specification refers to the applicable building code and there is
40 none, the loads, load combinations, system limitations, and general design
41 requirements shall be those in ASCE Minimum Design Loads and Associated
42 Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE/SEI 7).
43
44 Where conditions are not covered by this Specification, designs are permitted
45 to be based on tests or analysis, subject to the approval of the authority having
46 jurisdiction. Alternative methods of analysis and design are permitted,
47 provided such alternative methods or criteria are acceptable to the authority
48 having jurisdiction.
49
50 User Note: For the design of cold-formed steel structural members, the
51 provisions in the AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-
52 Formed Steel Structural Members (AISI S100) are recommended, except for
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xx, 2022

A-2
53 cold-formed hollow structural sections (HSS), which are designed in

54 accordance with this Specification.
55
56 1. Seismic Applications
57
58 The AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC
59 341) shall apply to the design, fabrication, erection, and quality of seismic
60 force-resisting systems of structural steel or of structural steel acting
61 compositely with reinforced concrete, unless specifically exempted by the
62 applicable building code.
63
64 User Note: ASCE/SEI 7 (Table 12.2-1, Item H) specifically exempts
65 structural steel systems in seismic design categories B and C from the
66 requirements in the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings if
67 they are designed according to this Specification and the seismic loads are
68 computed using a seismic response modification coefficient, R, of 3;
69 composite systems are not covered by this exemption. The Seismic
20 NE
70 Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings do not apply in seismic design
71 category A.
72
20 O
73 2. Nuclear Applications
74
3, W
75 The design, fabrication, erection, and quality of safety-related nuclear
76 structures shall comply with the provisions of this Specification as modified
E
77 by the requirements of the AISC Specification for Safety-Related Steel
78 Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690).
ST I
U EV
79
80 A2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS Comment [DC1]: Section A2 is not included in
81 Draft Public Review One.
G R
82 The following specifications, codes and standards are referenced in this

83 Specification:
84
AU IC
85 (a) American Concrete Institute (ACI)

86 ACI 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
BL
87 Commentary
88 ACI 318M-14 Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural Con-
PU
89 crete and Commentary

90 ACI 349-13 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related Concrete
91 Structures and Commentary
92 ACI 349M-13 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related Concrete
93 Structures and Commentary (Metric)
94
95 (b) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
96 ANSI/AISC 303-16 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
97 Bridges
98 ANSI/AISC 341-16 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
99 ANSI/AISC N690-12 Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures for
100 Nuclear Facilities
101 ANSI/AISC N690s1-15 Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures
102 for Nuclear Facilities, Supplement No. 1
103
104 (c) American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
105 AISI 923-xx Test Standard for Determining the Strength and Stiffness of
106 Shear Connections of Composite Members
107 AISI 924-xx Test Standard for Determining the Effective Flexural
108 Stiffness of Composite Members

A-3
109 (d) American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

110 ASCE/SEI 7-16 Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for
111 Buildings and Other Structures
112 ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire
113 Protection
114
115 (e) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
116 ASME B18.2.6-10 Fasteners for Use in Structural Applications
117 ASME B46.1-09 Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and
118 Lay
119
120 (f) American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
121 ANSI/ASNT CP-189-2011 Standard for Qualification and Certification
122 of Nondestructive Testing Personnel
123 Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A-2011 Personnel Qualification
124 and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
125
20 NE
126 (g) ASTM International (ASTM)
127 A6/A6M-14 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
128 Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
20 O
129 A36/A36M-14 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
130 A53/A53M-12 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
3, W
131 Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
132 A193/A193M-15 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
E
133 Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure
134 Service and Other Special Purpose Applications
ST I
U EV
135 A194/A194M-15 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel,

136 and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Tem-
137 perature Service, or Both
G R
138 A216/A216M-14e1 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,

139 Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service
140 A242/A242M-13 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
AU IC
141 Structural Steel

142 A283/A283M-13 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate
BL
143 Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates

144 A307-14 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
PU
145 Threaded Rod, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

146
147 User Note: ASTM A325/A325M are now included as a Grade within
148 ASTM F3125.
149
150 A354-11 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
151 Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
152 A370-15 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
153 of Steel Products
154 A449-14 Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,
155 Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
156 General Use
157
158 User Note: ASTM A490/A490M are now included as a Grade within
159 ASTM F3125.
160
161 A500/A500M-13 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
162 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
163 A501/A501M-14 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
164 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing

A-4
165 A502-03(2015) Standard Specification for Rivets, Steel, Structural

166 A514/A514M-14 Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,
167 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding
168 A529/A529M-14 Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-
169 Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
170 A563-15 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
171 A563M-07(2013) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
172 Nuts (Metric)
173 A568/A568M-15 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,
174 Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
175 Rolled, General Requirements for
177 Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
179 Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with
180 Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
181 A606/A606M-15 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
20 NE
182 High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Im-
183 proved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
184 A618/A618M-04(2015) Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded
20 O
185 and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing
186 A668/A668M-15 Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and
3, W
187 Alloy, for General Industrial Use
188 A673/A673M-07(2012) Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure
E
189 for Impact Testing of Structural Steel
190 A709/A709M-13a Standard Specification for Structural Steel for Bridg-
ST I
U EV
191 es
192 A751-14a Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
193 Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
G R
194 A847/A847M-14 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

195 Seamless High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Tubing with Im-
196
AU IC
proved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

198 Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and
BL
199 Self-Tempering Process (QST)

200 A992/A992M-11(2015) Standard Specification for Structural Steel
PU
201 Shapes
202 A1011/A1011M-14 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
203 Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
204 Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
205 Strength
206 A1043/A1043M-14 Standard Specification for Structural Steel with Low
207 Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in Buildings
208 A1065/A1065M-15 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Electric-
209 Fusion (Arc) Welded High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing in
210 Shapes, with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point
211 A1066/A1066M-11(2015)e1 Standard Specification for High-Strength
212 Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Produced by Thermo-Mechanical
213 Controlled Process (TMCP)
214 A1085/A1085M-13 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded
215 Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS)
216 C567/C567M-14 Standard Test Method for Determining Density of
217 Structural Lightweight Concrete
218 E119-15 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
219 and Materials

A-5
220 E165/E165M-12 Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination

221 for General Industry
222 E709-15 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
223 F436-11 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
224 F436M-11 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
225 F606/F606M-14a Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechani-
226 cal Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
227 Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
228 F844-07a(2013) Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),
229 Unhardened for General Use
230 F959-15 Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
231 Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
232 F959M-13 Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
233 Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners (Metric)
234 F1554-15 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
235 105-ksi Yield Strength
236
20 NE
237 User Note: ASTM F1554 is the most commonly referenced specifica-
238 tion for anchor rods. Grade and weldability must be specified.
239
20 O
240 User Note: ASTM F1852 and F2280 are now included as Grades within
241 ASTM F3125.
3, W
242
243 F3043-14e1 Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Con-
E
244 trol Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Alloy Steel, Heat Treat-
245 ed, 200 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ST I
U EV
246 F3111-14 Standard Specification for Heavy Hex Structural

247 Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 200 ksi
248 Minimum Tensile Strength
G R
249 F3125/F3125M-15 Standard Specification for High Strength Structural

250 Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and
251
AU IC
150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric
252 Dimensions
253 F3148-17a Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolt
BL
254 Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 144 ksi Minimum
255 Tensile Strength, Inch Dimensions
PU
256
257 (h) American Welding Society (AWS)
258 AWS A5.1/A5.1M:2012 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for
259 Shielded Metal Arc Welding
260 AWS A5.5/A5.5M:2014 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for
261 Shielded Metal Arc Welding
262 AWS A5.17/A5.17M:1997 (R2007) Specification for Carbon Steel
263 Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
264 AWS A5.18/A5.18M:2005 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes
265 and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
266 AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 (R2015) Specification for Carbon Steel
267 Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
268 AWS A5.23/A5.23M:2011 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
269 and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
270 AWS A5.25/A5.25M:1997 (R2009) Specification for Carbon and Low-
271 Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electroslag Welding
272 AWS A5.26/A5.26M:1997 (R2009) Specification for Carbon and Low-
273 Alloy Steel Electrodes for Electrogas Welding
274 AWS A5.28/A5.28M:2005 (R2015) Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
275 Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding

A-6
276 AWS A5.29/A5.29M:2010 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes

277 for Flux Cored Arc Welding
278 AWS A5.32/A5.32M:2011 Welding Consumables—Gases and Gas
279 Mixtures for Fusion Welding and Allied Processes
280 AWS A5.36/A5.36M:2012 Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy
281 Steel Flux Cored Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding and Metal
282 Cored Electrodes for Gas Metal Arc Welding
283 AWS B5.1:2013-AMD1 Specification for the Qualification of Welding
284 Inspectors
285 AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2015 Structural Welding Code—Steel
286 AWS D1.3/D1.3M:2008 Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel
287
288 (i) Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
289 Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, 2014
290
291 (j) Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
292 ANSI/SDI QA/QC-2011 Standard for Quality Control and Quality
20 NE
293 Assurance for Installation of Steel Deck
294
295 A3. MATERIAL
20 O
296
297 1. Structural Steel Materials
3, W
298
299 Material test reports or reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing
E
300 laboratory shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with one of the
301 ASTM standards listed in Section A3.1a. For hot-rolled structural shapes,
ST I
U EV
302 plates, and bars, such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM
303 A6/A6M; for sheets, such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM
304 A568/A568M; for tubing and pipe, such tests shall be made in accordance
G R
305 with the requirements of the applicable ASTM standards listed above for
306 those product forms.
307
AU IC
308 1a. ASTM Designations

309
BL
310 Structural steel material conforming to one of the following ASTM

311 specifications is approved for use under this Specification:
PU
312
313 (a) Hot-rolled structural shapes
314 ASTM A36/A36M
315 ASTM A529/A529M
316 ASTM A572/A572M
317 ASTM A588/A588M
318 ASTM A709/A709M, Grades 36 [250], 50 [345], 50S [345S], 50W
319 [345W], HPS 50W [HPS345W], QST 50 [QST345], QST 50S
320 [QST345S], QST 65 [QST450], QST 70 [QST485]
321 ASTM A913/A913M
322 ASTM A992/ A992M
323 ASTM A1043/A1043M
324
325 (b) Hollow structural sections (HSS)
326 ASTM A53/A53M Grade B
327 ASTM A500/A500M
328 ASTM A501/A501M
329 ASTM A618/A618M
330 ASTM A847/A847M
331 ASTM A1065/A1065M

A-7
332 ASTM A1085/A1085M

333
334 (c) Plates
335 ASTM A36/A36M
336 ASTM A242/A242M
337 ASTM A283/A283M
338 ASTM A514/A514M
339 ASTM A529/A529M
340 ASTM A572/A572M
341 ASTM A588/A588M
342 ASTM A709/A709M
343 ASTM A1043/A1043M
344 ASTM A1066/A1066M
345
346 (d) Bars
347 ASTM A36/A36M
348 ASTM A529/A529M
20 NE
349 ASTM A572/A572M
350 ASTM A709/A709M
351
20 O
352 (e) Sheets
353 ASTM A606/A606M
3, W
354 ASTM A1011/A1011M SS, HSLAS, AND HSLAS-F
355
E
356 User Note: Plates, sheets, strips and bars are different products, however,
357 design rules do not make a differentiation between these products.
ST I
U EV
358
359 1b. Unidentified Steel
360
G R
361 Unidentified steel, free of injurious defects, is permitted to be used only for
362 members or details whose failure will not reduce the strength of the structure,
363 either locally or overall. Such use shall be subject to the approval of the
AU IC
364 engineer of record.

365
BL
366 User Note: Unidentified steel may be used for details where the precise
367 mechanical properties and weldability are not of concern. These are
PU
368 commonly curb plates, shims and other similar pieces.

369
370 1c. Rolled Heavy Shapes
371
372 ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50
373 mm) are considered to be rolled heavy shapes. Rolled heavy shapes used as
374 members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or
375 flexure and spliced or connected using complete-joint-penetration groove
376 welds that fuse through the thickness of the flange or the flange and the web,
377 shall be specified as follows. The structural design documents shall require
378 that such shapes be supplied with Charpy V-notch (CVN) impact test results
379 in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S30,
380 Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural Shapes—Alternate Core
381 Location. The impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lb
382 (27 J) absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +70 °F (+21 °C).
383
384 The requirements in this section do not apply if the splices and connections
385 are made by bolting. Where a rolled heavy shape is welded to the surface of
386 another shape using groove welds, the requirements apply only to the shape
387 that has weld metal fused through the cross section.

A-8
388
389 User Note: Additional requirements for rolled heavy-shape welded joints are
390 given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.6 and M2.2.
391
392 1d. Built-Up Heavy Shapes
393
394 Built-up cross sections consisting of plates with a thickness exceeding 2 in.
395 (50 mm) are considered built-up heavy shapes. Built-up heavy shapes used as
396 members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or
397 flexure and spliced or connected to other members using complete-joint-
398 penetration groove welds that fuse through the thickness of the plates, shall
399 be specified as follows. The structural design documents shall require that
400 the steel be supplied with Charpy V-notch impact test results in accordance
401 with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5, Charpy V-Notch
402 Impact Test. The impact test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM
403 A673/A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a minimum average value of 20
404 ft-lb (27 J) absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +70°F (+21°C).
20 NE
405
406 When a built-up heavy shape is welded to the face of another member using
407 groove welds, these requirements apply only to the shape that has weld metal
20 O
408 fused through the cross section.
409
3, W
410 User Note: Additional requirements for built-up heavy-shape welded joints
411 are given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.6 and M2.2.
E
412
413 2. Steel Castings and Forgings
ST I
U EV
414
415 Steel castings and forgings shall conform to an ASTM standard intended for
416 structural applications and shall provide strength, ductility, weldability and
G R
417 toughness adequate for the purpose. Test reports produced in accordance with
418 the ASTM reference standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of
AU IC
419 conformity with such standards.

420
421 3. Bolts, Washers and Nuts
BL
422
423 Bolt, washer and nut material conforming to one of the following ASTM
PU
424 specifications is approved for use under this Specification:

425
426 User Note: ASTM F3125 is an umbrella standard that incorporates Grades
427 A325, A325M, A490, A490M, F1852 and F2280, which were previously
428 separate standards.
429
430 (a) Bolts
431
432 ASTM A307
433 ASTM A354
434 ASTM A449
435 ASTM F3043
436 ASTM F3111
437 ASTM F3125/F3125M
438 ASTM F3148
439
440 (b) Nuts
441 ASTM A194/A194M
442 ASTM A563
443 ASTM A563M

A-9
444
445 (c) Washers
446 ASTM F436
447 ASTM F436M
448 ASTM F844
449
450 (d) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
451 ASTM F959
452 ASTM F959M
453
454 Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity
455 with the standards.
456
457 4. Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods
458
459 Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one of the following
460 ASTM specifications is approved for use under this Specification:
20 NE
461
462 ASTM A36/A36M
463 ASTM A193/A193M
20 O
464 ASTM A354
465 ASTM A449
3, W
466 ASTM A572/A572M
467 ASTM A588/A588M
E
468 ASTM F1554
469
ST I
U EV
470 User Note: ASTM F1554 is the preferred material specification for anchor
471 rods.
472
G R
473 ASTM A449 material is permitted for high-strength anchor rods and threaded
474 rods of any diameter.
475
AU IC
476 Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to Class 2A, Unified
477 Coarse Thread Series of ASME B1.1 except for anchor rods over 1 in.
BL
478 diameter are permitted to conform to Class 2A, 8UN Thread Series.
479
PU

482
483 5. Consumables for Welding
484
485 Filler metals and fluxes shall conform to one of the following specifications
486 of the American Welding Society:
487 AWS A5.1/A5.1M
488 AWS A5.5/A5.5M
489 AWS A5.17/A5.17M
490 AWS A5.18/A5.18M
491 AWS A5.20/A5.20M
492 AWS A5.23/A5.23M
493 AWS A5.25/A5.25M
494 AWS A5.26/A5.26M
495 AWS A5.28/A5.28M
496 AWS A5.29/A5.29M
497 AWS A5.32/A5.32M
498 AWS A5.36/A5.36M

A-10
499
502
503 6. Headed Stud Anchors
504
505 Steel headed stud anchors shall conform to the requirements of the Structural
506 Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M).
507
509 with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
510
511 A4. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
512
513 The issuing entity shall obtain authorization from the engineer of record prior
514 to each issuance of the structural design documents and specifications. When
515 authorized, the documents that are released shall be clearly identified with
20 NE
516 the authorized purpose and shall include the date of release.
517
518 Structural design documents and specifications issued for construction of all
20 O
519 or a portion of the work shall be clearly legible and drawn to an identified
520 scale that is appropriate to clearly convey the information. They shall be
3, W
521 based on the consideration of the design loads, forces, and deformations to be
522 resisted by the structural frame in the completed project and give the
E
523 following information, as applicable, to define the scope of the work to be
524 fabricated and erected:
ST I
U EV
525
526 (a) Information as required by the applicable building code
527 (b) Statement of the method of design used: LRFD or ASD
G R
528 (c) The section, size, material grade, and location of all members
529 (d) All geometry and work points necessary for layout
AU IC
530 (e) Column base, floor, and roof elevation

531 (f) Column centers and offsets
532 (g) Identification of the lateral force-resisting system and connecting
BL
533 diaphragm elements that provide for lateral strength and stability in the
534 completed structure
PU
535 (h) Design provisions for initial imperfections, if different than specified
536 in Chapter C for stability design
537 (i) Fabrication and erection tolerances not included in or different from
538 the Code of Standard Practice
539 (j) Any special erection conditions or other considerations that are
540 required by the design concept, such as identification of a condition
541 when the structural steel frame in the fully erected and fully connected
542 state requires interaction with nonstructural steel elements for strength
543 or stability, the use of shores, jacks, or loads that must be adjusted as
544 erection progresses to set or maintain camber, position within speci-
545 fied tolerances, or prestress
546 (k) Preset elevation requirements, if any, at free ends of cantilevered
547 members relative to their fixed-end elevations
548 (l) Column differential shortening information, including performance
549 requirements for monitoring and adjusting for column differential
550 shortening
551 (m) Requirements for all connections and member reinforcement
552 (n) Joining requirements between elements of built-up members
553 (o) Camber requirements for members, including magnitude, direction,
554 and location

A-11
555 (p) Requirements for material grade, size, capacity, and detailing of steel
556 headed stud anchors as specified in Chapter I
557 (q) Anticipated deflections and the associated loading conditions for
558 major structural elements (such as transfer girders and trusses) that
559 support columns and hangers
560 (r) Requirements for openings in structural steel members for other trades
561 (s) Shop painting and surface preparation requirements as required for the
562 design of bolted connections
563 (t) Requirements for approval documents in addition to what is specified
564 in the Code of Standard Practice Section 4.
565 (u) Charpy V-Notch toughness (CVN) requirements for rolled heavy
566 shapes or built-up heavy shapes, if different than what is required in
567 Section A3
568 (v) Identification of members and joints subjected to fatigue
569 (w) Identification of members and joints requiring nondestructive testing
570 in addition to what is required in Chapter N
571 (x) Additional project requirements, as deemed appropriate by the
20 NE
572 engineer of record, that impact the life safety of the structure
573
574 When structural steel connection design is delegated, the design documents
20 O
575 shall include:
576
3, W
577 (a) Design requirements for the delegated design
578 (b) Requirements for substantiating connection information
E
579
580 User Note: For projects that require consideration of seismic provisions,
ST I
U EV
581 additional requirements for information to be shown are contained in

582 Section A4 of the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
583
G R
584 A5. APPROVALS

585
AU IC
586 The engineer of record or registered design professional in responsible

587 charge, as applicable, shall require submission of approval documents and
BL
588 shall review and approve, reject, or provide review comments on the
589 approval documents.
590
PU
591 When structural steel connection design is delegated to a licensed engineer

592 working with the fabricator, the engineer of record shall require submission
593 of the substantiating connection information and shall review the information
594 submitted for compliance with the information requested. The review shall
595 confirm the following:
596
597 (a) The substantiating connection information has been prepared by a
598 licensed engineer
599 (b) The substantiating connection information conforms to the design
600 documents and specifications
601 (c) The connection design work conforms to the design intent of the
602 engineer of record on the overall project
603
604 User Note: Communication requirements among the parties involved in the
605 approval process are discussed in the AISC Code of Standard Practice
606 Section 4. The Commentary to Section 4.1 recommends that a pre-detailing
607 conference be held to facilitate good communication among the parties
608 regarding the engineer’s design intent, requests for information (RFI), and
609 the approval documents required for a project.
610

B-1
1 CHAPTER B
2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3
4 This chapter addresses general requirements for the design of steel structures
5 applicable to all chapters of this Specification.
6
8
9 B1. General Provisions
10 B2. Loads and Load Combinations
11 B3. Design Basis
12 B4. Member Properties
13 B5. Fabrication and Erection
14 B6. Quality Control and Quality Assurance
15 B7. Evaluation of Existing Structures
20 NE
16
17 B1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
20 O
18 The design of members and connections shall be consistent with the intended
19 behavior of the structural system and the assumptions made in the structural
3, W
20 analysis.
21 B2. LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
E
22 The loads, nominal loads, and load combinations shall be those stipulated by
ST I
U EV
23 the applicable building code. In the absence of a building code, the loads,
24 nominal loads, and load combinations shall be those stipulated in Minimum
25 Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
G R
26 (ASCE/SEI 7).
27 User Note: When using ASCE/SEI 7 for design according to Section B3.1
AU IC
28 (LRFD), the load combinations in ASCE/SEI 7 Section 2.3 apply. For

29 design, according to Section B3.2 (ASD), the load combinations in
BL
30 ASCE/SEI 7 Section 2.4 apply.

31
PU
32 B3. DESIGN BASIS

33 Design shall be such that no applicable strength or serviceability limit state
34 shall be exceeded when the structure is subjected to all applicable load
35 combinations.
36
37 Design for strength shall be performed according to the provisions for load
38 and resistance factor design (LRFD) or to the provisions for allowable
39 strength design (ASD).
40
41 User Note: The term “design,” as used in this Specification, is defined in the
42 Glossary.
43 1. Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
44
45 Design according to the provisions for load and resistance factor design
46 (LRFD) satisfies the requirements of this Specification when the design
47 strength of each structural component equals or exceeds the required strength
48 determined on the basis of the LRFD load combinations. All provisions of
49 this Specification, except for those in Section B3.2, shall apply.

B-2
50 Design shall be performed in accordance with Equation B3-1:

51 Ru ≤ φRn (B3-1)
52 where
53 Ru = required strength using LRFD load combinations
54 Rn = nominal strength
55 φ = resistance factor
56 φRn = design strength
57
58 The nominal strength, Rn, and the resistance factor, φ, for the applicable limit
59 states are specified in Chapters D through K.
60
61 2. Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD)
62
63 Design according to the provisions for allowable strength design (ASD)
64 satisfies the requirements of this Specification when the allowable strength of
20 NE
65 each structural component equals or exceeds the required strength determined
66 on the basis of the ASD load combinations. All provisions of this Specifica-
67 tion, except those of Section B3.1, shall apply.
20 O
68 Design shall be performed in accordance with Equation B3-2:
3, W
Rn
69 Ra ≤ (B3-2)
Ω
E
70 where
ST I
U EV
71 Ra = required strength using ASD load combinations

72 Rn = nominal strength
73 Ω = safety factor
G R
74 R n Ω = allowable strength
AU IC
75
76 The nominal strength, Rn, and the safety factor, Ω, for the applicable limit
BL

78
79 3. Required Strength
PU
80
81 The required strength of structural members and connections shall be
82 determined by structural analysis for the applicable load combinations, as
83 stipulated in Section B2.
84 Design by elastic or inelastic analysis is permitted. Requirements for
85 analysis are stipulated in Chapter C and Appendix 1.
86
87 4. Design of Connections and Supports
88
89 Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
90 Chapters J and K. The forces and deformations used in design of the
91 connections shall be consistent with the intended performance of the
92 connection and the assumptions used in the design of the structure. Self-
93 limiting inelastic deformations of the connections are permitted.
94 At points of support, beams, girders, and trusses shall be restrained against
95 rotation about their longitudinal axis unless it can be shown by analysis that
96 the restraint is not required.

B-3
97 User Note: Code of Standard Practice Section 3.1.2 addresses communica-

98 tion of necessary information for the design of connections.
99 4a. Simple Connections
100 A simple connection transmits a negligible moment. In the analysis of the
101 structure, simple connections may be assumed to allow unrestrained relative
102 rotation between the framing elements being connected. A simple
103 connection shall have sufficient rotation capacity to accommodate the
104 required rotation determined by the analysis of the structure.
105 4b. Moment Connections
106 Two types of moment connections, fully restrained and partially restrained,
107 are permitted, as specified below.
108 (a) Fully Restrained (FR) Moment Connections
109 A fully restrained (FR) moment connection transfers moment with a
110 negligible rotation between the connected members. In the analysis of
20 NE
111 the structure, the connection may be assumed to allow no relative rota-
112 tion. An FR connection shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to
113 maintain the initial angle between the connected members at the strength
20 O
114 limit states.
115 (b) Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Connections
3, W
116 Partially restrained (PR) moment connections transfer moments, but the
E
117 relative rotation between connected members is not negligible. In the
118 analysis of the structure, the moment-rotation response characteristics of
ST I
U EV
119 any PR connection shall be included. The response characteristics of the

120 PR connection shall be based on the technical literature or established by
121 analytical or experimental means. The component elements of a PR
G R
122 connection shall have sufficient strength, stiffness, and deformation

123 capacity such that the moment-rotation response can be realized up to
AU IC
124 and including the required strength of the connection.

125
BL
126 5. Design of Diaphragms and Collectors

127
PU
128 Diaphragms and collectors shall be designed for forces that result from loads,
129 as stipulated in Section B2. They shall be designed in conformance with the
130 provisions of Chapters C through K, as applicable.
131
132 6. Design of Anchorages to Concrete
133
134 Anchorage between steel and concrete acting compositely shall be designed
135 in accordance with Chapter I. The design of column bases, and anchor rods
136 shall be in accordance with Chapter J.
137
138 7. Design for Stability
139
140 The structure and its elements shall be designed for stability in accordance
141 with Chapter C.
142
143 8. Design for Serviceability
144
145 The overall structure and the individual members and connections shall be
146 evaluated for serviceability limit states in accordance with Chapter L.
147

B-4
148 9. Design for Structural Integrity

149
150 When design for structural integrity is required by the applicable building
151 code, the requirements in this section shall be met.
152
153 (a) Column splices shall have a nominal tensile strength equal to or greater
154 than D + L for the area tributary to the column between the splice and
155 the splice or base immediately below,
156 where
157 D = nominal dead load, kips (N)
158 L = nominal live load, kips (N)
159
160 (b) Beam and girder end connections shall have a minimum nominal axial
161 tensile strength equal to (i) two-thirds of the required vertical shear
162 strength for design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD) or (ii) the required
163 vertical shear strength for design according to Section B3.2 (ASD), but
20 NE
164 not less than 10 kips in either case.
165
20 O
166 (c) End connections of members bracing columns shall have a nominal
167 tensile strength equal to or greater than (i) 1% of two-thirds of the re-
3, W
168 quired column axial strength at that level for design according to Section
169 B3.1 (LRFD) or (ii) 1% of the required column axial strength at that
E
170 level for design according to Section B3.2 (ASD).

ST I
U EV
171
172 The strength requirements for structural integrity in this section shall be
173 evaluated independently of other strength requirements. For the purpose of
G R
174 satisfying these requirements, bearing bolts in connections with short-slotted

175 holes parallel to the direction of the tension force and inelastic deformation
AU IC
176 of the connection are permitted.

BL
177 10. Design for Ponding

178
PU
179 The roof system shall be investigated through structural analysis to ensure
180 stability and strength under ponding conditions unless the roof surface is
181 configured to prevent the accumulation of water.
182 Ponding stability and strength analysis shall consider the effect of the
183 deflections of the roof’s structural framing under all loads (including dead
184 loads) present at the onset of ponding and the subsequent accumulation of
185 rainwater and snowmelt.
186 The nominal strength and resistance or safety factors for the applicable limit
188 11. Design for Fatigue
189
190 For members and their connections subjected to repeated loading, fatigue
191 shall be considered in accordance with Appendix 3. Fatigue need not be
192 considered for seismic effects or for the effects of wind loading on typical
193 building lateral force-resisting systems and building enclosure components.
194
195 12. Design for Fire Conditions
196

B-5
197 Two methods of design for fire conditions are provided in Appendix 4: (a) by
198 analysis and (b) by qualification testing. Compliance with the fire-protection
199 requirements in the applicable building code shall be deemed to satisfy the
200 requirements of Appendix 4.
201
202 This section is not intended to create or imply a contractual requirement for
203 the engineer of record responsible for the structural design or any other
204 member of the design team.
205 User Note: Design by qualification testing is the prescriptive method
206 specified in most building codes. Traditionally, on most projects where the
207 architect is the prime professional, the architect has been the responsible
208 party to specify and coordinate fire protection requirements. Design by
209 analysis is a newer engineering approach to fire-protection. Designation of
210 the person(s) responsible for designing for fire conditions is a contractual
211 matter to be addressed on each project.
212 13. Design for Corrosion Effects
20 NE
213 Where corrosion could impair the strength or serviceability of a structure,
214 structural components shall be designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be
215 protected against corrosion.
20 O
216
3, W
217 B4. MEMBER PROPERTIES
218
E
219 1. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
220
ST I
U EV
221 For members subject to axial compression, sections are classified as

222 nonslender-element or slender-element sections. For a nonslender-element
223 section, the width-to-thickness ratios of its compression elements shall not
G R
224 exceed λr from Table B4.1a. If the width-to-thickness ratio of any compres-
225 sion element exceeds λr, the section is a slender-element section.
AU IC
226
227 For members subject to flexure, sections are classified as compact,
BL
228 noncompact or slender-element sections. For all sections addressed in Table

229 B4.1b, flanges must be continuously connected to the web or webs. For a
230 section to qualify as compact, the width-to-thickness ratios of its compression
PU
231 elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness ratios, λp, from
232 Table B4.1b. If the width-to-thickness ratio of one or more compression
233 elements exceeds λp, but does not exceed λr from Table B4.1b, the section is
234 noncompact. If the width-to-thickness ratio of any compression element
235 exceeds λr, the section is a slender-element section.
236
237 For cases where the web and flange are not continuously attached,
238 consideration of element slenderness must account for the unattached length
239 of the elements and the appropriate plate buckling boundary conditions.
240
241 User Note: The Commentary discusses element slenderness when web and
242 flange are not continuously attached.
243
244 1a. Unstiffened Elements
245
246 For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge parallel to the
247 direction of the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows:
248

B-6
249 (a) For flanges of I-shaped members and tees, the width, b, is one-half the
250 full-flange width, bf.
251
252 (b) For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees, the width, b, is the
253 full leg or flange width.
254
255 (c) For plates, the width, b, is the distance from the free edge to the first row
256 of fasteners or line of welds.
257
258 (d) For stems of tees, d is the full depth of the section.
259
260 User Note: Refer to Table B4.1 for the graphic representation of unstiffened
261 element dimensions.
262
263 1b. Stiffened Elements
264
265 For stiffened elements supported along two edges parallel to the direction of
20 NE
266 the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows:
267
268 (a) For webs of rolled sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less
20 O
269 the fillet at each flange; hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the
270 inside face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius.
271
3, W
272 (b) For webs of built-up sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of
273 fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used, and
E
274 hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the nearest line of fasteners
ST I
275 at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange
U EV
276 when welds are used; hp is twice the distance from the plastic neutral
277 axis to the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the
G R
278 inside face of the compression flange when welds are used.
279
AU IC
280 (c) For flange plates in built-up sections, the width, b, is the distance
281 between adjacent lines of fasteners or lines of welds.
282
BL
283 (d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections (HSS), the width, b,
284 is the clear distance between webs less the inside corner radius on each
PU
285 side. For webs of rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance between the
286 flanges less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner radius is
287 not known, b and h shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimen-
288 sion minus three times the thickness. The thickness, t, shall be taken as
289 the design wall thickness, per Section B4.2.
290
291 (e) For flanges or webs of box sections and other stiffened elements, the
292 width, b, is the clear distance between the elements providing stiffening.
293
294 (f) For perforated cover plates, b is the transverse distance between the
295 nearest line of fasteners, and the net area of the plate is taken at the
296 widest hole.
297
298 (g) For round hollow structural sections (HSS), the width shall be taken as
299 the outside diameter, D, and the thickness, t, shall be taken as the design
300 wall thickness, as defined in Section B4.2.
301
302 User Note: Refer to Table B4.1 for the graphic representation of stiffened
303 element dimensions.
304

B-7
305 For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value
306 halfway between the free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
307
308 2. Design Wall Thickness for HSS
309
310 The design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations involving the wall
311 thickness of hollow structural sections (HSS). The design wall thickness, t,
312 shall be taken equal to the nominal thickness for box sections and HSS
313 produced according to ASTM A1065/A1065M or ASTM A1085/A1085M.
314 For HSS produced according to other standards approved for use under this
315 Specification, the design wall thickness, t, shall be taken equal to 0.93 times
316 the nominal wall thickness.
317 User Note: A pipe can be designed using the provisions of this Specification
318 for round HSS sections as long as the pipe conforms to ASTM A53/A53M
319 Grade B and the appropriate limitations of this Specification are used.
320
20 NE
321
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

B-8
322
TABLE B4.1a
Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements
Members Subject to Axial Compression
Limiting
Case
Width-to- Width-to-Thickness
Description of Thickness Ratio λr (nonslender/
Element Ratio slender) Examples
1 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped
sections, plates
projecting from
rolled I-shaped
sections, E
0.56
outstanding legs b/t Fy
of pairs of angles
connected with
continuous
20 NE
contact, flanges
of channels, and
Unstiffened Elements
flanges of tees
20 O
2 Flanges of built- [a]
up I-shaped
sections and
3, W
plates or angle b/t kc E
legs projecting 0.64
Fy
E
from built-up I-
shaped sections
ST I
U EV
3 Legs of single
angles, legs of
double angles E
with separators, b/t 0.45
G R
and all other Fy

unstiffened
AU IC
elements
4 Stems of tees E
0.75
BL
d/t
Fy
5 Webs of doubly
PU
symmetric rolled E
and built-up I- h/tw 1.49
shaped sections Fy
and channels
6 Walls of E
rectangular HSS b/t 1.40
Fy
Stiffened Elements
7 Flange cover
plates plates
between lines of E
b/t 1.40
fasteners or Fy
welds
8 All other stiffened E

elements b/t 1.49
Fy
9 Round HSS
E
D/t 0.11
Fy
[a]
kc = 4 h tw , but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
323

B-9
TABLE B4.1b
Members Subject to Flexure
Width- Limiting
to- Width-to-Thickness Ratio
Thick- λp λr
Case
Description of ness (compact/ (noncompact/

Element Ratio noncompact) slender) Examples
10 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped
E E
sections, b/t 0.38 1.0
channels, and Fy Fy
tees
11 Flanges of
doubly and [a] [b]
singly symmetric
I-shaped built-up b/t
kc E
sections E 0.95
0.38
FL
20 NE
Fy
12 Legs of single
angles E E
0.54 0.91
20 O
b/t
3, W Fy Fy
13 Flanges of all I-
shaped sections
and channels in
E
E E
flexure about the b/t 0.38 1.0
Fy Fy
ST I
minor axis
U EV
14 Stems of tees
E E
d/t 0.84 1.52
G R
Fy Fy
324
AU IC
BL
PU

B-10
325
TABLE B4.1b
Members Subject to Flexure
Limiting
Width-to-Thickness Ratio
Width-
to-
Thick- λp λr
Case
Description ness (compact/ (noncompact/

of Element Ratio noncompact) slender) Examples
15 Webs of
doubly
symmetric I- E E
h/tw 3.76 5.70
shaped Fy Fy
sections and
channels
16 Webs of [c]
20 NE
singly
symmetric I- hc E
shaped hp Fy E
sections hc/tw 2 5.70
 
20 O
Mp Fy
 0.54 − 0.09 
 My 
≤ λr
3, W
17 Flanges of
E
rectangular E E
HSS b/t 1.12 1.40
ST I
Fy Fy
U EV
18 Flange cover
plates
G R
between lines E E
of fasteners or b/t 1.12 1.40
Fy Fy
welds
AU IC
19 Webs of
BL
rectangular E E
HSS and box h/t 2.42 5.70
Fy Fy
sections
PU
20 Round HSS
E E
D/t 0.07 0.31
Fy Fy
21 Flanges of
box sections E E
b/t 1.12 1.49
Fy Fy
4
[a]
kc = but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
h tw
[b]
FL = 0.7Fy for slender web I-shaped members and major-axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-
shaped members with Sxt Sxc ≥ 0.7 ; and FL = Fy Sx t Sxc ≥ 0.5Fy for major-axis bending of compact and noncompact
web built-up I-shaped members with Sxc Sxt < 0.7 , where Sxc ,Sxt = elastic section modulus referred to compression
and tension flanges, respectively, in.3 (mm3).
[c]
M y is the moment at yielding of the extreme fiber. Mp = FyZx, plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm), where Zx = plastic section
modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) ENA = elastic neutral axis
Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa) PNA = plastic neutral axis
326
327

B-11
328 3. Gross and Net Area Determination

329
330 3a. Gross Area
331
332 The gross area, Ag, of a member is the total cross-sectional area.
333
334 3b. Net Area
335
336 The net area, An, of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness and
337 the net width of each element computed as follows:
338
339 In computing net area for tension and shear, the width of a bolt hole shall be
340 taken as 1/16 in. (2 mm) greater than the nominal dimension of the hole.
341
342 For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line,
343 the net width of the part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width
344 the sum of the diameters or slot dimensions as provided in this section, of all
20 NE
345 holes in the chain, and adding, for each gage space in the chain, the quantity
346 s 2 4g ,
347
20 O
348 where
349 g = transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage
3, W
350 lines, in. (mm)
351 s = longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two
E
352 consecutive holes, in. (mm)
ST I
353
U EV
354 For angles, the gage for holes in opposite adjacent legs shall be the sum of
355 the gages from the back of the angles less the thickness.
356
G R
357 For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the net area, An, is the gross area
358 minus the product of the thickness and the total width of material that is
AU IC
359 removed to form the slot.

360
BL
361 In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall not
362 be considered as adding to the net area.
363
PU
364 For members without holes, the net area, An, is equal to the gross area, Ag.
365
366 B5. FABRICATION AND ERECTION
367
368 Fabrication documents, fabrication, shop painting, and erection shall satisfy
369 the requirements stipulated in Chapter M.
370
371 User Note: Refer to Code of Standard Practice Section 4 addresses
372 requirements for fabrication and erection documents. Code of Standard
373 Practice Section 4.4 addresses the approval process for fabrication approval
374 documents.
375
376 B6. QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
377
378 Quality control and quality assurance activities shall satisfy the requirements
379 stipulated in Chapter N.
380
381

B-12
382 B7. EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

383
384 The evaluation of existing structures shall satisfy the requirements stipulated
385 in Appendix 5.
386
387 B8. DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
388
389 The provisions in this Specification are based on the assumption that
390 dimensional tolerances provided in the Code of Standard Practice and in the
391 ASTM specifications approved for use under Section A3.1a are satisfied.
392 Where these tolerances are not satisfied, the effect of the out-of-tolerance
393 shall be considered.
394
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

C-1
1 CHAPTER C
2 DESIGN FOR STABILITY

3
4 This chapter addresses requirements for the design of structures for stability. The
5 direct analysis method is presented herein.
6
8
9 C1. General Stability Requirements
10 C2. Calculation of Required Strengths
11 C3. Calculation of Available Strengths
12
13 User Note: Alternative methods for the design of structures for stability are
14 provided in Appendices 1 and 7. Appendix 1 provides alternatives that allow
20 NE
15 consideration of member imperfections and/or inelasticity directly within the
16 analysis and provides for a more detailed evaluation of the limit states. Appendix 7
17 provides the effective length method and a first-order elastic method.
20 O
18
19 C1. GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
3, W
20
21 Stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its
E
22 elements. The effects of all of the following on the stability of the structure
23 and its elements shall be considered: (a) flexural, shear and axial member
ST I
U EV
24 deformations, and all other component and connection deformations that

25 contribute to the displacements of the structure; (b) second-order effects
26 (including P-∆ and P-δ effects); (c) geometric imperfections; (d) stiffness
G R
27 reductions due to inelasticity, including the effect of partial yielding of the

28 cross section which may be accentuated by the presence of residual stresses;
AU IC
29 and (e) uncertainty in system, member, and connection strength and stiffness.
30 All load-dependent effects shall be calculated at a level of loading
BL
31 corresponding to LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combina-

32 tions.
33
PU
34 Any rational method of design for stability that considers all of the listed
35 effects is permitted; this includes the methods identified in Sections C1.1 and
36 C1.2.
37
38 User Note: See Commentary Section C1 and Table C-C1.1 for an
39 explanation of how requirements (a) through (e) of Section C1 are satisfied in
40 the methods of design listed in Sections C1.1 and C1.2.
41
42 1. Direct Analysis Method of Design
43
44 The direct analysis method of design is permitted for all structures, and can
45 be based on either elastic or inelastic analysis. For design by elastic analysis,
46 required strengths shall be calculated in accordance with Section C2 and the
47 calculation of available strengths in accordance with Section C3. For design
48 by advanced analysis, the provisions of Section 1.1 and Sections 1.2 or 1.3 of
49 Appendix 1 shall be satisfied.
50

C-2
51 2. Alternative Methods of Design

52
53 The effective length method and the first-order analysis method, both defined
54 in Appendix 7, are based on elastic analysis and are permitted as alternatives
55 to the direct analysis method for structures that satisfy the limitations
56 specified in that appendix.
57
58 C2. CALCULATION OF REQUIRED STRENGTHS
59
60 For the direct analysis method of design, the required strengths of compo-
61 nents of the structure shall be determined from an elastic analysis conforming
62 to Section C2.1. The analysis shall include consideration of initial imperfec-
63 tions in accordance with Section C2.2 and adjustments to stiffness in
64 accordance with Section C2.3.
65
66 1. General Analysis Requirements
67
68 The analysis of the structure shall conform to the following requirements:
20 NE
69
70 (a) The analysis shall consider flexural, shear, and axial member
20 O
71 deformations, and all other component and connection deformations
72 that contribute to displacements of the structure. The analysis shall
73 incorporate reductions in all stiffnesses that are considered to contrib-
3, W
74 ute to the stability of the structure, as specified in Section C2.3.
75
E
76 (b) The analysis shall be a second-order analysis that considers both P-Δ
ST I
77 and P-δ effects, except that it is permissible to neglect the effect of P-

U EV
78 δ on the response of the structure when the following conditions are

79 satisfied: (1) the structure supports gravity loads primarily through
G R
80 nominally vertical columns, walls or frames; (2) the ratio of maximum

81 second-order drift to maximum first-order drift (both determined for
82 LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with
AU IC
83 stiffnesses adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal

84 to or less than 1.7; and (3) no more than one-third of the total gravity
BL
85 load on the structure is supported by columns that are part of moment-

86 resisting frames in the direction of translation being considered. It is
PU
87 necessary in all cases to consider P-δ effects in the evaluation of indi-

88 vidual members subject to compression and flexure.
89
90 User Note: A P-Δ-only second-order analysis (one that neglects the
91 effects of P-δ on the response of the structure) is permitted under the
92 conditions listed. In this case, the requirement for considering P-δ
93 effects in the evaluation of individual members can be satisfied by
94 applying the B1 multiplier defined in Appendix 8, Section 8.1.2, to the
95 required flexural strength of the member.
96
97 Use of the approximate method of second-order analysis provided in
98 Appendix 8, Section 8.1, is permitted.
99
100 (c) The analysis shall consider all gravity and other applied loads that
101 may influence the stability of the structure.
102
103 User Note: It is important to include in the analysis all gravity loads,
104 including loads on leaning columns and other elements that are not
105 part of the lateral force-resisting system.
106

C-3
107 (d) For design by LRFD, the second-order analysis shall be carried out
108 under LRFD load combinations. For design by ASD, the second-
109 order analysis shall be carried out under 1.6 times the ASD load com-
110 binations, and the results shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
111 strengths of components.
112
113 2. Consideration of Initial System Imperfections
114
115 The effect of initial imperfections in the position of points of intersection of
116 members on the stability of the structure shall be taken into account either by
117 direct modeling of these imperfections in the analysis as specified in Section
118 C2.2a or by the application of notional loads as specified in Section C2.2b.
119
120 User Note: The imperfections required to be considered in this section are
121 imperfections in the locations of points of intersection of members (system
122 imperfections). In typical building structures, the important imperfection of
123 this type is the out-of-plumbness of columns. Consideration of initial out-of-
20 NE
124 straightness of individual members (member imperfections) is not required in
125 the structural analysis when using the provisions of this section; it is
126 accounted for in the compression member design provisions of Chapter E and
20 O
127 need not be considered explicitly in the analysis as long as it is within the
128 limits specified in the Code of Standard Practice. Appendix 1, Section 1.2,
129 provides an extension to the direct analysis method that includes modeling of
3, W
130 member imperfections (initial out-of-straightness) within the structural
131 analysis.
E
132
ST I
133 2a. Direct Modeling of Imperfections

U EV
134
135 In all cases, it is permissible to account for the effect of initial system
G R
136 imperfections by including the imperfections directly in the analysis. The

137 structure shall be analyzed with points of intersection of members displaced
AU IC
138 from their nominal locations. The magnitude of the initial displacements
139 shall be the maximum amount considered in the design; the pattern of initial
140 displacements shall be such that it provides the greatest destabilizing effect.
BL
141
142 User Note: Initial displacements similar in configuration to both displace-
PU
143 ments due to loading and anticipated buckling modes should be considered in
144 the modeling of imperfections. The magnitude of the initial displacements
145 should be based on permissible construction tolerances, as specified in the
146 Code of Standard Practice or other governing requirements, or on actual
147 imperfections if known.
148
149 In the analysis of structures that support gravity loads primarily through
150 nominally vertical columns, walls or frames, where the ratio of maximum
151 second-order story drift to maximum first-order story drift (both determined
152 for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with
153 stiffnesses adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or
154 less than 1.7, it is permissible to include initial system imperfections in the
155 analysis for gravity-only load combinations and not in the analysis for load
156 combinations that include applied lateral loads.
157
158 2b. Use of Notional Loads to Represent Imperfections
159
160 For structures that support gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
161 columns, walls, or frames, it is permissible to use notional loads to represent
162 the effects of initial system imperfections in the position of points of

C-4
163 intersection of members in accordance with the requirements of this section.

164 The notional load shall be applied to a model of the structure based on its
165 nominal geometry.
166
167 User Note: In general, the notional load concept is applicable to all types of
168 structures and to imperfections in the positions of both points of intersection
169 of members and points along members, but the specific requirements in
170 Sections C2.2b(a) through C2.2b(d) are applicable only for the particular
171 class of structure and type of system imperfection identified here.
172
173 (a) Notional loads shall be applied as lateral loads at all levels. The
174 notional loads shall be additive to other lateral loads and shall be ap-
175 plied in all load combinations, except as indicated in Section C2.2b(d).
176 The magnitude of the notional loads shall be:
177
178 Ni = 0.002αYi (C2-1)
179
20 NE
180 where
181 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
182 Ni = notional load applied at level i, kips (N)
20 O
183 Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combina-
184 tion or ASD load combination, as applicable, kips (N)
3, W
185
186 User Note: The use of notional loads can lead to additional (generally
E
187 small) fictitious base shears in the structure. The correct horizontal
188 reactions at the foundation may be obtained by applying an additional
ST I
U EV
189 horizontal force at the base of the structure, equal and opposite in di-
190 rection to the sum of all notional loads, distributed among vertical
191 load-carrying elements in the same proportion as the gravity load sup-
G R
192 ported by those elements. The notional loads can also lead to addi-
193 tional overturning effects, which are not fictitious.
AU IC
194
195 (b) The notional load at any level, Ni, shall be distributed over that level in
BL
196 the same manner as the gravity load at the level. The notional loads
197 shall be applied in the direction that provides the greatest destabilizing
198 effect.
PU
199
200 User Note: For most building structures, the requirement regarding
201 notional load direction may be satisfied as follows: for load combina-
202 tions that do not include lateral loading, consider two alternative or-
203 thogonal directions of notional load application, in a positive and a
204 negative sense in each of the two directions, in the same direction at
205 all levels; for load combinations that include lateral loading, apply all
206 notional loads in the direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the
207 combination.
208
209 (c) The notional load coefficient of 0.002 in Equation C2-1 is based on a
210 nominal initial story out-of-plumbness ratio of 1/500; where the use of
211 a different maximum out-of-plumbness is justified, it is permissible to
212 adjust the notional load coefficient proportionally.
213
214 User Note: An out-of-plumbness of 1/500 represents the maximum
215 tolerance on column plumbness specified in the Code of Standard
216 Practice. In some cases, other specified tolerances, such as those on
217 plan location of columns, will govern and will require a tighter plumb-
218 ness tolerance.

C-5
219
220 (d) For structures in which the ratio of maximum second-order drift to
221 maximum first-order drift (both determined for LRFD load combina-
222 tions or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with stiffnesses adjusted as
223 specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.7, it is
224 permissible to apply the notional load, Ni, only in gravity-only load
225 combinations and not in combinations that include other lateral loads.
226
227 3. Adjustments to Stiffness
228
229 The analysis of the structure to determine the required strengths of
230 components shall use reduced stiffnesses, as follows:
231
232 (a) A factor of 0.80 shall be applied to all stiffnesses that are considered
233 to contribute to the stability of the structure. It is permissible to apply
234 this reduction factor to all stiffnesses in the structure.
235
20 NE
236 User Note: Applying the stiffness reduction to some members and
237 not others can, in some cases, result in artificial distortion of the struc-
238 ture under load and possible unintended redistribution of forces. This
20 O
239 can be avoided by applying the reduction to all members, including
240 those that do not contribute to the stability of the structure.
241
3, W
242 (b) An additional factor, τb, shall be applied to the flexural stiffnesses of
243 all members whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to
E
244 the stability of the structure. For noncomposite members, τb shall be

ST I
245 defined as follows (see Section I1.5 for the definition of τb for compo-
U EV
246 site members):

247
G R
248 (1) When αPr/Pns ≤ 0.5

249
AU IC
250 τb = 1.0 (C2-2a)

251
BL
252 (2) When αPr/Pns > 0.5

253
τb = 4 ( αPr Pns ) 1 − ( αPr Pns ) 
PU
254 (C2-2b)
255 where
256 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
257 Pr = required axial compressive strength using LRFD or ASD load
258 combinations, kips (N)
259 Pns = cross-section compressive strength; for nonslender-element
260 sections, Pns = FyAg, and for slender-element sections, Pns =
261 FyAe, where Ae is as defined in Section E7 with Fcr = Fy, kips
262 (N)
263
264 User Note: Taken together, Sections (a) and (b) require the use of 0.8
265 τb times the nominal elastic flexural stiffness and 0.8 times other
266 nominal elastic stiffnesses for structural steel members in the analysis.
267
268 (c) In structures to which Section C2.2b is applicable, in lieu of using τb <
269 1.0, where αPr Pns > 0.5 , it is permissible to use τb = 1.0 for all
270 noncomposite members if a notional load of 0.001αYi [where Yi is as
271 defined in Section C2.2b(a)] is applied at all levels, in the direction
272 specified in Section C2.2b(b), in all load combinations. These notion-

C-6
273 al loads shall be added to those, if any, used to account for the effects
274 of initial imperfections in the position of points of intersection of
275 members and shall not be subject to the provisions of Section
276 C2.2b(d).
277
278 (d) Where components comprised of materials other than structural steel
279 are considered to contribute to the stability of the structure, and the
280 governing codes and specifications for the other materials require
281 greater reductions in stiffness, such greater stiffness reductions shall
282 be applied to those components.
283
284 C3. CALCULATION OF AVAILABLE STRENGTHS
285
286 For the direct analysis method of design, the available strengths of members
287 and connections shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of
288 Chapters D through K, as applicable, with no further consideration of overall
289 structure stability. The effective length for flexural buckling of all members
20 NE
290 shall be taken as the unbraced length unless a smaller value is justified by
291 rational analysis.
292
20 O
293 Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have
294 sufficient stiffness and strength to control member movement at the braced
295 points.
3, W
296
297 User Note: Methods of satisfying this bracing requirement are provided in
E
298 Appendix 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing

ST I
299 that is included in the design of the lateral force-resisting system of the
U EV
300 overall structure.

G R
AU IC
BL
PU

D-1
1 CHAPTER D
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

3
4 This chapter applies to members subject to axial tension.
6 D1. Slenderness Limitations
7 D2. Tensile Strength
8 D3. Effective Net Area
9 D4. Built-Up Members
10 D5. Pin-Connected Members
11 D6. Eyebars
12
13 User Note: For cases not included in this chapter, the following sections apply:
14 • B3.11 Members subject to fatigue
20 NE
15 • Chapter H Members subject to combined axial tension and flexure
16 • J3 Threaded rods
17 • J4.1 Connecting elements in tension
20 O
18 • J4.3 Block shear rupture strength at end connections of tension members
19
3, W
20 D1. SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS
21
E
22 There is no maximum slenderness limit for members in tension.
ST I
23
U EV
24 User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension, the slenderness
25 ratio, L/r, preferably should not exceed 300. This suggestion does not apply
26 to rods or hangers in tension.
G R
27
28 D2. TENSILE STRENGTH
AU IC
29
30 The design tensile strength, φtPn, and the allowable tensile strength, Pn/Ωt, of
BL
31 tension members shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit
32 states of tensile yielding in the gross section and tensile rupture in the net
PU
33 section.
34
35 (a) For tensile yielding in the gross section
36
37 Pn = Fy Ag (D2-1)
38 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

39
40 (b) For tensile rupture in the net section
41
42 Pn = Fu Ae (D2-2)
43
44 φt = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωt = 2.00 (ASD)
45
46 where
47 Ae = effective net area, in.2 (mm2)
48 Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
49 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa)
50 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa)
51

D-2
52 Where connections use plug, slot or fillet welds in holes or slots, the effective
53 net area through the holes shall be used in Equation D2-2.
54
55 D3. EFFECTIVE NET AREA
56
57 The gross area, Ag, and net area, An, of tension members shall be determined
58 in accordance with the provisions of Section B4.3.
59
60 The effective net area of tension members shall be determined as
61
62 Ae = AnU (D3-1)
63
64 where U, the shear lag factor, is determined as shown in Table D3.1.
65
66 For open cross sections such as W, M, S, C, or HP shapes, WTs, STs, and
67 single and double angles, the shear lag factor, U, need not be less than the
68 ratio of the gross area of the connected element(s) to the member gross area.
20 NE
69 This provision does not apply to closed sections, such as HSS sections, nor to
70 plates.
71
20 O
72 D4. BUILT-UP MEMBERS
73
3, W
74 For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in
75 continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape, or two plates, see
E
76 Section J3.5.
77
ST I
U EV
78 Lacing, perforated cover plates, or tie plates without lacing are permitted to be
79 used on the open sides of built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a
80 length not less than two-thirds the distance between the lines of welds or
G R
81 fasteners connecting them to the components of the member. The thickness of

82 such tie plates shall not be less than one-fiftieth of the distance between these
AU IC
83 lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or fasteners at tie plates

84 shall not exceed 6 in. (150 mm).
BL
85
86 User Note: The longitudinal spacing of connectors between components
87 should preferably limit the slenderness ratio in any component between the
PU
88 connectors to 300.
89

PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft August 3, 2020
D-3
90
TABLE D3.1
Shear Lag Factors for Connections
to Tension Members
Case Description of Element Shear Lag Factor, U Examples
1 All tension members where the tension load
is transmitted directly to each of the cross-
sectional elements by fasteners or welds U = 1.0 –
(except as in Cases 4, 5 and 6).
2 All tension members, except HSS, where the
tension load is transmitted to some but not
all of the cross-sectional elements by
fasteners or by longitudinal welds in x
combination with transverse welds. U = 1−
l
Alternatively, Case 7 is permitted for W, M, S
and HP shapes and Case 8 is permitted for
angles.
3 All tension members where the tension load
20 NE
U = 1.0 and
is transmitted only by transverse welds to
some but not all of the cross-sectional
An = area of the directly –
elements. connected elements
20 O
[a]
4 Plates, angles, channels with welds at heels,
tees, and W-shapes with connected
elements, where the tension load is 3l 2  x
3, W
U= 1−
transmitted by longitudinal welds only. See 2 2  l 
Case 2 for definition of x . 3l + w
E
5 Round and rectangular HSS with single R sin θ 1

ST I
x= − tp
U EV
concentric gusset through slots in the HSS.

θ 2
θ in rad
G R
−10
  x 3.2 
U = 1 +   
AU IC
  l  
2b 2 + tH − 2t 2
BL
x =b−
2 H + 4b − 4t
x
PU
U = 1−
l
6 Rectangular HSS with two side gusset BU B + HU H
plates. U=
H +B
3l 2
UB = 2
3l + B 2
3l 2
UH = 2
3l + H 2
7 W-, M-, S- or HP- with flange
shapes, or tees cut connected with 2
bf ≥ d, U = 0.90
from these shapes. (If three or more 3 –
U is calculated per fasteners per line in 2
Case 2, the larger the direction of bf < d, U = 0.85
3
value is permitted to loading
be used.) with web connected –
with four or more
fasteners per line in U = 0.70
the direction of
loading

D-4
8 Single and double with four or more –

angles (If U is fasteners per line in U = 0.80
calculated per Case the direction of
2, the larger value is loading
permitted to be used.) with three fasteners U = 0.60 –
per line in the
direction of loading
(with fewer than
three fasteners per
line in the direction
of loading, use
Case 2)
B = overall width of rectangular HSS member, measured 90° to the plane of the connection, in. (mm); D =
outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm); H = overall height of rectangular HSS member, measured in the plane
of the connection, in. (mm); d = depth of section, in. (mm); for tees, d = depth of the section from which the tee
was cut, in. (mm); l = length of connection, in. (mm); w = width of plate, in. (mm); x = eccentricity of connection,
in. (mm).
[a] l +l
l = 1 2 , where l1 and l2 shall not be less than 4 times the weld size.
2
91
20 NE
92 D5. PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS
93
94 1. Tensile Strength
20 O
95
96 The design tensile strength, φtPn, and the allowable tensile strength, Pn/Ωt, of
97 pin-connected members, shall be the lower value determined according to the
3, W
98 limit states of tensile rupture, shear rupture, bearing and yielding.
99
E
100 (a) For tensile rupture on the net effective area

ST I
U EV
101
102 Pn = Fu (2tbe ) (D5-1)
103
G R
104 φt = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωt = 2.00 (ASD)

105
AU IC
106 (b) For shear rupture on the effective area

107
BL
108 Pn = 0.6Fu Asf (D5-2)

109
PU
110 φsf = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωsf = 2.00 (ASD)

111
112 where
113 Asf = 2t ( a + d 2 )
114 = area on the shear failure path, in.2 (mm2)
115 Cr = reduction factor for shear rupture on pin-connected members
116 = 1.0 when dh – d ≤ 1/32 in. (1 mm)
117 = 0.95 when 1/32 in. < dh – d ≤ 1/16 in. (1 mm < dh – d ≤ 2 mm)
118 a = shortest distance from edge of the pin hole to the edge of the member
119 measured parallel to the direction of the force, in. (mm)
120 be = 2t + 0.63, in. (= 2t + 16, mm), but not more than the actual distance-
121 from the edge of the hole to the edge of the part measured in the di-
122 rection normal to the applied force, in. (mm)
123 d = diameter of pin, in. (mm)
124 dh = diameter of hole, in. (mm)
125 t = thickness of plate, in. (mm)
126
127 (c) For bearing on the projected area of the pin, use Section J7.
128 (d) For yielding on the gross section, use Section D2(a).

D-5
129
130 2. Dimensional Requirements
131
132 Pin-connected members shall meet the following requirements:
133
134 (a) The pin hole shall be located midway between the edges of the member in
135 the direction normal to the applied force.
136 (b)When the pin is expected to provide for relative movement between
137 connected parts while under full load, the diameter of the pin hole shall
138 not be more than 1/32 in. (1 mm) greater than the diameter of the pin for
139 pins less than 3 in. in diameter and not more than 1/16 in. (2 mm) greater
140 than the diameter of the pin for pins of 3 in. (75 mm) in diameter or
141 greater.
142 (c)The width of the plate at the pin hole shall not be less than 2be + d and the
143 minimum extension, a, beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to
144 the axis of the member, shall not be less than 1.33be.
145 (d)The corners beyond the pin hole are permitted to be cut at 45° to the axis
20 NE
146 of the member, provided the net area beyond the pin hole, on a plane
147 perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that required beyond the pin hole
148 parallel to the axis of the member.
20 O
149
150 D6. EYEBARS
151
3, W
152 1. Tensile Strength
153
E
154 The available tensile strength of eyebars shall be determined in accordance

ST I
U EV
155 with Section D2, with Ag taken as the gross area of the eyebar body.
156
157 For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the eyebars shall not
G R
158 exceed eight times its thickness.

159
AU IC
160 2. Dimensional Requirements

161
BL
162 Eyebars shall meet the following requirements:

163
164 (a) Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement at the pin
PU
165 holes, and have circular heads with the periphery concentric with the pin
166 hole.
167
168 (b) The radius of transition between the circular head and the eyebar body
169 shall not be less than the head diameter.
170
171 (c) The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times the eyebar
172 body width, and the pin-hole diameter shall not be more than 1/32 in. (1
173 mm) greater than the pin diameter.
174
175 (d) For steels having Fy greater than 70 ksi (485 MPa), the hole diameter shall
176 not exceed five times the plate thickness, and the width of the eyebar
177 body shall be reduced accordingly.
178
179 (e) A thickness of less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) is permissible only if external
180 nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug contact.
181
182 (f) The width from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the
183 direction of applied load shall be greater than two-thirds and, for the

D-6
184 purpose of calculation, not more than three-fourths times the eyebar body
185 width.
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

E-1
1 CHAPTER E
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION

3
4 This chapter addresses members subject to axial compression.
6
7 E1. General Provisions
8 E2. Effective Length
9 E3. Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
10 E4. Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Single Angles and Members
11 without Slender Elements
12 E5. Single-Angle Compression Members
13 E6. Built-Up Members
20 NE
14 E7. Members with Slender Elements
15
20 O
17 • H1 – H2 Members subject to combined axial compression and flexure
18 • H3 Members subject to axial compression and torsion
3, W
19 • I2 Composite axially loaded members
20 • J4.4 Compressive strength of connecting elements
E
21
22 E1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
ST I
U EV
23
24 The design compressive strength, φc Pn , and the allowable compressive strength,
G R
25 Pn Ω c , are determined as follows.

26 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the lowest value obtained based on
AU IC
27 the applicable limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
28 torsional buckling.
BL
29
30 φc = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωc = 1.67 (ASD)
PU
31
32

E-2
33
TABLE USER NOTE E1.1

Selection Table for the Application of
Chapter E Sections
Without Slender With Slender
Elements Elements
Cross Section
Sections in Limit Sections in Limit
Chapter E States Chapter E States
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 TB
TB
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 FTB
FTB
20 NE
LB
E3 FB E7
FB
20 O LB
3, W
E3 FB E7
FB
E
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
ST I
E4 FTB
FTB
U EV
E6 LB
FB E6
E3 FB
G R
FTB E7
E4 FTB
AU IC
E5 E5
BL
PU
E3 FB N/A N/A
Unsymmetrical shapes other LB

E4 FTB E7
than single angles FTB
FB = flexural buckling, TB = torsional buckling, FTB = flexural-torsional buckling, LB = local
buckling, N/A = not applicable
34

E-3
35 E2. EFFECTIVE LENGTH

36
37 The effective length, Lc, for calculation of member slenderness, Lc r , shall be
38 determined in accordance with Chapter C or Appendix 7,
39
40 where
41 Lc = KL = effective length of member, in. (mm)
42 K = effective length factor
43 L = laterally unbraced length of the member, in. (mm)
44 r = radius of gyration, in. (mm)
45
46 User Note: For members designed on the basis of compression, the effective
47 slenderness ratio, Lc r , preferably should not exceed 200.
48
49 User Note: The effective length, Lc, may be determined using an effective length
50 factor, K, or a buckling analysis.
51
20 NE
52 E3. FLEXURAL BUCKLING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER
53 ELEMENTS
54
20 O
55 This section applies to nonslender-element compression members, as defined in
56 Section B4.1, for elements in axial compression.
3, W
57
58 User Note: When the torsional effective length is larger than the lateral effective
E
59 length, Section E4 may control.
ST I
60
U EV
61 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit state
62 of flexural buckling:
63
G R
64 Pn = Fn Ag (E3-1)
AU IC
65
66 The nominal stress, Fn, is determined as follows:
BL
67
Lc E Fy
68 (a) When ≤ 4.71 (or ≤ 2.25)
PU
r Fy Fe
 Fy 
69 Fn =  0.658 Fe  Fy (E3-2)
 
 
70
Lc E Fy
71 (b) When > 4.71 (or > 2.25)
r Fy Fe
72
73 Fn = 0.877 Fe (E3-3)
74
75 where
77 E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
78 Fe = elastic buckling stress determined according to Equation E3-4; or as
79 specified in Appendix 7, Section 7.2.3(b); or through an elastic buckling
80 analysis, as applicable, ksi (MPa)

E-4
π2 E
81 = 2
(E3-4)
 Lc 
 
 r 
82
83 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi (MPa)
85
86 User Note: The two inequalities for calculating the limits of applicability of
87 Sections E3(a) and E3(b), one based on Lc r and one based on Fy Fe , provide
88 the same result for flexural buckling.
89
90 E4. TORSIONAL AND FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF SINGLE
91 ANGLES AND MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS
92
93 This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric members, certain
94 doubly symmetric members, such as cruciform or built-up members, and doubly
20 NE
95 symmetric members when the torsional unbraced length exceeds the lateral
96 unbraced length, all without slender elements. These provisions also apply to
97 single angles with b t > 0.71 E Fy , where b is the width of the longest leg and t is
20 O
98 the thickness.
3, W
99 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit
100 states of torsional and flexural-torsional buckling:
E
101
ST I
U EV
102 Pn = Fn Ag (E4-1)
103
104 The nominal stress, Fn, shall be determined according to Equation E3-2 or E3-3,
G R
105 using the torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress, Fe, determined as
106 follows:
AU IC
107
108 (a) For doubly symmetric members twisting about the shear center
BL
109
 π 2 ECw  1
110 Fe =  + GJ  (E4-2)
PU
2
 Lcz  Ix + Iy
111
112 (b) For singly symmetric members twisting about the shear center where y is the
113 axis of symmetry
114
 Fey + Fez  4 Fey Fez H 
115 Fe =   1 − 1 −  (E4-3)
 2H   ( Fey + Fez )2 
116
117 User Note: For singly symmetric members with the x-axis as the axis of
118 symmetry, such as channels, Equation E4-3 is applicable with Fey replaced by
119 Fex.
120
121 (c) For unsymmetric members twisting about the shear center, Fe is the lowest root
122 of the cubic equation
2 2
 xo  y 
123 ( Fe − Fex ) ( Fe − Fey ) ( Fe − Fez ) − Fe2 ( Fe − Fey )   − Fe2 ( Fe − Fex )  o  = 0
 ro   ro 
124 (E4-4)

E-5
125 where
126 Cw = warping constant, in.6 (mm6)
π2 E
127 Fex = 2
(E4-5)
 Lcx 
 r 
 x 
π2 E
128 Fey = 2
(E4-6)
 Lcy 
 
 ry 
 π 2 EC w  1
129 =  (E4-7)
 L 2 + GJ  A r 2
Fez
 cz  g o
130 G = shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11,200 ksi (77 200 MPa)
131 H = flexural constant
x2 + y 2
132 = 1− o 2 o (E4-8)
20 NE
ro
133 I x, I y = moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 (mm4)
134 J = torsional constant, in.4 (mm4)
20 O
135 Kx = effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis
136 Ky = effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis
3, W
137 Kz = effective length factor for torsional buckling about the
138 longitudinal axis
E
139 Lcx = KxLx = effective length of member for buckling about x-axis, in.
140 (mm)
ST I
U EV
141 Lcy = KyLy = effective length of member for buckling about y-axis, in.
142 (mm)
143 Lcz = KzLz = effective length of member for buckling about longitudinal
G R
144 axis, in. (mm)

145 Lx, Ly, Lz = laterally unbraced length of the member for each axis, in. (mm)
AU IC
146 ro = polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (mm)
Ix + I y
ro2 2 2
BL
147 = xo + yo + (E4-9)
Ag
148 rx = radius of gyration about x-axis, in. (mm)
PU
149 ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm)

150 xo, yo = coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, in.
151 (mm)
152
153 User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped sections, Cw may be taken as I y ho 2 4
154 , where ho is the distance between flange centroids, in lieu of a more precise
155 analysis. For tees and double angles, the term with Cw may be omitted when
156 computing Fez.
157
158 (d) For doubly symmetric I-shaped members with minor axis lateral bracing offset
159 from the shear center
160
 π2 EI y  ho2 2
 1
161 Fe =  2  + ya  + GJ  2
(E4-10)
 Lcz  4   Ag ro
162
163 where
164 (
ro2 = rx2 + ry2 + ya2 + xa2 ) (E4-11)

E-6
165 ho = distance between flange centroids, in. (mm)

166 ya = bracing offset distance along y-axis, in. (mm)
167 xa = bracing offset distance along x-axis = 0
168
169 (e) For doubly symmetric I-shaped members with major axis lateral bracing offset
170 from the shear center
171
 π2 EI y  h2 I   1
172 Fe =  2  o + x xa2  + GJ  2
(E4-12)
 Lcz  4 I y   Ag ro
173
174 where
175 ya = bracing offset distance along y-axis = 0
176 xa = bracing offset distance along x-axis, in. (mm)
177
178 (f) For all other members with lateral bracing offset from the shear center, the
179 elastic buckling stress, Fe, shall be determined by analysis.
20 NE
180
181 User Note: Bracing offset from the shear center is often referred to as constrained-
182 axis torsional buckling and is discussed further in the Commentary. Members that
20 O
183 buckle in this mode will exhibit twisting because the braces restrain only lateral
184 movement.
3, W
185
186 E5. SINGLE-ANGLE COMPRESSION MEMBERS
E
187
188 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, of single-angle members shall be the lowest
ST I
U EV
189 value based on the limit states of flexural buckling in accordance with Section E3
190 or Section E7, as applicable, or flexural-torsional buckling in accordance with
191 Section E4. Flexural-torsional buckling need not be considered when
G R
192 b t ≤ 0.71 E Fy .
AU IC
193 The effects of eccentricity on single-angle members are permitted to be neglected

194 and the member evaluated as axially loaded using one of the effective slenderness
BL
195 ratios specified in Section E5(a) or E5(b), provided that the following
196 requirements are met:
197
PU
198 (1) Members are loaded at the ends in compression through the same one leg.
199 (2) Members are attached by welding or by connections with a minimum of two
200 bolts.
201 (3) There are no intermediate transverse loads.
202 (4) Lc r as determined in this section does not exceed 200.
203 (5) For unequal leg angles, the ratio of long leg width to short leg width is less
204 than 1.7.
205
206 Single-angle members that do not meet these requirements or the requirements
207 described in Section E5(a) or (b) shall be evaluated for combined axial load and
208 flexure using the provisions of Chapter H.
209 (a) For angles that are individual members or are web members of planar trusses
210 with adjacent web members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or
211 chord
212 (1) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected through the longer
213 leg

E-7
L
214 (i) When ≤ 80
ra
Lc L
215 = 72 + 0.75 (E5-1)
r ra
L
216 (ii) When > 80
ra
217
Lc L
218 = 32 + 1.25 (E5-2)
r ra
219 (2) For unequal-leg angles connected through the shorter leg, Lc r from
Equations E5-1 and E5-2 shall be increased by adding 4 ( bl bs ) – 1 , but
2
220
 
221 Lc r of the members shall not be taken as less than 0.95L rz .
222
223 (b) For angles that are web members of box or space trusses with adjacent web
20 NE
224 members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or chord
225 (1) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected through the longer
20 O
226 leg
L
3, W
227 (i) When ≤ 75
ra
E
Lc L
228 = 60 + 0.8 (E5-3)
ST I
r ra
U EV
L
229 (ii) When > 75
ra
G R
Lc L
230 = 45 + (E5-4)
r ra
AU IC
231
232 (2) For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than 1.7 and connected
BL
233 through the shorter leg, Lc r from Equations E5-3 and E5-4 shall be
increased by adding 6 ( bl bs ) –1 , but Lc r of the member shall not be
2
234
 
PU
235 taken as less than 0.82L/rz

236
237 where
238 L = length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, in. (mm)
239 Lc = effective length of the member for buckling about the minor axis, in. (mm)
240 bl = length of longer leg of angle, in. (mm)
241 bs = length of shorter leg of angle, in. (mm)
242 ra = radius of gyration about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg, in.
243 (mm)
244 rz = radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm)
245
246 E6. BUILT-UP MEMBERS
247
248 1. Compressive Strength
249
250 This section applies to built-up members composed of two shapes either (a)
251 interconnected by bolts or welds or (b) with at least one open side interconnected
252 by perforated cover plates or lacing with tie plates. The end connection shall be

E-8
253 welded or connected by means of pretensioned bolts with Class A or B faying

254 surfaces.
255 User Note: It is acceptable to design a bolted end connection of a built-up
256 compression member for the full compressive load with bolts in bearing and bolt
257 design based on the shear strength; however, the bolts must be pretensioned. In
258 built-up compression members, such as double-angle struts in trusses, a small
259 relative slip between the elements can significantly reduce the compressive
260 strength of the strut. Therefore, the connection between the elements at the ends of
261 built-up members should be designed to resist slip.
262
263 The nominal compressive strength of built-up members composed of two shapes
264 that are interconnected by bolts or welds shall be determined in accordance with
265 Sections E3, E4, or E7, subject to the following modification. In lieu of more
266 accurate analysis, if the buckling mode involves relative deformations that produce
267 shear forces in the connectors between individual shapes, Lc r is replaced by
268 ( Lc r )m , determined as follows:
20 NE
269 (a) For intermediate connectors that are bolted snug-tight
20 O
270
2 2
 Lc   Lc   a 
3, W
271   =   +  (E6-1)
 m
r  r o  ri 
E
272
273
ST I
U EV
274 (b) For intermediate connectors that are welded or are connected by means of
275 pretensioned bolts with Class A or B faying surfaces
G R
a
276 (1) When ≤ 40
ri
AU IC
 Lc   Lc 
277   =  (E6-2a)
BL
 r  m  r o
278
PU
a
279 (2) When > 40
ri
2 2
 Lc   Lc   K i a 
280   =   +  (E6-2b)
 m
r  r o  ri 
281
282 where
 Lc 
283   = modified slenderness ratio of built-up member
 r m
 Lc 
284   = slenderness ratio of built-up member acting as a unit in the
 r o
285 buckling direction being addressed
286 Lc = effective length of built-up member, in. (mm)
287
288 Ki = 0.50 for angles back-to-back
289 = 0.75 for channels back-to-back
290 = 0.86 for all other cases
E-9
291 a = distance between connectors, in. (mm)

292 ri = minimum radius of gyration of individual component, in. (mm)
293
294 2. General Requirements
295
296 Built-up members shall meet the following requirements:
297 (a) Individual components of compression members composed of two or more
298 shapes shall be connected to one another at intervals, a, such that the
299 slenderness ratio, a ri , of each of the component shapes between the fasteners
300 does not exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the
301 built-up member. The minimum radius of gyration, ri, shall be used in
302 computing the slenderness ratio of each component part.
303 (b) At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on base plates or
304 finished surfaces, all components in contact with one another shall be
305 connected by a weld having a length not less than the maximum width of the
306 member or by bolts spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters apart
20 NE
307 for a distance equal to 1-1/2 times the maximum width of the member.
308 Along the length of built-up compression members between the end
20 O
309 connections required in the foregoing, longitudinal spacing of intermittent
310 welds or bolts shall be adequate to provide the required strength. For
3, W
311 limitations on the longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements in
312 continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape, or two plates, see Section
E
313 J3.5. Where a component of a built-up compression member consists of an
314 outside plate, the maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the
ST I
U EV
315 thinner outside plate times 0.75 E / Fy , nor 12 in. (300 mm), when
316 intermittent welds are provided along the edges of the components or when
G R
317 fasteners are provided on all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are
318 staggered, the maximum spacing of fasteners on each gage line shall not
AU IC
319 exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate times 1.12 E / Fy nor 18 in.
320 (460 mm).
BL
321 (c) Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be
322 provided with continuous cover plates perforated with a succession of access
PU
323 openings. The unsupported width of such plates at access openings, as defined
324 in Section B4.1, is assumed to contribute to the available strength provided the
325 following requirements are met:
326 (1) The width-to-thickness ratio shall conform to the limitations of Section
327 B4.1.
328 User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting width-to-thickness ratio
329 for Case 7 in Table B4.1a with the width, b, taken as the transverse
330 distance between the nearest lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is
331 taken at the widest hole. In lieu of this approach, the limiting width-to-
332 thickness ratio may be determined through analysis.
333 (2) The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of hole shall not
334 exceed 2.
335 (3) The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less
336 than the transverse distance between nearest lines of connecting fasteners
337 or welds.
338 (4) The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a minimum radius of 1-
339 1/2 in. (38 mm).

E-10
340 (d) As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing with tie plates is permitted
341 at each end and at intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates
342 shall be as near the ends as practicable. In members providing available
343 strength, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance
344 between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of
345 the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than one-half
346 of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of
347 the distance between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the
348 segments of the members. In welded construction, the welding on each line
349 connecting a tie plate shall total not less than one-third the length of the plate.
350 In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall
351 be not more than six diameters and the tie plates shall be connected to each
352 segment by at least three fasteners.
353 (e) Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or other shapes employed as
354 lacing, shall be so spaced that L r of the flange element included between
355 their connections shall not exceed three-fourths times the governing
356 slenderness ratio for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to
20 NE
357 provide a shearing strength normal to the axis of the member equal to 2% of
358 the available compressive strength of the member. For lacing bars arranged in
20 O
359 single systems, L r shall not exceed 140. For double lacing, this ratio shall
360 not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at the intersections. For
3, W
361 lacing bars in compression, L is permitted to be taken as the unsupported
362 length of the lacing bar between welds or fasteners connecting it to the
E
363 components of the built-up member for single lacing, and 70% of that distance
364 for double lacing.
ST I
U EV
365 User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall
366 preferably be not less than 60º for single lacing and 45º for double lacing.
367 When the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is
G R
368 more than 15 in. (380 mm), the lacing should preferably be double or made of
369 angles.
AU IC
370 For additional spacing requirements, see Section J3.5.

BL
371
372 E7. MEMBERS WITH SLENDER ELEMENTS
PU
373
374 This section applies to slender-element compression members, as defined in
375 Section B4.1 for elements in axial compression.
376
377 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the lowest value based on the
378 applicable limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
379 torsional buckling in interaction with local buckling.
380
381 Pn = Fn Ae (E7-1)
382 where
383 Ae = summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on reduced
384 effective widths, be, de or he, or the area as given by Equations E7-6 or
385 E7-7, in.2 (mm2)
386 Fn = nominal stress determined in accordance with Section E3 or E4, ksi
387 (MPa). For single angles, determine Fn in accordance with Section E3
388 only.
389
390 User Note: The effective area, Ae, may be determined by deducting from the gross
391 area, Ag, the reduction in area of each slender element determined as ( b – be ) t .

E-11
392
393 1. Slender Element Members Excluding Round HSS
394
395 The effective width, be, (for tees, this is de; for webs, this is he) for slender
396 elements is determined as follows:
397
Fy
398 (a) When λ ≤ λ r
Fn
399 be = b (E7-2)
400
Fy
401 (b) When λ > λ r
Fn
402
 F  Fel
403 be = b  1 − c1 el  (E7-3)
 Fn  Fn
20 NE
404
405 where
406 b = width of the element (for tees this is d; for webs this is h), in. (mm)
20 O
407 c1 = effective width imperfection adjustment factor determined from Table E7.1
1 − 1 − 4c1
3, W
408 c2 = (E7-4)
2c1
E
409 λ = width-to-thickness ratio for the element as defined in Section B4.1
410 λr = limiting width-to-thickness ratio as defined in Table B4.1a
ST I
U EV
2
 λ 
411 Fel =  c2 r  Fy (E7-5)
 λ 
G R
412 = elastic local buckling stress determined according to Equation E7-5 or an

413 elastic local buckling analysis, ksi (MPa)
AU IC
414
Table E7.1
BL
Effective Width Imperfection Adjustment Factors,

c1 and c2
PU
Case Slender Element c1 c2

(a) Stiffened elements except walls of square and rectangular HSS 0.18 1.31
(b) Walls of square and rectangular HSS 0.20 1.38
(c) All other elements 0.22 1.49
415
416 2. Round HSS
417
418 The effective area, Ae, is determined as follows:
419
D E
420 (a) When ≤ 0.11
t Fy
421
422 Ae = Ag (E7-6)
423
E D E
424 (b) When 0.11 < < 0.45
Fy t Fy
425

E-12
 0.038 E 2
426 Ae =  +  Ag (E7-7)
 Fy ( D / t ) 3 
427
428 where
429 D = outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm)
430 t = thickness of wall, in. (mm)
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

F-1
1
2 CHAPTER F
3 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

4
5 This chapter applies to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis.
6 For simple bending, the member is loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that
7 passes through the shear center or is restrained against twisting at load points and
8 supports.
9
11
12 F1. General Provisions
13 F2. Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent
14 about Their Major Axis
15 F3. Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Compact Webs and
20 NE
16 Noncompact or Slender Flanges Bent about Their Major Axis
17 F4. Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent
18 about Their Major Axis
20 O
19 F5. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with
20 Slender Webs Bent about Their Major Axis
3, W
21 F6. I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about Their Minor Axis
22 F7. Square and Rectangular HSS and Box Sections
E
23 F8. Round HSS
24 F9. Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry
ST I
U EV
25 F10. Single Angles

26 F11. Rectangular Bars and Rounds
27 F12. Unsymmetrical Shapes
G R
28 F13. Proportions of Beams and Girders

29
AU IC
31 • Chapter G Design provisions for shear
BL
32 • H1–H3 Members subject to biaxial flexure or to combined flexure and

33 axial force
34 • H3 Members subject to flexure and torsion
PU
35 • Appendix 3 Members subject to fatigue

36
37 For guidance in determining the appropriate sections of this chapter to apply, Table
38 User Note F1.1 may be used.
39

F-2
40
TABLE USER NOTE F1.1
Selection Table for the Application
of Chapter F Sections
Section in Cross Flange Web Limit
Chapter F Section Slenderness Slenderness States
F2 C C Y, LTB
F3 NC, S C LTB, FLB
CFY,LTB,
F4 C, NC, S C, NC
20 NE
FLB, TFY
20 O
CFY,LTB,
F5 C, NC, S S
FLB, TFY
3, W
E
F6 C, NC, S N/A Y, FLB
ST I
U EV
Y, FLB,
F7 C, NC, S C, NC, S
G R
WLB, LTB
AU IC
F8 N/A N/A Y, LB
BL
Y, LTB,
F9 C, NC, S N/A
FLB, WLB
PU
Y, LTB,
F10 N/A N/A
LLB
F11 N/A N/A Y, LTB
Unsymmetrical
shapes, All limit
F12 N/A N/A
other than single states
angles
Y = yielding, CFY = compression flange yielding, LTB = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB =
flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY = tension flange yielding, LLB = leg
local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = noncompact, S = slender, N/A = not
applicable
41

F-3
42 F1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

43
44 The design flexural strength, φbMn, and the allowable flexural strength,
45 Mn/Ωb, shall be determined as follows:
46 (a) For all provisions in this chapter
47 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
48
49 and the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined according to
50 Sections F2 through F13.
51
52 (b) The provisions in this chapter are based on the assumption that points of
53 support for beams and girders are restrained against rotation about their
54 longitudinal axis.
55
56 (c) For singly symmetric members in single curvature and all doubly
57 symmetric members
20 NE
58
59 The lateral-torsional buckling modification factor, Cb, for nonuniform
60 moment diagrams when both ends of the segment are braced is deter-
20 O
61 mined as follows:
62
3, W
12.5M max
63 Cb = (F1-1)
2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C
E
64 where
ST I
65 Mmax = absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced sement,

U EV
66 kip-in. (N-mm)
67 MA = absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced
68 segment, kip-in. (N-mm)
G R
69 MB = absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced seg-

70 ment, kip-in. (N-mm)
AU IC
71 MC = absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the un-

72 braced segment, kip-in. (N-mm)
BL
73
74 User Note: For doubly symmetric members with no transverse loading
PU
75 between brace points, Equation F1-1 reduces to 1.0 for the case of equal
76 end moments of opposite sign (uniform moment), 2.27 for the case of
77 equal end moments of the same sign (reverse curvature bending), and to
78 1.67 when one end moment equals zero. For singly symmetric members, a
79 more detailed analysis for Cb is presented in the Commentary. The
80 Commentary provides additional equations for Cb that provide improved
81 characterization of the effects of a variety of member boundary conditions.
82
83 For cantilevers where warping is prevented at the support and where the
84 free end is unbraced, Cb = 1.0.
85
86 (d) In singly symmetric members subject to reverse curvature bending, the
87 lateral-torsional buckling strength shall be checked for both flanges. The
88 available flexural strength shall be greater than or equal to the maximum
89 required moment causing compression within the flange under consider-
90 ation.
91
92 F2. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC COMPACT I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND
93 CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
94

F-4
95 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members and channels

96 bent about their major axis, having compact webs and compact flanges as
97 defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
98
99 User Note: For Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M, C,
100 and MC shapes except W21×48, W14×99, W14×90, W12×65, W10×12,
101 W8×31, W8×10, W6×15, W6×9, W6×8.5, and M4×6 have compact flanges;
102 For Fy < 70 ksi (485 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M, HP, C, and MC
103 shapes have compact webs.
104 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained
105 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional
106 buckling.
107 1. Yielding
108
109 M n = M p = Fy Z x (F2-1)
20 NE
110
111 where
112 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
20 O
113 (MPa)
114 Zx = plastic section modulus about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
115
3, W
116 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
E
117 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not
ST I
118 apply.
U EV
119 (b) When Lp < Lb ≤ Lr

G R
  Lb − L p  
120 M n = Cb  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x )   ≤ M p (F2-2)
  Lr − L p  
AU IC
121 (c) When Lb > Lr

BL
122 M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p (F2-3)

123 where
124 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral
PU
125 displacement of the compression flange or braced against twist

126 of the cross section, in. (mm)
2
Cb π2 E Jc  Lb 
127 Fcr = 1 + 0.078 (F2-4)
2
 Lb  S x ho  rts 
r 
 ts 
128 = critical stress, ksi (MPa)
130 J = torsional constant, in.4 (mm4)
131 Sx = elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
132 ho = distance between the flange centroids, in. (mm)
133
134 User Note: The square root term in Equation F2-4 may be conservatively
135 taken equal to 1.0.
136
137 User Note: Equations F2-3 and F2-4 provide identical solutions to the
138 following expression for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly symmetric
139 sections that has been presented in past editions of this Specification:

F-5
2
π  πE 
140 M cr = Cb EI y GJ +   I y Cw
Lb  Lb 
141 The advantage of Equations F2-3 and F2-4 is that the form is very similar
142 to the expression for lateral-torsional buckling of singly symmetric
143 sections given in Equations F4-4 and F4-5.
144
145 Lp, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding,
146 in. (mm), is:
E
147 L p = 1.76ry (F2-5)
Fy
148
149 Lr, the limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
150 torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:
151
20 NE
2 2
E Jc  Jc   0.7 Fy 
152 Lr = 1.95rts +   + 6.76   (F2-6)
0.7 Fy S x ho  S x ho   E 
20 O
153 where
3, W
E
I y Cw
155 rts2 = (F2-7)
ST I
Sx
U EV
156 and the coefficient c is determined as follows:

157 (1) For doubly symmetric I-shapes
G R
158
AU IC
159 c=1 (F2-8a)

160
BL
161 (2) For channels
ho Iy
PU
162 c= (F2-8b)
2 Cw
163 where
164 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
165
166 User Note:
I y ho2
167 For doubly symmetric I-shapes with rectangular flanges, Cw = , and
4
168 thus, Equation F2-7 becomes
I y ho
169 rts2 =
2S x
170 rts may be approximated accurately to conservatively as the radius of
171 gyration of the compression flange plus one-sixth of the web:
bf
172 rts =
 1 htw 
12 1 + 
 6 bf t f 

F-6
173
174 F3. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT
175 WEBS AND NONCOMPACT OR SLENDER FLANGES BENT
176 ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
177
178 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members bent about their
179 major axis having compact webs and noncompact or slender flanges as
180 defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
181
182 User Note: The following shapes have noncompact flanges for Fy = 50 ksi
183 (345 MPa): W21×48, W14×99, W14×90, W12×65, W10×12, W8×31,
184 W8×10, W6×15, W6×9, W6×8.5, and M4×6. All other ASTM A6 W, S, and
185 M shapes have compact flanges for Fy ≤ 50 ksi (345 MPa).
186
188 according to the limit states of lateral-torsional buckling and compression
20 NE
189 flange local buckling.
190
192
20 O
For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section F2.2 shall apply.
3, W
193 2. Compression Flange Local Buckling
E
194
ST I
195 (a) For sections with noncompact flanges

U EV
 λ − λ pf 
196 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x )   (F3-1)
 λ rf − λ pf 
G R
197
AU IC
198 (b) For sections with slender flanges

199
BL
0.9 Ek c S x
200 Mn = (F3-2)
λ2
PU
201 where
4
202 kc = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for
h tw
203 calculation purposes
204 h = distance as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
bf
2t
205 λ = f
206 bf = width of the flange, in. (mm)
207 tf = thickness of the flange, in. (mm)
208 λpf = λp is the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
209 defined in Table B4.1b
210 λrf = λr is the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange as
212
213 F4. OTHER I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT OR
214 NONCOMPACT WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
215

F-7
216 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members bent about their
217 major axis with noncompact webs and singly symmetric I-shaped members
218 with webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges, bent about their major
219 axis, with compact or noncompact webs, as defined in Section B4.1 for
220 flexure.
221
222 User Note: I-shaped members for which this section is applicable may be
223 designed conservatively using Section F5.
224
225 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained
226 according to the limit states of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
227 buckling, compression flange local buckling, and tension flange yielding.
228
229 1. Compression Flange Yielding
230
231 Mn = RpcMyc (F4-1)
232 where
20 NE
233 Myc = FySxc = yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm)
234 Rpc = web plastification factor, determined in accordance with Section
20 O
235 F4.2(c)(6)
236 Sxc = elastic section modulus referred to compression flange, in.3 (mm3)
237
3, W
E
239 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
ST I
U EV

  Lb − L p 
241 M n = Cb  R pc M yc − ( R pc M yc − FL S xc )    ≤ R pc M yc (F4-2)
G R
  Lr − L p  
AU IC
243 M n = Fcr S xc ≤ R pc M yc (F4-3)

BL
244 where
245 (1) Myc, the yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm), is:
PU
246 Myc =FySxc (F4-4)

247
248 (2) Fcr, the critical stress, ksi (MPa), is:
249
2
Cb π2 E J  Lb 
250 Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078   (F4-5)
 Lb  S xc ho  rt 
 r 
 t 
251
I yc
252 For ≤ 0.23 , J shall be taken as zero,
Iy
253
254 where
255 Iyc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-
256 axis, in.4 (mm4)
257

F-8
258 (3) FL, nominal compression flange stress above which the inelastic
259 buckling limit states apply, ksi (MPa), is determined as follows:
260
S xt
261 (i) When ≥ 0.7
S xc
262 FL = 0.7 Fy (F4-6a)
263
S xt
264 (ii) When < 0.7
S xc
S xt
265 FL = Fy ≥ 0.5 Fy (F4-6b)
S xc
266 where
267 Sxt = elastic section modulus referred to tension flange, in.3 (mm3)
268
269 (4) Lp, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yieling,
270 in. (mm) is:
20 NE
E
271 L p = 1.1rt (F4-7)
Fy
20 O
272
273 (5) Lr, the limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
3, W
274 torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:
275
E
2 2
ST I
E J  J   FL 
U EV
276 Lr = 1.95rt +   + 6.76  E  (F4-8)

FL S xc ho  S xc ho   
277
G R
278 (6) Rpc, the web plastification factor, is determined as follows:

279 (i) When I yc I y > 0.23
AU IC
hc
280 (a) When ≤ λ pw
BL
tw
Mp
281 R pc = (F4-9a)
PU
M yc
hc
282 (b) When > λ pw
tw
 Mp  Mp  λ − λ pw   M p
283 R pc =  − − 1  ≤ (F4-9b)
 M yc  M yc  λ rw − λ pw   M yc
284
285 (ii) When I yc I y ≤ 0.23
286 Rpc = 1.0 (F4-10)
287
288 where
289 Mp = FyZx ≤ 1.6FySx
290 hc = twice the distance from the centroid to the following: the in-
291 side face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner
292 radius, for rolled shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the
293 compression flange or the inside face of the compression
294 flange when welds are used, for built-up sections, in. (mm)

F-9
hc
295 =
tw
296 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web
297 as defined in Table B4.1b
298 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact
299 web as defined in Table B4.1b
300
301 (7) rt, the effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling, in.
302 (mm), is determined as follows:
303 (i) For I-shapes with a rectangular compression flange
304
b fc
305 rt = (F4-11)
 1 
12  1 + aw 
 6 
306
307 where
20 NE
hc t w
308 aw = (F4-12)
b fc t fc
20 O
309 bfc = width of compression flange, in. (mm)
310 tfc = thickness of compression flange, in. (mm)
3, W
311 tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
312
E
313 (ii) For I-shapes with a channel cap or a cover plate attached to the
314 compression flange
ST I
U EV
315
316 rt = radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural
317 compression plus one-third of the web area in compres-
G R
318 sion due to application of major axis bending moment

319 alone, in. (mm)
AU IC
320
BL
322
323 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of local buckling does
324 not apply.
PU
325 (b) For sections with noncompact flanges

 λ− λ pf 
326 M n = R pc M yc − ( R pc M yc − FL S xc )   (F4-13)
327 (c) For sections with slender flanges
0.9 Ekc S xc
328 Mn = (F4-14)
λ2
329 where
330 FL is defined in Equations F4-6a and F4-6b
331 Rpc is the web plastification factor, determined by Equation F4-9a, F4-
332 9b, or F4-10
4
333 kc = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76
h tw
334 for calculation purposes
b fc
335 λ =
2t fc

F-10
336 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
338 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange
340
341 4. Tension Flange Yielding
342
343 (a) When Sxt ≥ Sxc, the limit state of tension flange yielding does not apply.
344
345 (b) When Sxt < Sxc
346
347 Mn = RptMyt (F4-15)
348 where
349 M yt = Fy Sxt = yield moment in the tension flange, kip-in. (N-mm)
350
351 Rpt, the web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange
352 yielding limit state, is determined as follows:
20 NE
353
354 (1) When Iyc/Iy > 0.23
20 O
hc
≤ λ pw
355 t
(i) When w
3, W
Mp
356 R pt = (F4-16a)
M yt
E
ST I
hc
U EV
357 (ii) When > λ pw

tw
Mp  Mp   λ − λ pw  M p
G R
358 R pt =  −  − 1     ≤ (F4-16b)
 M yt  M yt   λ rw − λ pw   M yt
AU IC
359
BL
360 (2) When Iyc/Iy ≤ 0.23

361 Rpt = 1.0 (F4-17)
PU
362 where
363 Mp = FyZx ≤ 1.6FySx
h
364 λ= c
tw
365 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web as
367 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact web
369
370 F5. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED
371 MEMBERS WITH SLENDER WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR
372 AXIS
373
374 This section applies to doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped
375 members with slender webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges and bent
376 about their major axis as defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
377

F-11
379 according to the limit states of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
380 buckling, compression flange local buckling, and tension flange yielding.
381
382 1. Compression Flange Yielding
383
384 M n = Rpg Fy S xc (F5-1)
385
387
388 M n = Rpg Fcr S xc (F5-2)
389 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
390
392
  Lb − L p  
Fcr = Cb  Fy − ( 0.3Fy )    ≤ Fy
20 NE
393 (F5-3)
  Lr − L p  
394
20 O
Cb π2 E
396 Fcr = ≤ Fy (F5-4)
3, W
2
 Lb 
 r 
 t 
E
397
ST I
U EV
398 where
399 Lp is defined by Equation F4-7
E
G R
πrt
0.7 Fy
400 Lr = (F5-5)
AU IC
401 rt = effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling as de-

402 fined in Section F4, in. (mm)
BL
403 Rpg, the bending strength reduction factor, is:

404
 hc E 
PU
aw
405 R pg = 1 −  − 5.7  ≤ 1.0 (F5-6)
1, 200 + 300aw  tw Fy 
406
407 and
408 aw is defined by Equation F4-12, but shall not exceed 10
409
411 M n = Rpg Fcr S xc (F5-7)
412 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of compression flange
413 local buckling does not apply.
 λ− λ pf 
415 Fcr = Fy − ( 0.3Fy )   (F5-8)

F-12
0.9 Ekc
417 Fcr = 2 (F5-9)
 bf 
 
 2t f 
418 where
419 kc = 4 and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than
h tw
420 0.76 for calculation purposes
b fc
421 λ =
2t fc
426
427 4. Tension Flange Yielding
20 NE
428
429 (a) When Sxt ≥ Sxc, the limit state of tension flange yielding does not
430 apply.
20 O
431
432 (b) When Sxt < Sxc
3, W
433
Mn = Fy Sxt
E
434 (F5-10)
435
ST I
U EV
436 F6. I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR

437 MINOR AXIS
438
G R
439 This section applies to I-shaped members and channels bent about their
440 minor axis.
AU IC
441
BL
443 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and flange local
444 buckling.
445
PU
446 1. Yielding
Mn = M p = Fy Z y ≤ 1.6Fy Sy
447 (F6-1)
448 where
449 Sy = elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3)
450 Zy = plastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3)
451
452 2. Flange Local Buckling
453 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of flange local
454 buckling does not apply.
455 User Note: For Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M,
456 C, and MC shapes except W21x48, W14x99, W14x90, W12x65,
457 W10x12, W8x31, W8x10, W6x15, W6x9, W6x8.5, and M4x6 have
458 compact flanges.

F-13
 λ − λ pf 
460 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S y )   (F6-2)
λ −λ
 rf pf 
462 M n = Fcr S y (F6-3)
463 where
0.70 E
464 Fcr = 2
(F6-4)
b
 
 tf 
465 b = for flanges of I-shaped members, half the full flange width, bf ;
466 for flanges of channels, the full nominal dimension of the
467 flange, in. (mm)
b
469 λ =
tf
20 NE
20 O
3, W
474
475 F7. SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR HSS AND BOX SECTIONS
E
476
ST I
477 This section applies to square and rectangular HSS, and box sections bent
U EV
478 about either axis, having compact, noncompact, or slender webs or flanges,
479 as defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
G R
481 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), flange local
AU IC
482 buckling, web local buckling, and lateral-torsional buckling under pure
483 flexure.
BL
484
485 1. Yielding
PU
486
487 M n = M p = Fy Z (F7-1)
488
489 where
490 Z = plastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3)
491
492 2. Flange Local Buckling
493
494 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange local buckling does not
495 apply.
497
 λ − λ pf 
498 M n = M p − ( M p − Fy S )  ≤Mp (F7-2)
499 where
500 S = elastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3)
501 b = width of compression flange as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)

F-14
b
503 λ =
tf
508
510
511 M n = Fy Se (F7-3)
512
513 where
514 Se = effective section modulus determined with the effective width,
515 be, of the compression flange taken as:
516
517 (1) For HSS
20 NE
518
E  0.38 E 
519 be = 1.92t f 1 −  ≤ b (F7-4)
20 O
Fy  b /tf Fy 
520
3, W
521 (2) For box sections
522
E
E  0.34 E 
ST I
523 be = 1.92t f 1 −  ≤ b (F7-5)

U EV
Fy  b/tf Fy 
524 3. Web Local Buckling
G R
525
526 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of web local buckling does not
AU IC
527 apply.
528 (b) For sections with noncompact webs
BL
529
530
 λ − λ pw 
PU
531 M n = M p − ( M p − Fy S )  ≤Mp (F7-6)

 λ rw − λ pw 
532
533 where
534 h = depth of web, as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
535 tw = thickness of the web, in. (mm)
h
536 λ =
tw
537 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web as
539 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact
540 web as defined in Table B4.1b
541
542 (c) For sections with slender webs and compact or noncompact flanges
543
544 M n = Rpg Fy S (F7-7)
545 where
546 Rpg is defined by Equation F5-6 with aw = 2htw ( bt f )
F-15
547
548 User Note: Box sections with slender webs and slender flanges are not
549 addressed in this Specification.
550
551 User Note: There are no HSS with slender webs.
552
554
555 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not
556 apply.
557
  Lb − L p  
559 M n = Cb  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x )   ≤ M p (F7-10)
  Lr − L p  
20 NE
JAg
561 M n = 2 ECb ≤Mp (F7-11)
Lb ry
20 O
562 where
564 Lp , the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding,
3, W
565 in. (mm), is:
566
E
JAg
ST I
567 L p = 0.13Ery (F7-12)

U EV
Mp
568
569 Lr, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic
G R
570 lateral-torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:

571
AU IC
JAg
572 Lr = 2 Ery (F7-13)
BL
0.7 Fy S x
573
PU
574 User Note: Lateral-torsional buckling will not occur in square sections or
575 sections bending about their minor axis. In HSS sizes, deflection will usually
576 control before there is a significant reduction in flexural strength due to
577 lateral-torsional buckling. The same is true for box sections, and lateral-
578 torsional buckling will usually only be a consideration for sections with high
579 depth-to-width ratios.
580
581 F8. ROUND HSS
0.45E
582 This section applies to round HSS having D/t ratios of less than .
Fy
584 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and local buckling.
585 1. Yielding
586 M n = M p = Fy Z (F8-1)
587
588 2. Local Buckling
589

F-16
590 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange local buckling does
591 not apply.
592
593 (b) For noncompact sections
 
 0.021E 
594 Mn =  + Fy  S (F8-2)
D
 
 t 
595 (c) For sections with slender walls
596
597 M n = Fcr S (F8-3)
598 where
0.33E
600 Fcr = (F8-4)
D
 
 t 
20 NE
601 t = design wall thickness of HSS member, in. (mm)
602
603 F9. TEES AND DOUBLE ANGLES LOADED IN THE PLANE OF
20 O
604 SYMMETRY
605
3, W
606 This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the plane of
607 symmetry.
E
ST I
609 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional

U EV
610 buckling, flange local buckling, and local buckling of tee stems and double
611 angle web legs.
G R
612
613 1. Yielding
614
AU IC
615 Mn = Mp (F9-1)
BL
616 where
617
618 (a) For tee stems and web legs in tension
PU
619
620 M p = Fy Z x ≤ 1.6M y (F9-2)
621
622 where
623 My = yield moment about the axis of bending, kip-in. (N-mm)
624 = FySx (F9-3)
625
626 (b) For tee stems in compression
627
628 Mp = My (F9-4)
629
630 (c) For double angles with web legs in compression
631
632 M p = 1.5M y (F9-5)
633
635
636 (a) For stems and web legs in tension

F-17
637
638 (1) When Lb ≤ Lp , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not
639 apply.
640
L p < Lb ≤ Lr
641 (2) When
 Lb − L p 
642 Mn = M p − (M p − M y )  (F9-6)
 Lr − L p 
643 (3) When Lb > Lr
644
645 M n = M cr (F9-7)
646 where
E
647 Lp = 1.76ry (F9-8)
Fy
 E  IyJ  Fy  dS
648 Lr = 1.95   2.36   x + 1 (F9-9)
20 NE
 y x
F S  E  J
649 Mcr =
1.95 E
(
I y J B + 1 + B2 ) (F9-10)
20 O
Lb
 d  Iy
3, W
650 B = 2.3   (F9-11)
 Lb  J
E
651 d = depth of tee or width of web leg in tension, in. (mm)
652
ST I
U EV
653 (b) For stems and web legs in compression anywhere along the unbraced
654 length, Mcr is given by Equation F9-10 with
655
G R
 d  Iy
656 B = −2.3   (F9-12)
 Lb  J
AU IC
657 where
658 d = depth of tee or width of web leg in compression, in. (mm)
BL
659
660 (1) For tee stems
PU
661
662 Mn = Mcr ≤ M y (F9-13)
663
664 (2) For double-angle web legs, Mn shall be determined using Equations
665 F10-2 and F10-3 with Mcr determined using Equation F9-10 and My
666 determined using Equation F9-3.
667
668 3. Flange Local Buckling of Tees and Double-Angle Legs
669
670 (a) For tee flanges
671 (1) For sections with a compact flange in flexural compression, the limit
672 state of flange local buckling does not apply.
673
674 (2) For sections with a noncompact flange in flexural compression
675
  λ − λ pf 
676 M n =  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S xc )    ≤ 1.6M y (F9-14)
  λ rf − λ pf  
677

F-18
678 (3) For sections with a slender flange in flexural compression

679
0.7 ES xc
680 Mn = 2
(F9-15)
 bf 
 
 2t f 
681
682 where
683 Sxc = elastic section modulus referred to the compression flange, in.3
684 (mm3)
bf
685 λ =
2t f
20 NE
690
691 (b) For double-angle flange legs
692
20 O
693 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for double angles with the flange legs
694 in compression shall be determined in accordance with Section F10.3,
695 with Sc referred to the compression flange.
3, W
696
697 4. Local Buckling of Tee Stems and Double-Angle Web Legs in Flexural
E
698 Compression
ST I
699
U EV
700 (a) For tee stems

701 M n = Fcr S x (F9-16)
G R
702
703 where
AU IC
704 Sx = elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
705
BL
706 Fcr, the critical stress, is determined as follows:

707
PU
d E
≤ 0.84
tw Fy
708 (1) When
709
710 Fcr = Fy (F9-17)
711
E d E
0.84 < ≤ 1.52
Fy tw Fy
712 (2) When
713
 d Fy 
714 Fcr = 1.43 − 0.515  Fy (F9-18)
 tw E 
 
715
d E
> 1.52
tw Fy
716 (3) When
717

F-19
1.52 E
718 Fcr = 2
(F9-19)
d
t 
 w
719
720 (b) For double-angle web legs
721
722 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for double angles with the web legs in
723 compression shall be determined in accordance with Section F10.3, with
724 Sc taken as the elastic section modulus.
725
726 F10. SINGLE ANGLES
727
728 This section applies to single angles with and without continuous lateral
729 restraint along their length.
730
731 Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length
20 NE
732 are permitted to be designed on the basis of geometric axis (x, y) bending.
733 Single angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length
734 shall be designed using the provisions for principal axis bending except
20 O
735 where the provision for bending about a geometric axis is permitted.
736 If the moment resultant has components about both principal axes, with or
3, W
737 without axial load, or the moment is about one principal axis and there is
738 axial load, the combined stress ratio shall be determined using the provi-
E
739 sions of Section H2.
ST I
740 User Note: For geometric axis design, use section properties computed
U EV
741 about the x- and y-axis of the angle, parallel and perpendicular to the legs.
742 For principal axis design, use section properties computed about the major
G R
743 and minor principal axes of the angle.

AU IC
745 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional

746 buckling, and leg local buckling.
BL
747 User Note: For bending about the minor principal axis, only the limit
748 states of yielding and leg local buckling apply.
PU
749 1. Yielding
750
751 Mn = 1.5My (F10-1)
752
754
755 For single angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the
756 length
My
757 (a) When ≤ 1.0
M cr
 My 
758 M n =  1.92 − 1.17  M y ≤ 1.5M y (F10-2)
 M cr 
 
My
759 (b) When > 1.0
M cr

F-20
 0.17 M cr 
760 M n =  0.92 −  M cr (F10-3)
 My 
 
761
762 where
763 Mcr, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, is determined as
764 follows:
765
766 (1) For bending about the major principal axis of single angles
767
9 EAg rz tCb  
2
 β r  β r
768 M cr = 1 +  4.4 w z  + 4.4 w z  (F10-4)
8 Lb   Lb t  Lb t 
 
769 where
770 Cb is computed using Equation F1-1 with a maximum value of 1.5
771 Ag = gross area of angle, in.2(mm2)
772 Lb = laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm)
20 NE
773 rz = radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm)
774 t = thickness of angle leg, in. (mm)
775 βw = section property for single angles about major principal axis,
20 O
776 in. (mm). βw is positive with short legs in compression and
777 negative with long legs in compression for unequal-leg an-
3, W
778 gles, and zero for equal-leg angles. If the long leg is in
779 compression anywhere along the unbraced length of the
E
780 member, the negative value of βw shall be used.

ST I
781
U EV
782 User Note: The equation for βw and values for common angle
783 sizes are listed in the Commentary.
G R
784
785 (2) For bending about one of the geometric axes of an equal-leg angle
786 with no axial compression
AU IC
787
788 (i) With no lateral-torsional restraint:
BL
789
790 (a) With maximum compression at the toe
PU
0.58 Eb 4 tCb  
2
 Lb t  
791 M cr = 1 + 0.88  2  − 1 (F10-5a)
Lb 2  b  
 
792 (b) With maximum tension at the toe
0.58Eb4tCb  
2
 1 + 0.88  b  + 1
Lt
793 M cr = (F10-5b)
Lb 2   b2  
 
794 where
795 My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment calculated
796 using the geometric section modulus.
797 b = width of leg, in. (mm)
798
799 (ii) With lateral-torsional restraint at the point of maximum
800 moment only:
801
802 Mcr shall be taken as 1.25 times Mcr computed using Equation
803 F10-5a or F10-5b.
804

F-21
805 My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated using the ge-
806 ometric section modulus.
807
808 User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single angles with their vertical leg
809 toe in compression, and having a span-to-depth ratio less than or equal to
2
1.64 E t Fy
810   − 1.4
Fy b E
811
812 3. Leg Local Buckling
813
814 The limit state of leg local buckling applies when the toe of the leg is in
815 compression.
816
817 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of leg local buckling does not apply.
818 (b) For sections with noncompact legs
20 NE
  b  Fy 
819 M n = Fy S c  2.43 − 1.72    (F10-6)
  t  E 
20 O
820 (c) For sections with slender legs
821
3, W
822 M n = Fcr S c (F10-7)
823 where
E
0.71E
824 Fcr = (F10-8)
ST I
2
b
U EV
t
 
825 Sc = elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the
G R
826 axis of bending, in.3 (mm3). For bending about one of the geometric
827 axes of an equal-leg angle with no lateral-torsional restraint, Sc shall be
AU IC
828 0.80 of the geometric axis section modulus.

829 b = full width of leg in compression, in. (mm)
BL
830
831 F11. RECTANGULAR BARS AND ROUNDS
832
PU
833 This section applies to rectangular bars bent about either geometric axis, and
834 rounds.
835
837 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional
838 buckling.
839
840 1. Yielding
841
842 For rectangular bars
843 Mn = M p = Fy Z ≤ 1.5Fy Sx (F11-1)
844
845 For rounds
846 Mn = M p = Fy Z ≤ 1.6Fy Sx (F11-2)
847
848
850

F-22
Lb d 0.08 E
851 (a) For rectangular bars with ≤ bent about their major axis,
t2 Fy
852 rectangular bars bent about their minor axis, and rounds, the limit state of
853 lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
854
0.08 E Lb d 1.9 E
855 (b) For rectangular bars with < 2 ≤ bent about their major
Fy t Fy
856 axis
857
  L d  Fy 
858 M n = Cb 1.52 − 0.274  b2   M y ≤ M p (F11-3)
  t  E
859 where
860 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral
861 displacement of the compression region, or between points
862 braced to prevent twist of the cross section, in. (mm)
863
20 NE
Lb d 1.9 E
864 (c) For rectangular bars with > bent about their major axis
t2 Fy
20 O
865 M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p (F11-4)
866 where
3, W
1.9 ECb
867 Fcr = (F11-5)
Lb d
E
t2
ST I
U EV
868
869 F12. UNSYMMETRICAL SHAPES
870
G R
871 This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes except single angles.
872
AU IC
874 according to the limit states of yielding (yield moment), lateral-torsional
BL
875 buckling, and local buckling where

876
877 M n = Fn S min (F12-1)
PU
878 where
879 Smin = minimum elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending,
880 in.3 (mm3)
881
882 User Note: The design provisions within this section can be overly
883 conservative for certain shapes, unbraced lengths, and moment diagrams. To
884 improve economy, the provisions of Appendix 1.3 are recommended as an
885 alternative for determining the nominal flexural strength of members of
886 unsymmetrical shape.
887
888 1. Yielding
889
890 Fn = Fy (F12-2)
891
893
894 Fn = Fcr ≤ Fy (F12-3)
895 where

F-23
896 Fcr = lateral-torsional buckling stress for the section as determined by

897 analysis, ksi (MPa)
898
899 User Note: In the case of Z-shaped members, it is recommended that Fcr be
900 taken as 0.5Fcr of a channel with the same flange and web properties.
901
902 3. Local Buckling
903
904 Fn = Fcr ≤ Fy (F12-4)
905 where
906 Fcr = local buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi
907 (MPa)
908
909 F13. PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS
910
911 1. Strength Reductions for Members with Holes in the Tension Flange
912
20 NE
913 This section applies to rolled or built-up shapes and cover-plated beams with
914 holes, proportioned on the basis of flexural strength of the gross section.
20 O
915 In addition to the limit states specified in other sections of this Chapter, the
916 nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be limited according to the limit state of
3, W
917 tensile rupture of the tension flange.
(a) When Fu Afn ≥ Yt Fy Afg , the limit state of tensile rupture does not apply.
E
918
919
ST I
U EV
920 (b) When Fu Afn < Yt Fy Afg , the nominal flexural strength, M n , at the
921 location of the holes in the tension flange shall not be taken greater than
G R
922
Fu A fn
923 Mn = Sx (F13-1)
AU IC
Afg
924 where
BL
925 Afg = gross area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section
926 B4.3a, in.2 (mm2)
PU
927 Afn = net area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section
928 B4.3b, in.2 (mm2)
929 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa)
930 Sx = minimum elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3
931 (mm3)
932 Yt = 1.0 for Fy/Fu ≤ 0.8
933 = 1.1 otherwise
934
935 2. Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped Members
936
937 Singly symmetric I-shaped members shall satisfy the following limit:
938
I yc
939 0.1 ≤ ≤ 0.9 (F13-2)
Iy
940
941 I-shaped members with slender webs shall also satisfy the following limits:
942
a
943 (a) When ≤ 1.5
h

F-24
944
h E
945 t  = 12.0 (F13-3)
 w max Fy
946
a
947 (b) When > 1.5
h
948
h 0.40 E
949 t  = (F13-4)
 w  max Fy
950
951 where
952 a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm)
953
954 In unstiffened girders, h/tw shall not exceed 260. The ratio of 2 times the web
955 area in compression to the compression flange area, aw, as defined by
956 Equation F4-12, shall not exceed 10.
20 NE
957
958 3. Cover Plates
20 O
959
960 For members with cover plates, the following provisions apply:
961
3, W
962 (a) Flanges of welded beams or girders are permitted to be varied in
963 thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the use of cover
E
964 plates.
ST I
965
U EV
966 (b) High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to web, or cover plate to
967 flange, shall be proportioned to resist the total horizontal shear resulting
G R
968 from the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of
969 these bolts or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the intensity of
AU IC
970 the shear.

971
972 (c) However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed the maximum
BL
973 specified for compression or tension members in Sections E6 or D4,

974 respectively. Bolts or welds connecting flange to web shall also be
PU
975 proportioned to transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the
976 flange, unless provision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing.
977
978 (d) Partial-length cover plates shall be extended beyond the theoretical
979 cutoff point and the extended portion shall be attached to the beam or
980 girder by high-strength bolts in a slip-critical connection or fillet welds.
981 The attachment shall, at the applicable strength given in Sections J2.2,
982 J3.8 or B3.11, develop the cover plate’s portion of the flexural strength
983 in the beam or girder at the theoretical cutoff point.
984
985 (e) For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate
986 termination to the beam or girder shall be continuous welds along both
987 edges of the cover plate in the length a′, defined in the following, and
988 shall develop the cover plate’s portion of the available strength of the
989 beam or girder at the distance a′ from the end of the cover plate.
990
991 (1) When there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than three-fourths
992 of the plate thickness across the end of the plate
993
994 a′ = w (F13-5)

F-25
995
996 where
997 w = width of cover plate, in. (mm)
998
999 (2) When there is a continuous weld smaller than three-fourths of the
1000 plate thickness across the end of the plate
1001
1002 a′ = 1.5w (F13-6)
1003
1004 (3) When there is no weld across the end of the plate
1005
1006 a′ = 2w (F13-7)
1007
1008 4. Built-Up Beams
1009
1010 Where two or more beams or channels are used side by side to form a flexural
1011 member, they shall be connected together in compliance with Section E6.2.
20 NE
1012 When concentrated loads are carried from one beam to another or distributed
1013 between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to distribute the
1014 load shall be welded or bolted between the beams.
20 O
1015
1016
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

G-1
1 CHAPTER G
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

3
4
5 This chapter addresses webs of singly or doubly symmetric members subject to
6 shear in the plane of the web, single angles and HSS subject to shear, and shear in
7 the weak direction of singly or doubly symmetric shapes.
9 G1. General Provisions
10 G2. I-Shaped Members and Channels
11 G3. Single Angles and Tees
12 G4. Rectangular HSS, Box Sections, and other Singly and Doubly
13 Symmetric Members
14 G5. Round HSS
20 NE
15 G6. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Minor-
16 Axis Shear
17 G7. Beams and Girders with Web Openings
20 O
18
3, W
20 • H3.3 Unsymmetric sections
E
21 • J4.2 Shear strength of connecting elements
22 • J10.6 Web panel zone shear
ST I
U EV
23
24 G1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
25
G R
26 The design shear strength, φvVn, and the allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, shall
27 be determined as follows:
AU IC
28
29 (a) For all provisions in this chapter except Section G2.1(a)
BL
30
31 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)
32
PU
33 (b) The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall be determined according to Sections
34 G2 through G7.
35
36 G2. I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS
37
38 This section addresses the determination of shear strength for I-shaped
39 members and channels. Section G2.1 is applicable for webs with and without
40 transverse stiffeners. Alternatively, Sections G2.2 and G2.3 may be used for
41 webs with transverse stiffeners. Transverse stiffeners, or components
42 providing equivalent restraint of out-of-plane deformation of the web, shall be
43 provided at the member ends and at supports.
44
45 1. Shear Strength of Webs without Tension Field Action
46
47 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is:
48
49 Vn = 0.6FyAwCv1 (G2-1)
50
51 where

G-2
52 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
53 (MPa)
54 Aw = area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
55
56 (a) For webs of rolled I-shaped members with h tw ≤ 2.24 E Fy
57 φv = 1.00 (LRFD) Ωv= 1.50 (ASD)
58
59 and
60
61 Cv1 = 1.0 (G2-2)
62
63 where
65 h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in.
66 (mm)
68
20 NE
69 User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S, and HP shapes except
70 W44x230, W40x149, W36x135, W33x118, W30x90, W24x55,
71 W16x26, and W12x14 meet the criteria stated in Section G2.1(a) for Fy
20 O
72 = 50 ksi (345 MPa).
73
3, W
74 (b) For all other I-shaped members and channels
75
E
76 (1) The web shear strength coefficient, Cv1, is determined as follows:
ST I
77
U EV
78 (i) When h / tw ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy

79
G R
80 Cv1 = 1.0 (G2-3)

81
AU IC
82 where
83 h = for built-up welded sections, the clear distance be-
BL
84 tween flanges, in. (mm)

85 = for built-up bolted sections, the distance between fas-
86 tener lines, in. (mm)
PU
87
88 (ii) When h tw > 1.10 kv E / Fy
89
1.10 kv E / Fy
90 Cv1 = (G2-4)
h / tw
91
92 (2) The web plate shear buckling coefficient, kv, is determined as fol-
93 lows:
94 (i) For webs without transverse stiffeners
95
96 kv = 5.34
97
98 (ii) For webs with transverse stiffeners
5
99 kv = 5 + (G2-5)
( a / h )2
100 = 5.34 when a / h > 3.0
101 where

G-3
102 a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm)

103
104 User Note: Cv1= 1.0 for all ASTM A6 W, S, M, and HP shapes except
105 M12.5x12.4, M12.5x11.6, M12x11.8, M12x10.8, M12x10, M10x8, and
106 M10x7.5, when Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa).
107
108 2. Shear Strength of Interior Web Panels with a h ≤ 3 Considering Tension
109 Field Action
110
111 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is determined as follows:
112
113 (a) When h tw ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy
114 Vn = 0.6Fy Aw (G2-6)
115
116 (b) When h / tw > 1.10 kv E / Fy
20 NE
117 (1) When 2 Aw ( Afc + Aft ) ≤ 2.5 , h b fc ≤ 6.0 and h b ft ≤ 6.0
 
20 O
1 − Cv 2
118 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw Cv 2 +  (G2-7)
 2 
 1.15 1 + ( a / h ) 
3, W
119
120 (2) Otherwise
E
121
ST I
 
U EV
 1 − Cv 2 
122 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw Cv 2 +  (G2-8)
 1.15  a / h + 1 + ( a / h )  
2
G R
   
123
AU IC
124 where
125 The web shear buckling coefficient, Cv2, is determined as follows:
BL
126
127 (i) When h / t w ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy
PU
128
129 Cv2 = 1.0 (G2-9)
130
131 (ii) When 1.10 kv E / Fy < h / tw ≤ 1.37 kv E / Fy
132
1.10 kv E / Fy
133 Cv2 = (G2-10)
h / tw
134
135 (iii) When h / t w > 1.37 kv E / Fy
136
1.51kv E
137 Cv2 = 2
(G2-11)
( h / tw ) Fy
138
139 Afc = area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2)
140 Aft = area of tension flange, in.2 (mm2)
141 bfc = width of compression flange, in. (mm)
142 bft = width of tension flange, in. (mm)

G-4
143 kv is as defined in Section G2.1

144
145 The nominal shear strength is permitted to be taken as the larger of the values
146 from Sections G2.1 and G2.2.
147
148 User Note: Section G2.1 may predict a higher strength for members that do
149 not meet the requirements of Section G2.2(b)(1).
150
151 3. Shear Strength of End Web Panels with a/h ≤ 3 Considering Tension
152 Field Action
153
154 (a) The nominal shear strength for I-shaped members with equal flange
155 areas in the end panel, Vn, is
156
  
1 − Cv 2
157 Vn = 0.6 Fyw Aw Cv 2 + βv   (G2-12)
  2  
  1.15 1 + ( a h )  
20 NE
158
159 where
( ) ≤ 1.0
20 O
2.8 M pf + M pm + M pst + M pm
160 βv = (G2-13)
h Fywtw (1 − Cv 2 )
3, W
161
E
162 and
163 Fyw = specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi
ST I
U EV
164 (MPa)
165 Mpf = plastic moment of a section composed of the flange and a
166 segment of the web with the depth, de, kip-in. (N-mm)
G R
167 Mpm = smaller of Mpf and Mpst, kip-in. (N-mm)

168 Mpst = plastic moment of a section composed of the stiffener plus a
AU IC
169 length of web equal to de plus the distance from the inside
170 face of the stiffener to the end of the beam, except that the
BL
171 distance from the inside face of the stiffener to the end of the
172 beam shall not exceed 0.84tw E Fy for calculation purpos-
PU
173 es, kip-in. (N-mm)

174
175 (i) when Cv2 ≤ 0.8
2
176 d e = 35t w ( 0.8 − Cv 2 ) (G2-14)
177
178 (ii) when Cv2 > 0.8
179 de = 0 (G2-15)
180
181 (b) The flexural stress in the tension flange, αM r Sxt , in the end panel
182 shall not be larger than 0.35Fy.
183
184 where
185
186 α =1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
187
188 (c) The nominal shear strength for I-shaped members with unequal flange
189 areas shall be determined by analysis.
190

G-5
191 User Note: An approach for I-shaped members with unequal flange areas is
192 discussed in the commentary.
193
194 4. Transverse Stiffeners
195
196 For transverse stiffeners, the following shall apply.
197
198 (a) Transverse stiffeners are not required where h tw ≤ 2.54 E Fy , or
199 where the available shear strength provided in accordance with Section
200 G2.1 for kv = 5.34 is greater than the required shear strength.
201 (b) Transverse stiffeners are permitted to be stopped short of the tension
202 flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a concentrated load or
203 reaction. The weld by which transverse stiffeners are attached to the
204 web shall be terminated not less than four times nor more than six times
205 the web thickness from the near toe of the web-to-flange weld or web-to-
206 flange fillet. When single stiffeners are used, they shall be attached to
207 the compression flange to resist any twist of the flange.
20 NE
208 (c) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more
209 than 12 in. (300 mm) on center. If intermittent fillet welds are used, the
20 O
210 clear distance between welds shall not be more than 16 times the web
211 thickness nor more than 10 in. (250 mm).
3, W
212
E
213 (d) ( b t )st ≤ 0.56 (G2-16)
E
Fyst
ST I
(e) I st ≥ I st 2 + ( I st1 − I st 2 ) ρw
U EV
214 (G2-17)
215
216 where
G R
217
218 Fyst = specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi
AU IC
219 (MPa)
220 Ist = moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners about an axis in
BL
221 the web center for stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact
222 with the web plate for single stiffeners, in.4 (mm4)
PU
1.5
h 4 ρ1.3
st  Fyw 
223 Ist1 =   (G2-18)
40  E 
224 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners
225 required for development of the full shear post buckling re-
226 sistance of the stiffened web panels, Vr = Vc1, in.4 (mm4)
 2.5 
227 Ist2 =  2
− 2  b p tw3 ≥ 0.5b p tw3 (G2-19)
 ( a h ) 
228 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners
229 required for development of the web shear buckling re-
230 sistance, Vr = Vc2, in.4 (mm4)
231 V c1 = available shear strength calculated with Vn as defined in
232 Section G2.1 or G2.2, as applicable, kips (N)
233 Vc 2 = available shear strength, kips (N), calculated with
234 Vn = 0.6Fy AwCv2
235 Vr = required shear strength in the panel being considered, kips
236 (N)
237 bp = smaller of the dimension a and h, in. (mm)

G-6
238 ( b t )st = width-to-thickness ratio of the stiffener

239 ρst = larger of Fyw Fyst and 1.0
 V − Vc 2 
240 ρw = maximum shear ratio,  r  ≥ 0, within the web panels
 Vc1 − Vc 2 
241 on each side of the transverse stiffener
242
243 User Note: Ist may conservatively be taken as Ist1. Equation G2-19
244 provides the minimum stiffener moment of inertia required to attain the
245 web shear post buckling resistance according to Sections G2.1 and G2.2, as
246 applicable. If less post buckling shear strength is required, Equation G2-17
247 provides a linear interpolation between the minimum moment of inertia
248 required to develop web shear buckling and that required to develop the
249 web shear post buckling strength.
250
251 G3. SINGLE ANGLES AND TEES
252
20 NE
253 The nominal shear strength, Vn , of a single-angle leg or a tee stem is:
254
20 O
255 Vn = 0.6 Fy btCv 2 (G3-1)
256 where
3, W
257 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2
258 with h/tw =b/t and kv =1.2
E
259 b = width of the leg resisting the shear force or depth of the tee stem, in.
260 (mm)
ST I
U EV
261 t = thickness of angle leg or tee stem, in. (mm)

262
263 G4. RECTANGULAR HSS, BOX SECTIONS, AND OTHER SINGLY
G R
264 AND DOUBLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS

265
AU IC
266 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is:

267
BL
268 Vn = 0.6 Fy AwCv 2 (G4-1)

269
PU
270 For rectangular HSS and box sections

271 Aw = 2ht, in.2 (mm2)
272 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section
273 G2.2, with h/tw =h/t and kv =5
274 h = width resisting the shear force, taken as the clear distance between
275 the flanges less the inside corner radius on each side for HSS or
276 the clear distance between flanges for box sections, in. (mm). If
277 the corner radius is not known, h shall be taken as the correspond-
278 ing outside dimension minus 3 times the thickness.
279 t = design wall thickness, as defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
280
281 For other singly or doubly symmetric shapes
282 Aw = area of web or webs, taken as the sum of the overall depth times
283 the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
284 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section
285 G2.2, with h/tw =h/t and kv =5
286 h = width resisting the shear force, in. (mm)
287 = for built-up welded sections, the clear distance between flanges,
288 in. (mm)

G-7
289 = for built-up bolted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in.
290 (mm)
291 t = web thickness, as defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
292
293 G5. ROUND HSS
294
295 The nominal shear strength, Vn, of round HSS, according to the limit states of
296 shear yielding and shear buckling, shall be determined as:
297
298 Vn = Fcr Ag 2 (G5-1)
299 where
300 Fcr shall be the larger of
1.60E
301 Fcr = 5
(G5-2a)
Lv  D 4
 
D t 
302
20 NE
303 and
0.78E
304 Fcr = 3
(G5-2b)
20 O
D 2
 
 t 
3, W
305
306 but shall not exceed 0.6Fy
E
ST I
308 D = outside diameter, in. (mm)

U EV
309 Lv = distance from maximum to zero shear force, in. (mm)

310 t = design wall thickness, in. (mm)
311
G R
312 User Note: The shear buckling equations, Equations G5-2a and G5-2b,
313 will control for D/t over 100, high-strength steels, and long lengths. For
AU IC
314 standard sections, shear yielding will usually control and Fcr = 0.6Fy.
315
BL
316 G6. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS

317 SUBJECT TO MINOR-AXIS SHEAR
PU
318
319 For doubly and singly symmetric members loaded in the minor axis without
320 torsion, the nominal shear strength, Vn, for each shear resisting element is:
321
322 Vn = 0.6 Fy b f t f Cv 2 (G6-1)
323
324 where
325 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2
326 with h/tw =bf/2tf for I-shaped members and tees, or h/tw =bf/tf for
327 channels, and kv = 1.2
328 bf = width of flange, in. (mm)
329 tf = thickness of flange, in. (mm)
330
331 User Note: Cv2 = 1.0 for all ASTM A6 W, S, M, and HP shapes, when
332 Fy ≤ 70 ksi (485 MPa).
333
334 G7. BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS
335

G-8
336 The effect of all web openings on the shear strength of steel and composite
337 beams shall be determined. Reinforcement shall be provided when the
338 required strength exceeds the available strength of the member at the
339 opening.
340
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

H-1
1 CHAPTER H
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

3
4
5 This chapter addresses members subject to axial force and flexure about one or both axes, with or without torsion,
6 and members subject to torsion only.
8 H1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
9 H2. Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
10 H3. Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear, and/or Axial Force
11 H4. Rupture of Flanges with Holes Subjected to Tension
12
13 User Note: For composite members, see Chapter I.
20 NE
14
15 H1. DOUBLY AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
16
20 O
17 1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Compression
18
19
3, W
The interaction of flexure and compression in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
20 constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b.
E
21 User Note: Section H2 is permitted to be used in lieu of the provisions of this section.
ST I
U EV
Pr
22 (a) When ≥ 0.2
Pc
G R
Pr 8  M rx M ry 
23 +  +  ≤ 1.0 (H1-1a)
Pc 9  M cx M cy 
AU IC
24
Pr
BL
25 (b) When < 0.2

Pc
Pr  M rx M ry 
PU
26 + +  ≤ 1.0 (H1-1b)
2 Pc  M cx M cy 
27 where
28 Pr = required compressive strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
30 Pc = available compressive strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter E, kips (N)
31 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
32 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
33 Mc = available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter F, kip-in. (N-
34 mm)
35 x = subscript relating symbol to major axis bending
36 y = subscript relating symbol to minor axis bending
37
38
39 2. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Tension
40

H-2
41 The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
42 constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b,
43 where
44 Pr = required tensile strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
46 Pc = available tensile strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter D, kips (N)
47
αPr
48 For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Chapter F is permitted to be multiplied by 1+ when axial
Pey
49 tension acts concurrently with flexure,
50
51 where
π2 EI y
52 Pey = (H1-2)
L2b
53 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
20 NE
54
55 and
56
20 O
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
57 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
58 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement of the compression
3, W
59 flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in.4 (mm4)
60
E
61 3. Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact Members Subject to Single-Axis Flexure and Compression
ST I
62
U EV
63 For doubly symmetric rolled compact members, with the effective length for torsional buckling less than or
64 equal to the effective length for y-axis flexural buckling, Lcz ≤ Lc y , subjected to flexure and compression
G R
65 with moments primarily about their major axis, it is permissible to address the two independent limit states,
66 in-plane instability and out-of-plane buckling or lateral-torsional buckling, separately in lieu of the combined
AU IC
67 approach provided in Section H1.1,

68
BL
69 where
70 Lcy = effective length for buckling about the y-axis, in. (mm)
71 Lcz = effective length for buckling about the longitudinal axis, in. (mm)
PU
72
73 For members with M ry M cy ≥ 0.05 , the provisions of Section H1.1 shall be followed.
74 (a) For the limit state of in-plane instability, Equations H1-1a and H1-1b shall be used with Pc taken as the
75 available compressive strength in the plane of bending and Mcx taken as the available flexural strength
76 based on the limit state of yielding.
77
78 (b) For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling and lateral-torsional buckling
2
Pr  Pr   M rx 
79 1.5 − 0.5 + ≤ 1.0 (H1-3)
Pcy  Pcy   Cb M cx 
80 where
81 Pcy = available compressive strength out of the plane of bending, kips (N)
82 Cb = lateral-torsional buckling modification factor determined from Section F1
83 Mcx = available lateral-torsional strength for major axis flexure determined in accordance with
84 Chapter F using Cb = 1.0 , kip-in. (N-mm)
H-3
85
86 User Note: In Equation H1-3, C b M cx may be larger than φb M px in LRFD or M px Ωb in ASD. The
87 yielding resistance of the beam-column is captured by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b.
88
89 H2. UNSYMMETRIC AND OTHER MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
90
91 This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial stress for shapes not covered in Section H1. It is
92 permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape in lieu of the provisions of Section H1.
f ra f rbw f rbz
93 + + ≤ 1.0 (H2-1)
Fca Fcbw Fcbz
94
95 where
96 fra = required axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
97 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa)
98 Fca = available axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter E
20 NE
99 for compression or Section D2 for tension, ksi (MPa)
100 frbw, frbz = required flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter
101 C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa).
20 O
102 Fcbw, Fcbz = available flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter
103 F, ksi (MPa)
3, W
104 Use the section modulus, S, for the specific location in the cross section and consider the
105 sign of the stress.
E
106 w = subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending
ST I
107 z = subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis bending

U EV
108
109 User Note: The subscripts w and z refer to the principal axes of the unsymmetric cross section. For doubly
110 symmetric cross sections, these can be replaced by the x and y subscripts.
G R
111 Equation H2-1 shall be evaluated using the principal bending axes by considering the sense of the flexural
AU IC
112 stresses at the critical points of the cross section. The flexural terms are either added to or subtracted from the
113 axial term as applicable. When the axial force is compression, second-order effects shall be included
114
BL
according to the provisions of Chapter C.

115
116
PU
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Equation H2-1.
117
118 H3. MEMBERS SUBJECT TO TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, FLEXURE, SHEAR, AND/OR
119 AXIAL FORCE
120
121 1. Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to Torsion
122
123 The design torsional strength, φT Tn , and the allowable torsional strength, Tn ΩT , for round and rectangular
124 HSS according to the limit states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling shall be determined as follows:
125
126 Tn = Fcr C (H3-1)
127
128 φT = 0.90 (LRFD) ΩT = 1.67 (ASD)
129
130 where
131 C = HSS torsional constant, in.3 (mm3)

H-4
132
133 The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as follows:
134
135 (a) For round HSS, Fcr shall be the larger of
136
1.23E
137 (1) 5
(H3-2a)
L D 4
 
D t 
138
139 and
0.60 E
140 (2) Fcr = 3
(H3-2b)
D 2
 
 t 
141
142 but shall not exceed 0.6Fy ,
20 NE
143
144 where
20 O
145 D = outside diameter, in. (mm)
146 L = length of member, in. (mm)
147
3, W
t = design wall thickness defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
148
149
E
(b) For rectangular HSS
150
ST I
U EV
151 (1) When h t ≤ 2.45 E / Fy

152 Fcr = 0.6Fy (H3-3)
G R
153
154 (2) When 2.45 E / Fy < h / t ≤ 3.07 E / Fy
AU IC
155 Fcr =
(
0.6 Fy 2.45 E / Fy ) (H3-4)
BL
h
 
t
PU
156
157 (3) When 3.07 E / Fy < h / t ≤ 260
0.458π2 E
158 Fcr = 2
(H3-5)
h
 
t
159
160 where
161 h = flat width of longer side, as defined in Section B4.1b(d), in. (mm)
162
163 User Note: The torsional constant, C, may be conservatively taken as:
2
π(D − t) t
164 For round HSS: C =
2
165 For rectangular HSS: C = 2( B − t )( H − t )t − 4.5(4 − π)t 3
166

H-5
167 2. HSS Subject to Combined Torsion, Shear, Flexure and Axial Force
168
169 When the required torsional strength, Tr, is less than or equal to 20% of the available torsional strength, Tc,
170 the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial force for HSS may be determined by Section H1 and the
171 torsional effects may be neglected. When Tr exceeds 20% of Tc, the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure
172 and/or axial force shall be limited, at the point of consideration, by
2
 Pr M rx M ry   Vr Tr 
173  Pc + M cx + M cy  +  Vc + Tc  ≤ 1.0 (H3-6)
 
174
175 where
176 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
178 Pc = available tensile or compressive strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter D
179 or E, kips (N)
180 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
20 NE
182 Mc = available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter F, kip-in. (N-
183 mm)
184
20 O
Vr = required shear strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
186 Vc = available shear strength, φVn or Vn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter G, kips (N)
3, W
187 Tr = required torsional strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
E
189 Tc = available torsional strength, φTn or Tn Ω , determined in accordance with Section H3.1, kip-in.
ST I
U EV
190 (N-mm)
191
192 3. Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Stress
G R
193
194 The available torsional strength for non-HSS members shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
AU IC
195 limit states of yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under shear stress, or buckling, determined as
196 follows:
BL
197 φT = 0.90 (LRFD); ΩT = 1.67 (ASD)

198
PU
199 (a) For the limit state of yielding under normal stress
200
201 Fn = Fy (H3-7)
202
203 (b) For the limit state of shear yielding under shear stress
204
205 Fn = 0.6Fy (H3-8)
206
207 (c) For the limit state of buckling
208
209 Fn = Fcr (H3-9)
210
211 where
212 Fcr = buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa)
213
214
H-6
215 H4. RUPTURE OF FLANGES WITH HOLES AND SUBJECTED TO TENSION

216
217 At locations of bolt holes in flanges subjected to tension under combined axial force and major axis flexure,
218 flange tensile rupture strength shall be limited by Equation H4-1. Each flange subjected to tension due to
219 axial force and flexure shall be checked separately.
220
Pr M rx
221 + ≤ 1.0 (H4-1)
Pc M cx
222
223 where
224 Pr = required axial strength of the member at the location of the bolt holes, determined in accordance with
225 Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, positive in tension and negative in compression,
226 kips (N)
227 Pc = available axial strength for the limit state of tensile rupture of the net section at the location of bolt
228 holes, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Section D2(b), kips (N)
229 Mrx = required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
230 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, positive for tension in the flange under consideration and
20 NE
231 negative for compression, kip-in. (N-mm)
232 Mcx = available flexural strength about x-axis for the limit state of tensile rupture of the flange, φM n or
233
20 O
M n Ω , determined according to Section F13.1. When the limit state of tensile rupture in flexure
234 does not apply, use the plastic moment, Mp, determined with bolt holes not taken into consideration,
235
3, W
kip-in. (N-mm)
236
E
237
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

I-1
1 CHAPTER I
2 DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

3
4
5 This chapter addresses composite members composed of rolled or built-up structural
6 steel shapes or HSS and structural concrete acting together, and steel beams
7 supporting a reinforced concrete slab so interconnected that the beams and the slab
8 act together to resist bending. Simple and continuous composite beams with steel
9 headed stud anchors, as well as encased and filled beams, constructed with or
10 without temporary shores, are included. This chapter also addresses concrete filled
11 composite plate shear walls composed of structural steel plates, ties, steel anchors,
12 and structural concrete acting together.
13
15
20 NE
16 I1. General Provisions
17 I2. Axial Force
18 I3. Flexure
20 O
19 I4. Shear
20 I5. Combined Flexure and Axial Force
3, W
21 I6. Load Transfer
22 I7. Composite Diaphragms and Collector Beams
E
23 I8. Steel Anchors
24
ST I
U EV
25 I1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

26
27 In determining load effects in members and connections of a structure that
G R
28 includes composite members, consideration shall be given to the effective

29 sections at the time each increment of load is applied.
AU IC
30
31 1. Concrete and Steel Reinforcement
BL
32
33 The design, detailing and material properties related to the concrete and
34 reinforcing steel portions of composite construction shall comply with the
PU
35 reinforced concrete and reinforcing bar design specifications stipulated by the

36 applicable building code. Additionally, the provisions in the Building Code
37 Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318) and the Metric Building
38 Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318M), subsequently
39 referred to in Chapter I collectively as ACI 318, shall apply with the following
40 exceptions and limitations:
41
42 (a) Concrete and steel reinforcement material limitations shall be as
43 specified in Section I1.3.
44 (b) Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement requirements shall be as
45 specified in Sections I2 and I3 in addition to those specified in ACI 318.
46 Concrete and steel reinforcement components designed in accordance with
47 ACI 318 shall be based on a level of loading corresponding to LRFD load
48 combinations.
49 User Note: It is the intent of this Specification that the concrete and
50 reinforcing steel portions of composite concrete members are detailed
51 utilizing the provisions of ACI 318 as modified by this Specification. All
52 requirements specific to composite members are covered in this Specification.
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, July 7, 2016

I-2
53 Note that the design basis for ACI 318 is strength design. Designers using
54 ASD for steel must be conscious of the different load factors.
55
56 2. Nominal Strength of Composite Sections
57
58 The nominal strength of composite sections shall be determined in accordance
59 with either the plastic stress distribution method, the strain compatibility
60 method, the elastic stress distribution method, or the effective stress-strain
61 method, as defined in this section.
62
63 The tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in the determination of
64 the nominal strength of composite members.
65
66 Local buckling effects shall be evaluated for filled composite members, as
67 defined in Section I1.4. Local buckling effects need not be evaluated for
68 encased composite columns or composite plate shear walls.
69
20 NE
70 2a. Plastic Stress Distribution Method
71
72 For the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal strength shall be
20 O
73 computed assuming that steel components have reached a stress of Fy in either
74 tension or compression, and concrete components in compression due to axial
3, W
75 force and/or flexure have reached a stress of 0.85 f c′ , where f c′ is the
76 specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa). For round HSS filled
E
77 with concrete, a stress of 0.95 f c′ is permitted to be used for concrete

ST I
U EV
78 components in compression due to axial force and/or flexure to account for

79 the effects of concrete confinement.
80
G R
81 2b. Strain Compatibility Method

82
AU IC
83 For the strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of strains across the
84 section shall be assumed, with the maximum concrete compressive strain
BL
85 equal to 0.003 in./in. (mm/mm). The stress-strain relationships for steel and
86 concrete shall be obtained from tests or from published results.
87
PU
88 User Note: The strain compatibility method can be used to determine nominal
89 strength for irregular sections and for cases where the steel does not exhibit
90 elasto-plastic behavior. General guidelines for the strain compatibility method
91 for encased members subjected to axial load, flexure or both are given in
92 AISC Design Guide 6, Load and Resistance Factor Design of W-Shapes
93 Encased in Concrete, and ACI 318.
94
95 2c. Elastic Stress Distribution Method
96
97 For the elastic stress distribution method, the nominal strength shall be
98 determined from the superposition of elastic stresses for the limit state of
99 yielding or concrete crushing.
100
101 2d. Effective Stress-Strain Method
102
103 For the effective stress-strain method, the nominal strength shall be computed
104 assuming strain compatibility, and effective stress-strain relationships for
105 steel and concrete components accounting for the effects of local buckling,
106 yielding, interaction and concrete confinement.
107
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xxxx, 2022

PUBLIC REVEW Draft Dated August 3, 2020
I-3
108 3. Material Limitations

109
110 For concrete, structural steel, and steel reinforcing bars in composite systems,
111 the following limitations shall be met unless Appendix X is used:
112 (a) For the determination of the available strength, concrete shall have a
113 specified compressive strength, f c′ , of not less than 3 ksi (21 MPa) nor
114 more than 10 ksi (69 MPa) for normal weight concrete and not less than
115 3 ksi (21 MPa) nor more than 6 ksi (41 MPa) for lightweight concrete.
116 .
117 (b) The specified minimum yield stress of structural steel used in calculating
118 the strength of composite members shall not exceed 75 ksi (525 MPa).
119 (c) The specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars used in
120 calculating the strength of composite members shall not exceed 80 ksi
121 (550 MPa).
122 The design of filled composite members constructed from high-strength
20 NE
123 materials shall be in accordance with Appendix X.
124 4. Classification of Filled Composite Sections for Local Buckling
20 O
125
126 For compression, filled composite sections are classified as compact,
3, W
127 noncompact or slender. For a section to qualify as compact, the maximum
128 width-to-thickness ratio of its compression steel elements shall not exceed the
E
129 limiting width-to-thickness ratio, λ p , from Table I1.1a. If the maximum
ST I
130 width-to-thickness ratio of one or more steel compression elements exceeds

U EV
131 λ p , but does not exceed λ r from Table I1.1a, the filled composite section is
132 noncompact. If the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of any compression
G R
133 steel element exceeds λ r , the section is slender. The maximum permitted
134 width-to-thickness ratio shall be as specified in the table.
AU IC
135
136 For flexure, filled composite sections are classified as compact, noncompact
BL
137 or slender. For a section to qualify as compact, the maximum width-to-

138 thickness ratio of its compression steel elements shall not exceed the limiting
139 width-to-thickness ratio, λ p , from Table I1.1b. If the maximum width-to-
PU
140 thickness ratio of one or more steel compression elements exceeds λp, but
141 does not exceed λ r from Table I1.1b, the section is noncompact. If the width-
142 to-thickness ratio of any steel element exceeds λ r , the section is slender. The
143 maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio shall be as specified in the table.
144
145 Refer to Section B4.1b for definitions of width, b and D, and thickness, t, for
146 rectangular and round HSS sections and box sections of uniform thickness.
147
148 User Note: All current ASTM A1085 and ASTM A500 Grade C square HSS
149 sections are compact according to the limits of Table I1.1a and Table I1.1b,
150 except HSS7×7×1/8, HSS8×8×1/8, HSS10x10x3/16 and HSS12×12×3/16,
151 which are noncompact for both axial compression and flexure, and
152 HSS9x9x1/8, which is slender for both axial compression and flexure.
153
154 All current ASTM A500 Grade C round HSS sections are compact according
155 to the limits of Table I1.1a and Table I1.1b for both axial compression and
156 flexure, with the exception of HSS6.625x0.125, HSS7.000x0.125,
157 HSS10.000x0.188, HSS14.000x0.250, HSS16.000×0.250, and
158 HSS20.000x0.375, which are noncompact for flexure.

I-4
159
160
TABLE I1.1a
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in
Composite Members Subject to Axial Compression
for Use with Section I2.2
Width-to- λp λr
Description of Thickness Compact/ Noncompact/ Maximum
Element Ratio Noncompact Slender Permitted
Walls of
Rectangular
HSS and Box 2.26
E
3.00
E
5.00
E
b/t
Sections Fy Fy Fy
of Uniform
Thickness
0.15E 0.19E 0.31E
Round HSS D/t
20 NE
Fy Fy Fy
161
TABLE I1.1b
20 O
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in
Composite Members Subject to Flexure
3, W
for Use with Section I3.4
Width-to- λp λr
E
Description of Thickness Compact/ Noncompact/ Maximum
ST I
Element Ratio Noncompact Slender Permitted

U EV
Flanges of
Rectangular E E E
HSS and Box b/t 2.26 3.00 5.00
G R
Sections of Fy Fy Fy
Uniform Thickness
AU IC
Webs of
Rectangular
HSS and Box E E E
BL
h/t 3.00 5.70 5.70

Sections Fy Fy Fy
of Uniform
Thickness
PU
0.09E 0.31E 0.31E

Round HSS D/t
Fy Fy Fy
162
163
164 5. Stiffness for Calculation of Required Strengths
165
166 For the direct analysis method of design, the required strengths of encased
167 composite members, filled composite members, and composite plate shear
168 walls shall be determined using the provisions of Section C2 and the following
169 requirements:
170
171 (1) The nominal flexural stiffness of encased and filled composite members
172 subject to net compression shall be taken as the effective stiffness of the
173 composite section, EIeff, as defined in Section I2.
174
175 (2) The nominal axial stiffness of encased and filled composite members
176 subject to net compression shall be taken as the summation of the elastic
177 axial stiffnesses of each component.

I-5
178
179 (3) Stiffness of encased and filled composite members subject to net tension
180 shall be taken as the stiffness of the bare steel members in accordance
181 with Chapter C.
182
183 (4) The stiffness reduction parameter, τb, shall be taken as 0.8 for encased
184 and filled composite.
185
186 User Note: Taken together, the stiffness reduction factors require the use
187 of 0.64EIeff for the flexural stiffness and 0.8 times the nominal axial
188 stiffness of encased composite members and filled composite members
189 subject to net compression in the analysis.
190
191 Stiffness values appropriate for the calculation of deflections and for use
192 with the effective length method are discussed in the Commentary.
193
194 (5) The flexural, axial, and shear stiffnesses of composite plate shear walls
20 NE
195 shall be calculated as follows:
196
197 ( EI )eff = Es I s + 0.35Ec Ic (I1-1)
20 O
198 ( EA)eff = Es As + 0.45Ec Ac (I1-2)
199 (GA)eff = Gs Asw + Gc Ac (I1-3)
3, W
200 where
E
201 Ac = area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
202 As = area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
ST I
U EV
203 Asw = area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2
204 (mm2)
205 Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
G R
206 = w1.5
c f c′ , ksi ( 0.043w1.5
c f c′ , MPa)
207 Es = modulus of elasticity of steel
AU IC
208 = 29,000 ksi (200,000 MPa)

209 Gs = shear modulus of steel
BL
210 = 11,150 ksi (76,880 MPa)

211 Gc = shear modulus of concrete
PU
212 = 0.4 Ec
213 Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic
214 neutral axis of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
215 Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis
216 of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
217 wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or
218 1500 ≤ wc ≤ 2500 kg/m3)
219
220 6. Requirements for Composite Plate Shear Walls
221 The opposing steel plates shall be connected to each other using ties
222 consisting of bars, structural shapes, or built-up members. For filled
223 composite plate shear walls, the steel plates shall be anchored to the concrete
224 using ties or a combination of ties and steel anchors.
225
226 6a. Slenderness Requirement
227 The slenderness ratio of the plates, b/t, shall be limited as follows:

I-6
b E
228 ≤ 1.2 (I1-4)
t Fy
229 where
230 b = largest clear distance between rows of steel anchors or ties, in. (mm)
231 t = plate thickness, in. (mm)
232
233 6b. Tie Bar Requirement
234 Tie bars shall have spacing no greater than 1.0 times the wall thickness, tsc
235 The tie bar spacing to plate thickness ratio, S/t, shall be limited as follows:
S Es
236 ≤ 1.0 (I1-5)
t 2α + 1
4
t  t 
237 α = 1.7  sc − 2    (I1-6)
   dtie 
20 NE
t
238 where
20 O
239 S = largest clear spacing of the ties, in. (mm)
240 t = plate thickness, in. (mm)
3, W
241 tsc = thickness of composite plate shear wall, in. (mm)
242 dtie = effective diameter of the tie bar, in. (mm)
E
243
244 I2. AXIAL FORCE
ST I
U EV
245
246 This section applies to encased composite members, filled composite
247 members, and composite plate shear walls subject to axial force.
G R
248
249 1. Encased Composite Members
AU IC
250
251 1a. Limitations
BL
252
253 For encased composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
254
PU
255 (a) The cross-sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least 1% of
256 the total composite cross section.
257 (b) Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be reinforced with
258 continuous longitudinal bars and lateral ties or spirals.
259 Detailing of longitudinal reinforcing, including bar spacing and con-
260 crete cover requirements, shall conform to ACI 318.
261 Transverse reinforcement shall consist of a minimum of either a No. 3
262 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, or a
263 No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16 in. (400 mm)
264 on center shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement
265 of equivalent area are permitted.
266 Maximum spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 0.5 times the least
267 column dimension. Refer to ACI 318 for concrete cover requirements.
268 (c) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal
269 reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:

I-7
Asr
270 ρsr = (I2-1)
Ag
271 where
272 Ag = gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2)
273 Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2)
274
275 (d) The maximum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal
276 reinforcing, ρsr, shall be based on ACI 318 with the gross area of con-
277 crete Ag assumed in the calculations.
278
279 User Note: Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie, and
280 spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
281
282 1b. Compressive Strength
283
284 The design compressive strength, φcPn, and allowable compressive strength,
285 Pn/Ωc, of doubly symmetric axially loaded encased composite members shall
20 NE
286 be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling based on member
287 slenderness as follows:
288
20 O
289 φc = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωc =2.00 (ASD)
290
3, W
Pno
291 (a) When ≤ 2.25
E
Pe
292
ST I
U EV
 Pno 
293 
Pn = Pno 0.658 Pe  (I2-2)
 
 
G R
294
AU IC
Pno
295 (b) When > 2.25
Pe
BL
296
297 Pn = 0.877Pe (I2-3)
PU
298
299 where
300 Pno = Fy As + Fysr Asr + 0.85 f c′ Ac (I2-4)
301 Pe = elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with
302 Chapter C or Appendix 7, kips (N)
303 = π2 ( EI eff ) Lc 2 (I2-5)
304 Ac = area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
305 As = cross-sectional area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
1.5
307 = wc fc′ , ksi ( 0.043w1.5
c fc′ , MPa)
308 EIeff = effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in.2 (N-mm2)
309 = EsIs +EsIsr +C1EcIc (I2-6)
310 C1 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of an encased
311 composite compression member
 A + Asr 
312 = 0.25 + 3  s  ≤ 0.7 (I2-7)
 Ag 
313 Es = modulus of elasticity of steel

I-8
314 = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)

315 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel section, ksi (MPa)
316 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing steel, ksi (MPa)
317 Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic
318 neutral axis of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
319 Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of
320 the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
321 Isr = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral
322 axis of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
325 Lc = KL = effective length of the member, in. (mm)
326 fc′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
327 wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or 1500
328 ≤ wc ≤ 2500 kg/m3)
329
330 The available compressive strength need not be less than that specified for
20 NE
331 the bare steel member, as required by Chapter E.
332
333 1c. Tensile Strength
20 O
334
335 The available tensile strength of axially loaded encased composite members
336 shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as:
3, W
337
E
338 Pn = Fy As + Fysr Asr (I2-8)
ST I
339
U EV
340 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

341
342 1d. Load Transfer
G R
343
344 Load transfer requirements for encased composite members shall be
AU IC
345 determined in accordance with Section I6.

346
BL
347 1e. Detailing Requirements

348
349 For encased composite members, the following detailing requirements shall
PU
350 be met:
351
352 (a) Clear spacing between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing shall be
353 a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38
354 mm).
355
356 (b) If the composite cross section is built up from two or more encased steel
357 shapes, the shapes shall be interconnected with lacing, tie plates or
358 comparable components to prevent buckling of individual shapes due to
359 loads applied prior to hardening of the concrete.
360
362 spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
363
364 2. Filled Composite Members
365
366 2a. Limitations
367
368 For filled composite members, the following limitations shall be met:

I-9
369
370 (a) The cross-sectional area of the steel section shall comprise at least 1%
371 of the total composite cross section.
372 (b) Filled composite members shall be classified for local buckling
373 according to Section I1.4.
374 (c) Minimum longitudinal reinforcement is not required. If longitudinal
375 reinforcement is provided, internal transverse reinforcement is not
376 required for strength; however, minimum internal transverse rein-
377 forcement shall be provided for constructability. A minimum of either
378 a No. 3 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on cen-
379 ter, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16 in.
380 (400 mm) on center shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire
381 reinforcement of equivalent area are permitted.
382 (d) If longitudinal reinforcing steel is provided for strength, the maximum
383 reinforcement ratio shall be based on ACI 318 requirements for the
384 gross area of concrete
20 NE
386 spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 and Section I4 Commentary
20 O
387 for shear in concrete filled members.
388
3, W
390
E
391 The available compressive strength of axially loaded doubly symmetric filled
ST I
392 composite members shall be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling
U EV
393 in accordance with Section I2.1b with the following modifications:

394
395 (a) For compact sections
G R
396
397 Pno = Pp (I2-9a)
AU IC
398
BL
399 where
 E 
400 Pp = Fy As + C2 f c′  Ac + Asr s  (I2-9b)
 Ec 
PU
401 C2 = 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for round sections
402
404
Pp − Py
(λ − λ p )
2
405 Pno = Pp − (I2-9c)
(λ r − λ p )
2
406
407 where
408 λ, λp and λr are width-to-thickness ratios determined from Table
409 I1.1a
410
411 Pp is determined from Equation I2-9b
412
 E 
413 Py = F y As + 0.7 f c′  Ac + Asr s  (I2-9d)
 Ec 
414
415 (c) For slender sections

I-10
 E 
416 Pno = Fcr As + 0.7 f c′  Ac + Asr s  (I2-9e)
 Ec 
417
418 where
419 (1) For rectangular filled sections
9 Es
420 Fcr = 2
(I2-10)
b
 
t
421
422 (2) For round filled sections
0.72 Fy
423 Fcr = 0.2
(I2-11)
 D  Fy 
 t  E 
  s 
424
425 The effective stiffness of the composite section, EIeff, for all sections shall be:
20 NE
426
427 EIeff = EsIs + EsIsr +C3EcIc (I2-12)
20 O
428
429 where
430 C3 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite
3, W
431 compression member
 A + Asr 
E
432 = 0.45 + 3  s  ≤ 0.9 (I2-13)
ST I
 Ag 
U EV
433
434 The available compressive strength need not be less than specified for the
435 bare steel member, as required by Chapter E.
G R
436
AU IC
438
439 The available tensile strength of axially loaded filled composite members
BL

441
PU
442 Pn = As Fy + Asr Fysr (I2-14)

443
444 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
445
446 2d. Load Transfer
447
448 Load transfer requirements for filled composite members shall be deter-
449 mined in accordance with Section I6.
450
451 2e. Detailing Requirements
452
453 Clear spacing between the inside steel perimeter and longitudinal reinforc-
454 ing where provided shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but
455 not less than 1.5 in. (38 mm).
456
457 3. Composite Plate Shear Walls
458
459 3a. Limitations
460
461 For composite plate shear walls, the following limitations shall be met:

I-11
462
463 (a) The steel plates shall comprise at least 1% but no more than 10% of the
464 total composite cross-section area.
465 (b) The steel plates shall satisfy the slenderness requirements of Section
466 I1.6.
467 (c) Walls without flange (closure) plates or boundary elements are not
468 permitted.
469 (d) The height-to-length ratio of the wall shall be greater than or equal to 3.
470

472
473 The available compressive strength of axially loaded composite plate shear
474 walls shall be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling in
20 NE
475 accordance with Section I2.1b. The value of flexural stiffness from Section
476 I1.5 shall be used along with the section axial load capacity, Pno, determined
477 as follows:
20 O
478
479 Pno = Fy As + 0.85 fc' Ac (I2-15)
3, W
480
481 φc = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
E
482
ST I

U EV
484
485 The available tensile strength of axially loaded composite plate shear walls
G R
487
488 Pn = As Fy (I2-16)
AU IC
489 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

BL
490
491 I3. FLEXURE
492
PU
493 This section applies to three types of composite members subject to flexure:
494 composite beams with steel anchors consisting of steel headed stud anchors
495 or steel channel anchors, concrete encased members, and concrete filled
496 members.
497
498 1. General
499
500 1a. Effective Width
501
502 The effective width of the concrete slab shall be the sum of the effective
503 widths for each side of the beam centerline, each of which shall not exceed:
504
505 (a) one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-center of supports;
506 (b) one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beam; or
507 (c) the distance to the edge of the slab.
508
509 1b. Strength During Construction
510
511 When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel section
512 alone shall have sufficient strength to support all loads applied prior to the

I-12
513 concrete attaining 75% of its specified strength, fc′. The available flexural
514 strength of the steel section shall be determined in accordance with Chapter
515 F.
516
517 2. Composite Beams with Steel Headed Stud or Steel Channel Anchors
518
519 2a. Positive Flexural Strength
520
521 The design positive flexural strength, φb M n , and allowable positive flexural
522 strength, M n Ωb , shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as
523 follows:
524
525 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
526
527 (a) When h tw ≤ 3.76 E Fy
528
20 NE
529 Mn shall be determined from the plastic stress distribution on the com-
530 posite section for the limit state of yielding (plastic moment).
531
20 O
532 User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S and HP shapes satisfy the
533 limit given in Section I3.2a(a) for Fy ≤ 70 ksi (485 MPa).
3, W
534
535 (b) When h tw > 3.76 E Fy
E
536
ST I
537 M n shall be determined from the superposition of elastic stresses,

U EV
538 considering the effects of shoring, for the limit state of yielding (yield
539 moment).
G R
540
541 2b. Negative Flexural Strength
AU IC
542
543 The available negative flexural strength shall be determined for the steel
BL
544 section alone, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter F.

545
546 Alternatively, the available negative flexural strength shall be determined
PU
547 from the plastic stress distribution on the composite section, for the limit
548 state of yielding (plastic moment), with
549
550 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
551
552 provided that the following limitations are met:
553
554 (a) The steel beam is compact and is adequately braced in accordance
555 with Chapter F.
556
557 (b) Steel headed stud or steel channel anchors connect the slab to the steel
558 beam in the negative moment region.
559
560 (c) The slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam, within the effective
561 width of the slab, is developed.
562
563 User Note: To check compactness of a composite beam in negative
564 flexure, Case 10 in Table B4.1 is appropriate to use for flanges, and Case 16
565 of Table B4.1 is appropriate to use for webs.
566

I-13
567 2c. Composite Beams with Formed Steel Deck

568
569 1. General
570
571 The available flexural strength of composite construction consisting of
572 concrete slabs on formed steel deck connected to steel beams shall be
573 determined by the applicable portions of Sections I3.2a and I3.2b, with
574 the following requirements:
575
576 (a) The nominal rib height shall not be greater than 3 in. (75 mm).
577 The average width of concrete rib or haunch, wr, shall be not less
578 than 2 in. (50 mm), but shall not be taken in calculations as more
579 than the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck.
580
581 (b) The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel beam with steel
582 headed stud anchors welded either through the deck or directly to
583 the steel cross section. Steel headed stud anchors, after installa-
20 NE
584 tion, shall extend not less than 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) above the top of
585 the steel deck and there shall be at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) of speci-
586 fied concrete cover above the top of the steel headed stud anchors.
20 O
587
588 (c) The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not less than 2 in.
589 (50 mm).
3, W
590
591 (d) Steel deck shall be anchored to all supporting members at a spac-
E
592 ing not to exceed 18 in. (460 mm). Such anchorage shall be pro-
ST I
593 vided by steel headed stud anchors, a combination of steel headed

U EV
594 stud anchors and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other devices speci-
595 fied by the contract documents.
G R
596
597 2. Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam
AU IC
598
599 Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be neglected in deter-
600 mining composite section properties and in calculating Ac for deck ribs
BL
601 oriented perpendicular to the steel beams.

602
PU
603 3. Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam

604
605 Concrete below the top of the steel deck is permitted to be included in
606 determining composite section properties and in calculating Ac.
607
608 Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams are permitted to be split
609 longitudinally and separated to form a concrete haunch.
610
611 When the nominal depth of steel deck is 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) or greater,
612 the average width, wr, of the supported haunch or rib shall be not less
613 than 2 in. (50 mm) for the first steel headed stud anchor in the trans-
614 verse row plus four stud diameters for each additional steel headed
615 stud anchor.
616
617 2d. Load Transfer Between Steel Beam and Concrete Slab
618
619 1. Load Transfer for Positive Flexural Strength
620
621 The entire horizontal shear at the interface between the steel beam and
622 the concrete slab shall be assumed to be transferred by steel headed

I-14
623 stud or steel channel anchors, except for concrete-encased beams as

624 defined in Section I3.3. For composite action with concrete subject to
625 flexural compression, the nominal shear force between the steel beam
626 and the concrete slab transferred by steel anchors, V′, between the
627 point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment
628 shall be determined as the lowest value in accordance with the limit
629 states of concrete crushing, tensile yielding of the steel section, or the
630 shear strength of the steel anchors:
631
632 (a) Concrete crushing
633
634 V ' = 0.85f c′Ac (I3-1a)
635
636 (b) Tensile yielding of the steel section
637
638 V ' = Fy As (I3-1b)
639
20 NE
640 (c) Shear strength of steel headed stud or steel channel anchors
641
V ' = ΣQn
20 O
642 (I3-1c)
643
3, W
644 where
645 Ac = area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (mm2)
E
646 As = cross-sectional area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
ΣQn = sum of nominal shear strengths of steel headed stud or
ST I
647
U EV
648 steel channel anchors between the point of maximum pos-

649 itive moment and the point of zero moment, kips (N)
650
G R
651 The effect of ductility (slip capacity) of the shear connection at the
652 interface of the concrete slab and the steel beam shall be considered.
AU IC
653
654 2. Load Transfer for Negative Flexural Strength
BL
655
656 In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel in
657 the negative moment regions is considered to act compositely with the
PU
658 steel beam, the total horizontal shear between the point of maximum
659 negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be determined as
660 the lower value in accordance with the following limit states:
661
662 (a) For the limit state of tensile yielding of the slab reinforcement
663
664 V ' = Fysr Asr (I3-2a)
665 where
666 Asr = area of developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within
667 the effective width of the concrete slab, in.2 (mm2)
668 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the reinforcing steel,
669 ksi (MPa)
670
671 (b) For the limit state of shear strength of steel headed stud or steel
672 channel anchors
673
674 V ' = ΣQn (I3-2b)
675

I-15
677
678 3a. Limitations
679
680 For encased composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
681
682 (a) The available flexural strength of concrete-encased members shall be
683 determined as follows:
684
685 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
686
687 The nominal flexural strength, M n , shall be determined using one of the
688 following methods:
689
690 (1) The superposition of elastic stresses on the composite section, con-
691 sidering the effects of shoring for the limit state of yielding (yield
692 moment).
693
20 NE
694 (2) The plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone, for the limit
695 state of yielding (plastic moment) on the steel section.
696
20 O
697 (3) The plastic stress distribution on the composite section or the strain-
698 compatibility method, for the limit state of yielding (plastic mo-
3, W
699 ment) on the composite section. For concrete-encased members,
700 steel anchors shall be provided.
E
701
702 (b) The total cross sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least
ST I
U EV
703 1% of the total composite cross section.

704
705 (c) Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be reinforced with
G R
706 continuous longitudinal bars and transverse reinforcement (stirrups).

707
AU IC
708 Detailing of longitudinal reinforcing, including bar spacing and con-

709 crete cover requirements, shall conform to ACI 318.
BL
710 Transverse reinforcement for constructability shall consist of a mini-

711 mum of either a No. 3 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in.
PU
712 (300 mm) on center, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a
713 maximum of 16 in. (400 mm) on center shall be used. Deformed
714 wire or welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area are permitted.
715 (d) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal
716 reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
A
717 ρsr = sr (I3-3)
Ag
718 where
719 Ag = gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2)
720 Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2)
721
722 (e) The composite member, including the area of the steel section and
723 reinforcing steel, shall be tension controlled as defined in ACI 318.
724
725 User Note: The effect of this limitation is to restrict the reinforcement
726 ratio to mitigate brittle fracture behavior in case of an overload. Refer to
727 ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie and spiral reinforcing
728 provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
729

I-16
730
731 3b. Detailing Requirements
732
733 Clear spacing between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing shall be a
734 minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38
735 mm).
736
738
739 4a. Limitations
740
741 (a) Filled composite sections shall be classified for local buckling
742 according to Section I1.4.
743
744 (b) The total cross sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least
745 1% of the total composite cross section
746
20 NE
747 c) Minimum longitudinal reinforcement is not required.
748
749 Where provided, the minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous
20 O
750 longitudinal reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
A
751 ρsr = sr (I3-4)
3, W
Ag
752 If longitudinal reinforcement is provided, internal transverse rein-
E
753 forcement is not required for strength; however, minimum internal
ST I
754 transverse reinforcement shall be provided for constructability. A

U EV
755 minimum of either a No. 3 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12

756 in. (300 mm) on center, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a
757 maximum of 16 in. (400 mm) on center shall be used. Deformed
G R
758 wire or welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area are permitted

759
AU IC
760 (d) The composite member, including the area of the steel section and
761 reinforcing steel, shall be tension controlled as defined in ACI 318.
BL
762
763 User Note: The effect of this limitation is to restrict the reinforcement
PU
764 ratio to mitigate brittle fracture behavior in case of an overload. Refer to

765 ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie, and spiral reinforcing
766 provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
767
768 4b. Flexural Strength
769
770 The available flexural strength of filled composite members shall be
772
773 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
774
775 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined as follows:
776
777 (a) For compact sections
778
779 Mn = M p (I3-3a)
780
781 where
782 Mp = moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over
783 the composite cross section, kip-in. (N-mm)

I-17
784
 λ −λp 
786 Mn = M p – (M p – M y )  (I3-3b)
 λr − λ p 
787
788 where
789 λ, λp and λr are width-to-thickness ratios determined from Table
790 I1.1b.
791 My = yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension
792 flange and first yield of the compression flange, kip-in.
793 (N-mm). The capacity at first yield shall be calculated
794 assuming a linear elastic stress distribution with the max-
795 imum concrete compressive stress limited to 0.7 f c′ and
796 the maximum steel stress limited to Fy.
797
798 (c) For slender sections, Mn, shall be determined as the first yield
20 NE
799 moment. The compression flange stress shall be limited to the local
800 buckling stress, Fcr, determined using Equation I2-10 or I2-11. The
801 concrete stress distribution shall be linear elastic with the maximum
20 O
802 compressive stress limited to 0.70f′c.
803
3, W
804 4c. Detailing Requirements
805
E
806 Clear spacing between the inside steel perimeter and longitudinal reinforc-
807 ing where provided shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters,
ST I
U EV
808 but not less than 1.5 in. (38 mm).

809
G R
811
812 The available flexural strength of filled composite plate shear walls shall be
AU IC
813 determined in accordance with section I1.2a as the moment, Mp, correspond-
814 ing to plastic stress distribution over the composite cross section.
BL
815
816 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
817
PU
818 I4. SHEAR

819
821
822 The design shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, shall
823 be determined based on one of the following:
824
825 (a) The available shear strength of the steel section alone as specified in
826 Chapter G
827
828 (b) The available shear strength of the reinforced concrete portion
829 (concrete plus steel reinforcement) alone as defined by ACI 318 with
830
831 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)
832
833 (c) The nominal shear strength of the steel section, as defined in Chapter
834 G, plus the nominal strength of the reinforcing steel, as defined by
835 ACI 318, with a combined resistance or safety factor of
836

I-18
837 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)

839
840 The design shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, shall
842
843 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)
844
845 The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall account for the contributions of the
846 steel section and concrete infill as follows:
847 Vn = 0.6 Av Fy + 0.06 K c Ac f c′ (I4-1)
848 where
20 NE
849 Av = Shear area of the steel portion of a composite member. The shear
850 area for a circular section is equal to 2As/π, and for a rectangular
851 section is equal to the sum of the area of webs in the direction of
20 O
852 in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2)
853 Ac = Area of concrete in filled composite member, in.2 (mm2)
3, W
854 As = Area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
855 Kc = 1 for members with shear span-to-depth (Mu/Vud) greater than or
E
856 equal to 0.7, where Mu and Vu are equal to the maximum moment
ST I
857 and shear demands, respectively, along the member length, and d is
U EV
858 equal to the member depth in the direction of bending

859 Kc = 10 for members with rectangular compact cross sections and
860 Mu/Vud less than 0.5
G R
861 Kc = 9 for members with circular compact cross sections and Mu/Vud
862 less than 0.5
AU IC
863 Kc = 1 for members having other than compact cross sections

864 f’c = concrete strength in ksi
BL
865
866 Linear interpolation between the above Kc values shall be used for members
867 with compact cross sections and Mu/Vud between 0.5 and 0.7.
PU
868
869 3. Composite Beams with Formed Steel Deck
870 The available shear strength of composite beams with steel headed stud or
871 steel channel anchors shall be determined based upon the properties of the
872 steel section alone in accordance with Chapter G.
873
875 The design in-plane shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv,
876 of composite plate shear walls shall be determined as follows:
877
878 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)
879
880 The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall account for the contributions of the
881 steel section and concrete infill as follows:
882

I-19
K s + K sc
883 Vn = Asw Fy (I4-2)
3 K s2 + K sc
2
884
885 where
886 Asw = area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear
887 G = shear modulus of steel, ksi (MPa)
888 K s = GAsw (I4-3)
0.7 ( Ec Ac )( Es Asw )
K sc =
889 4 Es Asw + Ec Ac (I4-4)
890
891
892 I5. COMBINED FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
893
894 The interaction between flexure and axial forces in composite members shall
895 account for stability as required by Chapter C. The available compressive
20 NE
896 strength and the available flexural strength shall be determined as defined in
897 Sections I2 and I3, respectively. To account for the influence of length effects
898 on the axial strength of the member, the nominal axial strength of the member
20 O
899 shall be determined in accordance with Section I2.
900
3, W
901 (a) For encased composite members and for filled composite members with
902 compact sections, the interaction between axial force and flexure shall be
E
903 based on the interaction equations of Section H1.1 or one of the methods
904 defined in Section I1.2.
ST I
U EV
905
906 (b) For filled composite members with noncompact or slender sections, the
907 interaction between axial force and flexure shall be based either on the
G R
908 interaction equations of Section H1.1, the method defined in Section

909 I1.2d, or Equations I5-1a and b.
AU IC
910
911 (1) When
Pr
≥ cp
BL
Pc
912
PU
Pr 1 − c p  M r 
913 + ≤ 1.0 (I5-1a)
Pc cm  M c 
914 (2) When

Pr
< cp
Pc
 1 − cm   Pr  M r
915    + ≤ 1.0 (I5-1b)
 c p   Pc  M c
916
917
Table I5.1
Coefficients cp and cm for Use with Equations I5-1a and I5-1b
Filled Composite cm
cp
Member Type when csr ≥ 0.5 when csr < 0.5
0.17 1.06 0.90

Rectangular cp = cm = ≥ 1.0 cm = ≤ 1.67
csr 0.4 csr 0.11 csr 0.36

I-20
0.27 1.10 0.95

Round HSS cp = cm = ≥ 1.0 cm = ≤ 1.67
csr 0.4 csr 0.08 csr 0.32
918
919 where
920 M c = available flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section
921 I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
922 M r = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section
923 I1.5, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
924 Pc = available axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2,
925 kips (N)
926 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with Section
927 I1.5, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
928
929 For design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD):
930 M c = φb M n = design flexural strength determined in accordance
20 NE
931 with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
932 M r = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with
933 Section I1.5, using LRFD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
20 O
934 mm)
935 Pc = φc Pn = design axial strength, determined in accordance
3, W
936 with Section I2, kips (N)
E
937 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with
938 Section I1.5, using LRFD load combinations, kips (N)
ST I
U EV
939 φ c = resistance factor for compression = 0.75

940 φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
G R
941
942 For design according to Section B3.2 (ASD):
AU IC
943 M c = M n Ω b = allowable flexural strength, determined in ac-

944 cordance with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
BL
945 M r = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with

946 Section I1.5, using ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
947 mm)
PU
948 Pc = Pn Ω c = allowable axial strength, determined in accord-

949 ance with Section I2, kips (N)
950 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with
951 Section I1.5, using ASD load combinations, kips (N)
952 Ωc = safety factor for compression = 2.00
953 Ωb = safety factor for flexure = 1.67
954
955 cm and cp are determined from Table I5.1
As Fy + Asr Fyr
956 csr = (I5-2)
Ac f c′
957 (c) For filled composite plate shear wall sections, the interaction between
958 axial force and flexure shall be based on methods defined in Section I1.2a
959 or I1.2d.
960
961 I6. LOAD TRANSFER
962
964

I-21
965 When external forces are applied to an axially loaded encased or filled
966 composite member, the introduction of force to the member and the transfer
967 of longitudinal shear within the member shall be assessed in accordance with
968 the requirements for force allocation presented in this section.
969
970 The available strength of the applicable force transfer mechanisms as
971 determined in accordance with Section I6.3 shall equal or exceed the required
972 longitudinal shear force to be transferred, Vr′ , as determined in accordance
973 with Section I6.2. Force transfer mechanisms shall be located within the load
974 transfer region as determined in accordance with Section I6.4.
975
976 2. Force Allocation
977
978 Force allocation shall be determined based upon the distribution of external
979 force in accordance with the following requirements.
980
981 User Note: Bearing strength provisions for externally applied forces are
20 NE
982 provided in Section J8. For filled composite members, the term A2 A1 in
983 Equation J8-2 may be taken equal to 2.0 due to confinement effects.
20 O
984
985 2a. External Force Applied to Steel Section
986
3, W
987 When the entire external force is applied directly to the steel section, the force
required to be transferred to the concrete, Vr′ , shall be determined as:
E
988
ST I
989
U EV
990 Vr′ = Pr (1– Fy As Pno ) (I6-1)

991
G R
992 where
993 Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of
AU IC
994 length effects, determined by Equation I2-4 for encased composite

995 members, and Equation I2-9a or Equation I2-9c, as applicable, for
BL
996 compact or noncompact filled composite members, kips (N)

997 Pr = required external force applied to the composite member, kips (N)
998
PU
999 User Note: Equation I6-1 does not apply to slender filled composite
1000 members for which the external force is applied directly to the concrete fill in
1001 accordance with Section I6.2b, or concurrently to the steel and concrete, in
1002 accordance with Section I6.2c.
1003
1004 2b. External Force Applied to Concrete
1005
1006 When the entire external force is applied directly to the concrete encasement
1007 or concrete fill, the force required to be transferred to the steel, Vr′ , shall be
1009
1010 (a) For encased or filled composite members that are compact or noncompact
1011
1012 Vr′ = Pr ( Fy As / Pno ) (I6-2a)
1013
1014 (b) For slender filled composite members
1015
1016 V r′ = Pr ( Fcr A s / Pno ) (I6-2b)

I-22
1017
1018 where
1019 Fcr = critical buckling stress for steel elements of filled composite
1020 members determined using Equation I2-10 or Equation I2-11,
1021 as applicable, ksi (MPa)
1022 Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of
1023 length effects, determined by Equation I2-4 for encased compo-
1024 site members, and Equation I2-9a for filled composite mem-
1025 bers, kips (N)
1026
1027 2c. External Force Applied Concurrently to Steel and Concrete
1028
1029 When the external force is applied concurrently to the steel section and
1030 concrete encasement or concrete fill, Vr′ shall be determined as the force
1031 required to establish equilibrium of the cross section.
1032
1033 User Note: The Commentary provides an acceptable method of determining
20 NE
1034 the longitudinal shear force required for equilibrium of the cross section.
1035
1036 3. Force Transfer Mechanisms
20 O
1037
1038 The available strength of the force transfer mechanisms of direct bond
3, W
1039 interaction, shear connection, and direct bearing shall be determined in
1040 accordance with this section. Use of the force transfer mechanism providing
E
1041 the largest nominal strength is permitted. Force transfer mechanisms shall not
1042 be superimposed.
ST I
U EV
1043
1044 The force transfer mechanism of direct bond interaction shall not be used for
1045 encased composite members or for filled composite members where bond
G R
1046 failure would result in uncontrolled slip.

1047
AU IC
1048 3a. Direct Bearing

1049
BL
1050 Where force is transferred in an encased or filled composite member by direct

1051 bearing from internal bearing mechanisms, the available bearing strength of
1052 the concrete for the limit state of concrete crushing shall be determined as:
PU
1053
1054 Rn = 1 .7 f c′ A1 (I6-3)
1055
1056 φB = 0.65 (LRFD) ΩB = 2.31 (ASD)
1057
1058 where
1059 A1 = loaded area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
1060
1061 User Note: An example of force transfer via an internal bearing mechanism is
1062 the use of internal steel plates within a filled composite member.
1063
1064 3b. Shear Connection
1065
1066 Where force is transferred in an encased or filled composite member by shear
1067 connection, the available shear strength of steel headed stud or steel channel
1068 anchors shall be determined as:
1069
1070 Rc = ΣQcv (I6-4)
1071

I-23
1072 where
1073 ΣQcv = sum of available shear strengths, φvQnv (LRFD) or Qnv/Ωv (ASD),
1074 as applicable, of steel headed stud or steel channel anchors, de-
1075 termined in accordance with Section I8.3a or Section I8.3d, re-
1076 spectively, placed within the load introduction length as defined
1077 in Section I6.4, kips (N)
1078
1079 3c. Direct Bond Interaction
1080
1081 Where force is transferred in a filled composite member by direct bond
1082 interaction, the available bond strength between the steel and concrete shall be
1084
1085 Rn = pbLinFin (I6-5)
1086
1087 φd = 0.50 (LRFD) Ω d = 3.00 (ASD)
1088
20 NE
1089 where
1091 Fin = nominal bond stress, ksi (MPa)
20 O
2 2
1092 = 12t H ≤ 0.1, ksi ( 2100t H ≤ 0.7, MPa) for rectangular cross
3, W
1093 sections
2 2
1094 = 30t D ≤ 0.2, ksi (5300t D ≤ 1.4, MPa) for circular cross sections
E
1095 H = maximum transverse dimension of rectangular steel member, in.

ST I
1096 (mm)
U EV
1097 Lin = load introduction length, determined in accordance with Section

1098 I6.4, in. (mm)
1099 = nominal bond strength, kips (N)
G R
Rn
1100 pb = perimeter of the steel-concrete bond interface within the composite
1101 cross section, in. (mm)
AU IC
1102 t = design wall thickness of HSS member as defined in Section B4.2,

1103 in. (mm)
BL
1104
1105 4. Detailing Requirements
PU
1106
1107 4a. Encased Composite Members
1108
1109 Force transfer mechanisms shall be distributed within the load introduction
1110 length, which shall not exceed a distance of two times the minimum
1111 transverse dimension of the encased composite member above and below the
1112 load transfer region. Anchors utilized to transfer longitudinal shear shall be
1113 placed on at least two faces of the steel shape in a generally symmetric
1114 configuration about the steel shape axes.
1115
1116 Steel anchor spacing, both within and outside of the load introduction length,
1117 shall conform to Section I8.3e.
1118
1119 4b. Filled Composite Members
1120
1121 Force transfer mechanisms shall be distributed within the load introduction
1122 length, which shall not exceed a distance of two times the minimum
1123 transverse dimension of a rectangular steel member or two times the diameter
1124 of a round steel member both above and below the load transfer region. For
1125 the specific case of load applied to the concrete of a filled composite member

I-24
1126 containing no internal reinforcement, the load introduction length shall

1127 extend beyond the load transfer region in only the direction of the applied
1128 force. Steel anchor spacing within the load introduction length shall conform
1129 to Section I8.3e.
1130
1131 I7. COMPOSITE DIAPHRAGMS AND COLLECTOR BEAMS
1132
1133 Composite slab diaphragms and collector beams shall be designed and
1134 detailed to transfer loads between the diaphragm, the diaphragm’s boundary
1135 members and collector elements, and elements of the lateral force-resisting
1136 system.
1137
1138 User Note: Design guidelines for composite diaphragms and collector beams
1139 can be found in the Commentary.
1140
1141 I8. STEEL ANCHORS
1142
20 NE
1143 1. General
1144
1145 The diameter of a steel headed stud anchor, dsa, shall be 3/4 in. (19 mm) or
20 O
1146 less, except where anchors are utilized solely for shear transfer in solid slabs
1147 in which case 7/8-in.- (2 mm) and 1-in.- (25 mm) diameter anchors are
3, W
1148 permitted. Additionally, dsa shall not be greater than 2.5 times the thickness
1149 of the base metal to which it is welded, unless it is welded to a flange directly
E
1150 over a web.
1151
ST I
U EV
1152 Section I8.2 applies to a composite flexural member where steel anchors are
1153 embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel deck.
1154 Section I8.3 applies to all other cases.
G R
1155
1156 2. Steel Anchors in Composite Beams
AU IC
1157
1158 The length of steel headed stud anchors shall not be less than four stud
BL
1159 diameters from the base of the steel headed stud anchor to the top of the stud
1160 head after installation.
1161
PU
1162 2a. Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors

1163
1164 The nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud anchor embedded in a
1165 solid concrete slab or in a composite slab with decking shall be determined as
1166 follows:
1167 Qn = 0.5 Asa fc′ Ec ≤ Rg Rp Asa Fu (I8-1)
1168
1169 where
1170 Asa = cross-sectional area of steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2)
1.5
1172 = wc fc′ , ksi ( 0.043w1.5
c fc′ , MPa)
1173 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud
1174 anchor, ksi (MPa)
1175 Rg = 1.0 for:
1176 (a) One steel headed stud anchor welded in a steel deck rib
1177 with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel shape
1178 (b) Any number of steel headed stud anchors welded in a row
1179 directly to the steel shape

I-25
1180 (c) Any number of steel headed stud anchors welded in a row
1181 through steel deck with the deck oriented parallel to the steel
1182 shape and the ratio of the average rib width to rib depth ≥ 1.5
1183 = 0.85 for:
1184 (a) Two steel headed stud anchors welded in a steel deck rib
1185 with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel shape
1186 (b) One steel headed stud anchor welded through steel deck
1187 with the deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and the ratio
1188 of the average rib width to rib depth < 1.5
1189 = 0.7 for three or more steel headed stud anchors welded in a
1190 steel deck rib with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel
1191 shape
1192 Rp = 0.75 for:
1193 (a) Steel headed stud anchors welded directly to the steel
1194 shape
1195 (b) Steel headed stud anchors welded in a composite slab
1196 with the deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht ≥
20 NE
1197 2 in. (50 mm)
1198 (c) Steel headed stud anchors welded through steel deck, or
1199 steel sheet used as girder filler material, and embedded in a
20 O
1200 composite slab with the deck oriented parallel to the beam
1201 = 0.6 for steel headed stud anchors welded in a composite slab
3, W
1202 with deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht < 2 in.
1203 (50 mm)
E
1204 emid-ht = distance from the edge of steel headed stud anchor shank to
1205 the steel deck web, measured at mid-height of the deck rib, and
ST I
U EV
1206 in the load bearing direction of the steel headed stud anchor (in
1207 other words, in the direction of maximum moment for a simply
1208 supported beam), in. (mm)
G R
1209
1210 User Note: The table below presents values for Rg and Rp for
AU IC
1211 several cases. Available strengths for steel headed stud anchors can
1212 be found in the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
BL
1213
Condition Rg Rp
PU
No decking 1.0 0.75

Decking oriented parallel
to the steel shape
wr
≥ 1.5 1.0 0.75
hr
wr
< 1.5 0.85[a] 0.75
hr
Decking oriented perpendicular
to the steel shape
Number of steel headed stud
anchors occupying the same
decking rib:
1 1.0 0.6[b]
2 0.85 0.6[b]
3 or more 0.7 0.6[b]
hr = nominal rib height, in. (mm)
wr = average width of concrete rib or haunch (as defined in Section I3.2c),
in. (mm)
[a]
For a single steel headed stud anchor
[b]
This value may be increased to 0.75 when emid-ht ≥ 2 in. (50 mm).

I-26
1214
1215 2b. Strength of Steel Channel Anchors
1216
1217 The nominal shear strength of one hot-rolled channel anchor embedded in a
1218 solid concrete slab shall be determined as:
1219 Qn = 0.3(t f + 0.5tw )la fc′Ec (I8-2)
1220 where
1221 la = length of channel anchor, in. (mm)
1222 tf = thickness of flange of channel anchor, in. (mm)
1223 tw = thickness of channel anchor web, in. (mm)
1224
1225 The strength of the channel anchor shall be developed by welding the channel
1226 to the beam flange for a force equal to Qn, considering eccentricity on the
1227 anchor.
1228
1229 2c. Required Number of Steel Anchors
20 NE
1230
1231 The number of anchors required between the section of maximum bending
1232 moment, positive or negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall
20 O
1233 be equal to the horizontal shear as determined in Sections I3.2d.1 and I3.2d.2
1234 divided by the nominal shear strength of one steel anchor as determined from
3, W
1235 Section I8.2a or Section I8.2b. The number of steel anchors required between
1236 any concentrated load and the nearest point of zero moment shall be sufficient
E
1237 to develop the maximum moment required at the concentrated load point.
ST I
1238
U EV
1239 2d. Detailing Requirements

1240
1241 Steel anchors in composite beams shall meet the following requirements:
G R
1242
1243 (a) Steel anchors required on each side of the point of maximum bending
AU IC
1244 moment, positive or negative, shall be distributed uniformly between that

1245 point and the adjacent points of zero moment, unless specified otherwise
BL
1246 on the contract documents.

1247
PU
1248 (b) Steel anchors shall have at least 1 in. (25 mm) of lateral concrete cover in
1249 the direction perpendicular to the shear force, except for anchors installed in
1250 the ribs of formed steel decks.
1251
1252 (c) The minimum distance from the center of a steel anchor to a free edge in the
1253 direction of the shear force shall be 8 in. (200 mm) if normal weight concrete is used
1254 and 10 in. (250 mm) if lightweight concrete is used. The provisions of ACI 318
1255 Chapter 17 are permitted to be used in lieu of these values.
1256
1257 (d) Minimum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall be
1258 four diameters in any direction. For composite beams that do not contain
1259 anchors located within formed steel deck oriented perpendicular to the
1260 beam span, an additional minimum spacing limit of six diameters along
1261 the longitudinal axis of the beam shall apply.
1262
1263 (e) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel anchors shall not exceed
1264 eight times the total slab thickness or 36 in. (900 mm).
1265
1266 3. Steel Anchors in Composite Components
1267

I-27
1268 This section shall apply to the design of cast-in-place steel headed stud
1269 anchors and steel channel anchors in composite components.
1270
1271 The provisions of the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17 are
1272 permitted to be used in lieu of the provisions in this section.
1273
1274 User Note: The steel headed stud anchor strength provisions in this section
1275 are applicable to anchors located primarily in the load transfer (connection)
1276 region of composite columns and beam-columns, concrete-encased and filled
1277 composite beams, composite coupling beams, and composite walls, where the
1278 steel and concrete are working compositely within a member. They are not
1279 intended for hybrid construction where the steel and concrete are not working
1280 compositely, such as with embed plates.
1281
1282 Section I8.2 specifies the strength of steel anchors embedded in a solid
1283 concrete slab or in a concrete slab with formed steel deck in a composite
1284 beam.
20 NE
1285
1286 Limit states for the steel shank of the anchor and for concrete breakout in
1287 shear are covered directly in this Section. Additionally, the spacing and
20 O
1288 dimensional limitations provided in these provisions preclude the limit states
1289 of concrete pryout for anchors loaded in shear and concrete breakout for
1290 anchors loaded in tension as defined by ACI 318 Chapter 17.
3, W
1291
1292 For normal weight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors subjected to shear only
E
1293 shall not be less than five stud diameters in length from the base of the steel
ST I
1294 headed stud to the top of the stud head after installation. Steel headed stud
U EV
1295 anchors subjected to tension or interaction of shear and tension shall not be
1296 less than eight stud diameters in length from the base of the stud to the top of
G R
1297 the stud head after installation.

1298
AU IC
1299 For lightweight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors subjected to shear only
1300 shall not be less than seven stud diameters in length from the base of the steel
1301 headed stud to the top of the stud head after installation. Steel headed stud
BL
1302 anchors subjected to tension shall not be less than ten stud diameters in length
1303 from the base of the stud to the top of the stud head after installation. The
PU
1304 nominal strength of steel headed stud anchors subjected to interaction of shear
1305 and tension for lightweight concrete shall be determined as stipulated by the
1306 applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1307
1308 Steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or interaction of shear and
1309 tension shall have a diameter of the head greater than or equal to 1.6 times the
1310 diameter of the shank.
1311
1312 User Note: The following table presents values of minimum steel headed
1313 stud anchor h/d ratios for each condition covered in this Specification.
1314
Loading Normal Weight Lightweight
Condition Concrete Concrete
Shear h d sa ≥ 5 h d sa ≥ 7
Tension h d sa ≥ 8 h d sa ≥ 10
Shear and
h d sa ≥ 8 N/A[a]
Tension
h d sa = ratio of steel headed stud anchor shank length to the top of
the stud head, to shank diameter.

I-28
[a]
Refer to ACI 318 Chapter 17 for the calculation of interaction
effects of anchors embedded in lightweight concrete.
1315
1316
1317 3a. Shear Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors in Composite Components
1318
1319 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is not an applicable limit state, the
1320 design shear strength, φvQnv, and allowable shear strength, Qnv/Ωv, of one steel
1321 headed stud anchor shall be determined as:
1322
1323 Qnv = Fu Asa (I8-3)
1324
1325 φv = 0.65 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.31 (ASD)
1326
1327 where
1328 Asa = cross-sectional area of a steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2)
1329 = specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud
20 NE
Fu
1330 anchor, ksi (MPa)
1331 Qnv = nominal shear strength of a steel headed stud anchor, kips (N)
1332
20 O
1333 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is an applicable limit state, the
1334 available shear strength of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined
3, W
1335 by one of the following:
1336
E
1337 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318
ST I
1338 on both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
U EV
1339 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal shear strength from Equation
1340 I8-3 and the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used
G R
1341 for the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud anchor.
1342 (b) As stipulated by the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1343
AU IC
1344 User Note: If concrete breakout strength in shear is an applicable limit state
1345 (for example, where the breakout prism is not restrained by an adjacent steel
BL
1346 plate, flange or web), appropriate anchor reinforcement is required for the
1347 provisions of this Section to be used. Alternatively, the provisions of the
PU
1348 applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17 may be used.

1349
1350 3b. Tensile Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors in Composite
1351 Components
1352
1353 Where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
1354 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is
1355 greater than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1356 measured to the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-center spacing
1357 of steel headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three times the height
1358 of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud head, the
1359 available tensile strength of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined
1360 as:
1361 Qnt = Fu Asa (I8-4)
1362
1363 φt = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωt = 2.00 (ASD)
1364
1365 where
1366 Qnt = nominal tensile strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N)

I-29
1367
1368 Where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
1369 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is less
1370 than 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
1371 of the stud head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
1372 anchors is less than three times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1373 measured to the top of the stud head, the nominal tensile strength of one steel
1374 headed stud anchor shall be determined by one of the following:
1375
1376 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318 on
1377 both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
1378 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal tensile strength from Equation
1380 for the nominal tensile strength, Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor.
1382
1383 User Note: Supplemental confining reinforcement is recommended around
20 NE
1384 the anchors for steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or interaction of
1385 shear and tension to avoid edge effects or effects from closely spaced anchors.
1386 See the Commentary and ACI 318 for guidelines.
20 O
1387
1388 3c. Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors for Interaction of Shear and
1389 Tension in Composite Components
3, W
1390
1391 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is not a governing limit state, and
E
1392 where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
ST I
1393 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is
U EV
1394 greater than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1395 measured to the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-center spacing
G R
1396 of steel headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three times the height
1397 of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud head, the
AU IC
1398 nominal strength for interaction of shear and tension of one steel headed stud
1399 anchor shall be determined as:
1400
BL
5/3 5/3
 Qrt  Q 
1401   +  rv  ≤ 1.0 (I8-5)
PU
 Qct   Qcv 
1402 where
1403 Qct = available tensile strength, determined in accordance with Section
1404 I8.3b, kips (N)
1405 Qrt = required tensile strength, kips (N)
1406 Qcv = available shear strength, determined in accordance with Section
1407 I8.3a, kips (N)
1408 Qrv = required shear strength, kips (N)
1409
1410
1411 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is a governing limit state, or where
1412 the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in the
1413 direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is less
1414 than 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
1415 of the stud head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
1416 anchors is less than three times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1417 measured to the top of the stud head, the nominal strength for interaction of
1418 shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined by one
1419 of the following:
1420

I-30
1421 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318 on
1422 both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
1423 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal shear strength from Equation
1425 for the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud anchor, and
1426 the minimum of the steel nominal tensile strength from Equation I8-4 and
1427 the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used for the
1428 nominal tensile strength, Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor for use in
1429 Equation I8-5.
1431
1432 3d. Shear Strength of Steel Channel Anchors in Composite Components
1433
1434 The available shear strength of steel channel anchors shall be based on the
1435 provisions of Section I8.2b with the following resistance factor and safety
1436 factor:
1437
20 NE
1438 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)
1439
1440 3e. Detailing Requirements in Composite Components
20 O
1441
1442 Steel anchors in composite components shall meet the following require-
1443 ments:
3, W
1444
1445 (a) Minimum concrete cover to steel anchors shall be in accordance with ACI
E
1446 318 provisions for concrete protection of headed shear stud reinforcement.
ST I
U EV
1447
1448 (b) Minimum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall be
1449 four diameters in any direction.
G R
1450
1451 (c) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall
AU IC
1452 not exceed 32 times the shank diameter.

1453
BL
1454 (d) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel channel anchors shall be
1455 24 in. (600 mm).
1456
PU
1457 User Note: Detailing requirements provided in this section are absolute
1458 limits. See Sections I8.3a, I8.3b, and I8.3c for additional limitations required
1459 to preclude edge and group effect considerations.
1460
1461 4. Performance Based Alternative for the Design of Shear Connection
1462
1463 In lieu of shear connection prescribed by, and the corresponding strength
1464 determined per, Sections I8.1 through I8.3, it shall be permitted to use an
1465 alternate form of shear connection and determine its strength through testing,
1466 provided its performance requirements are established in accordance with
1467 Sections I8.4a through I8.4d. The geometric limitations of Sections I8.1
1468 through I8.3 do not apply to the performance evaluated by Section I8.4.
1469
1470 4a. Test Standard
1471
1472 Shear connection strength, slip capacity, and stiffness shall be established
1473 using AISI S923. An alternative test protocol may be used in the evaluation
1474 when approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
1475
1476

I-31
1477 4b. Nominal and Available Strength

1478
1479 When determining available strength of a flexural member, the nominal tested
1480 strength of shear connection, Qne, shall be taken as 0.85 times the mean tested
1481 strength determined per Section I8.4a. When required, the design shear
1482 strength, φQne, and the available shear strength, Qne/Ω, shall be determined per
1483 Section I8.3a. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to take Qne as the mean
1484 tested strength provided φQne or Qne/Ω , as applicable, is determined on the
1485 basis of a reliability analysis.
1486
1487 User Note: An approach for establishing available strength using test data is
1488 provided in Chapter K of ANSI/AISI S100.
1489
1490 4c. Shear Connection Slip Capacity
1491
1492 The nominal shear connection slip capacity shall be taken as the average shear
1493 connection slip corresponding to each specific tested shear connection
20 NE
1494 configuration. Shear connection slip capacity shall be measured at no less than
1495 95% of the post-peak strength.
1496
20 O
1497 4d. Acceptance Criteria
1498
3, W
1499 The design using tested properties of the shear connection per Section I8.4a
1500 through I8.4c shall be limited to the geometric and material properties tested.
E
1501 The nominal performance characteristics are permitted to be used in design
1502 provided either the conditions (1), (2), and (3) are satisfied, or the condition
ST I
U EV
1503 (4) is, met.

1504
1505 (1) The maximum permitted coefficient of variation corresponding to each
G R
1506 tested configuration of shear connection does not exceed 0.09 established
1507 over four replicate tests, or 0.15 established over nine replicate tests. It is
AU IC
1508 permitted, for this purpose, to establish the number of tests using all tests
1509 of the same type of shear connection that exhibit the same failure mode.
BL
1510
1511 (2) The nominal shear connection slip capacity is at least 0.25 in. (6 mm).
1512
PU
1513 (3) The minimum shear elastic stiffness of the shear connection shall not be
1514 less than 2,000 kip/in. (180 N/mm).
1515
1516 (4) Shear connections corresponding to the values of shear connection elastic
1517 stiffness, coefficient of variation, and slip capacity other than those
1518 stipulated in conditions (1), (2), and (3) shall be deemed acceptable,
1519 provided their effect is captured in the design. In lieu of using in an
1520 analysis the shear connection elastic stiffness determined per this Section,
1521 it shall be permitted to establish the stiffness of a composite section,
1522 incorporating shear connection evaluated by this Section, directly through
1523 testing using AISI S924. When stiffness of a composite section is
1524 established using AISI S924, it shall be a mean tested value established
1525 using at least three tests.
1526

J-1
1 CHAPTER J
2 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
3
4 This chapter addresses connecting elements, connectors. and the affected elements
5 of connected members not subject to fatigue loads.
6
8
9 J1. General Provisions
10 J2. Welds
11 J3. Bolts and Threaded Parts
12 J4. Affected Elements of Members and Connecting Elements
13 J5. Fillers
14 J6. Splices
15 J7. Bearing Strength
20 NE
16 J8. Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
17 J9. Anchor Rods and Embedments
18 J10. Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces
20 O
19
3, W
21 • Chapter K Additional Requirements for HSS and Box-Section Connections
22 • Appendix 3 Fatigue
E
23
24 J1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
ST I
U EV
25
26 1. Design Basis
27
G R
28 The design strength, φRn, and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of connections
29 shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this chapter and the
AU IC
30 provisions of Chapter B.
31
BL
32 The required strength of the connections shall be determined by structural

33 analysis for the specified design loads, consistent with the type of construc-
34 tion specified, or shall be a proportion of the required strength of the
PU
35 connected members when so specified herein.

36
37 Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded members do not
38 intersect at one point, the effects of eccentricity shall be considered.
39
40 2. Simple Connections
41
42 Simple connections of beams, girders and trusses shall be designed as flexible
43 and are permitted to be proportioned for the reaction shears only, except as
44 otherwise indicated in the design documents. Flexible beam connections shall
45 accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic but self-limiting
46 deformation in the connection is permitted to accommodate the end rotation
47 of a simple beam.
48
49 3. Moment Connections
50
51 End connections of restrained beams, girders and trusses shall be designed for
52 the combined effect of forces resulting from moment and shear induced by the
53 rigidity of the connections. Response criteria for moment connections are
54 provided in Section B3.4b.

J-2
55
56 User Note: See Chapter C and Appendix 7 for analysis requirements to
57 establish the required strength for the design of connections.
58
59 4. Compression Members with Bearing Joints
60
61 Compression members relying on bearing for load transfer shall meet the
62 following requirements:
63
64 (a) For columns bearing on bearing plates or finished to bear at splices, there
65 shall be sufficient connectors to hold all parts in place.
66
67 (b) For compression members other than columns finished to bear, the splice
68 material and its connectors shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and
69 their required strength shall be the lesser of:
70
71 (1) An axial tensile force equal to 50% of the required compressive
20 NE
72 strength of the member; or
73 (2) The moment and shear resulting from a transverse load equal to 2%
74 of the required compressive strength of the member. The trans-
20 O
75 verse load shall be applied at the location of the splice exclusive of
76 other loads that act on the member. The member shall be taken as
77 pinned for the determination of the shears and moments at the
3, W
78 splice.
79
E
80 User Note: All compression joints should also be proportioned to resist any
ST I
81 tension developed by the load combinations stipulated in Section B2.

U EV
82
83 5. Splices in Heavy Sections
G R
84
85 When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to be transmitted
AU IC
86 through splices in heavy sections, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d, by

87 complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds, the following provisions
88 apply: (a) material notch-toughness requirements as given in Sections A3.1c
BL
89 and A3.1d; (b) weld access hole details as given in Section J1.6; (c) filler
90 metal requirements as given in Section J2.6; and (d) thermal cut surface
PU
91 preparation and inspection requirements as given in Section M2.2. The

92 foregoing provision is not applicable to splices of elements of built-up shapes
93 that are welded prior to assembling the shape.
94
95 User Note: CJP groove welded splices of heavy sections can exhibit
96 detrimental effects of weld shrinkage. Members that are sized for compression
97 that are also subject to tensile forces may be less susceptible to damage from
98 shrinkage if they are spliced using partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove welds
99 on the flanges and fillet-welded web plates, or using bolts for some or all of
100 the splice.
101
102 6. Weld Access Holes
103
104 Weld access holes shall meet the following requirements:
105
106 (a) All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall be
107 detailed to provide room for weld backing as needed.
108

J-3
109 (b) The access hole shall have a length from the toe of the weld preparation
110 not less than 1-1/2 times the thickness of the material in which the hole is
111 made, nor less than 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).
112
113 (c) The access hole shall have a height not less than the thickness of the
114 material with the access hole, nor less than 3/4 in. (19 mm), nor does it
115 need to exceed 2 in. (50 mm).
116
117 (d) For sections that are rolled or welded prior to cutting, the edge of the web
118 shall be sloped or curved from the surface of the flange to the reentrant
119 surface of the access hole.
120
121 (e) In hot-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove welds that join
122 the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall be free of notches and sharp
123 reentrant corners.
124
125 (f) No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius less than 3/8 in. (10
20 NE
126 mm).
127
128 (g) In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove
20 O
129 welds that join the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall be free of
130 notches and sharp reentrant corners.
131
3, W
132 (h) The access hole is permitted to terminate perpendicular to the flange,
133 providing the weld is terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size
E
134 away from the access hole.

ST I
135
U EV
136 (i) For heavy shapes, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d, the thermally
137 cut surfaces of weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal.
G R
138
139 (j) If the curved transition portion of weld access holes is formed by predrilled
AU IC
140 or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole need not be ground.
141
142 7. Placement of Welds and Bolts
BL
143
144 Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member that transmit axial force
PU
145 into that member shall be sized so that the center of gravity of the group
146 coincides with the center of gravity of the member, unless provision is made
147 for the eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to end
148 connections of single-angle, double-angle and similar members.
149
150 8. Bolts in Combination with Welds
151 Bolts shall not be considered as sharing the load in combination with welds,
152 except in the design of shear connections on a common faying surface where
153 strain compatibility between the bolts and welds is considered.
154 It is permitted to determine the available strength, φRn and Rn/Ω, as

155 applicable, of a joint combining the strengths of high-strength bolts and
156 longitudinal fillet welds as the sum of (1) the nominal slip resistance, Rn, for
157 bolts as defined in Equation J3-4 according to the requirements of a slip-
158 critical connection and (2) the nominal weld strength, Rn, as defined in
159 Section J2.4, when the following apply:
160 (a) φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 2.00 (ASD) for the combined joint.

J-4
161 (b) When the high-strength bolts are pretensioned according to the
162 requirements of Table J3.1 or Table J3.1M, using the turn-of-nut or
163 combined method, the longitudinal fillet welds shall have an available
164 strength of not less than 50% of the required strength of the connection.
165 (c) When the high-strength bolts are pretensioned according to the
166 requirements of Table J3.1 or Table J3.1M, using any method other than
167 the turn-of-nut method, the longitudinal fillet welds shall have an availa-
168 ble strength of not less than 70% of the required strength of the connec-
169 tion.
170 (d) The high-strength bolts shall have an available strength of not less than
171 33% of the required strength of the connection.
172
173 In joints with combined bolts and longitudinal welds, the strength of the
174 connection need not be taken as less than either the strength of the bolts alone
175 or the strength of the welds alone.
176
177 9. Welded Alterations to Structures with Existing Rivets or Bolts
20 NE
178
179 In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and high-strength
180 bolts in standard or short-slotted holes transverse to the direction of load, and
20 O
181 tightened to the requirements of slip-critical connections are permitted to be
182 utilized for resisting loads present at the time of alteration, and the welding
183 need only provide the additional required strength. The weld available
3, W
184 strength shall provide the additional required strength, but not less than 25%
185 of the required strength of the connection.
E
186
ST I
187 User Note: The provisions of this section are generally recommended for
U EV
188 alteration in building designs or for field corrections. Use of the combined
189 strength of bolts and welds on a common faying surface is not recommended
G R
190 for new design.

191
AU IC
192 10. High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Rivets

193
194 In connections designed as slip-critical connections in accordance with the
BL
195 provisions of Section J3, high-strength bolts are permitted to be considered as

196 sharing the load with existing rivets.
PU
197
198 J2. WELDS AND WELDED JOINTS
199
200 All provisions of the Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M),
201 hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1/D1.1M, apply under this Specification,
202 with the exception that the provisions of the listed Specification sections
203 apply under this Specification in lieu of the cited AWS provisions as follows:
204
205 (a) Section J1.6 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 5.16
206 (b) Section J2.2a in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clauses 2.4.2.10 and 2.4.4.4
207 (c) Table J2.2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.1
208 (d) Table J2.5 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.3
209 (e) Appendix 3, Table A-3.1 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.5
210 (f) Section B3.11 and Appendix 3 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 2, Part
211 C
212 (g) Section M2.2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clauses 5.14 and 5.15
213
214 1. Groove Welds
215

J-5
216 1a. Effective Area

217
218 The effective area of groove welds shall be taken as the length of the weld
219 times the effective throat.
220
221 The effective throat of a CJP groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner
222 part joined.
223
224 When filled flush to the surface, the effective weld throat for a PJP groove
225 weld shall be as given in Table J2.1 and the effective weld throat for a flare
226 groove weld shall be as given in Table J2.2. The effective throat of a PJP
227 groove weld or flare groove weld filled less than flush shall be as shown in
228 Table J2.1 or Table J2.2, less the greatest perpendicular dimension measured
229 from a line flush to the base metal surface to the weld surface.
230
231 User Note: The effective throat of a PJP groove weld is dependent on the
232 process used and the weld position. The design documents should either
20 NE
233 indicate the effective throat required or the weld strength required, and the
234 fabricator should detail the joint based on the weld process and position to be
235 used to weld the joint.
20 O
236
237 For PJP groove welds effective throats larger than those for prequalified PJP
238 groove welds in AWS D1.1/D1.1M Figure 3.2 and flare groove welds in Table
3, W
239 J2.2 are permitted for a given welding procedure specification (WPS),
240 provided the fabricator establishes by testing the consistent production of such
E
241 larger effective throat. Testing shall consist of sectioning the weld normal to
ST I
242 its axis, at mid-length, and at terminal ends. Such sectioning shall be made on
U EV
243 a number of combinations of material sizes representative of the range to be

244 used in the fabrication. During production of welds with increased effective
G R
245 throats, single pass and the root pass of multi-pass welds shall be made using a
246 mechanized, automatic, or robotic process, with no decrease in current or
AU IC
247 increase in travel speed from that used for testing.

248
249 1b. Limitations
BL
250
251 The minimum effective throat of a partial-joint-penetration groove weld shall
PU
252 not be less than the size required to transmit calculated forces nor the size
253 shown in Table J2.3. Minimum weld size is determined by the thinner of the
254 two parts joined.
255
TABLE J2.1
Effective Throat of
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
Welding Position
F (flat),
H (horizontal), Groove Type
V (vertical), (AWS D1.1, Effective
Welding Process OH (overhead) Figure 3.3) Throat
Shielded metal arc J or U groove
(SMAW) depth of
All
Gas metal arc (GMAW) 60° V groove
Flux cored arc (FCAW)
J or U groove
Submerged arc (SAW) F
60° bevel or V
45° bevel depth of
Gas metal arc (GMAW) F, H

J-6
Flux cored arc (FCAW) groove
Shielded metal arc depth of

All
(SMAW) groove
45° bevel
Gas metal arc (GMAW) minus 1/8 in.
V, OH
Flux cored arc (FCAW) (3 mm)
256
257
TABLE J2.2
Effective Throat of
Flare Groove Welds
Welding Process Flare Bevel Groove[a] Flare V-Groove
GMAW and FCAW-G 5/8R 3/4R
SMAW and FCAW-S 5/16R 5/8R
SAW 5/16R 1/2R
[a]
For flare bevel groove with R < 3/8 in. (10 mm), use only reinforcing fillet weld on
filled flush joint.
20 NE
General note: R = radius of joint surface (is permitted to be assumed equal to 2t for
HSS)
258
20 O
259
TABLE J2.3
3, W
Minimum Effective Throat of
E
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
ST I
Material Thickness of Minimum Effective

U EV
Thinner Part Joined, in. (mm) Throat,[a] in. (mm)

To 1/4 (6) inclusive 1/8 (3)
Over 1/4 (6) to 1/2 (13) 3/16 (5)
G R
Over 1/2 (13) to 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6)

Over 3/4 (19) to 1-1/2 (38) 5/16 (8)
AU IC
Over 1-1/2 (38) to 2-1/4 (57) 3/8 (10)

Over 2-1/4 (57) to 6 (150) 1/2 (13)
Over 6 (150) 5/8 (16)
BL
[a]
See Table J2.1.
260
PU
261
262 2. Fillet Welds
263
265 The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied by
266 the effective throat. The effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest
267 distance from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld. An increase in
268 effective throat is permitted if consistent penetration beyond the root of the
269 diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using a given welding procedure
270 specification (WPS), provided the fabricator establishes by testing the
271 consistent production of such larger effective throat. Testing shall consist of
272 sectioning the weld normal to its axis, at mid-length, and terminal ends.
273 During production, single pass welds and the root pass of multi-pass welds
274 shall be made using a mechanized, automatic or robotic process, with no
275 decrease in current or increase in travel speed from that used for testing.
276
277 For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of
278 the centerline of the weld along the center of the plane through the throat. In

J-7
279 the case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal
280 cross-sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the faying surface.
281
282 2b. Limitations
283
284 Fillet welds shall meet the following limitations:
285
286 (a) The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not less than the size required to
287 transmit calculated forces, nor the size as shown in Table J2.4. These
288 limitations do not apply to fillet weld reinforcements of groove welds.
289
290 TABLE J2.4
291 Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
292
Material Thickness of Minimum Size of
Thinner Part Joined, in. (mm) Fillet Weld,[a] in. (mm)
To 1/4 (6) inclusive 1/8 (3)
20 NE
Over 1/4 (6) to 1/2 (13) 3/16 (5)
Over 1/2 (13) to 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6)
Over 3/4 (19) 5/16 (8)
20 O
[a]
Leg dimension of fillet welds. When non-low hydrogen electrodes are used single
pass welds must be used.
3, W
Note: See Section J2.2b for maximum size of fillet welds.
293
E
294 (b) The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall be:
295
ST I
U EV
296 (1) Along edges of material less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick; not greater
297 than the thickness of the material.
298
G R
299 (2) Along edges of material 1/4 in. (6 mm) or more in thickness; not
300 greater than the thickness of the material minus 1/16 in. (2 mm), un-
AU IC
301 less the weld is especially designated on the design and fabrication
302 documents to be built out to obtain full-throat thickness. In the as-
BL
303 welded condition, the distance between the edge of the base metal
304 and the toe of the weld is permitted to be less than 1/16 in. (2 mm),
305 provided the weld size is clearly verifiable.
PU
306
307 (c) The minimum length of fillet welds designed on the basis of strength shall be
308 not less than four times the nominal weld size, or else the effective size of
309 the weld shall not be taken to exceed one-quarter of its length.
310
311 (d) The effective length of fillet welds shall be determined as follows:
312
313 (1) For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 times the weld
314 size, it is permitted to take the effective length equal to the actual
315 length.
316
317 (2) When the length of the end-loaded fillet weld exceeds 100 times the
318 weld size, the effective length shall be determined by multiplying
319 the actual length by the reduction factor, β, determined as:
320
321 β = 1.2 – 0.002(l/w) ≤ 1.0 (J2-1)
322
323 where
324 l = actual length of end-loaded weld, in. (mm)

J-8
325 w = size of weld leg, in. (mm)

326
327 (3) When the length of the weld exceeds 300 times the leg size, w, the
328 effective length shall be taken as 180w.
329
330 User Note: For the effect of longitudinal fillet weld length in end connec-
331 tions upon the effective area of the connected member see Section D3.
332
333 (e) Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to be used to transfer calculated
334 stress across a joint or faying surfaces and to join components of built-up
335 members. The length of any segment of intermittent fillet welding shall be not
336 less than four times the weld size, with a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).
337
338 (f) In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be five times the thickness
339 of the thinner part joined, but not less than 1 in. (25 mm). Lap joints joining
340 plates or bars subjected to axial stress that utilize transverse fillet welds only
341 shall be fillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except where the
342 deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent opening of
20 NE
343 the joint under maximum loading.
344
345 (g) Fillet weld terminations shall be detailed in a manner that does not result
20 O
346 in a notch in the base metal subject to applied tension loads. Components
347 shall not be connected by welds where the weld would prevent the
3, W
348 deformation required to provide assumed design conditions.
349
E
350 User Note: Fillet weld terminations should be detailed in a manner that does
ST I
351 not result in a notch in the base metal transverse to applied tension loads that
U EV
352 can occur as a result of normal fabrication. An accepted practice to avoid

353 notches in base metal is to stop fillet welds short of the edge of the base metal
G R
354 by a length approximately equal to the size of the weld. In most welds, the
355 effect of stopping short can be neglected in strength calculations.
356
AU IC
357 There are two common details where welds are terminated short of the end of
358 the joint to permit relative deformation between the connected parts:
BL
359
360 • Welds on the outstanding legs of beam clip-angle connections are
PU
361 returned on the top of the outstanding leg and stopped no more than 4
362 times the weld size and not greater than half the leg width from the outer
363 toe of the angle.
364 • Fillet welds connecting transverse stiffeners to webs of girders that are ¾
365 in. thick or less are stopped 4 to 6 times the web thickness from the web
366 toe of the flange-to web fillet weld, except where the end of the stiffener
367 is welded to the flange.
368
369 Details of fillet weld terminations may be shown on shop standard details.
370
371
372 (h) Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be used to transmit shear and
373 resist loads perpendicular to the faying surface in lap joints or to prevent the
374 buckling or separation of lapped parts and to join components of built-up
375 members. Such fillet welds are permitted to overlap, subject to the provisions
376 of Section J2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered plug or
377 slot welds.
378

J-9
379 (i) For fillet welds in slots, the ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall
380 have the corners rounded to a radius of not less than the thickness of the part
381 containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
382
383 3. Plug and Slot Welds
384
386
387 The effective shear area of plug and slot welds shall be taken as the nominal
388 area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
389
390 3b. Limitations
391
392 Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear in lap joints, or to
393 prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts, and to join component parts of
394 built-up members, subject to the following limitations:
395
20 NE
396 (a)The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not be less than the
397 thickness of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded to the next
398 larger odd 1/16 in. (even mm), nor greater than the minimum diameter plus
20 O
399 1/8 in. (3 mm) or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the weld.
400
401 (b) The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall be four times
3, W
402 the diameter of the hole.
403
E
404 (c) The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of
ST I
405 the weld.

U EV
406
407 (d) The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part
G R
408 containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm) rounded to the next larger odd 1/16 in.
409 (even mm), nor shall it be larger than 2-1/4 times the thickness of the weld.
AU IC
410
411 (e) The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded
412 to a radius of not less than the thickness of the part containing it.
BL
413
414 (f) The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to
PU
415 their length shall be four times the width of the slot.
416
417 (g) The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any
418 line shall be two times the length of the slot.
419
420 (h) The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less in
421 thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over 5/8
422 in. (16 mm) thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least one-half the
423 thickness of the material, but not less than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
424
425 4. Strength
426
427 (a) The design strength, φRn and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of welded
428 joints shall be the lower value of the base material strength determined
429 according to the limit states of tensile rupture and shear rupture and the
430 weld metal strength determined according to the limit state of rupture as
431 follows:
432
433 For the base metal
434 Rn = FnBM ABM (J2-2)

J-10
435
436 For the weld metal
437 Rn = FnwAwe (J2-3)
438
439 where
440 ABM = area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2)
441 Awe = effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2)
442 FnBM = nominal stress of the base metal, ksi (MPa)
443 Fnw = nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa)
444
445 The values of φ, Ω, FnBM and Fnw, and limitations thereon, are given in
446 Table J2.5.
447
448
449
450
20 NE
451
452
453
20 O
454
455
3, W
456
457
E
458
ST I
459
U EV
460
461
462
G R
463
464
AU IC
465
466
BL
467
468
PU
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484

J-11
TABLE J2.5
Available Strength of Welded Joints, ksi (MPa)
Effective
Nominal Required
Area
Load Type and Direction Pertinent Stress Filler Metal
φ and Ω (ABM or
Relative to Weld Axis Metal (FnBM or Fnw), Awe), Strength
[a][b]
ksi (MPa) 2 2 Level
in. (mm )
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Matching
filler metal
shall be
used. For T-
and corner-
Strength of the joint is controlled
joints with
Tension– by the base metal.
backing left
Normal to weld axis in place,
notch tough
20 NE
filler metal is
required.
See Section
20 O
J2.6.
Filler metal
3, W
with a
strength
E
level equal
Strength of the joint is controlled
to or one
by the base metal.
ST I
Compression– strength
U EV
Normal to weld axis level less

than
matching
G R
filler metal
is permitted.
AU IC
Filler metal
with a
BL
strength
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to level equal
Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of to or less
PU
Parallel to weld axis welds joining the parts. than

matching
filler metal is
permitted.
Matching
Strength of the joint is controlled filler metal
Shear by the base metal. shall be
[c]
used.
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING FLARE V-GROOVE
AND FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS
φ = 0.75
Base Fu See J4
Tension– Ω = 2.00
Normal to weld axis φ = 0.80 See
Weld 0.60 FEXX
Ω = 1.88 J2.1a

J-12
Compression–
Connections of Members Compressive stress is permitted to be neglected
designed to bear as in design of welds joining the parts.
described in Section
J1.4(b)
φ = 0.90
Base See
Ω = 1.67 Fy
Compression– J4
Connections not designed
to bear φ = 0.80
0.90 FEXX See
Weld Ω = 1.88 J2.1a
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to Filler metal

Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of with a
welds joining the parts. strength
Parallel to weld axis
level equal
Base Governed by J4
to or less
20 NE
than
Shear φ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See matching
Weld
Ω = 2.00 J2.1a filler metal is
permitted.
20 O
FILLET WELDS INCLUDING FILLETS IN HOLES AND SLOTS AND SKEWED T-JOINTS
Base Governed by J4 Filler metal
3, W
φ = 0.75 [d] See with a
Shear Weld 0.60 FEXX
Ω = 2.00 J2.2a strength
E
level equal
to or less
ST I
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to

U EV
than
Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of matching
Parallel to weld axis welds joining the parts. filler metal is
permitted.
G R
PLUG AND SLOT WELDS

Filler metal
AU IC
Base Governed by J4
with a
strength
BL
level equal
Shear–
to or less
Parallel to faying surface φ = 0.75
Weld 0.60FEXX J2.3a than
PU
on the effective area Ω = 2.00 matching

filler metal is
permitted
[a]
For matching weld metal, see AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 3.3.
[b]
Filler metal with a strength level one strength level greater than matching is permitted.
[c]
Filler metals with a strength level less than matching are permitted to be used for CJP
groove welds between the webs and flanges of built-up sections transferring shear loads,
or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld joint
shall be detailed and the weld shall be designed using the thickness of the material as the
effective throat, where φ = 0.80, Ω = 1.88 and 0.60 FEXX is the nominal strength.
[d]
The provisions of Section J2.4(b) are also applicable.
485

J-13
486
487 (b) The design strength, φRn and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of weld groups
488 shall be determined as follows:
489
490 (1) For a linear weld group with a uniform leg size, loaded through the
491 center of gravity, the available strength is permitted to be determined
492 accounting for a directional strength increase if strain compatibility
493 of the various weld elements is considered, using
494 Fnw (
= 0.60 FEXX 1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5 θ ) (J2-4)
495
496 where
497 FEXX = filler metal classification strength, ksi (MPa)
498 φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
499 θ = angle between the line of action of the required force
500 and the weld longitudinal axis, degrees
501
20 NE
502 User Note: A linear weld group is one in which all elements are
503 in a line or are parallel.
504
20 O
505
506 (2) For fillet welds to the ends of rectangular HSS where the weld ia
507 loaded in tension, the directional strength increase is not applicable.
3, W
508 Hence,
509
E
510 Fnw = 0.60 FEXX (J2-5)

ST I
U EV
511
512 (3) For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and consisting of
513 elements with a uniform leg size that are oriented both longitudinal-
G R
514 ly and transversely to the direction of applied load, the combined

515 strength, Rn, of the fillet weld group shall be determined as the
AU IC
516 greater of the following:

517
BL
518 (i) Rn = Rnwl + Rnwt (J2-6a)

519
520 or
PU
521
522 (ii) Rn = 0.85 Rnwl + 1.5Rnwt (J2-6b)
523
524 where
525 Rnwl = total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet
526 welds, as determined in accordance with Table J2.5,
527 kips (N)
528 Rnwt = total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet
529 welds, as determined in accordance with Table J2.5
530 without the increase in Section J2.4(b), kips (N)
531
532 User Note: The instantaneous center method is a valid way to calculate the
533 strength of weld groups consisting of weld elements in various directions
534 based on strain compatibility.
535
536 5. Combination of Welds
537
538 If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are
539 combined in a single joint, the strength of each shall be separately computed

J-14
540 with reference to the axis of the group in order to determine the strength of
541 the combination.
542
543 6. Filler Metal Requirements
544
545 The choice of filler metal for use with CJP groove welds subject to tension
546 normal to the effective area shall comply with the requirements for matching
547 filler metals given in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
548
549 User Note: The following User Note Table summarizes the AWS
550 D1.1/D1.1M provisions for matching filler metals. Other restrictions exist.
551 For a complete list of base metals and prequalified matching filler metals, see
552 AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 3.1 and Table 3.2.
553
Base Metal (ASTM) Matching Filler Metal
A36 ≤ 3/4 in. thick 60- and 70-ksi filler metal
SMAW: E7015, E7016, E7018,
A36 > 3/4 in. thick, A588[a], A1011,
E7028
20 NE
A572 Gr. 50 and 55, A913 Gr. 50,
Other processes: 70-ksi filler
A992, A1018
metal
A913 Gr. 60 and 65 80-ksi filler metal
20 O
A913 Gr. 70 90-ksi filler metal
[a]
For corrosion resistance and color similar to the base metal, see AWS
3, W
D1.1/D1.1M clause 3.7.3.
Notes:
E
In joints with base metals of different strengths, either a filler metal that matches the
ST I
higher strength base metal or a filler metal that matches the lower strength and
U EV
produces a low hydrogen deposit may be used when matching strength is required.
554
555
G R
556
557 Filler metal with a specified minimum Charpy V-notch toughness of 20 ft-lb
AU IC
558 (27 J) at 40°F (4°C) or lower shall be used in the following joints:
559
BL
560 (a) CJP groove welded T- and corner joints with steel backing left in place,
561 subject to tension normal to the effective area, unless the joints are
562 designed using the nominal strength and resistance factor or safety
PU
563 factor, as applicable, for a PJP groove weld

564 (b) CJP groove welded splices subject to tension normal to the effective
565 area in heavy sections, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d
566
567 The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance shall be sufficient evidence of
568 compliance.
569
570 7. Mixed Weld Metal
571
572 When Charpy V-notch toughness is specified, the process consumables for all
573 weld metal, tack welds, root pass and subsequent passes deposited in a joint
574 shall be compatible to ensure notch-tough composite weld metal.
575
576 J3. BOLTS, THREADED PARTS and BOLTED CONNECTIONS
577
578 1. Common Bolts
579

J-15
580 ASTM A307 bolts are permitted except where pretensioning is specified.
581
582 2. High-Strength Bolts
583
584 Use of high-strength bolts and bolting components shall conform to the
585 provisions of the Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength
586 Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC Specification, except as modified by
587 this Specification. Major modifications include the following:
588
589 (a) This Specification allows bolt grades of ASTM F3125 Grades A325,
590 A325M, A490, A490M, F1852 F2280 ASTM F3043, F3111, F3148,
591 A354 Grade BC, A354 Grade BD, and A449 bolts.
592 (b) The RCSC Specification Section 5.2 is replaced with Section J3.7 of this
593 Specifiction
594 (c) Exceptions to the RCSC Specification associated with cyclically loaded
595 connections are contained in Appendix 3 of this Specification.
596 (d) Water-jet cutting of holes is permitted by Section M2.5 of this
20 NE
597 Specification.
598
599 High-strength bolts in this Specification are grouped according to material
20 O
600 strength as follows:
601
602 Group 120⎯ASTM F3125/F3125M Grades A325, A325M, F1852 and
3, W
603 ASTM A354 Grade BC
604 Group 144 ASTM F3148 Grade 144
E
605 Group 150⎯ASTM F3125/F3125M Grades A490, A490M, F2280 and

ST I
U EV
606 ASTM A354 Grade BD

607 Group 200 ASTM F3043 and F3111
608
G R
609 Use of Group 144 bolting assemblies shall conform to the provisions of
610 ASTM F3148. Assemblies may be used in snug-tight, pretensioned or slip-
AU IC
611 critical connections, using the installation procedures provided in ASTM

612 F3148 and RCSC Section 8.2.5.
BL
613
614 Use of Group 200 high-strength bolting assemblies shall conform to the
615 applicable provisions of their ASTM standard. ASTM F3043 and F3111
PU
616 Grade 1 assemblies may be installed only to the snug-tight condition. ASTM
617 F3043 and F3111 Grade 2 assemblies may be used in snug-tight, preten-
618 sioned and slip-critical connections, using procedures provided in the
619 applicable ASTM standard.
620
621 User Note: The use of Group 200 bolting assemblies is limited to specific
622 building locations and noncorrosive environmental conditions by the
623 applicable ASTM standard.
624
625 When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers,
626 shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale.
627
628 (a) Bolting assemblies are permitted to be installed to the snug-tight
629 condition when used in:
630
631 (1) Bearing-type connections, except as stipulated in Section E6
632 (2) Tension or combined shear and tension applications, for Group 120
633 bolts only, where loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load fluc-
634 tuations are not design considerations
635

J-16
636 (b) Bolts in the following connections shall be pretensioned:

637
638 (1) As required by the RCSC Specification
639 (2) Connections subjected to vibratory loads where bolt loosening is a
640 consideration
641 (3) End connections of built-up members composed of two shapes
642 either interconnected by bolts, or with at least one open side inter-
643 connected by perforated cover plates or lacing with tie plates, as
644 required in Section E6.1
645
646 (c) The following connections shall be designed as slip critical:
647
648 (1) As required by the RCSC Specification
649 (2) The extended portion of bolted, partial-length cover plates, as
650 required in Section F13.3
651
652 The snug-tight condition is defined in the RCSC Specification. Bolts to be
20 NE
653 tightened to a condition other than snug tight shall be clearly identified on the
654 design documents. (See Table J3.1 or J3.1M for minimum bolt pretension for
655 connections designated as pretensioned or slip critical.)
20 O
656
657 User Note: There are no specific minimum or maximum tension require-
658 ments for snug-tight bolts. Bolts that have been pretensioned are permitted in
3, W
659 snug-tight connections unless specifically prohibited on design documents.
660
E
661 When bolt requirements cannot be provided within the RCSC Specification
ST I
662 limitations because of requirements for lengths exceeding 12 diameters or

U EV
663 diameters exceeding 1-1/2 in. (38 mm), bolts or threaded rods conforming to
664 Group 120 or Group 150 materials are permitted to be used in accordance
G R
665 with the provisions for threaded parts in Table J3.2.

666 When ASTM A354 Grade BC, A354 Grade BD, or A449 bolts and threaded
AU IC
667 rods are used in pretensioned connections, the bolt geometry, including the
668 thread pitch, thread length, head and nut(s), shall be equal to or (if larger in
BL
669 diameter) proportional to that required by the RCSC Specification.

670 Installation shall comply with all applicable requirements of the RCSC
671 Specification with modifications as required for the increased diameter and/or
PU
672 length to provide the design pretension.

673 2. Size and Use of Holes
674
675 The following requirements apply for bolted connections:
676
677 (a) The nominal dimensions of standard, oversized, short-slotted and long-
678 slotted holes for bolts are given in Table J3.3 or Table J3.3M.
679
680 User Note: Bolt holes with a smaller nominal diameter are permitted. See
681 RCSC Table 3.1 for bolt hole fabrication tolerances. See Section J9 for
682 diameters of holes in base plates for anchor rods providing anchorage to
683 concrete.
684
685 (b) Standard holes or short-slotted holes transverse to the direction of the load
686 shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of this Specification,
687 unless oversized holes, short-slotted holes parallel to the load, or long-slotted
688 holes are approved by the engineer of record.
689

J-17
690 (c) Finger shims up to 1/4 in. (6 mm) are permitted in slip-critical connections
691 designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal shear
692 strength of the fastener to that specified for slotted holes.
693
TABLE J3.1
Minimum Bolt Pretension,
[a] [b]
kips
Group 144
And [c]
Bolt Size, Group 120[a] Group 150[b] Group 200, Grade 2
in.
1/2 12 15 −
5/8 19 24 −
3/4 28 35 −
7/8 39 49 −
1 51 64 90
1 1/8 64 80 113
1-1/4 81 102 143
1 3/8 97 121 −
20 NE
1-1/2 118 148 −
[a]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A325 rounded off to nearest kip.
20 O
[b]
F3125/F3125M for Grade A490 rounded off to nearest kip. Group 144 (F3148) assemblies
have the same specified minimum pretension as Group 150.
3, W
[c]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM F3043 and
F3111 for Grade 2, rounded off to nearest kip,.
E
694
ST I
695
U EV
696
TABLE J3.1M
G R
Minimum Bolt Pretension,(metric) kN

Group 120 [a] [b]
Bolt Size, Group 150
AU IC
mm
BL
M16 91 114
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
PU
M24 205 257

M27 267 334
M30 326 408
M36 475 595
[a]
F3125/F3125M for Grade A325M, rounded off to nearest kN.
[a]
F3125/F3125M for Grade A490M bolts rounded off to nearest kN.
697
698 User Note: Metric grades manufactured to F3125 Grade A325M and A490M
699 are similar to Group 120 (830MPa) and Group 150 (1030MPa), respectively.
700
701 (d) Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical
702 connections, but they shall not be used in bearing-type connections.
703
704 (e) Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical or
705 bearing-type connections. The slots are permitted without regard to direction
706 of loading in slip-critical connections, but the length shall be normal to the
707 direction of the loading in bearing-type connections.

J-18
708
709 (f) Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the connected parts of
710 either a slip-critical or bearing-type connection at an individual faying
711 surface. Long-slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of
712 loading in slip-critical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of
713 loading in bearing-type connections.
714
715 (g) Washers shall be provided in accordance with the RCSC Specification
716 Section 6, except for Group 200 bolting assemblies, washers shall be provided
717 in accordance with the applicable ASTM standard.
718
719 User Note: When Group 200 heavy-hex bolting assemblies are used, a single
720 washer is used under the bolt head and a single washer is used under the nut.
721 When Group 200 twist-off bolting assemblies are used, a single washer is
722 used under the nut. Washers are of the type specified in the ASTM standard
723 for the bolting assembly.
724
20 NE
725 3. Minimum Spacing
726
727 The distance between centers of standard, oversized or slotted holes shall not
20 O
728 be less than 2-2/3 times the nominal diameter, d, of the fastener. However, the
729 clear distance between bolt holes or slots shall not be less than d.
730
3, W
731 User Note: A distance between centers of standard, oversize or slotted holes
732 of 3d is preferred.
E
TABLE J3.2
ST I
U EV
Nominal Stress of Fasteners and Threaded Parts, ksi (MPa)

Nominal Shear Stress in Bearing-
Type Connections,
G R
Nominal Fnv, ksi (MPa) [c]

Tensile Threads Not Threads
AU IC
Stress, Excluded from Excluded from

Fnt, ksi Shear Planes – Shear Planes –
[a][b]
Description of Fasteners (MPa) (N) (X)
BL
A307 bolts 45 (310)[c] 27 (186)[c] [d] 27 (186)[c][d]

PU
Group 120 (e.g., A325) 90 (620) 54 (372) 68 (469)
Group 144 (e.g., F3148) 108 (745) 65 (448) 81 (565)
Group 150 (e.g., A490) 113 (780) 68 (469) 84 (579)
Group 200 (e.g., F3043) [e]

150 (1040) 90 (620) 113 (779)[e]
Threaded parts meeting 0.75 Fu 0.450 Fu 0.563 Fu

the requirements of
Section A3.4,

J-19
[a]
For high-strength bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Appendix 3.
[b]
For nominal tensile strength it is permitted to use the tensile stress areaof the threaded rod or
bolt multiplied by the minimum specified tensile stress of the rod or bolt material, in lieu of the
tabulated values based on a nomnal tensile stress ares of 0.75 times the gross area
[c]
For end loaded connections with a fastener pattern length greater than 38 in. (950 mm), Fnv
shall be reduced to 83.3% of the tabulated values. Fastener pattern length is the maximum
distance parallel to the line of force between the centerline of the bolts connecting two parts with
one faying surface.
d]
For A307 bolts, the tabulated values shall be reduced by 1% for each 1/16 in. (2 mm) over five
diameters of length in the grip.
[e]
Threads assumed and permitted in shear planes in all cases.
[e]
The transition area of Group 200 bolts is considered part of the threaded section.
733
734 4. Minimum Edge Distance
735
736 The distance from the center of a standard hole to an edge of a connected part
737 in any direction shall not be less than either the applicable value from Table J3.4
738 or Table J3.4M, or as required in Section J3.10. The distance from the center of
20 NE
739 an oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected part shall be not less
740 than that required for a standard hole to an edge of a connected part plus the
741 applicable increment, C2, from Table J3.5 or Table J3.5M.
20 O
742
743 User Note: The edge distances in Tables J3.4 and J3.4M are minimum edge
3, W
744 distances based on standard fabrication practices and workmanship
745 tolerances. The appropriate provisions of Sections J3.10 and J4 must be
E
746 satisfied.
ST I
747
U EV
748 5. Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance

749
G R
750 The maximum distance from the center of any bolt hole to the nearest edge of
751 elements in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the connected element
752 under consideration, but shall not exceed 6 in. (150 mm). The longitudinal
AU IC
753 spacing of bolt holes between elements consisting of a plate and a shape, or
754 two plates, in continuous contact shall be as follows:
BL
755
756 (a) For painted members or unpainted members not subject to corrosion, the
PU
757 spacing shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part or 12
758 in. (300 mm).
759
760 (b) For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric
761 corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the
762 thinner part or 7 in. (180 mm).
763
764 User Note: The dimensions in (a) and (b) do not apply to elements consisting
765 of two shapes in continuous contact.
766
767 TABLE J3.3
768 Nominal Hole Dimensions, in.
Hole Dimensions
Bolt Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
Diameter (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x Length) (Width x Length)
1/2 9/16 5/8 9/16 x 11/16 9/16 x 1-1/4
5/8 11/16 13/16 11/16 x 7/8 11/16 x 1-9/16
3/4 13/16 15/16 13/16 x 1 13/16 x 1-7/8
7/8 15/16 1-1/16 15/16 x 1-1/8 15/16 x 2-3/16
1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/8 x 1-5/16 1-1/8 x 2-1/2
≥1-1/8 d + 1/8 d + 5/16 (d + 1/8) x (d + 3/8) (d + 1/8) x 2.5d

J-20
769
770
771 TABLE J3.3M
772 Nominal Hole Dimensions, mm
Hole Dimensions
Bolt Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
Diameter (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x (Width x
Length) Length)
M16 18 20 18 x 22 18 x 40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
[a]
M24 27 30 27 x 32 27 x 60
M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
≥M36 d+3 d+8 (d + 3) x (d + 10) (d + 3) x 2.5d
[a]
Clearance provided allows the use of a 1-in.-diameter bolt.
20 NE
773
774 TABLE J3.4
Minimum Edge Distance [a] from
20 O
775
776 Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of Connected Part
3, W
777 in.
E
Bolt Diameter Minimum Edge Distance

ST I
U EV
1/2 3/4
5/8 7/8
3/4 1
G R
7/8 1-1/8
1 1-1/4
AU IC
1-1/8 1-1/2
1-1/4 1-5/8
BL
Over 1-1/4 1-1/4d

[a]
If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the applicable provisions from
Sections J3.10 and J4 are satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not
PU
permitted without approval from the engineer of record.

[b]
For oversized or slotted holes, see Table J3.5.
778
779
780 TABLE J3.4M
781 Minimum Edge Distance[a] from
782 Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of Connected Part,
783 mm
Bolt Diameter Minimum Edge Distance
16 22
20 26
22 28
24 30
27 34
30 38
36 46
Over 36 1.25d

J-21
[a]
If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the applicable provisions from
Sections J3.10 and J4 are satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not
permitted without approval from the engineer of record.
[b]
For oversized or slotted holes, see Table J3.5M.
784
785 6. Tensile and Shear Strength of Bolts and Threaded Parts
786
787 The design tensile or shear strength, φRn, and the allowable tensile or shear
788 strength, Rn/Ω, of a snug-tightened or pretensioned high-strength bolt or
789 threaded part shall be determined according to the limit states of tension
790 rupture and shear rupture as:
791
792 Rn = Fn Ab (J3-1)
793
794 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
795
796 where
20 NE
797 Ab = nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, in.2 (mm2)
798 Fn = nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from Table J3.2, ksi
799 (MPa)
20 O
800
801 The required tensile strength shall include any tension resulting from prying
3, W
802 action produced by deformation of the connected parts.
803
E
804 User Note: The available strength of a bolt in shear depends on whether the
ST I
805 bolt is sheared through its shank or through the threads / thread runout. Bolts
U EV
806 that are relatively short may be produced as fully threaded, without a shank,
807 and thus may not be able to be installed in the “threads excluded” condition.
808
G R
809 User Note: The force that can be resisted by a snug-tightened or preten-
810 sioned high-strength bolt or threaded part may be limited by the bearing or
AU IC
811 tearout strength at the bolt hole per Section J3.10. The effective strength of an
812 individual fastener may be taken as the lesser of the fastener shear strength
BL
813 per Section J3.6 or the bearing or tearout strength at the bolt hole per Section
814 J3.10. The strength of the bolt group is taken as the sum of the effective
815 strengths of the individual fasteners.
PU
816
817 7. Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections
818
819 The available tensile strength of a bolt subjected to combined tension and
820 shear shall be determined according to the limit states of tension and shear
821 rupture as:
822 Rn = Fnt′ Ab (J3-2)
823
824 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
825
826 where
827 F nt′ = nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear
828 stress, ksi (MPa)
Fnt
1.3 Fnt − f rv ≤ Fnt (LRFD) (J3-3a)
φFnv
Ω Fnt
1.3 Fnt − f rv ≤ Fnt (ASD) (J3-3b)
Fnv
829 F nt = nominal tensile stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)

J-22
830 Fnv = nominal shear stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)
831 frv = required shear stress using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
832 (MPa)
833
834 The available shear stress of the fastener shall equal or exceed the required
835 shear stress, frv.
836
837 User Note: Note that when the required stress, f, in either shear or tension, is
838 less than or equal to 30% of the corresponding available stress, the effects of
839 combined stress need not be investigated. Also note that Equations J3-3a and
840 J3-3b can be rewritten so as to find a nominal shear stress, F′nv, as a function
841 of the required tensile stress, ft.
842
843 TABLE J3.5
844 Values of Edge Distance Increment C2, in.
Slotted Holes
20 NE
Nominal Long Axis Perpendicular to Long Axis
Diameter of Oversized Edge Parallel to
Fastener Holes Short Slots Long Slots[a] Edge
20 O
≤ 7/8 1/16 1/8
1 1/8 1/8 3/4d 0
≥1 1/8 1/8 3/16
3, W
[a]
When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see Table J3.3), C2 is
E
permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual slot
lengths.
ST I
845
U EV
846
847 TABLE J3.5M
G R
848 Values of Edge Distance Increment C2, mm

AU IC
Nominal Slotted Holes

Diameter of Long Axis Perpendicular to Long Axis
BL
Fastener Oversized Edge Parallel to

Holes Short Slots Long Slots [a] Edge
≤ 22 2 3
PU
24 3 3 0.75d 0
≥ 27 3 5
[a]
When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see Table J3.3M), C2 is
permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual
slot lengths.
849
850 8. High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections
851
852 Slip-critical connections shall be designed to prevent slip and for the limit
853 states of bearing-type connections. When slip-critical bolts pass through
854 fillers, all surfaces subject to slip shall be prepared to achieve design slip
855 resistance.
856
857 The single bolt available slip resistance for the limit state of slip shall be
859
860 Rn = μDu h f Tbns (J3-4)
861

J-23
862 (a) For standard size and short-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of
863 the load
864
865 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
866
867 (b) For oversized and short-slotted holes parallel to the direction of the load
868
869 φ = 0.85 (LRFD) Ω = 1.76 (ASD)
870
871 (c) For long-slotted holes
872
873 φ = 0.70 (LRFD) Ω = 2.14 (ASD)
874
875 where
876 Du = 1.13, a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean installed bolt
877 pretension to the specified minimum bolt pretension. The use of
878 other values are permitted if approved by the engineer of record.
20 NE
879 Tb = minimum fastener tension given in Table J3.1, kips, or Table J3.1M,
880 kN
881 hf = factor for fillers, determined as follows:
20 O
882
883 (1) For one filler between connected parts
3, W
884
885 hf = 1.0
E
886
887 (2) For two or more fillers between connected parts
ST I
U EV
888
889 hf = 0.85
890
G R
891 ns = number of slip planes required to permit the connection to slip

892 μ = mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, and
AU IC
893 determined as follows, or as established by tests:

894
BL
895 (1) For Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or
896 surfaces with Class A coatings on blast-cleaned steel or hot-
897 dipped galvanized and roughened surfaces)
PU
898
899 μ = 0.30
900
901 (2) For Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned steel surfaces or
902 surfaces with Class B coatings on blast-cleaned steel)
903
904 μ = 0.50
905
906 9. Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections
907
908 When a slip-critical connection is subjected to an applied tension that reduces
909 the net clamping force, the available slip resistance per bolt from Section J3.8
910 shall be multiplied by the factor, ksc, determined as follows:
911
Tu
912 k sc = 1 − ≥0 (LRFD) (J3-5a)
Du Tb nb
1.5Ta
913 k sc = 1 − ≥0 (ASD) (J3-5b)
Du Tb nb
914 where

J-24
915 Ta = required tension force using ASD load combinations, kips (kN)
916 Tu = required tension force using LRFD load combinations, kips (kN)
917 n b = number of bolts carrying the applied tension
918
919 10. Bearing and Tearout Strength at Bolt Holes
920
921 The available strength, φRn and Rn Ω , at bolt holes shall be determined for
922 the limit states of bearing and tearout, as follows:
923
924 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
925
926 The nominal strength of the connected material, Rn , is determined as follows:
927
928 (a) For connections with plies in contact:
929 1. The strength of a connected element at a bolt in a connection with
930 standard, oversized and short-slotted holes, independent of the di-
931 rection of loading, or a long-slotted hole with the slot parallel to
20 NE
932 the direction of the bearing force shall be the lesser of:
933
20 O
934 (a) Bearing
935
936 (i) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a de-
3, W
937 sign consideration
938
E
939 Rn = 2.4 dtFu (J3-6a)

ST I
U EV
940
941 (ii) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a
942 design consideration
G R
943
944 (J3-6b)
AU IC
945 Rn = 3.0 dtFu

946
BL
947 (b) Tearout

948
949 (i) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a
PU

951
952 Rn = 1.2 lc tFu (J3-6c)
953
954 (ii) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a
956
957 Rn = 1.5 lc tFu (J3-6d)
958
959 2.The strength of a connected element at a bolt in a connection with
960 long-slotted holes with the slot perpendicular to the direction of
961 force is the lesser of:
962
963 (a) Bearing
964 (J3-6e)
965 R n = 2.0 dtFu
966
967 (b) Tearout
968

J-25
969 Rn = 1.0 lc tFu (J3-6f)

970
971 (b) For connections made using bolts or rods that pass completely through
972 an unstiffened box member or HSS
973
974 (1) Bearing shall satisfy Section J7 and Equation J7-1
975
976 (2) Tearout
977
978 (i) For a bolt in a connection with a standard hole or a short-slotted
979 hole with the slot perpendicular to the direction of force:
980
981 (a) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a design
982 consideration
983
984 Rn = 1.2 lc tFu (J3-6g)
985
20 NE
986 (b) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a
988
20 O
989 Rn = 1.5 lc tFu (J3-6h)
990
3, W
991 (ii) For a bolt in a connection with long-slotted holes with the slot
992 perpendicular to the direction of force:
E
993
994 (J3.6i)
ST I
Rn = 1.0 lc tFu
U EV
995
996 where
997 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, ksi
G R
998 (MPa)
999 d = nominal fastener diameter, in. (mm)
AU IC
1000 lc = clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the
1001 hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, in.
BL
1002 (mm)
1003 t = thickness of connected material, in. (mm)
PU
1004
1005 Bearing strength and tearout strength shall be checked for both bearing-type
1006 and slip-critical connections. The use of oversized holes and short- and long-
1007 slotted holes parallel to the line of force is restricted to slip-critical
1008 connections per Section J3.2.
1009
1010 11. Special Fasteners
1011
1012 The nominal strength of special fasteners other than the bolts presented in
1013 Table J3.2 shall be verified by tests.
1014
1015 12. Wall Strength at Tension Fasteners
1016
1017 When bolts or other fasteners in tension are attached to an unstiffened box or
1018 HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall be determined by rational analysis.
1019
1020 J4. AFFECTED ELEMENTS OF MEMBERS AND CONNECTING
1021 ELEMENTS
1022

J-26
1023 This section applies to elements of members at connections and connecting

1024 elements, such as plates, gussets, angles and brackets.
1025
1026 1. Strength of Elements in Tension
1027
1028 The design strength, φRn, and the allowable strength, Rn /Ω, of affected and
1029 connecting elements loaded in tension shall be the lower value obtained
1030 according to the limit states of tensile yielding and tensile rupture.
1031
1032 (a) For tensile yielding of connecting elements
1033
1034 Rn = Fy Ag (J4-1)
1035
1036 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1037
1038 (b) For tensile rupture of connecting elements
1039
20 NE
1040 Rn = Fu Ae (J4-2)
1041
1042 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
20 O
1043
1044 where
3, W
1045 Ae = effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2 (mm2)
1046
E
1047 User Note: The effects of shear lag or concentrated loads dispersed within
ST I
1048 the element may cause only a portion of the area to be effective in resisting
U EV
1049 the load. For shear lag see Chapter D

1050
1051 2. Strength of Elements in Shear
G R
1052
1053 The available shear strength of affected and connecting elements in shear
AU IC
1054 shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of shear
1055 yielding and shear rupture:
BL
1056
1057 (a) For shear yielding of the element
PU
1058
1059 Rn = 0.60Fy Agv (J4-3)
1060
1061 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
1062
1063 where
1064 Agv = gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1065
1066 (b) For shear rupture of the element
1067
1068 Rn = 0.60 Fu Anv (J4-4)
1069
1070 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1071
1072 where
1073 Anv = net area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1074
1075 3. Block Shear Strength

J-27
1076
1077 The available strength for the limit state of block shear rupture along a shear
1078 failure path or paths and a perpendicular tension failure path shall be
1080
1081 Rn = 0.60Fu Anv + Ubs Fu Ant ≤ 0.60Fy Agv + Ubs Fu Ant
1082 (J4-5)
1083
1084 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1085
1086 where
2 2
1087 Ant = net area subject to tension, in. (mm )
1088
1089 Where the tension stress is uniform, Ubs = 1; where the tension stress is
1090 nonuniform, Ubs = 0.5.
1091
1092 User Note: Typical cases where Ubs should be taken equal to 0.5 are
20 NE
1093 illustrated in the Commentary
1094 For connections with round holes, Aev is calculated with a shear length
1095 reduction for each hole in the shear plane, lvh, according to Equation J4-6.
20 O
1096 For connections with slotted holes, lvh is the nominal slot dimension parallel
1097 to the shear plane plus 1/16 in.
3, W
1098
lvh = d h2 − d 2
E
1099 (J4-6)
1100
ST I
U EV
1101 where
1102 Aev = effective area subjected to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1103 Ant = net area subjected to tension, in.2 (mm2)
G R
1104 d = bolt diameter, in.

1105 dh = nominal hole diameter plus 1/16 in. (2 mm), in.
AU IC
1106
1107 For concentrically loaded connections that are symmetrical about the loading
BL
1108 axis and beam webs at welded clip angle connections:

1109
1110 Ubs = 1.0
PU
1111
1112 For end connections at axially loaded angles and axially loaded tee-shape
1113 members bolted through the web, and for outstanding legs of clip angles in
1114 single-angle connections:
1115
1116 Ubs = 0.70 for connections with one bolt row parallel to the load
1117 Ubs = 0.50 for connections with two bolt rows parallel to the load
1118
1119 For beam webs at bolted end connections subjected to vertical shear and for
1120 connecting elements at these interfaces:
1121
1122 Ubs = 0.85 for connections with one vertical bolt row
1123 Ubs = 0.40 for connections with two vertical bolt rows
1124 Ubs = 0.50 for connections with two bolt rows parallel to the load
1125
1126 For beam webs at bolted end connections subjected to vertical shear and for
1127 connecting elements at these interfaces:
1128

J-28
1129 Ubs = 0.85 for connections with one vertical bolt row
1130 Ubs = 0.40 for connections with two vertical bolt rows
1131
1132 4. Strength of Elements in Compression
1133
1134 The available strength of connecting elements in compression for the limit
1135 states of yielding and buckling shall be determined as follows:
1136
1137 (a) When Lc/r ≤ 25
1138
1139 Pn = FyAg (J4-6)
1140
1141 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1142
1143 (b) When Lc/r >25, the provisions of Chapter E apply;
1144
1145 where
20 NE
1146 Lc = KL = effective length, in. (mm)
20 O
1149
1150 User Note: The effective length factors used in computing compressive
3, W
1151 strengths of connecting elements are specific to the end restraint provided and
1152 may not necessarily be taken as unity when the direct analysis method is
E
1153 employed.
1154
ST I
U EV
1155 5. Strength of Elements in Flexure

1156
1157 The available flexural strength of affected elements shall be the lower value
G R
1158 obtained according to the limit states of flexural yielding, local buckling,
1159 flexural lateral-torsional buckling, and flexural rupture.
AU IC
1160
1161 J5. FILLERS
BL
1162
1163 1. Fillers in Welded Connections
1164
PU
1165 Whenever it is necessary to use fillers in joints required to transfer applied

1166 force, the fillers and the connecting welds shall conform to the requirements
1167 of Section J5.1a or Section J5.1b, as applicable.
1168
1169 1a. Thin Fillers
1170
1171 Fillers less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick shall not be used to transfer stress.
1172 When the thickness of the fillers is less than 1/4 in. (6 mm), or when the
1173 thickness of the filler is 1/4 in. (6 mm) or greater but not sufficient to transfer
1174 the applied force between the connected parts, the filler shall be kept flush
1175 with the edge of the outside connected part, and the size of the weld shall be
1176 increased over the required size by an amount equal to the thickness of the
1177 filler.
1178
1179 1b. Thick Fillers
1180
1181 When the thickness of the fillers is sufficient to transfer the applied force
1182 between the connected parts, the filler shall extend beyond the edges of the
1183 outside connected base metal. The welds joining the outside connected base
1184 metal to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the force to the filler and the

J-29
1185 region subjected to the applied force in the filler shall be sufficient to prevent
1186 overstressing the filler. The welds joining the filler to the inside connected
1187 base metal shall be sufficient to transmit the applied force.
1188
1189 2. Fillers in Bolted Bearing-Type Connections
1190
1191 When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are equal to or less
1192 than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick, the shear strength shall be used without reduction.
1193 When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are greater than 1/4 in.
1194 (6 mm) thick, one of the following requirements shall apply:
1195
1196 (a) The shear strength of the bolts shall be multiplied by the factor
1197
1198 1 − 0.4(t − 0.25)
1199
1200 1 − 0.0154(t − 6) (S.I.)
1201
20 NE
1202 but not less than 0.85, where t is the total thickness of the fillers.
1203
1204 (b) The fillers shall be welded or extended beyond the joint and bolted to
20 O
1205 uniformly distribute the total force in the connected element over the
1206 combined cross section of the connected element and the fillers.
3, W
1207
1208 (c) The size of the joint shall be increased to accommodate a number of bolts
E
1209 that is equivalent to the total number required in (b).
1210
ST I
U EV
1211 J6. SPLICES

1212
1213 Groove-welded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the nominal
G R
1214 strength of the smaller spliced section. Other types of splices in cross sections
1215 of plate girders and beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at
AU IC
1216 the point of the splice.

1217
BL
1218 J7. BEARING STRENGTH

1219
1220 The design bearing strength, φRn , and the allowable bearing strength, Rn Ω ,
PU
1221 of surfaces in contact shall be determined for the limit state of bearing (local
1222 compressive yielding) as follows:
1223
1224 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1225
1226 The nominal bearing strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
1227
1228 (a) For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, bolts or rods
1229 that pass completely through an unstiffened box or HSS member, and
1230 ends of fitted bearing stiffeners
1231
1232 Rn = 1.8Fy Apb (J7-1)
1233
1234 where
1235 Apb = projected area in bearing, in.2 (mm2)
1237
1238 (b) For expansion rollers and rockers
1239

J-30
1240 (1) When d ≤ 25 in. (630 mm)

1241
1.2 ( Fy – 13 ) lb d
1242 Rn = (J7-2)
20
1243
1.2 ( F y – 90 ) lb d
1244 Rn = (J7-2M)
20
1245
1246 (2) When d >25 in. (630 mm)
1247
6.0 ( Fy – 13) lb d
1248 Rn = (J7-3)
20
1249
30.2 ( Fy – 90 ) lb d
1250 Rn = (J7-3M)
20
1251
20 NE
1252 where
1253 d = diameter, in. (mm)
20 O
1254 lb = length of bearing, in. (mm)
1255
1256 J8. COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON CONCRETE
3, W
1257
1258 Provisions shall be made to transfer the column loads and moments to the
E
1259 footings and foundations.

ST I
1260
U EV
1261 In the absence of code regulations, the design bearing strength, φc Pp , and the
1262 allowable bearing strength, Pp Ωc , for the limit state of concrete crushing
G R
1263 are permitted to be taken as follows:

1264
AU IC
1265 φc = 0.65 (LRFD) Ω c = 2.31 (ASD)

BL
1266
1267 The nominal bearing strength, Pp, is determined as follows:
1268
PU
1269 (a) On the full area of a concrete support

1270
1271 Pp = 0.85f c′A1 (J8-1)
1272
1273 (b) On less than the full area of a concrete support
1274
1275 Pp = 0.85 f c′A1 A2 / A1 ≤ 1.7f c′A1 (J8-2)
1276
1277 where
2 2
1278 A1 = area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, in. (mm )
1279 A2 = maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is
1280 geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area, in.2
1281 (mm2)
1282 f c′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
1283
1284 J9. ANCHOR RODS AND EMBEDMENTS
1285

J-31
1286 Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required resistance to loads on
1287 the completed structure at the base of columns including the net tensile
1288 components of any bending moment resulting from load combinations
1289 stipulated in Section B2. The anchor rods shall be designed in accordance
1290 with the requirements for threaded parts in Table J3.2.
1291
1292 Design of anchor rods for the transfer of forces to the concrete foundation
1293 shall satisfy the requirements of ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or ACI 349 (ACI
1294 349M).
1295
1296 User Note: Column bases should be designed considering bearing against
1297 concrete elements, including when columns are required to resist a horizontal
1298 force at the base plate. See AISC Design Guide 1, Base Plate and Anchor
1299 Rod Design, Second Edition, for column base design information.
1300
1301 When anchor rods are used to resist horizontal forces, hole size, anchor rod
1302 setting tolerance, and the horizontal movement of the column shall be
20 NE
1303 considered in the design.
1304
1305 Larger oversized holes and slotted holes are permitted in base plates when
20 O
1306 adequate bearing is provided for the nut by using ASTM F844 washers or
1307 plate washers to bridge the hole.
1308
3, W
1309 User Note: The recommended hole sizes, corresponding washer dimensions
1310 and nuts are given in the AISC Steel Construction Manual and ASTM
E
1311 F1554. ASTM F1554 anchor rods may be furnished in accordance with
ST I
1312 product specifications with a body diameter less than the nominal diameter.
U EV
1313 Load effects such as bending and elongation should be calculated based on
1314 minimum diameters permitted by the product specification. See ASTM
G R
1315 F1554 and the table, “Applicable ASTM Specifications for Various Types of
1316 Structural Fasteners,” in Part 2 of the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
AU IC
1317
1318 User Note: See ACI 318 (ACI 318M) for embedment design and for shear
BL
1319 friction design. See OSHA for special erection requirements for anchor rods.
1320
1321 J10. FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES
PU
1322
1323 This section applies to single- and double-concentrated forces applied normal
1324 to the flange(s) of wide-flange sections and similar built-up shapes. A single-
1325 concentrated force is either tensile or compressive. Double-concentrated
1326 forces are one tensile and one compressive and form a couple on the same
1327 side of the loaded member.
1328
1329 When the required strength exceeds the available strength as determined for
1330 the limit states listed in this section, stiffeners and/or doublers shall be
1331 provided and shall be sized for the difference between the required strength
1332 and the available strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also
1333 meet the design requirements in Section J10.8. Doublers shall also meet the
1334 design requirement in Section J10.9.
1335
1336 User Note: See Appendix 6, Section 6.3 for requirements for the ends of
1337 cantilever members.
1338
1339 Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams in accordance with the
1340 requirements of Section J10.7.

J-32
1341
1342 User Note: Design guidance for members other than wide-flange sections and
1343 similar built-up shapes, including HSS members can be found in the
1344 Commentary.
1345
1346 1. Flange Local Bending
1347
1348 This section applies to tensile single-concentrated forces and the tensile
1349 component of double-concentrated forces.
1350
1351 The design strength, φRn , and the allowable strength, Rn Ω , for the limit
1352 state of flange local bending shall be determined as:
1353
1354 Rn = 6.25Fyf t 2f (J10-1)
1355
1356 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
20 NE
1357
1358 where
1359 Fyf = specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi (MPa)
20 O
1360 tf = thickness of the loaded flange, in. (mm)
1361
1362 If the length of loading across the member flange is less than 0.15bf, where bf
3, W
1363 is the member flange width, Equation J10-1 need not be checked.
1364
E
1365 When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
ST I
U EV
1366 member end that is less than 10tf, Rn shall be reduced by 50%.
1367
1368 When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be provided.
G R
1369
1370 2. Web Local Yielding
AU IC
1371
1372 This section applies to single-concentrated forces and both components of
BL
1373 double-concentrated forces.

1374
1375 The available strength for the limit state of web local yielding shall be
PU

1377
1378 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
1379
1380 The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:
1381
1382 (a) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
1383 member end that is greater than the full nominal depth of the member, d,
1384
1385 Rn = Fywtw ( 5k + lb ) (J10-2)
1386
1387 (b) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from
1388 the member end that is less than or equal to the full nominal depth of the
1389 member, d,
1390
1391 Rn = Fywtw ( 2.5k + lb ) (J10-3)
1392
1393 where

J-33
1394 Fyw = specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi (MPa)
1395 k = distance from outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet, in.
1396 (mm)
1397 lb = length of bearing, in. (mm)
1399
1400 When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be
1401 provided.
1402
1403 3. Web Local Crippling
1404
1405 This section applies to compressive single-concentrated forces or the
1406 compressive component of double-concentrated forces.
1407
1408 The available strength for the limit state of web local crippling shall be
1410
20 NE
1411 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1412
1413 The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:
20 O
1414
1415 (a) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a
3, W
1416 distance from the member end that is greater than or equal to d 2
 l  t   EFywt f
1.5
E
1417 Rn = 0.80tw 2
1 + 3  b   w   Qf (J10-4)
  d  tf  
ST I
tw
 
U EV
1418
1419 (b) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a
G R
1420 distance from the member end that is less than d 2

1421
AU IC
1422 (1) For lb d ≤ 0.2

 1.5 
 l  t 
BL
EFywt f
1423 Rn = 0.40tw 2 1 + 3  b   w   Qf (J10-5a)
   f 
d t  tw
 
PU
1424
1425 (2) For lb / d > 0.2
  tw   EFywt f
1.5

1 + 
4lb 
1426 Rn = 0.40tw 2
− 0.2     Qf (J10-5b)
  d  tf   tw
 
1427 where
1428 d = full nominal depth of the member, in. (mm)
1429 Qf = 1.0 for wide-flange sections and for HSS (connecting surface) in
1430 tension
1431 = as given in Table K3.2 for all other HSS conditions
1432
1433 When required, a transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or a
1434 doubler plate extending at least three quarters of the depth of the web shall be
1435 provided.
1436
1437 4. Web Sidesway Buckling
1438
1439 This section applies only to compressive single-concentrated forces applied to
1440 members where relative lateral movement between the loaded compression

J-34
1441 flange and the tension flange is not restrained at the point of application of the
1442 concentrated force.
1443
1444 The available strength of the web for the limit state of sidesway buckling shall
1446
1447 φ = 0.85 (LRFD) Ω = 1.76 (ASD)
1448
1449 The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
1450
1451 (a) If the compression flange is restrained against rotation
1452
1453 (1) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) ≤ 2.3
1454
Cr tw3 t f   h tw  
3
1455 Rn = 1 + 0.4    (J10-6)
h2   Lb b f  
 
20 NE
1456
1457 (2) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) > 2.3 , the limit state of web sidesway buckling
20 O
1458 does not apply.
1459
3, W
1460 When the required strength of the web exceeds the available strength, local
1461 lateral bracing shall be provided at the tension flange or either a pair of
E
1462 transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be provided.
ST I
1463
U EV
1464 (b) If the compression flange is not restrained against rotation

1465
(1) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) ≤ 1.7
G R
1466
1467
AU IC
Cr tw3 t f   h tw  
3
1468 Rn = 0.4    (J10-7)

BL
h 2   Lb b f  
 
1469 (2) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) > 1.7 , the limit state of web sidesway buck-
PU
1470 ling does not apply.

1471
1472 When the required strength of the web exceeds the available strength, local
1473 lateral bracing shall be provided at both flanges at the point of application of
1474 the concentrated forces.
1475
1476 In Equations J10-6 and J10-7, the following definitions apply:
1477
1478 Cr = 960,000 ksi (6.6×106 MPa), when αsMr < My at the location of the
1479 force
1480 = 480,000 ksi (3.3×106 MPa), when αsMr < My at the location of the
1481 force
1482 Lb = largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of
1483 load, in. (mm)
1484
1485 Mr = required flexural strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
1486 kip-in. (N-mm)
1487 bf = width of flange, in. (mm)

J-35
1488 h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled
1489 shapes; distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear dis-
1490 tance between flanges when welds are used for built-up shapes, in.
1491 (mm)
1492 αs = 1.0 (LRFD); 1.5 (ASD)
1493
1494 User Note: For determination of adequate restraint, refer to Appendix 6.
1495
1496 5. Web Compression Buckling
1497
1498 This section applies to a pair of compressive single-concentrated forces or the
1499 compressive components in a pair of double-concentrated forces, applied at
1500 both flanges of a member at the same location.
1501
1502 The available strength for the limit state of web compression buckling shall
 24tw3 EFyw 
Rn =  Qf
20 NE
1504 (J10-8)
 h 
 
1505
20 O
1506 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1507 where
3, W
1508 Qf = 1.0 for wide-flange sections and for HSS (connecting surface) in
1509 tension.
E
1510 = as given in Table K3.2 for all other HSS conditions
1511
ST I
U EV
1512 When the pair of concentrated compressive forces to be resisted is applied at a

1513 distance from the member end that is less than d / 2, Rn shall be reduced by
1514 50%.
G R
1515
1516 When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or
AU IC
1517 a doubler plate extending the full depth of the web shall be provided.
1518
BL
1519 6. Web Panel-Zone Shear

1520
1521 This section applies to double-concentrated forces applied to one or both
PU
1522 flanges of a member at the same location.

1523
1524 The available strength of the web panel zone for the limit state of shear
1525 yielding shall be determined as follows:
1526
1527 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1528
1529 The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
1530
1531 (a) When the effect of inelastic panel-zone deformation on frame stability is
1532 not accounted for in the analysis:
1533
1534 (1) For αPr ≤ 0.4Py
1535
1536 Rn = 0.60Fy d ctw (J10-9)
1537
1538 (2) For αPr > 0.4Py
1539

J-36
 αP 
1540 Rn = 0.60 Fy d c tw  1.4 − r  (J10-10)
 Py 
1541
1542 (b) When frame stability, including plastic panel zone deformation, is
1543 considered in the analysis or when the required panel-zone shear
1544 strength is determined based on the plastic bending moment, Mp, flexur-
1545 al strength of the beam:
1546
1547 (1) For αPr ≤ 0.75Py
 3bcf tcf2 
1548 Rn = 0.60 Fy d c t w  1 +  (J10-11)
 d b d c tw
 
1549
1550 (2) For αPr > 0.75Py
 3bcf tcf2   1.2αPr 
Rn = 0.60 Fy d c tw  1 + 1.9 −
 d b d c tw  
1551  (J10-12)
20 NE
  Py 
1552
1553 In Equations J10-9 through J10-12, the following definitions apply:
20 O
1554
3, W
1556 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the column web, ksi (MPa)
1557 Pr = required axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips
E
1558 (N)
ST I
1559 Py = Fy Ag , axial yield strength of the column, kips (N)

U EV
1560 bcf = width of column flange, in. (mm)

1561 db = depth of beam, in. (mm)
G R
1562 dc = depth of column, in. (mm)

1563 tcf = thickness of column flange, in. (mm)
AU IC
1564 tw = thickness of column web, in. (mm)

1565 α = 1.0 (LRFD); = 1.6 (ASD)
BL
1566
1567 When required, doubler plate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners shall be
1568 provided within the boundaries of the rigid connection whose webs lie in a
PU
1569 common plane.

1570
1571 See Section J10.9 for doubler plate design requirements.
1572
1573 7. Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders
1574
1575 At unframed ends of beams and girders not otherwise restrained against
1576 rotation about their longitudinal axes, a pair of transverse stiffeners, extending
1577 the full depth of the web, shall be provided.
1578
1579 8. Additional Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Forces
1580
1581 Stiffeners required to resist tensile concentrated forces shall be designed in
1582 accordance with the requirements of Section J4.1 and welded to the loaded
1583 flange and the web. The welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference
1584 between the required strength and available strength. The stiffener to web
1585 welds shall be sized to transfer to the web the algebraic difference in tensile
1586 force at the ends of the stiffener.
1587

J-37
1588 Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces shall be designed

1589 in accordance with the requirements in Section J4.4 and shall either bear on or
1590 be welded to the loaded flange and welded to the web. The welds to the
1591 flange shall be sized for the difference between the required strength and the
1592 applicable limit state strength. The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer
1593 to the web the algebraic difference in compression force at the ends of the
1594 stiffener. For fitted bearing stiffeners, see Section J7.
1595
1596 Transverse full depth bearing stiffeners for compressive forces applied to a
1597 beam or plate girder flange(s) shall be designed as axially compressed
1598 members (columns) in accordance with the requirements of Section E6.2 and
1599 Section J4.4. The member properties shall be determined using an effective
1600 length of 0.75h and a cross section composed of two stiffeners, and a strip of
1601 the web having a width of 25tw at interior stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of
1602 members. The weld connecting full depth bearing stiffeners to the web shall
1603 be sized to transmit the difference in compressive force at each of the
1604 stiffeners to the web.
20 NE
1605
1606 Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply with the following additional
1607 requirements:
20 O
1608
1609 (a) The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness of the column
1610 web shall not be less than one-third of the flange or moment connection
3, W
1611 plate width delivering the concentrated force.
1612 (b) The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than one-half the thickness
E
1613 of the flange or moment connection plate delivering the concentrated

ST I
1614 load, nor less than the width divided by 16.

U EV
1615 (c) Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of one-half the depth of
1616 the member except as required in Sections J10.3, J10.5 and J10.7.
G R
1617
1618 9. Additional Doubler Plate Requirements for Concentrated Forces
AU IC
1619
1620 Doubler plates required for compression strength shall be designed in
1621 accordance with the requirements of Chapter E.
BL
1622
1623 Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be designed in accordance
PU
1624 with the requirements of Chapter D.

1625
1626 Doubler plates required for shear strength (see Section J10.6) shall be
1627 designed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter G.
1628
1629 Doubler plates shall comply with the following additional requirements:
1630
1631 (a) The thickness and extent of the doubler plate shall provide the additional
1632 material necessary to equal or exceed the strength requirements.
1633 (b) The doubler plate shall be welded to develop the proportion of the total
1634 force transmitted to the doubler plate.
1635
1636 10. Transverse Forces on Plate Elements
1637
1638 When a force is applied transverse to the plane of a plate element, the nominal
1639 strength shall consider the limit states of shear and flexure in accordance with
1640 Sections J4.2 and J4.5.
1641

J-38
1642 User Note: The flexural strength can be checked based on yield-line theory
1643 and the shear strength can be determined based on a punching shear model.
1644 See AISC Steel Construction Manual Part 9 for further discussion.
1645
1646
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

K-1
1 CHAPTER K
2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HSS AND BOX-

3 SECTION CONNECTIONS
4
5 This chapter addresses additional requirements for connections to HSS members
6 and box sections of uniform wall thickness, where seam welds between box-section
7 elements are complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds in the connection
8 region. The requirements of Chapter J also apply.
9
11
12 K1. General Provisions and Parameters for HSS Connections
13 K2. Concentrated Forces on HSS
14 K3. HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
15 K4. HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections
20 NE
16 K5. Welds of Plates and Branches to Rectangular HSS
17
18 K1. GENERAL PROVISIONS AND PARAMETERS FOR HSS
20 O
19 CONNECTIONS
20
3, W
21 For the purposes of this chapter, the centerlines of branch members and chord
22 members shall lie in a common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are
E
23 further limited to having all members oriented with walls parallel to the
ST I
24 plane.
U EV
25
26 The tables in this chapter are often accompanied by limits of applicability.
27 Connections complying with the limits of applicability listed can be designed
G R
28 considering the limit states provided for each joint configuration. Connec-
29 tions not complying with the limits of applicability listed are not prohibited
AU IC
30 and must be designed by rational analysis.

31
BL
32 User Note: The connection strengths calculated in Chapter K, including the

33 applicable sections of Chapter J, are based on strength limit states only. See
PU
34 the Commentary if excessive connection deformations may cause servicea-

35 bility or stability concerns.
36
37 User Note: Connection strength is often governed by the size of HSS
38 members, especially the wall thickness of truss chords, and this must be
39 considered in the initial design. To ensure economical and dependable
40 connections can be designed, the connections should be considered in the
41 design of the members. Angles between the chord and the branch(es) of less
42 than 30° can make welding and inspection difficult and should be avoided.
43 The limits of applicability provided reflect limitations on tests conducted to
44 date, measures to eliminate undesirable limit states, and other considerations.
45 See Section J3.10(c) for through-bolt provisions.
46
47 This section provides parameters to be used in the design of plate-to-HSS and
48 HSS-to-HSS connections.
49
50 The design strength, φRn, φMn and φPn, and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω,
51 Mn/Ω and Pn/Ω, of connections shall be determined in accordance with the
52 provisions of this chapter and the provisions of Chapter B.
53

PUBLICE REVIEW ONE Draft Dated August 3, 2020
K-2
54 1. Definitions of Parameters
55
56 Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, in.2 (mm2)
57 B = overall width of rectangular HSS main member, measured 90° to the
58 plane of the connection, in. (mm)
59 Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate, measured 90°
60 to the plane of the connection, in. (mm)
61 Be = effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for local
62 yielding of the transverse element, in. (mm)
63 Bep = effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for
64 punching shear, in. (mm)
65 D = outside diameter of round HSS main member, in. (mm)
66 Db = outside diameter of round HSS branch member, in. (mm)
67 Fc = available stress in main member, ksi (MPa)
68 = Fy for LRFD; 0.60Fy for ASD
69 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of HSS member material, ksi (MPa)
70 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of HSS main member material, ksi
20 NE
71 (MPa)
72 Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member or plate
73 material, ksi (MPa)
20 O
74 H = overall height of rectangular HSS main member, measured in the plane
75 of the connection, in. (mm)
3, W
76 Hb = overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, measured in the
77 plane of the connection, in. (mm)
E
78 Qf = chord stress interaction parameter
79 lend = distance from the near side of the connecting branch or plate to end of
ST I
U EV
80 chord, in. (mm)

81 t = design wall thickness of HSS main member, in. (mm)
82 tb = design wall thickness of HSS branch member or thickness of plate, in.
G R
83 (mm)
84 β = width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter = Db/D for
AU IC
85 round HSS; the ratio of overall branch width to chord width = Bb/B for
86 rectangular HSS
BL
87 βeff = effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch
88 members in a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width
89
PU
90 2. Rectangular HSS
91
92 2a. Effective Width for Connections to Rectangular HSS
93
94 For local yielding of transverse elements, the effective width of elements
95 (plates or rectangular HSS branches) perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
96 a rectangular HSS member that deliver a force component transverse to the
97 face of the member shall be taken as:
98
99  10t   Fy t  (K1-1)
Be =    Bb ≤ Bb
 B   Fyb tb 
100
101 For shear yielding (punching), the effective width of the face of a rectangular
102 HSS member, adjacent to transverse element (plates or rectangular HSS
103 branches) shall be taken as:
104
 10t 
105 Bep =   Bb ≤ Bb (K1-2)
 B 

K-3
106 User Note: Section J4 addresses the strength of affected elements in tension,
107 compression, flexure and shear. The effective widths above are used to
108 establish the effective areas to be used when checking these limit states. The
109 commentary provide further guidance
110
111 3. Main Member Stress Function
112
113 Where required, the main member stress function, Qf, shall be taken as:
114
115 (a) For HSS connecting surface in tension, Qf = 1
116
117 (b) For round HSS connecting surface in compression
118
119 Q f = 1 − 0.3U (1 + U ) ≤ 1.0 (K1-3)
120
121 (c) For rectangular HSS connecting surface in compression
122
20 NE
U 
123 Q f = 1.3 − 0.4   ≤ 1.0 for T-, Y-, and cross connections (K1-4)
β
20 O
 U 
124 Q f = 1.3 − 0.4   ≤ 1.0 for gapped K-connections (K1-5)
 βeff 
3, W
125 Q f = 1 − U 2 for longitudinal plate connections (K1-6)
E
126
ST I
127 where
U EV
Pro M
128 U= + ro ≤ 1.0
Fc Ag Fc S
G R
129
130 where Pro and Mro are determined on the side of the joint that has lower
AU IC
131 compression stress for round HSS and higher compression stress for
132 rectangular HSS. Pro and Mro refer to required strengths in the HSS: Pro =
BL
133 Pu for LRFD, and Pa for ASD; Mro = Mu for LRFD, and Ma for ASD.
134
135 Limits of Applicability:
PU
136 D/t ≤ 50 for round HSS T-, Y-,and K-connections

137 D/t ≤ 40 for round HSS cross-connections
138 B/t and H/t ≤ 35 for rectangular HSS overlapped K-connections
139 Fy ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
140 Fy/Fu ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable
141
142 4. End Distance
143
144 The connection available strengths in Chapters J and K assume a main
145 member with a minimum end distance, lend, on both sides of a connections .
146
147 (a) For rectangular sections:
148
149 lend ≥ B 1 − B , for β ≤ 0.85
150 (K1-7)
151
152 (b) For round sections:
153

K-4
 β
154 lend ≥ D 1.25 −  (K1-8)
 2
155
156 When the connection occurs at a distance less than lend from an open chord
157 end, reduce the connection available strength by 50%.
158
159 K2. CONCENTRATED FORCES ON HSS
160
162
163 lb = bearing length of the load, measured parallel to the axis of the HSS
164 member (or measured across the width of the HSS in the case of load-
165 ed cap plates), in. (mm)
166
167 2. Round HSS
168
169 The available strength of plate-to-round HSS connections, within the limits
20 NE
170 in Table K2.1A, shall be taken as shown in Table K2.1.
171
20 O
TABLE K2.1
Available Strengths of Plate-to-Round HSS Connections
3, W
Connection Available
Connection Type Plate Bending
E
Strength
Transverse Plate T-, Y-,
ST I
Limit state: HSS local yielding

U EV
and Cross-Connections
Plate Axial Load In-Plane Out-of-Plane
 
 
G R
5.5
Rn sinθ = Fy t 2  Mn = 0.5BbRn
Bb 
Qf
 1 − 0.81  –
 (K2-1b)
D 
AU IC
(K2-1a)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
BL
Longitudinal Plate T-, Y- Limit state: HSS plastification

and Cross-Connections
PU
Plate Axial Load In-Plane Out-of-Plane
 l  Mn = 0.8 lb Rn
R n sin θ = 5 .5Fy t 2 1 + 0 .25 b  Qf
 D –
(K2-2a) (K2-2b)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
172
173

K-5
174
TABLE K2.1A
Limits of Applicability of Table K2.1
HSS wall slenderness: D t ≤ 50 for T-connections under branch plate axial load
or bending
D t ≤ 40 for cross-connections under branch plate axial
load or bending
Width ratio: 0.2 < Bb D ≤ 1.0 for transverse branch plate connections
Material strength: Fy ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
Ductility: Fy Fu ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable
175
177
178 The available strength of connections to rectangular HSS with concentrated
20 NE
179 loads shall be determined based on the applicable limit states from Chapter
180 J.
181
20 O
182 K3. HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS
183
3, W
184 HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as connections that consist of
185 one or more branch members that are directly welded to a continuous
E
186 chord that passes through the connection and shall be classified as follows:
ST I
187
U EV
188 (a) When the punching load, Pr sinθ, in a branch member is equilibrated
189 by beam shear in the chord member, the connection shall be classi-
G R
190 fied as a T-connection when the branch is perpendicular to the chord,

191 and classified as a Y-connection otherwise.
192 (b) When the punching load, Pr sinθ, in a branch member is essentially
AU IC
193 equilibrated (within 20%) by loads in other branch member(s) on the

194 same side of the connection, the connection shall be classified as a K-
BL
195 connection. The relevant gap is between the primary branch mem-
196 bers whose loads equilibrate. An N-connection can be considered as
PU
197 a type of K-connection.

198
199 User Note: A K-connection with one branch perpendicular to the
200 chord is often called an N-connection.
201
202 (c) When the punching load, Prsinθ, is transmitted through the chord
203 member and is equilibrated by branch member(s) on the opposite
204 side, the connection shall be classified as a cross-connection.
205 (d) When a connection has more than two primary branch members, or
206 branch members in more than one plane, the connection shall be clas-
207 sified as a general or multiplanar connection.
208
209 When branch members transmit part of their load as K-connections and
210 part of their load as T-, Y- or cross-connections, the adequacy of the
211 connections shall be determined by interpolation on the proportion of the
212 available strength of each in total.
213
214 For trusses that are made with HSS that are connected by welding branch
215 members to chord members, eccentricities within the limits of applicability

K-6
216 are permitted without consideration of the resulting moments for the design
217 of the connection.
218
220
221 Ov = lov/lp × 100, %
222 e = eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the
223 branches, in. (mm)
224 g = gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection,
225 neglecting the welds, in. (mm)
226 lb = Hb / sinθ, in. (mm)
227 lov = overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord
228 beneath the two branches, in. (mm)
229 lp = projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, in. (mm)
230
231 γ = chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
232 thickness = D/2t for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to
20 NE
233 wall thickness = B/2t for rectangular HSS
234 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio
235 of the length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of
20 O
236 the connection to the chord width = lb/B
237 θ = acute angle between the branch and chord (degrees)
3, W
238 ζ = gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-
239 connection to the width of the chord = g/B for rectangular HSS
E
240
241 2. Round HSS
ST I
U EV
242
243 The available strength of round HSS-to-HSS truss connections, within the
244 limits in Table K3.1A, shall be taken as the lowest value obtained accord-
G R
245 ing to the limit states shown in Table K3.1.

246
AU IC
BL
PU

K-7
TABLE K3.1
Available Strengths of Round
HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
Connection Type Connection Available Axial Strength
General Check for T-, Y-, Cross- and K- Limit State: Shear Yielding (punching)
Connections with gap, when  1 + sinθ 
Pn = 0.6Fy t πDb  2 
(K3-1)
 2sin θ 
Db (tens/comp) < ( D − 2t )
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
T- and Y-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification
Pnsinθ = Fy t 2 ( 3.1+ 15.6β2 ) γ0.2Qf (K3-2)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
20 NE
Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification
20 O  5.7 
Pn sinθ = Fy t 2   Qf (K3-3)
3, W
 1 − 0.81 β 
E
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

ST I
U EV
K-Connections with Gap or Overlap Limit State: Chord Plastification

G R
( Pn sinθ )compression branch (K3-4)
 Db comp 
AU IC
= Fy t 2  2.0 + 11.33  Qg Qf
 D 
( Pn sin θ)tension branch
BL
(K3-5)
= ( Pn sin θ)compression branch
PU
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

Functions
 
 0.024 γ1.2 
Qg = γ 0.2 1 +  (K3-6)

 exp  0.5 g 
− 1.33  + 1
  t  
x
Note that exp(x) is equal to e , where e=2.71828 is the base of the natural logarithm.
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258

K-8
259
TABLE K3.1A
Joint eccentricity: –0.55 ≤ e/D ≤ 0.25 for K-connections
Chord wall slenderness: D/t ≤ 50 for T-, Y- and K-connections
D/t ≤ 40 for cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: Db t b ≤ 50 for tension and compression branch
Db t b ≤ 0.05E Fyb for compression branch
Width ratio: 0.2 ≤ Db D ≤ 1.0 for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped
K-connections
0.4 ≤ Db D ≤ 1.0 for gapped K-connections
Gap: g ≤ tb comp + tb tens for gapped K-connections
Overlap: 25% ≤ Ov ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
Branch thickness: tb overlapping ≤ tb overlapped for branches in overlapped
K-connections
Material strength: Fy and Fyb ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
20 NE
Ductility strength: Fy/Fu and Fyb/Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is
accpetable.
20 O
260
3, W
262
263 The available strength, φPn and Pn/Ω, of rectangular HSS-to-HSS truss
E
264 connections within the limits in Table K3.2A, shall be taken as the lowest
265 value obtained according to limit states shown in Table K3.2 and Chapter
ST I
U EV
266 J.
267
268 User Note: Outside the limits in Table K3.2A, the limit states of Chapter J
G R
269 are still applicable and the applicable limit states of Chapter K are not
270 defined.
AU IC
271
272
BL
PU

K-9
273
274
TABLE K3.2
Available Strengths of Rectangular
HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
Connection Type Connection Available Axial Strength
Gapped K-Connections Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, for all β
Pnsinθ = Fy t 2 ( 9.8βeff γ0.5 ) Qf (K3-7)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
Limit State: Shear Yielding (punching), when Bb < B – 2t

This limit state need not be checked for square
branches.
Pn sinθ = 0.6Fy tB ( 2η + β + βeop ) (K3-8)
20 NE
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
20 O
Limit State: Shear of Chord Side Walls in the Gap
Region
3, W
Determine Pnsinθ in accordance with Section G4.
This limit state need not be checked for square chords.
E
ST I
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches due to

U EV
Uneven Load Distribution.

This limit state need not be checked for square
branches or where B t ≥ 15.
G R
Pn = Fybtb ( 2Hb + Bb + Be − 4tb ) (K3-9)

AU IC
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)

BL
Overlapped K-Connections Limit state: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches due to

Uneven Load Distribution
PU
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)

When 25% ≤ Ov < 50%
Pn,i = Fybi tbi  v ( 2Hbi − 4tbi ) + Bei + Bej 

O
(K3-10)
 50 
When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%
(
Pn ,i = Fybi t bi 2H bi − 4t bi + Bei + Bej ) (K3-11)
When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%

Note that the force arrows shown for (
Pn,i = Fybi t bi 2H bi − 4t bi + Bbi + Bej ) (K3-12)
overlapped K-connections may be
reversed; i and j control member Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
identification.
Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
 Fybj Abj 
Pn, j = Pn,i   (K3-13)
 Fybi Abi 
 

K-10
Functions
βeff = ( Bb + Hb )compression branch + ( Bb + Hb )tension branch  4B (K3-16)

5β
βeop = ≤β (K3-17)
γ
275
TABLE K3.2A
Joint eccentricity: –0.55 ≤ e H ≤ 0.25 for K-connections
Chord wall slenderness: B t and H t ≤ 35 for gapped K-connections and T-, Y-, and
cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: B t ≤ 30 for overlapped K-connections
H t ≤ 35 for overlapped K-connections
Bb t b and H b t b ≤ 35 for tension branch
E
20 NE
≤ 1.25 for compression branch of gapped K-,
Fyb
T-, Y- and cross-connections
20 O
≤ 35 for compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y-
and cross-connections
3, W
E
≤ 1.1 for compression branch of overlapped K-
Fyb
E
connections
Width ratio: Bb B and H b B ≥ 0.25 for T-, Y-, cross-, and overlapped K-
ST I
U EV
connections
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ H b Bb ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ H B ≤ 2.0
Overlap: 25% ≤ Ov ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
G R
Branch width ratio: Bbi Bbj ≥ 0.75 for overlapped K-connections, where
subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
AU IC
and subscript j refers to the overlapped

branch
BL
Branch thickness ratio: t bi t bj ≤ 1.0 for overlapped K-connections, where

subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
PU
and subscript j refers to the overlapped

branch
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable.
Additional Limits for Gapped K-Connections

γ
Width ratio: Bb B and H b B ≥ 0.1 +
50
βeff ≥ 0.35
Gap ratio: ζ = g B ≥ 0.5 (1−βeff )
Gap: g ≥ tb compression branch + tb tension branch
Branch size: smaller Bb ≥ 0.63 (larger Bb), if both branches are square
276
277 User Note: Maximum gap size in Table K3.2A will be controlled by the e/H limit.
278 If the gap is large, treat as two Y-connections.
279
280 K4. HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT CONNECTIONS
281
282 HSS-to-HSS moment connections are defined as connections that consist
283 of one or two branch members that are directly welded to a continuous

K-11
284 chord that passes through the connection, with the branch or branches
285 loaded by bending moments.
286
287 A connection shall be classified as:
288
289 (a) A T-connection when there is one branch and it is perpendicular to the
290 chord and as a Y-connection when there is one branch, but not per-
291 pendicular to the chord
292 (b) A cross-connection when there is a branch on each (opposite) side of
293 the chord
294
296
297 Zb = Plastic section modulus of branch about the axis of bending, in.3
298 (mm3)
299 β = width ratio
300 = Db/D for round HSS; ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter
301 = Bb/B for rectangular HSS; ratio of overall branch width to chord
20 NE
302 width
303 γ = chord slenderness ratio
20 O
304 = D/2t for round HSS; ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
305 thickness
306 = B/2t for rectangular HSS; ratio of one-half the width to the wall
3, W
307 thickness
308 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS
E
309 = lb/B; the ratio of the length of contact of the branch with the chord in
ST I
310 the plane of the connection to the chord width, where lb=Hb /sin θ
U EV
311 θ = acute angle between the branch and chord (degrees)

312
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

K-12
313 2. Round HSS

314
315 The available strength of round HSS-to-HSS moment connections within
316 the limits of Table K4.1A shall be taken as the lowest value of the
317 applicable limit states shown in Table K4.1.
318
TABLE K4.1
Available Strengths of Round HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections
Connection Available Flexural
Connection Type
Strength
Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending Limit State: Chord Plastification
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
M n -ip = 5.39 Fy t 2 γ 0.5β  b  Qf (K4-1)

D
 sin θ 
20 NE
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
Limit State: Shear Yielding
(punching), when Db < ( D − 2t )
20 O  1 + 3sinθ 
3, W
M n -ip = 0.6Fy tDb2  2  (K4-2)
 4sin θ 
E
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)

ST I
U EV
Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending Limit State: Chord Plastification

T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
Fy t 2Db  3.0 
G R
Mn -op = Qf (K4-3)
sinθ  1 − 0.81 β 
AU IC
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

Limit state: Shear Yielding
BL
(punching), when Db < ( D − 2t )

PU
 3 + sinθ 
Mn -op = 0.6Fy tDb2  2 
(K4-4)
 4sin θ 
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
For T-, Y- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-
plane bending, and out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
2
Pr  Mr − ip  Mr −op
+  + ≤ 1.0 (K4-5)
Pc  Mc − ip  Mc −op
Pr = required axial strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
kips (N)
Mr-ip = required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD
load combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
Mr-op= required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
Pc = available axial strength obtained from Table K3.1, kips (N)
Mc-ip = available strength for in-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)
Mc-op= available strength for out-of-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)

K-13
319
TABLE K4.1A
Chord wall slenderness: D t ≤ 50 for T- and Y-connections
D t ≤ 40 for cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: Db t b ≤ 50
Db t b ≤ 0.05 E Fyb
Width ratio: 0.2 < Db D ≤ 1.0
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is
acceptable
320
321
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

K--14
322 3. Rectangular
R HSS
323
324 Thhe available sttrength, φPn an
nd Pn/Ω, of recctangular HSS--to-HSS momeent
325 co
onnections witthin the limits in Table K4.2 2A shall be takken as the loweest
326 vaalue obtained according
a to liimit states show
wn in Table KK4.2 and Chaptter
327 J.
328
329 User
U Note: Outtside the limits in Table K4.2
2A, the limit staates of Chapteer J
330 arre still applicaable and the applicable
a limiit states of Chhapter K are nnot
331 deefined.
332
333
TABLE
T K4
4.2
Availa
able Strengths of Rectangu
ular HSS-to-HSS M
Moment
Connectio
C ons
Connection Type Co
onnection Ava
ailable Flexura
al Strength
20 NE
Branch((es) under Out--of-Plane Bend
ding
T-
T and Cross-C Connections Lim
mit State: Chorrd Sidewall Lo
ocal Yielding
20 O
Mn − op = Fy*t ( B − t )( H b + 5t ) (K4-6)
φ = 1.00 (LR
RFD) Ω = 1.50
0 (ASD)
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
Lim
mit State: Chorrd distortional fa
ailure, for T-
conn
nections and un nbalanced crosss-connections
G R
Mn −op = 2Fy t Hbt + BHt ( B + H ) 

AU IC
(K4-7)
BL
φ = 0.95 (LRF
FD) Ω = 1.5
58 (ASD)
PU
Limitt State: Sidew

wall Local Yield
ding
Whenn β ≥ 0.85
2
M n − ip = 0.5Fy*t ( H b + 5t ) (K4-8)
φ = 1.00 (LR
RFD) Ω = 1.50
0 (ASD)
For T- and cross-connecttions, with bran

nch(es) under combined
c axial load, in-plane bending, and
Specification for Structu dings, xx, 20222

ural Steel Build
PUBLIC REVIEW ONE E Draft Dated August 3, 202 0
AMERICAN INSTITUTEE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
O
K-15
out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:

Pr Mr − ip Mr − op
+ + ≤ 1.0 (K4-9)
Pc Mc − ip Mc − op
Pr = required axial strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
Mr-ip = required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-
in (N-mm)
Mr-op = required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
kip-in (N-mm)
Pc = available axial strength obtained from Table K3.1, kips (N)
Mc-ip = available strength for in-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)
Mc-op = available strength for out-of-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)

= φMn–op (LRFD); = Mn–op /Ω (ASD)
Functions
Fy*= Fy for T- connections and 0.8Fy for cross connections
Pro = Pu for LRFD, and Pa for ASD; Mro = Mu for LRFD, and Ma for ASD.
20 NE
334
335
TABLE K4.2A
20 O
3, W
Branch angle: θ ≅ 90°
B t and H t ≤ 35
E
Chord wall slenderness:
Bb t b and H b t b ≤ 35
ST I
Branch wall slenderness:

U EV
E
≤ 1.25
Fyb
G R
Width ratio: Bb B ≥ 0.25

AU IC
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ Hb B b ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ H B ≤ 2.0

BL
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable
336
PU
337 K5. WELDS OF PLATES AND BRANCHES TO HSS

338
339 The available strength of branch connections shall be determined consider-
340 ing the nonuniformity of load transfer along the line of weld, due to
341 differences in relative stiffness of HSS walls in HSS-to-HSS connections
342 and between elements in transverse plate-to-HSS connections, as follows:
343
344 Rn or Pn= Fnwtwle (K5-1)
345
346 Mn-ip = FnwSip (K5-2)
347
348 Mn-op = FnwSop (K5-3)
349
350 Interaction shall be considered.
351
352 (a) For fillet welds
353
354 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
355
356 (b) For partial-joint-penetration groove welds

K-16
357
358 φ = 0.80 (LRFD) Ω = 1.88 (ASD)
359
360 where
361 Fnw = nominal stress of weld metal in accordance with Chapter J, ksi
362 (MPa)
363 Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending
364 (Table K5.1), in.3 (mm3)
365 Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bend-
366 ing (Table K5.1), in.3 (mm3)
367 le = total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to HSS for
368 weld strength calculations, in. (mm)
369 tw = smallest effective weld throat around the perimeter of branch or
370 plate, in. (mm)
371
TABLE K5.1
Effective Weld Properties for Connections to
20 NE
Rectangular HSS
Connection Type Weld Properties
20 O
Transverse Plate T- and Cross- Effective Weld Properties
Connections under Plate Axial Load
3, W
le = 2Be (K5-4)
E
ST I
U EV
where le = total effective weld length for welds on

both sides of the transverse plate
T-, Y-, and Cross-Connections Effective Weld Properties
G R
under Branch Axial Load or Bending

2Hb
AU IC
le = + 2Be (K5-5)
sinθ
BL
2
tw  Hb   Hb 
Sip =   + tw Be   (K5-6)
3  sin θ   sin θ 
PU
3
( t 3)( Bb − Be )
Sop = tw  b  Bb + w ( Bb2 ) − w
H t (K5-7)
 sin θ  3 Bb
When β > 0.85 or θ > 50°, Be 2 shall not exceed

Bb 4
Gapped K-Connections under Branch Effective Weld Properties

Axial Load
When θ ≤ 50°:

K-17
2 ( Hb − 1.2tb )
le = + 2 ( Bb − 1.2tb ) (K5-8)
sinθ
When θ ≥ 60°:
2 ( Hb − 1.2tb )
le = + Bb − 1.2tb (K5-9)
sinθ
When 50° < θ < 60°, linear interpolation shall be

used to determine le.
Overlapped K-Connections Overlapping Member Effective Weld Properties

Under Branch Axial Load (all dimensions are for the overlapping branch, i )
20 NE
When 25% ≤ Ov < 50%:
2Ov  Ov   H bi  Ov  Hbi 
le,i = 1 −  +  
50  100   sinθi  100  sin ( θi + θ j ) 
20 O
+Bei + Bej
3, W
(K5-10)
E
When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%:
 O  H  O  
le,i = 2  1 − v   bi  + v 
ST I
Hbi
 
U EV
Note that the force arrows shown for  100   sinθi  100  sin ( θi + θ j ) 
overlapped K-connections may be +Bei + Bej
reversed; i and j control member (K5-11)
G R
identification.
When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%:
AU IC
 O  H  Ov  
le,i = 2  1 − v   bi
Hbi
+  
  100   sinθi  100  sin ( θi + θ j ) 
BL
+Bbi + Bej
(K5-12)
PU
When Bbi B > 0.85 or θi > 50 , Bei 2 shall not

exceed Bbi 4 and when Bbi Bbj > 0.85 or
(180 − θi − θ j ) > 50 , Bej 2 shall not exceed Bbi/4.
Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch

Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
Overlapped Member Effective Weld Properties
(all dimensions are for the overlapped branch, j )
2H bj
le, j = + 2B ej (K5-13)
sinθ j
When Bbj B > 0.85 or θj > 50°,

le, j = 2 ( Hbj − 1.2tbj ) sinθ j (K5-14)
372
373 When a rectangular overlapped K-connection has been designed in accordance with
374 Table K3.2, and the branch member component forces normal to the chord are 80%

K--18
375 balanced (ii.e., the branch

h member forcees normal to th
he chord face ddiffer by no moore
376 than 20%)), the hidden weld
w under an
n overlapping branch may bbe omitted if tthe
377 remaining welds to the overlapped
o braanch everywheere develop thee full capacity of
378 pped branch meember walls.
the overlap
379
380 The weld checks
c in Tablles K5.1 and K5.2
K are not req
quired if the w
welds are capabble
381 of developping the full strrength of the brranch memberr wall along itss entire perimetter
382 (or a plate along its entiree length).
383
384 User Notee: The approaach used here to allow dow wnsizing of w
welds assumess a
385 constant weld
w size around the full perim meter of the HS SS branch. Sppecial attentionn is
386 required for
fo equal width (or near-equ ual width) con nnections to rrectangular HS SS
387 which commbine partial-jo oint-penetration groove weld ds along the m
matched edges of
388 the connecction, with filleet welds generaally across the main
m member fface.
389
TAB
BLE K5.2
Effe
ective We
eld Prope
erties for Connecttions to
20 NE
Round HSS
Connection Type
T Weld Prope erties
20 O
T-, Y-, an
nd Cross-Connnections under Efffective Weld P
Properties
Branch Axial Load
L
When 0.1≤ β ≤ 0.5, 60⁰ ≤ θ ≤ 90⁰, and 10
3, W
≤ D/t ≤ 50
0:
E
4
le = lw ≤ lw (K5-15)
ST I
2β ( D t )
U EV
Where lwis the total weld

d length aroundd
G R
the branch
h. This may be obtained from m
3D modelss of 9ntersectio
on cylinders, orr
from:
AU IC
1 + 1 sin θ
BL
lw = πDb (K5-16)
2
PU
390

ural Steel Build
O
L-1
1
2 CHAPTER L
3
4 DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY
5
6
7 This chapter addresses the evaluation of the structure and its components for the
8 serviceability limit states of deflections, drift, vibration, wind-induced motion,
9 thermal distortion, and connection slip.
11 L1. General Provisions
12 L2. Deflections
13 L3. Drift
14 L4. Vibration
15 L5. Wind-Induced Motion
20 NE
16 L6. Thermal Expansion and Contraction
17 L7. Connection Slip
18
20 O
19 L1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
20
21 Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance,
3, W
22 maintainability, durability, and the comfort of its occupants are preserved
23 under typical usage. Limiting values of structural behavior for serviceability
E
24 (such as maximum deflections and accelerations) shall be chosen with due

ST I
25 regard to the intended function of the structure. Serviceability shall be

U EV
26 evaluated using applicable load combinations.

27
G R
28 User Note: Serviceability limit states, service loads, and appropriate load
29 combinations for serviceability considerations can be found in Minimum
AU IC
30 Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
31 (ASCE/SEI 7) Appendix C and its commentary. The performance
BL
32 requirements for serviceability in this chapter are consistent with ASCE/SEI

33 7 Appendix C. Service loads are those that act on the structure at an arbitrary
34 point in time and are not usually taken as the nominal loads.
PU
35
36 Reduced stiffness values used in the direct analysis method, described in
37 Chapter C, are not intended for use with the provisions of this chapter.
38
39 L2. DEFLECTIONS
40
41 Deflections in structural members and structural systems shall be limited so
42 as not to impair the serviceability of the structure.
43
44 L3. DRIFT
45
46 Drift shall be limited so as not to impair the serviceability of the structure.
47
48 L4. VIBRATION
49
50 The effect of vibration on the comfort of the occupants and the function of
51 the structure shall be considered. The sources of vibration to be considered
52 include occupant loading, vibrating machinery and others identified for the
53 structure.
54

L-2
55 L5. WIND-INDUCED MOTION

56
57 The effect of wind-induced motion of buildings on the comfort of occupants
58 shall be considered.
59
60 L6. THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
61
62 The effects of thermal expansion and contraction of a building shall be
63 considered.
64
65 L7. CONNECTION SLIP
66
67 The effects of connection slip shall be included in the design where slip at
68 bolted connections may cause deformations that impair the serviceability of
69 the structure. Where appropriate, the connection shall be designed to
70 preclude slip.
71
20 NE
72 User Note: For the design of slip-critical connections, see Sections J3.8 and
73 J3.9. For more information on connection slip, refer to the RCSC Specifica-
74 tion for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Dated August 3, 2020
M-1
1 CHAPTER M
2 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

3
4
5 This chapter addresses requirements for fabrication documents, fabrication, shop
6 painting and erection.
7
9
10 M1. Fabriction and Erection Documents
11 M2. Fabrication
12 M3. Shop Painting
13 M4. Erection
14
15 M1. FABRICATION AND ERECTION DOCUMENTS
20 NE
16
17 1. Fabrication Documents for Steel Construction
20 O
18 Fabrication documents shall indicate the work to be performed, and
19 include items required by the applicable building code and the following
3, W
20 as applicable:
E
21 (a) Locations of pretensioned bolts
ST I
22 (b) Locations of Class A, or higher, faying surfaces

U EV
23 (c) Weld access hole dimensions, surface profile and finish requirements
G R
24 (d) Nondestructive testing (NDT) where performed by the fabricator
25 2. Erection Documents for Steel Construction

AU IC
26 Erection documents shall indicate the work to be performed, and include

BL
27 items required by the applicable building code and the following as

28 applicable:
PU
29 (a) Locations of pretensioned bolts

30 (b) Those joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly order,
31 welding sequence, welding technique or other special precautions are
32 required
33
34 User Note: Refer to Code of Standard Practice Section 4 addresses
35 requirements for fabrication and erection documents.
36
37 M2. FABRICATION
38
39 1. Cambering, Curving and Straightening
40
41 Local application of heat or mechanical means is permitted to be used to
42 introduce or correct camber, curvature and straightness. The temperature of
43 heated regions shall not exceed 1,100°F (590°C) for ASTM A514/A514M nor
44 1,200°F (650°C) for other steels, unless limited by the specified ASTM
45 material standard..
46

M-2
47 2. Thermal Cutting
48
49 Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of Structural Welding
50 Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M) clauses 5.14.5.2, 5.14.8.3 and 5.14.8.4,
51 hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1M/D1.1M, with the exception that
52 thermally cut free edges that will not be subject to fatigue shall be free of
53 round-bottom gouges greater than 3/16 in. (5 mm) deep and sharp V-shaped
54 notches. Gouges deeper than 3/16 in. (5 mm) and notches shall be removed by
55 grinding or repaired by welding.
56
57 Reentrant corners shall be formed with a curved transition. The radius need
58 not exceed that required to fit the connection. Discontinuous corners are
59 permitted where the material on both sides of the discontinuous reentrant
60 corner are connected to a mating piece to prevent deformation and associated
61 stress concentration at the corner.
62
63 User Note: Reentrant corners with a radius of 1/2 to 3/8 in. (13 to 10 mm) are
20 NE
64 acceptable for statically loaded work. Where pieces need to fit tightly together,
65 a discontinuous reentrant corner is acceptable if the pieces are connected close
66 to the corner on both sides of the discontinuous corner. Slots in HSS for
20 O
67 gussets may be made with semicircular ends or with curved corners. Square
68 ends are acceptable provided the edge of the gusset is welded to the HSS.
69
3, W
70 Weld access holes shall meet the geometrical requirements of Section J1.6.
71 Beam copes and welds access holes in shapes that are to be galvanized shall
E
72 be ground to bright metal. For shapes with a flange thickness not exceeding 2
ST I
73 in. (50 mm), the roughness of thermally cut surfaces of copes shall be no
U EV
74 greater than a surface roughness value of 2,000 μin. (50 μm) as defined in
75 Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay (ASME B46.1),
G R
76 hereafter referred to as ASTM B46.1. For beam copes and weld access holes
77 in which the curved part of the access hole is thermally cut in ASTM
AU IC
78 A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm)
79 and welded built-up shapes with material thickness greater than 2 in. (50
BL
80 mm), a preheat temperature of not less than 150°F (66°C) shall be applied
81 prior to thermal cutting. The thermally cut surface of access holes in ASTM
82 A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm)
PU
83 and built-up shapes with a material thickness greater than 2 in. (50 mm) shall
84 be ground.
85
86 User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS
87 C4.1-77) sample 2 may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface
88 roughness of copes in shapes with flanges not exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) thick.
89
90 3. Planing of Edges
91
92 Planing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or shapes is not
93 required unless specifically called for in the construction documents or
94 included in a stipulated edge preparation for welding.
95
96 4. Welded Construction
97
98 Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, except as
99 modified in Section J2.
100
101 User Note: Welder qualification tests on plate defined in AWS D1.1/D1.1M
102 clause 4 are appropriate for welds connecting plates, shapes or HSS to other

M-3
103 plates, shapes or rectangular HSS. The 6GR tubular welder qualification is
104 required for unbacked complete-joint-penetration groove welds of HSS T-, Y-
105 and K-connections.
106
107 5. Bolted Construction
108
109 Parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and rigidly held together
110 during assembly. Use of a drift pin in bolt holes during assembly shall not
111 distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be cause
112 for rejection.
113
114 Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the RCSC Specification for
115 Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts Section 3.3, hereafter referred to
116 as the RCSC Specification. Water jet and thermally cut holes are permittedand
117 shall have a surface roughness profile not exceeding 1,000 μin. (25 μm), as
118 defined in ASME B46.1. Gouges shall not exceed a depth of 1/16 in. (2 mm).
119
20 NE
120 User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS
121 C4.1-77) sample 3 may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface
122 roughness of thermally cut holes.
20 O
123
124 Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness of not more than 1/4 in. (6
125 mm) within a joint, are permitted without changing the strength (based upon
3, W
126 hole type) for the design of connections. The orientation of such shims is
127 independent of the direction of application of the load.
E
128
ST I
U EV
129 The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the RCSC
130 Specification, except as modified in Section J3.
131
G R
132 6. Compression Joints

133
AU IC
134 Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part of the splice
135 strength shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces
BL
136 prepared by milling, sawing or other equivalent means.

137
138 7. Dimensional Tolerances
PU
139
140 Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of the AISC
141 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, hereafter referred
142 to as the Code of Standard Practice.
143
144 8. Finish of Column Bases
145
146 Column bases and base plates shall be finished in accordance with the
147 following requirements:
148
149 (a) Steel bearing plates 2 in. (50 mm) or less in thickness are permitted
150 without milling provided a smooth and notch-free contact bearing sur-
151 face is obtained. Steel bearing plates over 2 in. (50 mm) but not over 4
152 in. (100 mm) in thickness are permitted to be straightened by pressing or,
153 if presses are not available, by milling for bearing surfaces, except as
154 stipulated in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of this section, to obtain a smooth
155 and notch-free contact bearing surface. Steel bearing plates over 4 in.
156 (100 mm) in thickness shall be milled for bearing surfaces, except as
157 stipulated in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
158

M-4
159 (b) Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases that are grouted to
160 ensure full bearing contact on foundations need not be milled.
161
162 (c) Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when complete-joint-
163 penetration groove welds are provided between the column and the
164 bearing plate.
165
166 9. Holes for Anchor Rods
167
168 Holes for anchor rods are permitted to be mechanically or manually thermally
169 cut, providing the quality requirements in accordance with the provisions of
170 Section M2.2 are met.
171
172 10. Drain Holes
173
174 When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either during
175 construction or during service, the member shall be sealed, provided with a
20 NE
176 drain hole at the base, or otherwise protected from water infiltration.
177
178 11. Requirements for Galvanized Members
20 O
179
180 Members and parts to be galvanized shall be designed, detailed and
181 fabricated to provide for flow and drainage of pickling fluids and zinc and to
3, W
182 prevent pressure buildup in enclosed parts.
183
E
184 User Note: Drainage and vent holes should be detailed on fabrication
ST I
185 documents. See The Design of Products to be Hot-Dip Galvanized After

U EV
186 Fabrication, American Galvanizer’s Association, and ASTM A123, A143,

187 A385, F2329, A385, and A780 for useful information on design and
G R
188 detailing of galvanized members. See Section M2.2 for requirements for
189 copes of members that are to be galvanized.
AU IC
190
191 M3. SHOP PAINTING
BL
192
194
PU
195 Shop painting and surface preparation shall be in accordance with the
196 provisions in Code of Standard Practice Chapter 6.
197
198 Shop paint is not required unless specified by the contract documents.
199
200 2. Inaccessible Surfaces
201
202 Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be
203 cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if required by the construction
204 documents.
205
206 3. Contact Surfaces
207
208 Paint is permitted in bearing-type connections. For slip-critical connections,
209 the faying surface requirements shall be in accordance with RCSC
210 Specification Section 3.2.2.
211
212 4. Finished Surfaces
213

M-5
214 Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by a rust

215 inhibitive coating that can be removed prior to erection or has characteristics
216 that make removal prior to erection unnecessary.
217
218 5. Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds
219
220 Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, surfaces within 2 in. (50
221 mm) of any field weld location shall be free of materials that would prevent
222 weld quality from meeting the quality requirements of this Specification, or
223 produce unsafe fumes during welding.
224
225 M4. ERECTION
226
227 1. Column Base Setting
228
229 Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with full bearing on
230 concrete or masonry as defined in Code of Standard Practice Section 7.
20 NE
231
232 2. Stability and Connections
233
20 O
234 The frame of structural steel buildings shall be carried up true and plumb
235 within the limits defined in Code of Standard Practice Chapter 7. As erection
236 progresses, the structure shall be secured to support dead, erection and other
3, W
237 loads anticipated to occur during the period of erection. Temporary bracing
238 shall be provided, in accordance with the requirements of the Code of
E
239 Standard Practice, wherever necessary to support the loads to which the
ST I
240 structure may be subjected, including equipment and the operation of same.
U EV
241 Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for safety.
242
G R
243 3. Alignment
244
AU IC
245 No permanent bolting or welding shall be performed until the affected

246 portions of the structure have been aligned as required by the construction
247 documents.
BL
248
249 4. Fit of Column Compression Joints and Base Plates
PU
250
251 Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 1/16 in. (2 mm), regardless of
252 the type of splice used (partial-joint-penetration groove welded or bolted), is
253 permitted. If the gap exceeds 1/16 in. (2 mm), but is equal to or less than 1/4
254 in. (6 mm), and if an engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact
255 area does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with nontapered steel shims.
256 Shims need not be other than mild steel, regardless of the grade of the main
257 material.
258
259 5. Field Welding
260
261 Surfaces in and adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be prepared as
262 necessary to assure weld quality. This preparation shall include surface
263 preparation necessary to correct for damage or contamination occurring
264 subsequent to fabrication.
265
266 6. Field Painting
267

M-6
268 Responsibility for touch-up painting, cleaning, and field painting shall be
269 allocated in accordance with accepted local practices, and this allocation shall
270 be set forth explicitly in the contract documents.
271
272
273
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

N-1
1
2
3 CHAPTER N
4 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
5
6 This chapter addresses minimum requirements for quality control, quality assurance
7 and nondestructive testing for structural steel systems and steel elements of
8 composite members for buildings and other structures.
9
10 User Note: This chapter does not address quality control or quality assurance for
11 the following items:
12 (a) Steel (open web) joists and girders
13 (b) Tanks or pressure vessels
14 (c) Cables, cold-formed steel products, or gage material
15 (d) Concrete reinforcing bars, concrete materials, or placement of concrete for
16 composite members
17 (e) Surface preparations or coatings
20 NE
18
19 The Chapter is organized as follows:
20
20 O
21 N1. General Provisions
22 N2. Fabricator and Erector Quality Control Program
3, W
23 N3. Fabricator and Erector Documents
24 N4. Inspection and Nondestructive Testing Personnel
E
25 N5. Minimum Requirements for Inspection of Structural Steel Buildings
ST I
26 N6. Approved Fabricators and Erectors

U EV
27 N7. Nonconforming Material and Workmanship

28 N8. Minimum Requirements for Shop or Field Applied Coatings
29
G R
30 N1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

31
AU IC
32 Quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA), as specified in this

33 chapter, shall be provided. QC shall be provided by the fabricator and
BL
34 erector. QA shall be provided by others when required by the authority

35 having jurisdiction (AHJ), applicable building code, purchaser, owner,
PU
36 engineer of record (EOR), or as modified by the provisions of N6.

37 Nondestructive testing (NDT) shall be performed by the agency or firm
38 responsible for quality assurance, except as permitted in accordance with
39 Section N6.
40
41 User Note: The QA/QC requirements in Chapter N are considered
42 adequate and effective for most steel structures and are strongly encour-
43 aged without modification. When the applicable building code and AHJ
44 requires the use of a QA plan, this chapter outlines the minimum require-
45 ments deemed effective to provide satisfactory results in steel building
46 construction. There may be cases where supplemental inspections are
47 advisable. Additionally, where the contractor’s QC program has demon-
48 strated the capability to perform some tasks this plan has assigned to QA,
49 modification of the plan could be considered.
50
51 User Note: The producers of materials manufactured in accordance with
52 the standard specifications referenced in Section A3 and steel deck
53 manufacturers are not considered to be fabricators or erectors.
54
55 N2. FABRICATOR AND ERECTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

N-2
56
57 The fabricator and erector shall establish, maintain and implement QC
58 procedures to ensure that their work is performed in accordance with this
59 Specification and the construction documents.
60
61 1. Material Identification
62
63 Material identification procedures shall comply with the requirements of
64 Section 6.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
65 Bridges, hereafter referred to as the Code of Standard Practice, and shall
66 be monitored by the fabricator’s quality control inspector (QCI).
67
68 2. Fabricator Quality Control Procedures
69
70 The fabricator’s QC procedures shall address inspection of the following as
71 a minimum, as applicable:
72
20 NE
73 (a) Shop welding, high-strength bolting, and details in accordance with
74 Section N5
75 (b) Shop cut and finished surfaces in accordance with Section M2
20 O
76 (c) Shop heating for cambering, curving and straightening in accordance
77 with Section M2.1
78 (d) Tolerances for shop fabrication in accordance with Code of Standard
3, W
79 Practice Section 6.4
80
E
81 3. Erector Quality Control Procedures

ST I
82
U EV
83 The erector’s quality control procedures shall address inspection of the

84 following as a minimum, as applicable:
G R
85
86 (a) Field welding, high-strength bolting, and details in accordance with
AU IC
87 Section N5
88 (b) Steel deck in accordance with SDI Standard for Quality Control and
89
BL
Quality Assurance for Installation of Steel Deck

90 (c) Headed steel stud anchor placement and attachment in accordance
91 with Section N5.4
PU
92 (d) Field cut surfaces in accordance with Section M2.2

93 (e) Field heating for straightening in accordance with Section M2.1
94 (f) Tolerances for field erection in accordance with Code of Standard
95 Practice Section 7.13
96
97 N3. FABRICATOR AND ERECTOR DOCUMENTS
98
99 1. Submittals for Steel Construction
100
101 The fabricator or erector shall submit the following documents for review
102 by the EOR or the EOR’s designee, in accordance with Code of Standard
103 Practice Section 4.4, prior to fabrication or erection, as applicable:
104
105 (a) Fabrication documents, unless fabrication documents have been
106 furnished by others
107 (b) Erection documents, unless erection documents have been furnished
108 by others
109
110 2. Available Documents for Steel Construction
111

N-3
112 The following documents shall be available in electronic or printed form

113 for review by the EOR or the EOR’s designee prior to fabrication or
114 erection, as applicable, unless otherwise required in the construction
115 documents to be submitted:
116
117 (a) For main structural steel elements, copies of material test reports
118 in accordance with Section A3.1.
119 (b) For steel castings and forgings, copies of material test reports in
120 accordance with Section A3.2.
121 (c) For fasteners, copies of manufacturer’s certifications in accord-
122 ance with Section A3.3.
123 (d) For anchor rods and threaded rods, copies of material test reports
125 (e) For welding consumables, copies of manufacturer’s certifications
127 (f) For headed stud anchors, copies of manufacturer’s certifications
20 NE
129 (g) Manufacturer’s product data sheets or catalog data for welding
130 filler metals and fluxes to be used. The data sheets shall describe
131 the product, limitations of use, recommended or typical welding
20 O
132 parameters, and storage and exposure requirements, including
133 baking, if applicable.
134 (h) Welding procedure specifications (WPS).
3, W
135 (i) Procedure qualification records (PQR) for WPS that are not
136 prequalified in accordance with Structural Welding Code—Steel
E
137 (AWS D1.1/D1.1M), hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

ST I
138 or Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel (AWS D1.3/D1.3M), as

U EV
139 applicable.
140 (j) Welding personnel performance qualification records (WPQR)
G R
141 and continuity records.

142 (k) Fabricator’s or erector’s, as applicable, written QC manual that
AU IC
143 shall include, as a minimum:

144 (1) Material control procedures
145 (2) Inspection procedures
BL
146 (3) Nonconformance procedures

147 (l) Fabricator’s or erector’s, as applicable, QCI qualifications.
PU
148 (m) Fabricator NDT personnel qualifications, if NDT is performed by

149 the fabricator.
150
151 N4. INSPECTION AND NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING PERSONNEL
152
153 1. Quality Control Inspector Qualifications
154
155 QC welding inspection personnel shall be qualified to the satisfaction of
156 the fabricator’s or erector’s QC program, as applicable, and in accordance
157 with either of the following:
158
159 (a) Associate welding inspectors (AWI) or higher as defined in
160 Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors (AWS
161 B5.1), or
162 (b) Qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.1.4.
163
164 QC bolting inspection personnel shall be qualified on the basis of docu-
165 mented training and experience in structural bolting inspection.
166

N-4
167 The fabricator or erector’s QCI performing coating inspection shall be

168 qualified by training and experience as required by the firm’s quality
169 control program. The QCI shall receive initial and periodic documented
170 training.
171
172 2. Quality Assurance Inspector Qualifications
173
174 QA welding inspectors shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the QA
175 agency’s written practice, and in accordance with either of the following:
176
177 (a) Welding inspectors (WI) or senior welding inspectors (SWI), as
178 defined in Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors
179 (AWS B5.1), except AWI are permitted to be used under the di-
180 rect supervision of WI, who are on the premises and available
181 when weld inspection is being conducted, or
182 (b) Qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.1.4.
183
20 NE
184 QA bolting inspection personnel shall be qualified on the basis of docu-
185 mented training and experience in structural bolting inspection.
186
20 O
187 QA coating inspection personnel shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the
188 QA agency’s written practice, receive documented training, have experi-
189 ence in coating inspection, and be qualified in accordance with one of the
3, W
190 following:
191
E
192 (a) NACE, Coating Inspector Program (CIP) Level 1 Certification

ST I
193 (b) SSPC, Protective Coatings Inspector Program (PCI) Level 1

U EV
194 Certification
195 (c) On the basis of documented training and experience in coating
G R
196 application and inspection.

197
AU IC
198 3. NDT Personnel Qualifications

199
200 NDT personnel, for NDT other than visual, shall be qualified in accordance
BL
201 with their employer’s written practice, which shall meet or exceed the
202 criteria of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.14.6, and,
PU
203
204 (a) Personnel Qualification and Certification Nondestructive Testing
205 (ASNT SNT-TC-1A), or
206 (b) Standard for the Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive
207 Testing Personnel (ANSI/ASNT CP-189).
208
209 N5. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION OF
210 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
211
212 1. Quality Control
213
214 QC inspection tasks shall be performed by the fabricator’s or erector’s
215 QCI, as applicable, in accordance with Sections N5.4, N5.6 and N5.7.
216
217 Tasks in Tables N5.4-1 through N5.4-3 and Tables N5.6-1 through N5.6-3
218 listed for QC are those inspections performed by the QCI to ensure that the
219 work is performed in accordance with the construction documents.
220

N-5
221 For QC inspection, the applicable construction documents are the fabrica-
222 tion documents and the erection documents, and the applicable referenced
223 specifications, codes and standards.
224
225 User Note: The QCI need not refer to the design documents and project
226 specifications. The Code of Standard Practice Section 4.2.1(a) requires the
227 transfer of information from the contract documents (design documents
228 and project specification) into accurate and complete fabrication and
229 erection documents, allowing QC inspection to be based upon fabrication
230 and erection documents alone.
231
232 2. Quality Assurance
233
234 The QAI shall review the material test reports and certifications as listed in
235 Section N3.2 for compliance with the construction documents.
236
237 QA inspection tasks shall be performed by the QAI, in accordance with
20 NE
238 Sections N5.4, N5.6 and N5.7.
239
240 Tasks in Tables N5.4-1 through N5.4-3 and N5.6-1 through N5.6-3 listed
20 O
241 for QA are those inspections performed by the QAI to ensure that the work
242 is performed in accordance with the construction documents.
243
3, W
244 Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to the AHJ, EOR or owner,
245 the QA agency shall submit to the fabricator and erector:
E
246
ST I
247 (a) Inspection reports

U EV
248 (b) NDT reports

249
G R
250 3. Coordinated Inspection

251
AU IC
252 When a task is noted to be performed by both QC and QA, it is permitted

253 to coordinate the inspection function between the QCI and QAI so that the
254 inspection functions are performed by only one party. When QA relies
BL
255 upon inspection functions performed by QC, the approval of the EOR and
256 the AHJ is required.
PU
257
258 4. Inspection of Welding
259
260 Observation of welding operations and visual inspection of in-process and
261 completed welds shall be the primary method to confirm that the materials,
262 procedures and workmanship are in conformance with the construction
263 documents.
264
265 User Note: The technique, workmanship, appearance and quality of
266 welded construction are addressed in Section M2.4.
267
268 As a minimum, welding inspection tasks shall be in accordance with
269 Tables N5.4-1, N5.4-2 and N5.4-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks are
270 as follows:
271
272 (a) Observe (O): The inspector shall observe these items on a random
273 basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections.
274 (b) Perform (P): These tasks shall be performed for each welded joint or
275 member.
276

N-6
TABLE N5.4-1
Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding

Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding QC QA
Welder qualification records and continuity records P O
WPS available P P
Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available P P
Material identification (type/grade) O O
Welder identification systema O O
Fit-up of groove welds (including joint geometry)
• Joint preparations
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel)
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) O O
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location)
• Backing type and fit (if applicable)
20 NE
Fit-up of CJP groove welds of HSS T-, Y- and K-connections
without backing (including joint geometry)
20 O
• Joint preparations
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) P O
3, W
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
E
Configuration and finish of access holes O O

ST I
U EV
Fit-up of fillet welds

• Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root)
O O
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
G R

Check welding equipment O −
AU IC
a
The fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a system by which a welder
BL
who has welded a joint or member can be identified. Stamps, if used on cyclically-
loaded members, require the approval of the engineer of record and shall be the
low-stress type.
PU
277

N-7
TABLE N5.4-2
Inspection Tasks During Welding

Inspection Tasks During Welding QC QA
Control and handling of welding consumables
• Packaging O O
• Exposure control
O O
No welding over cracked tack welds
Environmental conditions
• Wind speed within limits O O
• Precipitation and temperature
WPS followed
• Settings on welding equipment
20 NE
• Travel speed
• Selected welding materials
O O
• Shielding gas type/flow rate
20 O
• Preheat applied
• Interpass temperature maintained (min./max.)
• Proper position (F, V, H, OH)
3, W
Welding techniques
E
• Interpass and final cleaning O O
• Each pass within profile limitations
ST I
U EV
• Each pass meets quality requirements

G R
Placement and installation of steel headed stud anchors P P

AU IC
278
BL
279
280
281
PU
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294

N-8
TABLE N5.4-3
Inspection Tasks After Welding

Inspection Tasks After Welding QC QA
Welds cleaned O O
Size, length and location of welds P P
Welds meet visual acceptance criteria
• Crack prohibition
• Weld/base-metal fusion
• Crater cross section P P
• Weld profiles
• Weld size
• Undercut
• Porosity
Arc strikes P P
20 NE
k-area[a] P P
Weld access holes in rolled heavy shapes and built-up heavy
b] P P
shapes[
20 O
Backing removed and weld tabs removed (if required) P P
P P
3, W
Repair activities
Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member
[c] P P
E
No prohibited welds have been added without the approval of
O O
ST I
the EOR
U EV
[a]
When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the
k-area, visually inspect the web k-area for cracks within 3 in. (75 mm) of the weld.
[b]
After rolled heavy shapes (see Section A3.1c) and built-up heavy shapes (see Section
G R
A3.1d) are welded, visually inspect the weld access hole for cracks.
[c]
Stamps, if used on cyclically-loaded members, require the approval of the engineer of
record and shall be the low-stress type.
AU IC
295
296
BL
297 5. Nondestructive Testing of Welded Joints

298
PU
299 5a. Procedures

300
301 Ultrasonic testing (UT), magnetic particle testing (MT), penetrant testing
302 (PT), and radiographic testing (RT), where required, shall be performed by
303 QA in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
304
305 User Note: The technique, workmanship, appearance and quality of
306 welded construction is addressed in Section M2.4.
307
308 5b. CJP Groove Weld NDT
309
310 For structures in risk category III or IV, UT shall be performed by QA on
311 all complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds subject to transversely
312 applied tension loading in butt, T- and corner joints, in material 5/16 in. (8
313 mm) thick or greater. For structures in risk category II, UT shall be
314 performed by QA on 10% of CJP groove welds in butt, T- and corner
315 joints subject to transversely applied tension loading, in materials 5/16 in.
316 (8 mm) thick or greater.
317

N-9
318 User Note: For structures in risk category I, NDT of CJP groove welds is
319 not required. For all structures in all risk categories, NDT of CJP groove
320 welds in materials less than 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick is not required.
321
322 5c. Welded Joints Subjected to Fatigue
323
324 When required by Appendix 3, Table A-3.1, welded joints requiring weld
325 soundness to be established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection shall
326 be tested by QA as prescribed. Reduction in the rate of UT is prohibited.
327
328 5d. Ultrasonic Testing Rejection Rate
329
330 The ultrasonic testing rejection rate shall be determined as the number of
331 welds containing defects divided by the number of welds completed.
332 Welds that contain acceptable discontinuities shall not be considered as
333 having defects when the rejection rate is determined. For evaluating the
334 rejection rate of continuous welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the
20 NE
335 effective throat is 1 in. (25 mm) or less, each 12 in. (300 mm) increment or
336 fraction thereof shall be considered as one weld. For evaluating the
337 rejection rate on continuous welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the
20 O
338 effective throat is greater than 1 in. (25 mm), each 6 in. (150 mm) of
339 length, or fraction thereof, shall be considered one weld.
340
3, W
341 5e. Reduction of Ultrasonic Testing Rate
342
E
343 For projects that contain 40 or fewer welds, there shall be no reduction in
ST I
344 the ultrasonic testing rate. The rate of UT is permitted to be reduced if

U EV
345 approved by the EOR and the AHJ. Where the initial rate of UT is 100%,
346 the NDT rate for an individual welder or welding operator is permitted to
G R
347 be reduced to 25%, provided the rejection rate, the number of welds
348 containing unacceptable defects divided by the number of welds complet-
AU IC
349 ed, is demonstrated to be 5% or less of the welds tested for the welder or
350 welding operator. A sampling of at least 40 completed welds shall be made
351 for such reduced evaluation on each project.
BL
352
353 5f. Increase in Ultrasonic Testing Rate
PU
354
355 For structures in risk category II and higher (where the initial rate for UT is
356 10%) the NDT rate for an individual welder or welding operator shall be
357 increased to 100% should the rejection rate (the number of welds contain-
358 ing unacceptable defects divided by the number of welds completed)
359 exceed 5% of the welds tested for the welder or welding operator. A
360 sampling of at least 20 completed welds on each project shall be made
361 prior to implementing such an increase. If the rejection rate for the welder
362 or welding operator falls to 5% or less on the basis of at least 40 completed
363 welds, the rate of UT may be decreased to 10%.
364
365 5g. Documentation
366
367 All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop fabrication, the NDT
368 report shall identify the tested weld by piece mark and location in the
369 piece. For field work, the NDT report shall identify the tested weld by
370 location in the structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.
371
372 When a weld is rejected on the basis of NDT, the NDT record shall
373 indicate the location of the defect and the basis of rejection.

N-10
374
375 6. Inspection of High-Strength Bolting
376
377 Observation of bolting operations shall be the primary method used to
378 confirm that the materials, procedures and workmanship incorporated in
379 construction are in conformance with the construction documents and the
380 provisions of the RCSC Specification.
381
382 (a) For snug-tight joints, pre-installation verification testing as specified
383 in Table N5.6-1 and monitoring of the installation procedures as
384 specified in Table N5.6-2 are not applicable. The QCI and QAI need
385 not be present during the installation of fasteners in snug-tight
386 joints.
387
388 (b) For pretensioned joints and slip-critical joints, when the installer is
389 using the turn-of-nut or combined method with matchmarking tech-
390 niques, the direct-tension-indicator method, or the twist-off-type
20 NE
391 tension control bolt method, monitoring of bolt pretensioning proce-
392 dures shall be as specified in Table N5.6-2. The QCI and QAI need
393 not be present during the installation of fasteners when these meth-
20 O
394 ods are used by the installer.
395
396 (c) For pretensioned joints and slip-critical joints, when the installer is
3, W
397 using the turn-of-nut or combined method without matchmarking, or
398 the calibrated wrench method, monitoring of bolt pretensioning pro-
E
399 cedures shall be as specified in Table N5.6-2. The QCI and QAI
ST I
400 shall be engaged in their assigned inspection duties during installa-

U EV
401 tion of fasteners when these methods are used by the installer.
402
G R
403 As a minimum, bolting inspection tasks shall be in accordance with Tables

404 N5.6-1, N5.6-2 and N5.6-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks are as
AU IC
405 follows:
406
407 (a) Observe (O): The inspector shall observe these items on a random
BL
408 basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections.

409 (b) Perform (P): These tasks shall be performed for each bolted connec-
PU
410 tion.
411

N-11
TABLE N5.6-1
Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting

Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting QC QA
Manufacturer’s certifications available for fastener materials O P
Fasteners marked in accordance with ASTM requirements O O

Correct fasteners selected for the joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are
O O
to be excluded from shear plane)
Correct bolting procedure selected for joint detail O O
Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole
O O
preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements
20 NE
Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and
P O
documented for fastener assemblies and methods used
20 O
Protected storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components O O
3, W
412
E
TABLE N5.6-2
ST I
U EV
Inspection Tasks During Bolting

G R
Inspection Tasks During Bolting QC QA

AU IC
Fastener assemblies placed in all holes and washers and nuts are positioned as
O O
required
BL
Joint brought to the snug-tight condition prior to the pretensioning operation O O

PU
Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented from rotating O O
Fasteners are pretensioned in accordance with the RCSC Specification,

O O
progressing systematically from the most rigid point toward the free edges
413
414
TABLE N5.6-3
Inspection Tasks After Bolting

Inspection Tasks After Bolting QC QA
Document acceptance or rejection of bolted connections P P
415
416

N-12
417 7. Inspection of Galvanized Structural Steel Main Members

418
419 Exposed cut surfaces of galvanized structural steel main members and
420 exposed corners of rectangular HSS shall be visually inspected for cracks
421 subsequent to galvanizing. Cracks shall be repaired or the member shall be
422 rejected.
423
424 User Note: It is normal practice for fabricated steel that requires hot dip
425 galvanizing to be delivered to the galvanizer and then shipped to the
426 jobsite. As a result, inspection on site is common.
427
428 8. Other Inspection Tasks
429
430 The fabricator’s QCI shall inspect the fabricated steel to verify compliance
431 with the details shown on the fabrication documents.
432
433 User Note: This includes such items as the correct application of shop
20 NE
434 joint details at each connection.
435
436 The erector’s QCI shall inspect the erected steel frame to verify compli-
20 O
437 ance with the field installed details shown on the erection documents.
438
439 User Note: This includes such items as braces, stiffeners, member
3, W
440 locations, and correct application of field joint details at each connection.
441
E
442 The QAI shall be on the premises for inspection during the placement of
ST I
443 anchor rods and other embedments supporting structural steel for compli-
U EV
444 ance with the construction documents. As a minimum, the diameter, grade,
445 type and length of the anchor rod or embedded item, and the extent or
G R
446 depth of embedment into the concrete, shall be verified and documented
447 prior to placement of concrete.
AU IC
448
449 The QAI shall inspect the fabricated steel or erected steel frame, as
450 applicable, to verify compliance with the details shown on the construction
BL
451 documents.
452
PU
453 User Note: This includes such items as braces, stiffeners, member
454 locations and the correct application of joint details at each connection.
455
456 The acceptance or rejection of joint details and the correct application of
457 joint details shall be documented.
458
459 N6. APPROVED FABRICATORS AND ERECTORS
460
461 When the fabricator or erector has been approved by the AHJ to perform
462 all inspections without the involvement of a third-party, independent, QAI,
463 the fabricator or erector shall perform and document all of the QA
464 inspections required by this Chapter.
465 NDT of welds completed in an approved fabricator’s shop is permitted to
466 be performed by that fabricator when approved by the AHJ. When the
467 fabricator performs the NDT, the NDT reports prepared by the fabricator’s
468 NDT personnel shall be available for review by the QA agency.
469
470 At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a
471 certificate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and
472 work performed by the fabricator are in accordance with the construction

N-13
473 documents. At completion of erection, the approved erector shall submit a

474 certificate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and
475 work performed by the erector are in accordance with the construction
476 documents.
477
478 N7. NONCONFORMING MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
479
480 Identification and rejection of material or workmanship that is not in
481 conformance with the construction documents is permitted at any time
482 during the progress of the work. However, this provision shall not relieve
483 the owner or the inspector of the obligation for timely, in-sequence
484 inspections. Nonconforming material and workmanship shall be brought to
485 the immediate attention of the fabricator or erector, as applicable.
486
487 Nonconforming material or workmanship shall be brought into conform-
488 ance or made suitable for its intended purpose as determined by the EOR.
489
20 NE
490 Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to the AHJ, EOR or owner,
491 the QA agency shall submit to the fabricator and erector:
492
20 O
493 (a) Nonconformance reports
494 (b) Reports of repair, replacement or acceptance of nonconforming items
495
3, W
496 N8. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOP OR FIELD APPLIED
497 COATINGS
E
498
ST I
499 When coating or touch up is specified in the contract documents, the

U EV
500 fabricator and/or erector shall establish, maintain, and implement QC

501 procedures to ensure the proper application of coatings on structural steel
G R
502 in accordance with the manufacturer’s product data sheet, unless there is
503 direction to the contrary in the contract documents.
AU IC
504
505 User Note: When there is a conflict between the manufacturer’s product
506 data sheet and the contract documents for the proper application of a
BL
507 coating, it is recommended to clarify with the engineer of record which

508 will govern.
PU
509
510 Observation of the coating process prior to, during, and after the applica-
511 tion of the coating shall be the primary method to confirm that the coating
512 material, procedures, and workmanship are in conformance with the
513 manufacturer’s product data sheet unless there is direction to the contrary
514 in the contract documents.

APP1-1
1
2 APPENDIX 1
3
4 DESIGN BY ADVANCED ANALYSIS
5
6 This Appendix permits the use of advanced methods of structural analysis to
7 directly model system and member imperfections, and/or allow for the
8 redistribution of member and connection forces and moments as a result of localized
9 yielding.
10
11 The appendix is organized as follows:
12
13 1.1 General Requirements
14 1.2 Design by Elastic Analysis
15 1.3 Design by Inelastic Analysis
16
20 NE
17 1.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
18
19 The analysis methods permitted in this Appendix shall ensure that
20 O
20 equilibrium and compatibility are satisfied for the structure in its deformed
21 shape, including all flexural, shear, axial, and torsional deformations, and all
3, W
22 other component and connection deformations that contribute to the
23 displacements of the structure.
E
24
ST I
25 Design by the methods of this Appendix shall be conducted in accordance

U EV
26 with Section B3.1, using load and resistance factor design (LRFD).
27
28 1.2. DESIGN BY ELASTIC ANALYSIS
G R
29
30 1. General Stability Requirements
AU IC
31
32 Design by a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct modeling of
BL
33 system and member imperfections is permitted for all structures subject to

34 the limitations defined in this section. All requirements of Section C1 apply,
PU
35 with additional requirements and exceptions as noted below. All load-

36 dependent effects shall be calculated at a level of loading corresponding to
37 LRFD load combinations.
38
39 The influence of torsion shall be considered, including its impact on member
40 deformations and second-order effects.
41
42 The provisions of this method apply only to doubly symmetric members,
43 including I-shapes, HSS and box sections, unless evidence is provided that
44 the method is applicable to other member types.
45
46 2. Calculation of Required Strengths
47
48 For design using a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct
49 modeling of system and member imperfections, the required strengths of
50 components of the structure shall be determined from an analysis conforming
51 to Section C2, with additional requirements and exceptions as noted in the
52 following.
53
54 2a. General Analysis Requirements
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

APP1-2
55
56 The analysis of the structure shall also conform to the following require-
57 ments:
58
59 (a) Torsional member deformations shall be considered in the analysis.
60
61 (b) The analysis shall consider geometric nonlinearities, including P-Δ, P-
62 δ, and twisting effects as applicable to the structure. The use of the
63 approximate procedures appearing in Appendix 8 is not permitted.
64
65 User Note: A rigorous second-order analysis of the structure is an
66 important requirement for this method of design. Many analysis rou-
67 tines common in design offices are based on a more traditional sec-
68 ond-order analysis approach that includes only P-Δ and P-δ effects
69 without consideration of additional second-order effects related to
70 member twist, which can be significant for some members with un-
71 braced lengths near or exceeding Lr . The type of second-order analy-
20 NE
72 sis defined herein also includes the beneficial effects of additional
73 member torsional strength and stiffness due to warping restraint,
74 which can be conservatively neglected. Refer to the Commentary for
20 O
75 additional information and guidance.
76
3, W
77 (c) In all cases, the analysis shall directly model the effects of initial
78 imperfections due to both points of intersection of members displaced
E
79 from their nominal locations (system imperfections), and initial out-
80 of-straightness or offsets of members along their length (member im-
ST I
U EV
81 perfections). The magnitude of the initial displacements shall be the

82 maximum amount considered in the design; the pattern of initial dis-
83 placements shall be such that it provides the greatest destabilizing ef-
G R
84 fect for the load combination being considered. The use of notional
85 loads to represent either type of imperfection is not permitted.
AU IC
86
87 User Note: Initial displacements similar in configuration to both dis-
BL
88 placements due to loading and anticipated buckling modes should be

89 considered in the modeling of imperfections. The magnitude of the
90 initial points of intersection of members displaced from their nominal
PU
91 locations (system imperfections) should be based on permissible con-

92 struction tolerances, as specified in the AISC Code of Standard Prac-
93 tice for Steel Buildings and Bridges or other governing requirements,
94 or on actual imperfections, if known. When these displacements are
95 due to erection tolerances, 1/500 is often considered, based on the tol-
96 erance of the out-of-plumbness ratio specified in the Code of Standard
97 Practice. For out-of-straightness of members (member imperfections),
98 a 1/1000 out-of-straightness ratio is often considered. Refer to the
99 Commentary for additional guidance.
100
101 2b. Adjustments to Stiffness
102
103 The analysis of the structure to determine the required strengths of
104 components shall use reduced stiffnesses as defined in Section C2.3. Such
105 stiffness reduction, including factors of 0.8 and τb, shall be applied to all
106 stiffnesses that are considered to contribute to the stability of the structure.
107 The use of notional loads to represent τb is not permitted.
108
109 User Note: Stiffness reduction should be applied to all member properties
110 including torsional properties (GJ and ECw) affecting twist of the member

PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft dated August 3, 2020
APP1-3
111 cross section. One practical method of including stiffness reduction is to

112 reduce E and G by 0.8τb, thereby leaving all cross-section geometric
113 properties at their nominal value.
114
115 Applying this stiffness reduction to some members and not others can, in
116 some cases, result in artificial distortion of the structure under load and
117 thereby lead to an unintended redistribution of forces. This can be avoided
118 by applying the reduction to all members, including those that do not
119 contribute to the stability of the structure.
120
121 3. Calculation of Available Strengths
122
123 For design using a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct
124 modeling of system and member imperfections, the available strengths of
125 members and connections shall be calculated in accordance with the
126 provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable, except as defined below,
127 with no further consideration of overall structure stability.
20 NE
128
129 The nominal compressive strength of members, Pn, may be taken as the
130 cross-section compressive strength, FyAg, or as FyAe for members with
20 O
131 slender elements, where Ae is defined in Section E7.
132
133 1.3. DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS
3, W
134
135 User Note: Design by the provisions of this section is independent of the
E
136 requirements of Section 1.2.

ST I
137
U EV

139
G R
140 The design strength of the structural system and its members and connections
141 shall equal or exceed the required strength as determined by the inelastic
AU IC
142 analysis. The provisions of Section 1.3 do not apply to seismic design.
143
BL
144 The inelastic analysis shall take into account: (a) flexural, shear, axial, and
145 torsional member deformations, and all other component and connection
146 deformations that contribute to the displacements of the structure; (b) second-
PU
147 order effects (including P-Δ, P-δ, and twisting effects); (c) geometric
148 imperfections; (d) stiffness reductions due to inelasticity, including partial
149 yielding of the cross section that may be accentuated by the presence of
150 residual stresses; and (e) uncertainty in system, member, and connection
151 strength and stiffness.
152
153 Strength limit states detected by an inelastic analysis that incorporates all of
154 the preceding requirements in this Section are not subject to the correspond-
155 ing provisions of this Specification when a comparable or higher level of
156 reliability is provided by the analysis. Strength limit states not detected by
157 the inelastic analysis shall be evaluated using the corresponding provisions of
158 Chapters D through K.
159
160 Connections shall meet the requirements of Section B3.4.
161
162 Members and connections subject to inelastic deformations shall be shown to
163 have ductility consistent with the intended behavior of the structural system.
164 Force redistribution due to rupture of a member or connection is not
165 permitted.

APP1-4
166
167 Any method that uses inelastic analysis to proportion members and
168 connections to satisfy these general requirements is permitted. A design
169 method based on inelastic analysis that meets the preceding strength
170 requirements, the ductility requirements of Section 1.3.2, and the analysis
171 requirements of Section 1.3.3 satisfies these general requirements.
172 2. Ductility Requirements

173 Members and connections with elements subject to yielding shall be
174 proportioned such that all inelastic deformation demands are less than or
175 equal to their inelastic deformation capacities. In lieu of explicitly ensuring
176 that the inelastic deformation demands are less than or equal to their inelastic
177 deformation capacities, the following requirements shall be satisfied for steel
178 members subject to plastic hinging.
179 2a. Material

180
20 NE
181 The specified minimum yield stress, Fy, of members subject to plastic
182 hinging shall not exceed 65 ksi (450 MPa).
20 O
183 2b. Cross Section
184
3, W
185 The cross section of members at plastic hinge locations shall be doubly
186 symmetric with width-to-thickness ratios of their compression elements not
E
187 exceeding λpd, where λpd is equal to λp from Table B4.1b, except as modified
ST I
U EV
188 below:
189
190 (a) For the width-to-thickness ratio, h tw , of webs of I-shaped members,
G R
191 rectangular HSS, and box sections subject to combined flexure and
192 compression
AU IC
193
194 (1) When Pu φc Py ≤ 0.125
BL
E  2.75Pu 
195 λ pd = 3.76 1 − 
φc Py
PU
Fy  
196 (A-1-1)
197
198 (2) When Pu φc Py > 0.125
E  Pu  E
199 λ pd = 1.12  2.33 −  ≥ 1.49 (A-1-2)
Fy  φc Py  Fy
200 where
201 Pu = required axial strength in compression, using LRFD load
203 Py = Fy Ag = axial yield strength, kips (N)
204 h = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
205 tw = web thickness, in. (mm)
206 φc = resistance factor for compression = 0.90
207
208 (b) For the width-to-thickness ratio, b t , of flanges of rectangular HSS
209 and box sections, and for flange cover plates between lines of fasteners
210 or welds

APP1-5
211
212 λ pd = 0.94 E Fy (A-1-3)
213 where
214 b = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
215 t = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
216
217 (c) For the diameter-to-thickness ratio, D t , of round HSS in flexure
218
219 λ pd = 0.045 E Fy (A-1-4)
220
221 where
223 2c. Unbraced Length

224
225 In prismatic member segments that contain plastic hinges, the laterally
20 NE
226 unbraced length, Lb, shall not exceed Lpd, determined as follows. For
227 members subject to flexure only, or to flexure and axial tension, Lb shall be
228 taken as the length between points braced against lateral displacement of the
20 O
229 compression flange, or between points braced to prevent twist of the cross
230 section. For members subject to flexure and axial compression, Lb shall be
3, W
231 taken as the length between points braced against both lateral displacement in
232 the minor axis direction and twist of the cross section.
E
233
ST I
234 (a) For I-shaped members bent about their major axis:
U EV
 M′  E
235 L pd =  0.12 − 0.076 1  ry (A-1-5)
 M 2  Fy
G R
236 where
237 = radius of gyration about minor axis, in. (mm)
AU IC
ry
238
239 (1) When the magnitude of the bending moment at any location within
BL
240 the unbraced length exceeds M 2

241
PU
242 M 1′ M 2 = +1 (A-1-6a)
243
244 Otherwise:
245
246 (2) When M mid ≤ ( M 1 + M 2 ) 2
247
248 M 1′ = M 1 (A-1-6b)
249
250 (3) When M mid > ( M 1 + M 2 ) 2
251
252 M 1′ = ( 2M mid – M 2 )< M 2 (A-1-6c)
253 where
254 M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
255 M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
256 (shall be taken as positive in all cases)
257 M mid = moment at middle of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)

APP1-6
258 M 1′ = effective moment at end of unbraced length opposite from

259 M 2 , kip-in. (N-mm)
260
261 The moments M1 and M mid are individually taken as positive
262 when they cause compression in the same flange as the moment,
263 M 2 , and taken as negative otherwise.
264
265 (b) For solid rectangular bars and for rectangular HSS and box sections bent
266 about their major axis
267
 M ′ E E
268 Lpd =  0.17 − 0.10 1  ry ≥ 0.10 ry (A-1-7)
 
M 2  Fy Fy

269
270 For all types of members subject to axial compression and containing plastic
271 hinges, the laterally unbraced lengths about the cross section major and
20 NE
272 minor axes shall not exceed 4.71rx E Fy and 4.71ry E Fy , respectively.
273
20 O
274 There is no Lpd limit for member segments containing plastic hinges in the
275 following cases:
3, W
276
277 (a) Members with round or square cross sections subject only to flexure or
E
278 to combined flexure and tension
279 (b) Members subject only to flexure about their minor axis or combined
ST I
U EV
280 tension and flexure about their minor axis

281 (c) Members subject only to tension
G R
282 2d. Axial Force

283
AU IC
284 To ensure ductility in compression members with plastic hinges, the

285 design strength in compression shall not exceed 0.75Fy Ag .
BL
286 3. Analysis Requirements

287
PU
288 The structural analysis shall satisfy the general requirements of Section 1.3.1.
289 These requirements are permitted to be satisfied by a second-order inelastic
290 analysis meeting the requirements of this Section.
291
292 Exception: For continuous beams not subject to axial compression, a first-
293 order inelastic or plastic analysis is permitted and the requirements of
294 Sections 1.3.3b and 1.3.3c are waived.
295
296 User Note: Refer to the Commentary for guidance in conducting a
297 traditional plastic analysis and design in conformance with these provisions.
298 3a. Material Properties and Yield Criteria

299
300 The specified minimum yield stress, Fy, and the stiffness of all steel members
301 and connections shall be reduced by a factor of 0.9 for the analysis, except as
302 stipulated in Section 1.3.3c.
303
304 The influence of axial force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis
305 bending moment shall be included in the calculation of the inelastic response.

APP1-7
306
307 The plastic strength of the member cross section shall be represented in the
308 analysis either by an elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion expressed in
309 terms of the axial force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bending
310 moment, or by explicit modeling of the material stress-strain response as
311 elastic-perfectly-plastic.
312 3b. Geometric Imperfections

313
314 In all cases, the analysis shall directly model the effects of initial imperfec-
315 tions due to both points of intersection of members displaced from their
316 nominal locations (system imperfections), and initial out-of-straightness or
317 offsets of members along their length (member imperfections). The
318 magnitude of the initial displacements shall be the maximum amount
319 considered in the design; the pattern of initial displacements shall be such
320 that it provides the greatest destabilizing effect.
20 NE
321 3c. Residual Stress and Partial Yielding Effects
322
323 The analysis shall include the influence of residual stresses and partial
20 O
324 yielding. This shall be done by explicitly modeling these effects in the
325 analysis or by reducing the stiffness of all structural components as specified
3, W
326 in Section C2.3.
327
E
328 If the provisions of Section C2.3 are used, then:
ST I
329
U EV
330 (a) The 0.9 stiffness reduction factor specified in Section 1.3.3a shall be
331 replaced by the reduction of the elastic modulus, E, by 0.8 as specified in
332 Section C2.3, and
G R
333
334 (b) the elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion, expressed in terms of the axial
AU IC
335 force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bending moment,
336 shall satisfy the cross-section strength limit defined by Equations H1-1a
BL
337 and H1-1b using Pc = 0.9Py , M cx = 0.9M px , and M cy = 0.9M py .

338
PU

APP2-1
1 APPENDIX 2 Comment [DC1]: This Appendix is being

proposed to be removed.
2 DESIGN FOR PONDING
3
4 This appendix provides methods for determining whether a roof system has
5 adequate strength and stiffness to resist ponding. These methods are valid for flat
6 roofs with rectangular bays where the beams are uniformly spaced and the girders
7 are considered to be uniformly loaded.
8
10
11 2.1. Simplified Design for Ponding
12 2.2. Improved Design for Ponding
13
14 The members of a roof system shall be considered to have adequate strength and
15 stiffness against ponding by satisfying the requirements of Sections 2.1 or 2.2.
16
20 NE
17 2.1. SIMPLIFIED DESIGN FOR PONDING
18
19 The roof system shall be considered stable for ponding and no further
20 O
20 investigation is needed if both of the following two conditions are met:
21 Formatted: Centered
22 C p + 0.9Cs ≤ 0.25 (A-2-1)
3, W
Formatted: Centered, Tab stops: 2", Left
23 Formatted: Centered
E
24 ( )
I d ≥ 25 S 4 10−6 (A-2-2)
ST I
U EV
25
26 I d ≥ 3940 S 4 (A-2-2M)
27 where
G R
32 Ls L4p
28 Cp = (A-2-3)
107 I p
AU IC
29
BL
504 Ls L4p
30 Cp = (A-2-3M)
Ip
PU
32SL4s
31 Cs = (A-2-4)
10 7 Is
32
504SL4s
33 Cs = (A-2-4M)
Is
34
35 I d = moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on secondary
36 members, in.4 per ft (mm4 per m)
4 4
37 I p = moment of inertia of primary members, in. (mm )
4 4
38 I s = moment of inertia of secondary members, in. (mm )
39 Lp = length of primary members, ft (m)
40 Ls = length of secondary members, ft (m)
41 S = spacing of secondary members, ft (m)
42
43 For trusses and steel joists, the calculation of the moments of inertia, Ip and
44 Is, shall include the effects of web member strain when used in the above
45 equation.

APP2-2
46
47 User Note: When the moment of inertia is calculated using only the truss
48 or joist chord areas, the reduction in the moment of inertia due to web
49 member strain can typically be taken as 15%.
50
51 A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly
52 supported by the primary members.
53
54 2.2. IMPROVED DESIGN FOR PONDING
55
56 It is permitted to use the provisions in this section when a more accurate
57 evaluation of framing stiffness is needed than that given by Equations A-2-
58 1 and A-2-2.
59
60 Define the stress indexes
61
 0.8 F y − f o 
20 NE
Up =  for the primary member (A-2-5)
 fo p
62
 0.8 F y − f o 
( A-2-6 )
20 O
Us =   for the secondary member
 fo s
3, W
63
64 where
E
66 fo = stress due to impounded water due to either nominal rain or snow

ST I
67 loads (exclusive of the ponding contribution), and other loads acting

U EV
68 concurrently as specified in Section B2, ksi (MPa)

69
G R
70 For roof framing consisting of primary and secondary members, evaluate

71 the combined stiffness as follows. Enter Figure A-2.1 at the level of the
72 computed stress index, Up, determined for the primary beam; move
AU IC
73 horizontally to the computed Cs value of the secondary beams and then

74 downward to the abscissa scale. The combined stiffness of the primary and
BL
75 secondary framing is sufficient to prevent ponding if the flexibility

76 coefficient read from this latter scale is more than the value of Cp comput-
77 ed for the given primary member; if not, a stiffer primary or secondary
PU
78 beam, or combination of both, is required.

79
80 A similar procedure must be followed using Figure A-2.2.
81
82 For roof framing consisting of a series of equally spaced wall bearing
83 beams, evaluate the stiffness as follows. The beams are considered as
84 secondary members supported on an infinitely stiff primary member. For
85 this case, enter Figure A-2.2 with the computed stress index, Us. The
86 limiting value of Cs is determined by the intercept of a horizontal line
87 representing the Us value and the curve for Cp = 0.
88
89
90
91

APP2-3
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
92
93
BL
94 Fig. A-2.1. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the primary systems.

95
PU
96
97 Evaluate the stability against ponding of a roof consisting of a metal roof
98 deck of relatively slender depth-to-span ratio, spanning between beams
99 supported directly on columns, as follows. Use Figure A-2.1 or A-2.2,
100 using as Cs the flexibility coefficient for a one-foot (one-meter) width of
101 the roof deck (S = 1.0).
102

APP2-4
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
103
104 Fig.A-2.2. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the secondary systems.
BL
105
PU

APP 3-1
1 APPENDIX 3
2
3 FATIGUE
4
5
6 This appendix applies to members and connections subject to high-cycle loading
7 within the elastic range of stresses of frequency and magnitude sufficient to initiate
8 cracking and progressive failure.
9
10 User Note: See AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings for
11 structures subject to seismic loads.
12
14
15 3.1. General Provisions
16 3.2. Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges
17 3.3. Plain Material and Welded Joints
20 NE
18 3.4. Bolts and Threaded Parts
19 3.5. Fabrication and Erection Requirements for Fatigue
20 3.6. Nondestructive Examination Requirements for Fatigue
20 O
21
22 3.1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
3, W
23
24 The fatigue resistance of members consisting of shapes or plate shall be
E
25 determined when the number of cycles of application of live load exceeds
ST I
26 20,000. No evaluation of fatigue resistance of members consisting of HSS

U EV
27 in building-type structures subject to code mandated wind loads is

28 required. When the applied cyclic stress range is less than the threshold
29 allowable stress range, FTH, no further evaluation of fatigue resistance is
G R
30 required. See Table A-3.1.

AU IC
31 The engineer of record shall provide either complete details including weld
32 sizes or shall specify the planned cycle life and the maximum range of
BL
33 moments, shears and reactions for the connections.

34 The provisions of this Appendix shall apply to stresses calculated on the
PU
35 basis of the applied cyclic load spectrum. The maximum permitted stress
36 due to peak cyclic loads shall be 0.66Fy. In the case of a stress reversal, the
37 stress range shall be computed as the numerical sum of maximum repeated
38 tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of maximum
39 shearing stresses of opposite direction at the point of probable crack
40 initiation.
41 The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Appendix is
42 applicable to structures with suitable corrosion protection or subject only to
43 mildly corrosive atmospheres, such as normal atmospheric conditions.
44
45 The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Appendix is
46 applicable only to structures subject to temperatures not exceeding 300°F
47 (150°C).
48
49 3.2. CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM STRESSES AND STRESS
50 RANGES
51
52 Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic analysis. Stresses shall not
53 be amplified by stress concentration factors for geometrical discontinuities.

APP 3-2
54
55 For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial tension, the calculated stresses
56 shall include the effects of prying action, if any. In the case of axial stress
57 combined with bending, the maximum stresses of each kind shall be those
58 determined for concurrent arrangements of the applied load.
59
60 For members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners and welds
61 shall be arranged symmetrically about the axis of the member, or the total
62 stresses including those due to eccentricity shall be included in the
63 calculation of the stress range.
64
65 For axially loaded angle members where the center of gravity of the
66 connecting welds lies between the line of the center of gravity of the angle
67 cross section and the center of the connected leg, the effects of eccentricity
68 shall be ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies
69 outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to joint eccentrici-
70 ty, shall be included in the calculation of stress range.
20 NE
71
72 3.3. PLAIN MATERIAL AND WELDED JOINTS
73
20 O
74 In plain material and welded joints, the range of stress due to the applied
75 cyclic loads shall not exceed the allowable stress range computed as
76 follows.
3, W
77
E
78 (a) For stress categories A, B, B′, C, D, E and E,′ the allowable stress
79 range, FSR, shall be determined by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M, as
ST I
U EV
80 follows:
81
0.333
 Cf 
G R
82 FSR = 1, 000   ≥ FTH (A-3-1)

 nSR 
AU IC
0.333
 Cf 
83 FSR = 6 900   ≥ FTH (A-3-1M)
 nSR 
BL
84 where
85 Cf = constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category
PU
86 FSR = allowable stress range, ksi (MPa)

87 FTH = threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range
88 for indefinite design life from Table A-3.1, ksi (MPa)
89 nSR = number of stress range fluctuations in design life
90
91 (b) For stress category F, the allowable stress range, FSR, shall be
92 determined by Equation A-3-2 or A-3-2M as follows:
93
94

APP 3-3
0.167
 1.5 
95 FSR = 100   ≥ 8 ksi (A-3-2)
 nSR 
96
0.167
 1.5 
97 FSR = 690   ≥ 55 MPa (A-3-2M)
 nSR 
98
99 (c) For tension-loaded plate elements connected at their end by cruciform,
100 T or corner details with partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove welds
101 transverse to the direction of stress, with or without reinforcing or con-
102 touring fillet welds, or if joined with only fillet welds, the allowable
103 stress range on the cross section of the tension-loaded plate element
104 shall be determined as the lesser of the following:
105
106 (1) Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on the ten-
107 sion-loaded plate element (i.e., when RPJP = 1.0), the allowable
20 NE
108 stress range, FSR, shall be determined by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-
109 1M for stress category C.
110
20 O
111 (2) Based upon crack initiation from the root of the weld, the allowa-
112 ble stress range, FSR, on the tension loaded plate element using
3, W
113 transverse PJP groove welds, with or without reinforcing or con-
114 touring fillet welds, the allowable stress range on the cross section
E
115 at the root of the weld shall be determined by Equation A-3-3 or
ST I
116 A-3-3M, for stress category C′ as follows:

U EV
117
0.333
 4.4 
118 FSR = 1, 000 RPJP   (A-3-3)
G R
 nSR 
0.333
 4.4 
AU IC
119 FSR = 6900 RPJP   (A-3-3M)

 nSR 
BL
120
121 where
122 RPJP, the reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced
PU
123 transverse PJP groove welds, is determined as follows:

124
 2a  w
0.65 − 0.59   + 0.72  
125 RPJP =  tp   t p  ≤ 1.0 (A-3-4)
0.167
tp
126
 2a   w
1.12 − 1.01  + 1.24  
=  tp   t p  ≤ 1.0
127 RPJP 0.167
(A-3-4M)
tp
128
129 2a = length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of
130 the thickness of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm)
131 tp = thickness of tension loaded plate, in. (mm)
132 w = leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if any,
133 in the direction of the thickness of the tension-loaded
134 plate, in. (mm)
135

APP 3-4
136 If RPJP = 1.0, the stress range will be limited by the weld toe and
137 category C will control.
138
139 (3) Based upon crack initiation from the roots of a pair of transverse
140 fillet welds on opposite sides of the tension loaded plate element,
141 the allowable stress range, FSR, on the cross section at the root of
142 the welds shall be determined by Equation A-3-5 or A-3-5M, for
143 stress category C′′ as follows:
144
0.333
 4.4 
145 FSR = 1, 000 RFIL   (A-3-5)
 nSR 
146
0.333
 4.4 
147 FSR = 6900 RFIL   (A-3-5M)
 nSR 
148 where
20 NE
149 RFIL = reduction factor for joints using a pair of transverse fil-
150 let welds only
151
20 O
0.06 + 0.72 ( w / t p )
152 = ≤ 1.0 (A-3-6)
t 0.167
3, W p
0.103 + 1.24 ( w / t p )
153 = ≤ 1.0 (A-3-6M)
E
t 0.167
p
ST I
154
U EV
155 If RFIL = 1.0, the stress range will be limited by the weld toe and
156 category C will control.
157
G R
158 User Note: Stress categories C′ and C′′ are cases where the fatigue crack
159 initiates in the root of the weld. These cases do not have a fatigue threshold
AU IC
160 and cannot be designed for an infinite life. Infinite life can be approximated
161 by use of a very high cycle life such as 2 × 108. Alternatively, if the size of
BL
162 the weld is increased such that RFIL or RPJP is equal to 1.0, then the base metal
163 controls, resulting in stress category C, where there is a fatigue threshold and
PU
164 the crack initiates at the toe of the weld.

165
166 3.4. BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
167
168 In bolts and threaded parts, the range of stress of the applied cyclic load shall
169 not exceed the allowable stress range computed as follows.
170
171 (a) For mechanically fastened connections loaded in shear, the maximum
172 range of stress in the connected material of the applied cyclic load shall
173 not exceed the allowable stress range computed using Equation A-3-1 or
174 A-3-1M, where Cf and FTH are taken from Section 2 of Table A-3.1.
175
176 (b) For high-strength bolts, common bolts, threaded anchor rods, and hanger
177 rods with cut, ground or rolled threads, the maximum range of tensile
178 stress on the net tensile area from applied axial load and moment plus
179 load due to prying action shall not exceed the allowable stress range
180 computed using Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M, where Cf and FTH are taken
181 from Case 8.5 (stress category G). The net area in tension, At, is given by
182 Equation A-3-7 or A-3-7M.
183

APP 3-5
2
π 0.9743 
184 At =  db −  (A-3-7)
4 n 
185
π
186 At = ( d b − 0.9382 p )2 (A-3-7M)
4
187
188 where
189 db = nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), in. (mm)
190 n = threads per in. (per mm)
191 p = pitch, in. per thread (mm per thread)
192
193 For joints in which the material within the grip is not limited to steel or joints
194 that are not tensioned to the requirements of Table J3.1 or J3.1M, all axial
195 load and moment applied to the joint plus effects of any prying action shall
196 be assumed to be carried exclusively by the bolts or rods.
197
198 For joints in which the material within the grip is limited to steel and which
20 NE
199 are pretensioned to the requirements of Table J3.1 or J3.1M, an analysis of
200 the relative stiffness of the connected parts and bolts is permitted to be used
201 to determine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts due to the total
20 O
202 applied cyclic load and moment, plus effects of any prying action.
203 Alternatively, the stress range in the bolts shall be assumed to be equal to the
3, W
204 stress on the net tensile area due to 20% of the absolute value of the applied
205 cyclic axial load and moment from dead, live and other loads.
E
206
ST I
207 The following exceptions to RCSC Specifications shall apply to cyclically

U EV
208 loaded connections subject to the requirements of Appendix 3:

209
G R
210 (a) The Engineer’s approval for thermally cut holes is not required for
211 cyclically loaded slip critical joints.
212 (b) Both pretensioned and not pretensioned bolted connections are permitted.
AU IC
213 (c) Bolt net tension area is used for tension

214 (d) The maximum allowable stress range and stress range threshold are
BL
215 independent of the bolt material.

216
PU
217 3.5. FABRICATION AND ERECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FATIGUE

218
219 Longitudinal steel backing, if used, shall be continuous. If splicing of steel
220 backing is required for long joints, the splice shall be made with a complete-
221 joint-penetration (CJP) groove weld, ground flush to permit a tight fit. If
222 fillet welds are used to attach left-in-place longitudinal backing, they shall be
223 continuous.
224
225 In transverse CJP groove welded T- and corner-joints, a reinforcing fillet
226 weld, not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) in size, shall be added at reentrant corners.
227
228 The surface roughness of thermally cut edges subject to cyclic stress ranges,
229 that include tension, shall not exceed 1,000 μin. (25 μm), where Surface
230 Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay (ASME B46.1) is the
231 reference standard.
232
233 User Note: AWS C4.1 Sample 3 may be used to evaluate compliance with
234 this requirement.
235

APP 3-6
236 Reentrant corners at cuts, copes and weld access holes shall form a radius not
237 less than the prescribed radius in Table A-3.1.
238
239 For transverse butt joints in regions of tensile stress, weld tabs shall be used
240 to provide for cascading the weld termination outside the finished joint. End
241 dams shall not be used. Weld tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld
242 finished flush with the edge of the member.
243
244 Fillet welds subject to cyclic loading normal to the outstanding legs of angles
245 or on the outer edges of end plates shall have end returns around the corner
246 for a distance not less than two times the weld size; the end return distance
247 shall not exceed four times the weld size.
248
249 3.6. NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
250 FATIGUE
251
252 In the case of CJP groove welds, the maximum allowable stress range
20 NE
253 calculated by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M applies only to welds that have
254 been ultrasonically or radiographically tested and meet the acceptance
255 requirements of Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M) clause
20 O
256 6.12.2 or clause 6.13.2.
257
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-7
258 TABLE A-3.1

259 Fatigue Design Parameters
Description Stress Constant, Threshold, Potential
Category Cf FTH, Crack
ksi Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 1–PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except
noncoated weathering Away from all
steel, with as-rolled or A 25 24 welds or
cleaned surfaces; flame-cut (165) structural
edges with surface connections
roughness value of 1,000
μin. (25 μm) or less, but
without reentrant corners
20 NE
1.2 Noncoated weathering
steel base metal with as- Away from all
rolled or cleaned surfaces; B 12 16 welds or
20 O
flame-cut edges with (110) structural
surface roughness value of connections
3, W
1,000 μin. (25 μm) or less,
but without reentrant
E
corners
ST I
1.3 Members with

U EV
reentrant corners at copes, At any

cuts, block-outs or other external edge
geometrical discontinuities, or at hole
G R
except weld access holes perimeter

AU IC
R ≥ 1 in. (25 mm), with the C 4.4 10

radius, R, formed by (69)
BL
predrilling, subpunching
and reaming water-jet
cutting or thermally cutting
PU
and grinding to a bright

metal surface
E’ 0.39 2.6 (18)
R ≥ 3/8 in. (10 mm) and the
radius, R, formed by drilling
punching, water-jet cutting,
or thermal cutting; punched
holes need not be reamed,
and thermally cut surfaces
need not be ground .

APP 3-8
1.4 Rolled cross sections At reentrant

with weld access holes corner of weld
made to requirements of access hole
Section J1.6
Access hole R ≥ 1 in. (25 C 4.4 10

mm) with radius, R, formed (69)
by predrilling, subpunching
and reaming or thermally
cut and ground to a bright
metal surface
Access hole R ≥ 3/8 in. (10 E’ 0.39 2.6

mm) and the radius, R, (18)
need not be ground to a
bright metal surface
1.5 Members with drilled or In net section
reamed holes originating at
20 NE
side of the
hole
Holes containing C 4.4 10
20 O
pretensioned bolts (69)
D 2.2 7
3, W
Open holes without bolts
(48)
SECTION 2–CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
E
2.1 Gross area of base

ST I
B 12 16 Through gross
U EV
metal in lap joints

connected by high-strength (110) section near
bolts in joints satisfying all hole
G R
requirements for slip-critical

connections. Holes may be
prepared by any method
AU IC
permitted by this
specification.
BL
2.2 Base metal at net

section of high-strength In net section
B 12 16 originating at
PU
bolted joints, Holes may be

prepared by any method (110) side of hole
permitted by this
specificationbut thermally
cut holes shall be subject to
the approval of the
Engineer.
2.3 Base metal at the net
section of joints with rivets, C 4.4 10 In net section
snug tightened bolts or (69) originating at
other mechanical fasteners. side of hole
2.4 Base metal at net E 1.1 4.5 In net section
section of eyebar head or (31) originating at
pin plate side of hole
260
261
262

APP 3-9
263 TABLE A-3.1 (continued)

265
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
266
PU

APP 3-10
Remove the
note!
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
267
268
G R
269
AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-11

271
Description Stress Constant, Thresh- Potential
Catego- Cf old, Crack
ry FTH , Initiation Point
ksi
(MPa)
SECTION 3–WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1 Base metal and weld metal From surface

in members without or internal
attachments built up of plates B 12 16 discontinuities
or shapes connected by (110) in weld
continuous longitudinal CJP
20 NE
groove welds, back gouged
and welded from second side,
or by continuous fillet welds
20 O
3.2 Base metal and weld metal From surface
in members without or internal
3, W
attachments built up of plates B′ 6.1 12 discontinuities
or shapes, connected by (83) in weld
E
continuous longitudinal CJP
groove welds with left-in-place
ST I
U EV
continuous steel backing, or by

continuous PJP groove welds
G R
3.3 Base metal at the ends of From the weld

longitudinal welds that termination
terminate at weld access holes into the web or
AU IC
in connected built-up flange

members, as well as weld toes
BL
of fillet welds that wrap around

ends of weld access holes
PU
Access hole R ≥ 1 in. (25 mm) D 2.2 7

with radius, R, formed by (48)
predrilling, subpunching and
reaming, or thermally cut and
ground to bright metal surface
Access hole R ≥ 3/8 in. (10 E’ 0.39 2.6

mm) and the radius, R, need (18)
not be ground to a bright metal
surface
3.4 Base metal at ends of E 1.1 4.5 In connected

longitudinal intermittent fillet (31) material at
weld segments start and stop
locations of
any weld

APP 3-12
3.5 Base metal at ends of In flange at

partial length welded toe of end
coverplates narrower than the weld (if
flange having square or present) or in
tapered ends, with or without flange at
welds across the ends termination of
longitudinal
weld
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm) E 1.1 4.5

(31)
t f > 0.8 in. (20 mm) E′ 0.39 2.6

where (18)
tf = thickness of member
flange, in. (mm)
3.6 Base metal at ends of In flange at
20 NE
partial length welded toe of end
coverplates or other weld or in
attachments wider than the flange at
20 O
flange with welds across the termination of
ends longitudinal
weld or in
3, W
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm) E 1.1 4.5 edge of flange
(31)
E
ST I
t f > 0.8 in. (20 mm)

U EV
E′ 0.39 2.6
(18)
G R
3.7 Base metal at ends of In edge of

partial length welded flange at end
coverplates wider than the of coverplate
AU IC
flange without welds across the weld

ends
BL
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm) E′ 0.39 2.6

(18)
PU
t f >0.8 in. (20 mm) is not None − −

permitted
SECTION 4–LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Base metal at junction of Initiating from

axially loaded members with end of any
longitudinally welded end weld
connections; welds are on termination
each side of the axis of the extending into
member to balance weld the base metal
stresses
t ≤ 0.5 in. (13 mm) E 1.1 4.5

(31)
t > 0.5 in. (13 mm) E′ 0.39 2.6

(18)
where
t = connected member
thickness, as shown in Case

APP 3-13
4.1 figure, in. (mm)
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-14
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
273
AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-15
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
274
275
BL
276
PU
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285

APP 3-16

287
Description Stress Constant, Threshold, Potential
Category Cf FTH , Crack
ksi Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 5–WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1 Weld metal and base
metal in or adjacent to CJP From internal
groove welded splices in discontinuities
plate, rolled shapes, or built- B 12 16 in weld metal
up cross sections with no (110) or along the
change in cross section with fusion
welds ground essentially boundary
parallel to the direction of
20 NE
stress and inspected in
accordance with Section 3.6
20 O
groove welded splices with discontinuities
3, W
welds ground essentially in metal or
parallel to the direction of along the
stress at transitions in fusion
E
thickness or width made on boundary or at
ST I
a slope no greater than 1:2- start of

U EV
1/2 and inspected in transition

accordance with Section 3.6 when Fy ≥ 90
ksi (620 MPa)
G R
Fy < 90 ksi (620 MPa) B 12 16

(110)
AU IC
BL
6.1 12
Fy ≥ 90 ksi (620 MPa) B′
(83)
5.3 Base metal and weld
PU

groove welded splices with discontinuities
welds ground essentially in weld metal
parallel to the direction of B 12 16 or along the
stress at transitions in width (110) fusion
made on a radius, R, of not boundary
less than 24 in. (600 mm)
with the point of tangency at
the end of the groove weld
and inspected in accordance
with Section 3.6

APP 3-17

metal in or adjacent to CJP From weld
groove welds in T- or corner- extending into
joints or splices, without C 4.4 10 base metal or
transitions in thickness or (69) into weld
with transition in thickness metal
having slopes no greater
than 1:2-1/2, when weld
reinforcement is not
removed, and is inspected in
5.5 Base metal and weld From the toe
metal in or adjacent to of the groove
transverse CJP groove weld or the
welded butt splices with toe of the
backing left in place weld attaching
backing when
Tack welds inside groove applicable
D 2.2 7 (48)
20 NE
Tack welds outside the E 1.1 4.5 (31)
groove and not closer than
1/2 in. (13 mm) to the edge
20 O
of base metal
3, W
metal at transverse end
connections of tension-
E
loaded plate elements using
PJP groove welds in butt, T-
ST I
or corner-joints, with
U EV
reinforcing or contouring
fillets; FSR shall be the
G R
smaller of the toe crack or

root crack allowable stress
range
AU IC
Crack initiating from weld C 4.4 10 Initiating from

BL
toe (69) weld toe

extending into
base metal
PU
Crack initiating from weld C′ See Eq. Initiating at

None
root A-3-3 or weld root
A-3-3M extending into
and through
weld
289
290
291

APP 3-18

294
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
295
PU
296
297

APP 3--19
Noote
revvised
figgure ©
298
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
299
300
BL
301
PU
302
303
304

ural Steel Build
O
APP 3-20
305
306
307

Description Stress Constant Thresh- Potential
Category Cf old Crack
FTH , Initiation Point
ksi
(MPa)
SECTION 5–WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
20 NE
(cont’d)
20 O
metal at transverse end
connections of tension-loaded
plate elements using a pair of
3, W
fillet welds on opposite sides
of the plate; FSR shall be the
E
smaller of the weld toe crack

ST I
or weld root crack allowable

U EV
stress range
Crack initiating from weld toe C 4.4 10 Initiating from

G R
(69) weld toe

extending into
AU IC
base metal
BL
Crack initiating from weld root Initiating at

C'' See Eq. None
A-3-5 or weld root
extending into
PU
A-3-5M
and through
weld
5.8 Base metal of tension- C 4.4 10 From

loaded plate elements, and (69) geometrical
on built-up shapes and rolled discontinuity
beam webs or flanges at toe at toe of fillet
of transverse fillet welds extending into
adjacent to welded transverse base metal
stiffeners
SECTION 6–BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER

CONNECTIONS

APP 3-21
6.1 Base metal of equal or Near point of

unequal thickness at details tangency of
attached by CJP groove radius at edge
welds subject to longitudinal of member
loading only when the detail
embodies a transition radius,
R, with the weld termination
ground smooth and inspected
in accordance with Section
3.6
B 12 16
R ≥ 24 in. (600 mm) (110)
6 in. ≤ R < 24 in. C 10

4.4
(150 mm ≤ R < 600 mm) (69)
20 NE
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in. D 2.2 7
(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm) (48)
20 O
3, W
R < 2 in. (50 mm) E 1.1 4.5
(31)
E
ST I
310
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-22

20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
313
314
315
316

APP 3-23
TABLE A-3.1 (continued)

Fatigue Design Parameters
Catego- Cf old Crack
ksi
(MPa)

CONNECTIONS (continued)
6.2 Base metal at details of

equal thickness attached by
CJP groove welds, subject to
transverse loading, with or
without longitudinal loading,
20 NE
when the detail embodies a
transition radius, R, with the
weld termination ground
20 O
smooth and inspected in
3, W
E
(a) When weld reinforcement Near point of
is removed
ST I
tangency of
U EV
radius or in
B 12 16 the weld or at
R ≥ 24 in. (600 mm)
(110) fusion
G R
boundary or
member or
AU IC
6 in. ≤ R < 24 in. attachment

(150 mm ≤ R < 600 mm) C 4.4 10
(69)
BL
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in. D 2.2 7

(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm)
PU
(48)
R < 2 in. (50 mm)

E 1.1
4.5
(31)
(b) When weld reinforcement At toe of the
is not removed weld either
R ≥ 6 in. (150 mm) 1 along edge of
C
4.4 0 member or the
(69) attachment
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in. D
2.2 7
(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm) (48)
R < 2 in. (50 mm) E 1.1 4.5

(31)

APP 3-24
6.3 Base metal at details of

unequal thickness attached by
CJP groove welds, subject to
transverse loading, with or
without longitudinal loading,
when the detail embodies a
transition radius, R, with the
weld termination ground
smooth and in accordance with
Section 3.6:
(a) When weld reinforcement

is removed
R > 2 in. (50 mm) D 2.2 7 At toe of weld

(48) along edge of
thinner
material
20 NE
1.1 In weld
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm) E 4.5 termination in
small radius
20 O
(31)
(b) When reinforcement is not
3, W
removed
Any radius 1.1

E
E 4.5 At toe of weld
(31) along edge of
ST I
U EV
thinner
material
G R
317
318
AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-25

20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333

APP 3-26

ksi
(MPa)
CONNECTIONS (continued)
6.4 Base metal of equal or Initiating in
unequal thickness, subject to base metal at
longitudinal stress at the weld
transverse members, with or termination or
without transverse stress, at the toe of
attached by fillet or PJP the weld
groove welds parallel to extending into
20 NE
direction of stress when the the base
detail embodies a transition metal
radius, R, with weld
20 O
termination ground smooth
R > 2 in. (50 mm) D 2.2 7

3, W
(48)
E
ST I
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm) E

U EV
1.1 4.5
(31)
G R
SECTION 7–BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTSa

AU IC
BL
PU

APP 3-27
7.1 Base metal subject to Initiating in

longitudinal loading at details base metal at
with welds parallel or the weld
transverse to the direction of termination or
stress, with or without at the toe of
transverse load on the detail, the weld
where the detail embodies no extending into
transition radius, R, and with the base
detail length, a, in direction of metal
stress and thickness of the
attachment, b:
a < 2 in. (50 mm) for any C 4.4 10

thickness, b (69)
Align the descriptions, Ctegories, Cfs

20 NE
2 in. (50 mm) ≤ a ≤ 4 in. (100 D 2.2 7
and Fths after the chnges are acceptd

mm) and a≤ 12b (48)
20 O
2 in. (50 mm) ≤ a ≤ 4 in. (100
mm) and a > 12b
E 1.1 4.5
3, W
a> 4 in. (100 mm) and b≤ 0.8
(31)
in. (20 mm)
E
ST I
U EV
0.39 2.6
a > 4 in. (100 mm) E′
and b > 0.8 in. (20 mm) (18)
G R
AU IC
7.2 Base metal subject to Initiating in

longitudinal stress at details base metal at
attached by fillet or PJP the weld
BL
groove welds, with or without termination,

transverse load on detail, extending into
PU
when the detail embodies a the base

transition radius, R, with weld metal
termination ground smooth:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) D 2.2 7

(48)
E 1.1 4.5
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm)
(31)
[a] “Attachment,” as used herein, is defined as any steel detail welded to a member that causes a deviation
in the stress flow in the member and, thus, reduces the fatigue resistance. The reduction is due to the
presence of the attachment, not due to the loading on the attachment.
336
337
338
339

APP 3-28

20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
342
343
344

APP 3-29
345
346

349

ksi
(MPa)
SECTION 8–MISCELLANEOUS
20 NE
8.1 Base metal at steel headed C 4.4 10 At toe of weld
stud anchors attached by fillet (69) in base metal
20 O
weld or automatic stud welding
3, W
8.2 Shear on throat of any fillet F See Eq. See Eq. Initiating at the
weld, continuous or A-3-2 or A-3-2 or root of the
E
intermittent, longitudinal or A-3-2M A-3-2M fillet weld,
transverse extending into
ST I
the weld
U EV
8.3 Base metal at plug or slot E 1.1 4.5 Initiating in the

welds (31) base metal at
G R
the end of the

plug or slot
AU IC
weld,
extending into
BL
the base
metal
PU
8.4 Shear on plug or slot F See Eq. See Eq. Initiating in the
welds A-3-2 or A-3-2 or weld at the
A-3-2M A-3-2M faying surface,
extending into
the weld
8.5 High-strength bolts, G 0.39 7 Initiating at the

common bolts, threaded (48) root of the
anchor rods, and hanger rods, threads,
whether pretensioned in extending into
accordance with Table J3.1 or the fastener
J3.1M, or snug-tightened with
cut, ground or rolled threads;
stress range on tensile stress
area due to applied cyclic load
plus prying action, when
applicable
350
351
352
353
354
355

APP 3-30
356

20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
359
360
361

APP4-1
1
2 APPENDIX 4
3
4 STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

5
6
7 This appendix provides criteria for the design and evaluation of structural steel
8 components, systems, and frames for fire conditions. These criteria provide for the
9 determination of the heat input, thermal expansion, and degradation in mechanical
10 properties of materials at elevated temperatures that cause progressive decrease in
11 strength and stiffness of structural components and systems at elevated
12 temperatures.
13
14 User Note: Throughout this chapter, the term “elevated temperatures” refers to
15 temperatures due to unintended fire exposure only.
20 NE
16
18
20 O
20 4.2. Structural Design for Fire Conditions by Analysis
3, W
21 4.3. Design by Qualification Testing
E
23
ST I
U EV
24 The methods contained in this appendix provide regulatory evidence of

25 compliance in accordance with the design applications outlined in this
26 section.
G R
27
28 1. Performance Objective
AU IC
29
30 Structural components, members, and building frame systems shall be
BL
31 designed so as to maintain their load-bearing function during the design-

32 basis fire and to satisfy other performance requirements specified for the
33 building occupancy.
PU
34
35 Deformation criteria shall be applied where the means of providing
36 structural fire resistance, or the design criteria for fire barriers, requires
37 evaluation of the deformation of the load-carrying structure.
38
39 Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and deformations from the
40 design-basis fire shall not cause a breach of horizontal or vertical com-
41 partmentation.
42
43 2. Design by Engineering Analysis
44
45 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 are permitted to be used to document
46 the anticipated performance of steel framing when subjected to design-
47 basis fire scenarios. Methods in Section 4.2 provide evidence of compli-
48 ance with performance objectives established in Section 4.1.1.
49
50 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 are permitted to be used to demon-
51 strate an equivalency for an alternative material or method, as permitted by
52 the applicable building code (ABC).

APP4-2
53
54 Structural design for fire conditions using Appendix 4.2 shall be performed
55 using the load and resistance factor design method in accordance with the
56 provisions of Section B3.1 (LRFD).
57
58 3. Design by Qualification Testing
59
60 The qualification testing methods in Section 4.3 are permitted to be used to
61 document the fire resistance of steel framing subject to the standardized
62 fire testing protocols required by the ABC.
63 4. Load Combinations and Required Strength
64
65 In the absence of ABC provisions for design under fire exposures, the
66 required strength of the structure and its elements shall be determined from
67 the gravity load combination as follows:
68
69 (0.9 or 1.2) D + AT + 0.5L + 0.2S (A-4-1)
20 NE
70
71 where
72 AT = nominal forces and deformations due to the design-basis fire de-
20 O
73 fined in Section 4.2.1
74 D = nominal dead load
3, W
75 L = nominal occupancy live load
76 S = nominal snow load
E
77
ST I
78
U EV
79 User Note: ASCE/SEI 7 Section 2.5 contains this load combination for
80 extraordinary events, which includes fire. Live load reduction is permitted.
G R
81 4.2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS BY ANALYSIS

82
AU IC
83 It is permitted to design structural members, components and building

84 frames for elevated temperatures in accordance with the requirements of
BL
85 this section.
86
PU
87 1. Design-Basis Fire
88
89 A design-basis fire shall be identified to describe the heating conditions for
90 the structure. These heating conditions shall relate to the fuel commodities
91 and compartment characteristics present in the assumed fire area. The fuel
92 load density based on the occupancy of the space shall be considered when
93 determining the total fuel load. Heating conditions shall be specified either
94 in terms of a heat flux or temperature of the upper gas layer created by the
95 fire. The variation of the heating conditions with time shall be determined
96 for the duration of the fire.
97
98 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 shall be used in accordance with the
99 provisions for alternative materials, designs, and methods as permitted by
100 the ABC. When the analysis methods in Section 4.2 are used to demon-
101 strate equivalency to hourly ratings based on qualification testing in
102 Section 4.3, the design-basis fire shall be permitted to be determined in
103 accordance with ASTM E119.
104
105 1a. Localized Fire
106

APP4-3
107 Where the heat release rate from the fire is insufficient to cause flashover,
108 a localized fire exposure shall be assumed. In such cases, the fuel compo-
109 sition, arrangement of the fuel array, and floor area occupied by the fuel
110 shall be used to determine the radiant heat flux from the flame and smoke
111 plume to the structure.
112
113 1b. Post-Flashover Compartment Fires
114
115 Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient to cause flashover, a
116 post-flashover compartment fire shall be assumed. The determination of
117 the temperature versus time profile resulting from the fire shall include fuel
118 load, ventilation characteristics of the space (natural and mechanical),
119 compartment dimensions, and thermal characteristics of the compartment
120 boundary.
121
122 The fire duration in a particular area shall be determined from the total
123 combustible mass, or fuel load in the space. In the case of either a
20 NE
124 localized fire or a post-flashover compartment fire, the fire duration shall
125 be determined as the total combustible mass divided by the mass loss rate.
126
20 O
127 1c. Exterior Fires
128
129 The exposure effects of the exterior structure to flames projecting from
3, W
130 windows or other wall openings as a result of a post-flashover compart-
131 ment fire shall be addressed along with the radiation from the interior fire
E
132 through the opening. The shape and length of the flame projection shall be
ST I
133 used along with the distance between the flame and the exterior steelwork
U EV
134 to determine the heat flux to the steel. The method identified in Section
135 4.2.1b shall be used for describing the characteristics of the interior
G R
136 compartment fire.

137
AU IC
138 1d. Active Fire-Protection Systems

139
140 The effects of active fire-protection systems shall be addressed when
BL
141 describing the design-basis fire.

142
PU
143 Where automatic smoke and heat vents are installed in nonsprinklered
144 spaces, the resulting smoke temperature shall be determined from calcula-
145 tion.
146
147 2. Temperatures in Structural Systems under Fire Conditions
148
149 Temperatures within structural members, components and frames due to
150 the heating conditions posed by the design-basis fire shall be determined
151 by a heat transfer analysis.
152
153 3. Material Properties at Elevated Temperatures
154
155 The effects of elevated temperatures on the physical and mechanical
156 properties of materials shall be considered in the analysis and design of
157 structural members, components and systems. Any rational method that
158 establishes material properties at elevated temperatures that is based on test
159 data is permitted, including the methods defined in Sections 4.2.3a, and
160 4.2.3b.
161

APP4-4
162
163 3a. Thermal Elongation
164
165 The coefficients of thermal expansion shall be taken as follows:
166 (a) For structural and reinforcing steels: For calculations at temperatures
167 above 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 7.8 × 10-
6
168 /°F (1.4 × 10-5/oC).
169
170 (b) For normal weight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above
171 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 10 × 10−6/°F (1.8
172 × 10−5/oC).
173
174 (c) For lightweight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above
175 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 4.4 × 10−6/°F
176 (7.9 × 10−6/oC).
177
20 NE
178 3b. Mechanical Properties of Structural Steel, Hot-Rolled Reinforcing
179 Steel, and Concrete at Elevated Temperatures
180
20 O
181 The uniaxial engineering stress-strain-temperature relationship for
182 structural steel, hot rolled reinforcing steel, and concrete shall be deter-
3, W
183 mined using this section. This applies only to structural and reinforcing
184 steels with a specified minimum yield strength, Fy, equal to 65 ksi (450
E
185 MPa) or less, and to concrete with a specified compressive strength, f′c,
ST I
186 equal to 8 ksi (55 MPa) or less.

U EV
187
188 (a) Structural and Hot Rolled Reinforcing Steel
G R
189 Table A-4.2.1 provides retention factors (kE, ky, and kp) for steel which
190 are expressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated tem-
AU IC
191 perature with respect to the property at ambient, assumed to be 68°F

192 (20°C). It is permitted to interpolate between these values. The proper-
BL
193 ties at elevated temperature, T, and are defined as follows:

194
195 E(T) is the modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature,
PU
196 ksi (MPa), which is calculated as a ratio to the ambient property as

197 specified in Table A-4.2.1.
198
199 G(T) is the shear modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated
200 temperature, ksi (MPa) , which is calculated as a ratio to the ambient
201 property as specified in Table A-4.2.1.
202 Fy(T) is the specified minimum yield stress of steel at elevated
203 temperature, ksi (MPa) , which is calculated as a ratio to the ambient
204 property as specified in Table A-4.2.1.
205 Fp(T) is the proportional limit at elevated temperature, which is cal-
206 culated as a ratio to yield strength as specified in Table A-4.2.1.
207
208 Fu(T) is the specified minimum tensile strength at elevated tempera-
209 ture, which is equal to Fy(T) for temperatures greater than 750oF
210 (400oC). For temperatures less than or equal to 750°F (400°C), Fu
211 may be used in place of Fu(T).
212
213 The engineering stress at elevated temperature, F(T), at each strain
214 range shall be determined as follows:

APP4-5
215 (a) When in the elastic range [ε(T) < εp(T)]
216 F(T) = E(T) ε(T) (A-4-2)[a]
217 (b) When in the nonlinear range [εp(T) ≤ ε(T) ≤ εy(T)]
b 2
218 F ( T ) = F p (T ) − c + a 2 −  ε y (T ) − ε (T )  (A-4-3)[a]
a
219
220 (c) When in the plastic range [εy(T) ≤ ε(T) ≤ εu(T)]
221
222 F (T ) = Fy (T ) (A-4-4)[a]
223 where
224 ε(T) = the engineering strain at elevated temperature, in./in.
225 (m/m)
226 εp(T) = the engineering strain at the proportional limit at elevat-
20 NE
227 ed temperature, in./in. (m/m) = Fp(T) / E(T)
228 εy(T) = the engineering yield strain at elevated temperature,
20 O
229 in./in. (m/m) = 0.02 in./in. (m/m)
 c 
230 a2 = ε y (T ) − ε p (T )  ε y (T ) − ε p (T ) +  (A-4-5)[a]
3, W
 E ( )
T
= E (T ) ε y (T ) − ε p (T )  c + c2
E
231 b2 (A-4-6)[a]
ST I
2
 Fy (T ) − Fp (T ) 
U EV
232 c = (A-4-7)[a]
E (T ) ε y (T ) − ε p (T )  − 2  Fy (T ) − Fp (T ) 
G R
233
234 User Note: The equation for the plastic range conservatively neglects the
235 strain-hardening portion, but strain-hardening is permitted to be includ-
AU IC
236 edThe plateau of the plastic range does not exceed the ultimate strain,
237 εu(T), where εu(T) = 15%.
BL
238
239 User Note: This section applies to structural steel materials in Section
PU
240 A3.1 and to hot-rolled reinforcing steel with a specified minimum yield
241 strength, Fy, equal to 65 ksi or less, which includes ASTM A615/A615M
242 Gr. 60 (420) and ASTM A706/A706M Gr. 60 (420) steel reinforcement.
243
244 (b) Concrete
245
246 Table A-4.2.2 provides retention factors for concrete which are ex-
247 pressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated temperature
248 with respect to the property at ambient, assumed to be 68°F (20 °C). It
249 is permitted to interpolate between these values. For lightweight con-
250 crete, values of εcu(T) shall be obtained from tests. The properties at
251 elevated temperature, T, are defined as follows:
252
a
EC4, European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Eurocode 4 Design of
Composite Steel and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire
Design, EN 1994-1-2, CEN, Brussels, 2005.

APP4-6
253 f c′(T ) = the specified compressive strength of concrete at elevated

254 temperature, ksi (MPa), which is calculated as a ratio to the
255 ambient property as specified in Table A-4.2.2.
256 Ec(T) = the modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated
257 temperature, ksi (MPa)
258 εcu(T) = the concrete strain corresponding to f c′(T ) at elevated
259 temperature, in./in. (m/m)
260
261 The uniaxial stress-strain-temperature relationship for concrete in com-
262 pression is permitted to be calculated as follows:
263
  ε (T )  
 3 c  
  εcu (T )  
264 Fc (T ) = f c′ (T )  3
(A-4-8)[a]
  εc ( T )  
2 +   
  εcu (T )  
20 NE
265
266 where Fc(T) and εc(T) are the concrete compressive stress and strain,
20 O
267 respectively, at elevated temperature.
268
269 User Note: The tensile strength of concrete at elevated temperature can
3, W
270 be taken as zero, or not more than 10% of the compressive strength at
271 the corresponding temperature.
E
272
ST I
273 (c) Strengths of Bolts at Elevated Temperatures

U EV
274
275 Table A-4.2.3 provides retention factors for high-strength bolts which are
G R
276 expressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated temperature

277 with respect to the property at ambient, which is assumed to be 68°F
AU IC
278 (20°C). The properties at elevated temperature, T, are defined as follows:

279
BL
280 Fnt(T) = nominal tensile strength of the bolt, ksi (MPa)

281 Fnv(T) = nominal shear strength of the bolt, ksi (MPa)
282
PU
TABLE A-4.2.1
Properties of Steel at Elevated Temperatures
kE = E (T ) E
Steel Temperature,
= G(T) G k p = Fp (T ) Fy ky = Fy (T ) Fy
ºF (ºC)
68 (20) 1.00 1.00 1.00
200 (93) 1.00 1.00 1.00
400 (200) 0.90 0.80 1.00
600 (320) 0.78 0.58 1.00
750 (400) 0.70 0.42 1.00
800 (430) 0.67 0.40 0.94
1000 (540) 0.49 0.29 0.66
1200 (650) 0.22 0.13 0.35
a
EC4, European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Eurocode 4 Design of
Composite Steel and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire
Design, EN 1994-1-2, CEN, Brussels, 2005.

APP4-7
1400 (760) 0.11 0.06 0.16

1600 (870) 0.07 0.04 0.07
1800 (980) 0.05 0.03 0.04
2000 (1100) 0.02 0.01 0.02
2200 (1200) 0.00 0.00 0.00
283
TABLE A-4.2.2
Properties of Concrete at Elevated Temperatures
Concrete kc = fc′ (T ) fc′ εcu(T),
Temperature, %
ºF (ºC) Normal Weight Lightweight Ec (T ) Ec Normal Weight
Concrete Concrete Concrete
68 (20) 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25
200 (93) 0.95 1.00 0.93 0.34
400 (200) 0.90 1.00 0.75 0.46
550 (290) 0.86 1.00 0.61 0.58
600 (320) 0.83 0.98 0.57 0.62
20 NE
800 (430) 0.71 0.85 0.38 0.80
1000 (540) 0.54 0.71 0.20 1.06
1200 (650) 0.38 0.58 0.092 1.32
20 O
1400 (760) 0.21 0.45 0.073 1.43
1600 (870) 0.10 0.31 0.055 1.49
1800 (980) 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.50
3, W
2000 (1100) 0.01 0.05 0.018 1.50
2200 (1200) 0.00 0.00 0.000 0.00
E
284
285
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

APP4-8
286
TABLE A-4.2.3
Properties of Group 120 and Group 150 High-
Strength Bolts at Elevated Temperatures
Bolt Temperature,
°F (°C) Fnt (T ) Fnt or Fnv (T ) Fnv
68 (20) 1.00
200 (93) 0.97
300 (150) 0.95
400 (200) 0.93
600 (320) 0.88
800 (430) 0.71
900 (480) 0.59
1000 (540) 0.42
1200 (650) 0.16
1400 (760) 0.08
1600 (870) 0.04
20 NE
1800 (980) 0.01
2000 (1100) 0.00
287
20 O
288 4. Structural Design Requirements
289
3, W
290 4a. General Requirements
291
E
292 The structural frame and foundation shall be capable of providing the
ST I
293 strength and deformation capacity to withstand, as a system, the structural

U EV
294 actions developed during the fire within the prescribed limits of defor-
295 mation. The structural system shall be designed to sustain local damage
296 with the structural system as a whole remaining stable. Frame stability and
G R
297 required strength shall be determined in accordance with the requirements

298 of Section C1.
AU IC
299
300 Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer all forces from the
BL
301 exposed region to the final point of resistance.

302
PU
303 The requirement for steam vent holes in concrete-filled composite

304 members shall be evaluated. Any rational method that considers heat
305 transfer through the cross-section, water content in concrete, fire protec-
306 tion, and the allowable pressure build up in the member is permitted for
307 calculating the size and spacing of vent holes.
308
309 User Note: Section 4.3.2.2.1 provides a possible vent hole configuration
310 for concrete-filled columns.
311
312
313 4b. Strength Requirements and Deformation Limits
314
315 Conformance of the structural system to these requirements shall be
316 demonstrated by constructing a mathematical model of the structure based
317 on principles of structural mechanics and evaluating this model for the
318 internal forces and deformations in the members of the structure developed
319 by the temperatures from the design-basis fire.
320

APP4-9
321 Individual members shall have the design strength necessary to resist the
322 shears, axial forces and moments determined in accordance with these
323 provisions.
324
325 Connections shall be designed and detailed to resist the imposed loading
326 and deformation demands during a design-basis fire as required to meet the
327 performance objectives stated in Section 4.1.1. Where the means of
328 providing fire resistance requires the evaluation of deformation criteria, the
329 deformation of the structural system, or members thereof, under the
330 design-basis fire shall not exceed the prescribed limits.
331
332 User Note: Typical simple shear connections may need additional design
333 enhancements for ductility and resistance to large compression and tensile
334 forces that may develop during the design-basis fire exposure. A fire
335 exposure will not only affect the magnitude of member end reactions, but
336 may also change the nature of the reaction to a limit state different from the
337 controlling mode at ambient temperature.
20 NE
338
339 It shall be permitted to include membrane action of composite floor slabs
340 for fire resistance if the design provides for the effects of increased
20 O
341 connection tensile forces and redistributed gravity load demands on the
342 adjacent framing supports.
343
3, W
344 4c. Design by Advanced Methods of Analysis
345
E
346 Design by advanced methods of analysis is permitted for the design of all
ST I
347 steel building structures for fire conditions. The design-basis fire exposure
U EV
348 shall be that determined in Section 4.2.1. The analysis shall include both a
349 thermal response and the mechanical response to the design-basis fire.
G R
350
351 The thermal response shall produce a temperature field in each structural
AU IC
352 element as a result of the design-basis fire and shall incorporate

353 temperature-dependent thermal properties of the structural elements and
354 fire-resistive materials, as per Section 4.2.2.
BL
355
356 The mechanical response results in forces and deformations in the
PU
357 structural system due to the thermal response calculated from the design-
358 basis fire. The mechanical response shall take into account explicitly the
359 deterioration in strength and stiffness with increasing temperature, the
360 effects of thermal expansions, inelastic behavior and load redistribution,
361 large deformations, time-dependent effects such as creep, and uncertainties
362 resulting from variability in material properties at elevated temperature.
363 Support and restraint conditions (forces, moments, and boundary
364 conditions) shall represent the behavior of the structure during a design-
365 basis fire. Material properties shall be defined as per Section 4.2.3.
366
367 The resulting analysis shall address all relevant limit states, such as
368 excessive deflections, connection ruptures, and global or local buckling.
369
370 4d. Design by Simple Methods of Analysis
371
372 The methods of analysis in this section are permitted to be used for the
373 evaluation of the performance of individual members at elevated tempera-
374 tures during exposure to a design-basis fire. When evaluating individual
375 members, the support and restraint conditions (forces, moments and

APP4-10
376 boundary conditions) applicable at normal temperatures are permitted to be

377 assumed to remain unchanged throughout the fire exposure.
378
379 For evaluating the performance of structural frames during exposure to a
380 design-basis fire, member demands (forces and moments) are also
381 permitted to be determined through consideration of reduced stiffness at
382 elevated temperatures, appropriate boundary conditions, and thermal
383 deformations.
384
385 It is permitted to model the thermal response of steel and composite
386 members using a lumped heat capacity analysis with heat input as deter-
387 mined by the design-basis fire defined in Section 4.2.1, using the tempera-
388 ture equal to the maximum steel temperature. For composite beams, the
389 maximum steel temperature shall be assigned to the bottom flange and a
390 temperature gradient shall be applied to incorporate thermally induced
391 moments, as stipulated in Section 4.2.4d(f) .
392
20 NE
393 For steel temperatures less than or equal to 400°F (200°C), the member
394 and connection design strengths is permitted to be determined without
395 consideration of temperature effects on the nominal strengths.
20 O
396
397 The design strength shall be determined as in Section B3.1. The nominal
398 strength, Rn, shall be calculated using material properties, as provided in
3, W
399 Section 4.2.3b, at the temperature developed by the design-basis fire and as
400 stipulated in Sections 4.2.4d(a) through (f).
E
401
ST I
402 User Note: Lumped heat capacity analysis assumes uniform temperature
U EV
403 over the section and length of the member, which is generally a reasonable
404 assumption for many structural members exposed to post-flashover fires.
G R
405 Consideration should be given to the use of the uniform temperature

406 assumption as it may not always be applicable or conservative.
AU IC
407
408 At temperatures below 400°F (200°C), the reduction in steel properties
409 need not be considered in calculating member strengths despite small
BL
410 reductions in material properties in Table A-4.2.1. This is a simplifying

411 assumption used only in the simple method of analysis.
PU
412
413 (a) Design for Tension
414
415 The nominal strength for tension shall be determined using the
416 provisions of Chapter D, with steel properties as stipulated in Section
417 4.2.3b(a) and assuming a uniform temperature over the cross section
418 using the temperature equal to the maximum steel temperature.
419
420 (b) Design for Compression
421
422 For nonslender-element columns, the nominal strength for flexural
423 buckling of compression members shall be determined using the pro-
424 visions of Chapter E with steel properties as stipulated in Section
425 4.2.3b(a).Equation A-4-9 shall be used in lieu of Equations E3-2 and
426 E3-3 to calculate the nominal compressive strength for flexural buck-
427 ling:
 Fy (T ) 
 F (T ) 
428 Fcr (T ) = 0.42 e  Fy (T ) (A-4-9)
 

APP4-11
429 where Fy(T) is the yield stress at elevated temperature and Fe(T) is the
430 critical elastic buckling stress calculated from Equation E3-4 with the
431 elastic modulus, E(T), at elevated temperature. Fy(T) and E(T) are ob-
432 tained using coefficients from Table A-4.2.1.
433
434 The strength of leaning (gravity) columns may be increased by rota-
435 tional restraints from cooler columns in the stories above and below
436 the story exposed to the fire. This increased strength applies to fires on
437 only one floor and should not be used for multiple story fires. The
438 increase in design strength can be accounted for by reducing the col-
439 umn slenderness ( Lc r ) used to calculate Fe ( T ) in Equation A-4-9 to
440 ( Lc r )T as follows:
441
 Lc   T − 32   Lc  35
442   = 1 −    − (T − 32) ≥ 0 (oF) (A-4-10)
 r T  n ( 3,600 )   r  n ( 3,600 )
20 NE
443
 Lc   T   Lc  35T
444   = 1 −  − ≥0 (oC) (A-4-10M)
 r T  n ( 2,000 )   r  n ( 2, 000 )
445
20 O
3, W
446 where
447 Lc = KL = effective length of member, in. (mm)
E
449 = effective length factor
ST I
K
U EV

451 T = steel temperature, oF , oC
452 n = 1 for columns with cooler columns both above and below
G R
453 n = 2 for columns with cooler columns either above or below

454 only
AU IC
455
456 User Note: The design equations for compression predict flexural
BL
457 buckling capacities of wide flange rolled shapes, but do not consider
458 local buckling and torsional buckling. If applicable, these additional
459 limit states must be considered with an alternative method. For most
PU
460 fire conditions, uniform heating and temperatures govern the design
461 for compression. When uniform heating is not a reasonable assump-
462 tion, alternative methods must be used to account for the effects of
463 nonuniform heating and resulting thermal gradients on the design
464 strength of compression members, as the simple method assumes a
465 uniform temperature distribution.
466
467 (c) Design for Compression in Concrete-Filled Composite Columns
468
469 For concrete-filled composite columns, the nominal strength for com-
470 pression shall be determined using the provisions of Section I2.2 with
471 steel and concrete properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3b. Equa-
472 tion A-4-11 shall be used in lieu of Equations I2-2 and I2-3 to calcu-
473 late the nominal compressive strength for flexural buckling:
474
( ) .
475 𝑃 (𝑇) = 0.45 ( ) 𝑃 (𝑇) (A-4-11)

476
477 where Pno(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equations I2-

APP4-12
478 10, I2-11, and I2-12. Pe(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using
479 Equations I2-5, I2-13, and I2-14. . Fy(T), f’c(T), Es(T), and Ec(T) are
480 obtained using coefficients from Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
481
482 (d) Design for Compression in Concrete-Filled Composite Plate Shear
483 Walls
484
485 For concrete-filled composite plate shear walls, the nominal strength
486 for compression shall be determined using the provisions of Section
487 I2.3 with steel and concrete properties as stipulated in Section A-
488 4.2.3b and Equation A-4-12 used in lieu of Equations I2-2 and I2-3 to
489 calculate the nominal compressive strength for flexural buckling:
490
( ) .
491 𝑃 (𝑇) = 0.32 ( ) 𝑃 (𝑇) (A-4-12)

492
493 where Pno(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equation I2-
20 NE
494 16. Pe(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equations I2-5
495 and I1-1. Fy(T), f’c(Tc), Es(T), and Ec(Tc) are obtained using coeffi-
496 cients from Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
20 O
497
498 User Note: For composite members, the steel temperature is deter-
3, W
499 mined using heat transfer equations with heat input corresponding to
500 the design-basis fire. The temperature distribution in concrete infill
E
501 can be calculated using one- or two-dimensional heat transfer equa-
502 tions. The regions of concrete infill will have varying temperatures
ST I
U EV
503 and mechanical properties. Concrete contribution to axial strength and

504 effective stiffness can therefore be calculated by discretizing the cross-
505 section into smaller elements (with each concrete element considered
G R
506 to have a uniform temperature) and summing up the contribution of

507 individual elements.
AU IC
508
509 (e) Design for Flexure
BL
510
511 For steel beams, the calculated bottom flange temperature shall be
512 constant over the depth of the member.
PU
513
514 (1) The nominal strength for flexure shall be determined using the
515 provisions of Chapter F with steel properties as stipulated in Section
516 4.2.3b(b).Equations A-4-13 through A-4-19 shall be used in lieu of
517 Equations F2-2 through F2-6 to calculate the nominal flexural strength
518 for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly symmetric compact rolled
519 wide-flange shapes bent about their major axis: When Lb ≤ Lr ( T )
520
𝐿
𝑀 (𝑇) = 𝐶 𝐹 (𝑇)𝑆 + 𝑀 (𝑇) − 𝐹 (𝑇)𝑆 1− ≤ 𝑀 (𝑇)
𝐿 (𝑇)
521 (A-4-13)
522 (2) When Lb > Lr (T)
523 Mn (T ) = Fcr (T )Sx ≤ M p (T ) (A-4-14)
524 where

APP4-13
2
Cb π2 E (T ) Jc  Lb 
525 Fcr (T ) = 1 + 0.078 (A-4-15)
 Lb 
2
S x ho  rts 
r 
 ts 
2 2
E (T ) Jc  Jc   FL (T ) 
526 Lr (T ) = 1.95rts +   + 6.76  E (T ) 
FL (T ) S x ho  x o
S h  
527
528 (A-4-16)
529 FL (T ) = Fy ( k p − 0.3k y ) (A-4-17)
530 M p (T ) = Fy (T )Zx (A-4-18)
T
531 c x = 0.53 + ≤ 3.0 where T is in °F (A-4-19)
450
20 NE
T
532 c x = 0.6 + ≤ 3.0 where T is in °C (A-4-19M)
250
20 O
533 and
534 T = elevated temperature of steel due to unintended fire, °F (°C)
3, W
535
536 The material properties at elevated temperatures, E(T) and Fy(T), and
E
537 the kp and ky coefficients are calculated in accordance with Table A-

ST I
U EV
538 4.2.1, and other terms are as defined in Chapter F.

539
540 User Note: FL(T) represents the initial yield stress, which assumes a
G R
541 residual stress of 0.3Fy. Alternatively, 10 ksi (69 MPa) may be used in
542 place of 0.3Fy for calculation of FL(T).
AU IC
543
544 User Note: The equations for lateral-torsional buckling do not consid-
BL
545 er local buckling. If applicable, the effects of local buckling must be

546 considered with an alternative method.
547
PU
548 (f) Design for Flexure in Composite Beams

549
550 For composite beams, the calculated bottom flange temperature shall
551 be taken as constant between the bottom flange and mid-depth of the
552 web and shall decrease linearly by no more than 25% from the mid-
553 depth of the web to the top flange of the beam.
554
555 The nominal strength of a composite flexural member shall be deter-
556 mined using the provisions of Chapter I, with reduced yield stresses in
557 the steel as determined from Table A-4.2.1. Steel properties will vary
558 as the temperature along the depth of section changes.
559
560 Alternatively, the nominal flexural strength of a composite beam,
561 Mn ( T ) , is permitted to be calculated using the bottom flange temper-
562 ature, T, as follows:
563 Mn (T ) = r ( T ) Mn (A-4-20)
564 where,

APP4-14
565 M n = nominal flexural strength at ambient temperature calculat-

566 ed in accordance with provisions of Chapter I, kip-in. (N-
567 mm)
568 r(T) = retention factor depending on bottom flange temperature, T,
569 as given in Table A-4.2.4
570
TABLE A-4.2.4
Retention Factor for Composite
Flexural Members
Bottom Flange Temperature,
°F (°C) r(T)
68 (20) 1.00
300 (150) 0.98
600 (320) 0.95
800 (430) 0.89
1000 (540) 0.71
20 NE
1200 (650) 0.49
1400 (760) 0.26
1600 (870) 0.12
20 O
1800 (980) 0.05
2000 (1100) 0.00
571
3, W
572 (g) Design for Shear
573
E
574 The nominal strength for shear yielding shall be determined in

ST I
575 accordance with the provisions of Chapter G, with steel properties as

U EV
576 stipulated in Section 4.2.3b(a) and assuming a uniform temperature

577 over the cross section.
G R
578
579 User Note: Shear yielding equations do not consider shear buckling
580 or tension field action. If applicable, these limit states must be consid-
AU IC
581 ered with an alternative method.

582
BL
583 (h) Design for Combined Forces and Torsion

PU
584 The nominal strength for combinations of axial force and flexure about
585 one or both axes, with or without torsion, shall be in accordance with
586 the provisions of Chapter H with the design axial and flexural
587 strengths as stipulated in Sections 4.2.4d(a) to (d). Nominal strength
588 for torsion shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of
589 Chapter H, with the steel properties as stipulated in Section 4.2.3b(a),
590 assuming uniform temperature over the cross section.
591
592 4e. Design by Critical Temperature Method
593
594 The critical temperature of a structural member is the temperature at which
595 the demand on the member exceeds its capacity under fire conditions. The
596 evaluation methods in this section are permitted to be used in lieu of
597 Section 4.2.4d for tension members, continuously braced beams not
598 supporting concrete slabs, or compression members that are assumed to be
599 simply supported and develop a uniform temperature over the cross section
600 throughout the fire exposure.
601

APP4-15
602 The use of the critical temperature methods shall be limited to steel
603 members with wide-flange rolled shapes which have nonslender elements
604 per Section B4.
605
606 (a) Design for Tensile Yielding
607
608 The critical temperature of a tension member is permitted to be calcu-
609 lated as follows:
610
611 𝑇 = 816 − 306 ln in °F (A-4-21)
612
613 𝑇 = 435 − 170 ln in °C (A-4-21M)
614 where
615
616 Tcr = critical temperature in °F (°C)
20 NE
617 Rn = nominal yielding strength at ambient temperature determined
618 in accordance with the provisions in Section D2, kips (N)
619 Ru = required tensile strength at elevated temperature, determined
20 O
620 using the load combination in Equation A-4-1 and greater than
621 0.01Rn, kips (N)
3, W
622
623 User Note: Tensile rupture in the net section is not considered in this
E
624 critical temperature calculation and ought to be considered using alter-
ST I
625 native methods.

U EV
626
627 (b) Design for Compression
628
G R
629 The critical temperature of a compression member is permitted to be

630 calculated as follows:
AU IC
631
632 𝑇 = 1580 − 0.814 − 1300 in °F (A-4-22)
BL
633
634 𝑇 = 858 − 0.455 − 722 in °C (A-4-22M)
PU
635
636 where
637
638 Lc = effective length of member, in. (mm)
640 Pn = nominal compressive strength at ambient temperature determined
641 in accordance with the provisions in Section E3, kips (N)
642 Pu = required compressive strength at elevated temperature, deter-
643 mined using the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kips (N)
644
645 (c) Design for Flexural Yielding
646
647 The critical temperature of a continuously braced beam not supporting a
648 concrete slab is permitted to be calculated as follows:
649
650 𝑇 = 816 − 306 ln in °F (A-4-23)
651
652 𝑇 = 435 − 170 ln in °C (A-4-23M)

APP4-16
653 where
654 Tcr = critical temperature in °F (°C)
655 Mn = nominal flexural strength due to yielding at ambient temperature
656 determined in accordance with the provisions in Section F2.1, kip-
657 in. (N-mm)
658 Mu = required flexural strength at elevated temperature, determined
659 using the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kip-in. and greater
660 than 0.01Mn (N-mm)
661
662 User Note: Lateral-torsional buckling of beams is not considered in this
663 critical temperature calculation and ought to be considered using alterna-
664 tive methods.
665 4.3. DESIGN BY QUALIFICATION TESTING

666
667 1. Qualification Standards
668
20 NE
669 Structural members and components in steel buildings shall be qualified
670 for the rating period in conformance with ASTM E119. Demonstration of
671 compliance with these requirements using the procedures specified for
20 O
672 steel construction in Section 5 of Standard Calculation Methods for
673 Structural Fire Protection (ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29) is permitted. It is also
3, W
674 permitted to demonstrate equivalency to such standard fire resistance
675 ratings using the advanced analysis methods in Section 4.2 in combination
E
676 with the fire exposure specified in ASTM E119 as the design-basis fire.
ST I
677
U EV
678 User Note: There are other standard fire exposures which are more severe
679 than that prescribed in ASTM E119, for example the hydrocarbon pool fire
680 scenario defined in ASTM E1529 (UL 1709). Fire resistance ratings
G R
681 developed on the basis of ASTM E119 are not directly substitutable for
682 such more demanding conditions.
AU IC
683
684 The generic steel assemblies described in Table A-4.3.1 shall be deemed to
BL
685 have the fire resistance ratings prescribed therein.

686
687
PU
688

APP4-17
689
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance
Ratings of Steel Assembliese
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel Carbonate, lightweight
columns and sand-lightweight
and all of aggregate concrete,
primary 1-1.1 members 6 in. × 6 in. or 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
trusses greater (not including
sandstone, granite and
a
siliceous gravel).
Carbonate, lightweight
and sand-lightweight
20 NE
aggregate concrete,
1-1.2 members 8 in. × 8 in. or 2 1-1/2 1 1
greater (not including
20 O
a
siliceous gravel).
Carbonate, lightweight
3, W
and sand-lightweight
aggregate concrete,
E
1-1.3 members 12 in. × 12 in. 1-1/2 1 1 1
or greater (not including
ST I
U EV

siliceous gravel).a
Siliceous aggregate
concrete and concrete
G R
1-1.4 excluded in Item 1-1.1, 3 2 1-1/2 1

members 6 in. × 6 in. or
AU IC
greater.a
Siliceous aggregate
BL

1-1.5 excluded in Item 1-1.1, 2-1/2 2 1 1
members 8 in.× 8 in.or
PU
greater.a
Siliceous aggregate
1-1.6 excluded in Item 1-1.1, 2 1 1 1
members 12 in.× 12 in or
greater.a
Clay or shale brick with
1-2.1 a 3-3/4 – – 2-1/4
brick and mortar fill.
690
691
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.

APP4-18
692
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Assembly
1. Steel
columns
and all of
primary
trusses Cement plaster over
metal lath wire tied to 3/4
in. cold-rolled vertical
channels with 0.049 in.
1-4.1 (No. 18 B.W. gage) wire – – 2-1/2b 7/8
20 NE
ties spaced 3 to 6 in. on
center. Plaster mixed
1:2.5 by volume, cement
20 O
to sand.
693
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
a

APP4-19
694
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel Vermiculite concrete, 1:4
columns mix by volume over
and all of paperbacked wire fabric
primary lath wrapped directly
trusses around column with
additional 2 × 2 in. 0.065
/ 0.065 in. (No. 16/16
1-5.1 B.W. gage) wire fabric 2 – – –
placed 3/4 in. from outer
20 NE
concrete surface. Wire
fabric tied with 0.049 in.
(No. 18 B.W. gage) wire
spaced 6 in. on center for
20 O
inner layer and 2 in. on
center for outer layer.
3, W
Perlite or vermiculite
gypsum plaster over
E
metal lath wrapped
around column and
ST I
U EV
furred 1-1/4 in. from

column flanges. Sheets
1-6.1 1-1/2 1 – –
lapped at ends and tied
at 6 in. intervals with
G R
0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.

gage) tie wire. Plaster
AU IC
pushed through to
flanges.
BL
Perlite or vermiculite 1-3/4 1-3/8 1 –

gypsum plaster over self-
furring metal lath
PU
wrapped directly around

1-6.2
column, lapped 1 in. and
tied at 6 in. intervals with
0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
gage) wire.
Perlite or vermiculite 1-1/2 – – –
gypsum plaster on metal
lath applied to 3/4 in.
1-6.3 cold-rolled channels
spaced 24 in. apart
vertically and wrapped
flatwise around column.
695
696
a

APP4-20
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel 1-6.4 Perlite or vermiculite 2-1/2 2 – –
columns gypsum plaster over two
and all of layers of 1/2 in. plain full-
primary length gypsum lath
trusses applied tight to column
flanges. Lath wrapped
with 1 in. hexagonal
mesh of No. 20 gage wire
and tied with doubled
0.035 in. diameter (No.
20 NE
18 B.W. gage) wire ties
spaced 23 in. on center.
For three-coat work, the
plaster mix for the
20 O
second coat shall not
exceed 100 pounds of
3, W
gypsum to 2.5 cubic feet
of aggregate for the 3-
E
hour system.
1-6.5 Perlite or vermiculite – 2 – –
ST I
gypsum plaster over one

U EV
layer of 1/2 in. plain full-

length gypsum lath
applied tight to column
G R
flanges. Lath tied with

doubled 0.049 in. (No. 18
AU IC
B.W. gage) wire ties

spaced 23 in. on center
BL
and scratch coat

wrapped with 1 in.
hexagonal mesh 0.035
PU
in. (No. 20 B.W. gage)

wire fabric. For three-coat
work, the plaster mix for
the second coat shall not
exceed 100 pounds of
gypsum to 2.5 cubic feet
of aggregate.
697
698
a

APP4-21
699
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel 1-7.1 Multiple layers of 1/2 in. – – 2 1
c
columns gypsum wallboard
d
and all of adhesively secured to
primary column flanges and
trusses successive layers.
Wallboard applied
without horizontal joints.
Corner edges of each
layer staggered.
20 NE
Wallboard layer below
outer layer secured to
column with doubled
0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
20 O
gage) steel wire ties
spaced 15 in. on center.
3, W
Exposed corners taped
and treated.
E
1-7.2 Three layers of 5/8 in. – – 1-7/8 –
Type X gypsum
ST I
wallboard.c First and

U EV
second layer held in

place by 1/8 in. dia. by 1-
3/8 in. long ring shank
G R
nails with 5/16 in. dia.

heads spaced 24 in. on
AU IC
center at corners. Middle

layer also secured with
BL
metal straps at mid-

height and 18 in. from
each end, and by metal
PU
corner bead at each

corner held by the metal
straps. Third layer
attached to corner bead
with 1 in. long gypsum
wallboard screws spaced
12 in. on center.
700
701
a

APP4-22
702
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel 1-7.3 Three layers of 5/8 in. – 1-7/8 – –
columns Type X gypsum
c
and all of wallboard, each layer
primary screw attached to 1-5/8
trusses in. steel studs, 0.018 in.
thick (No. 25 carbon
sheet steel gage) at each
corner of column. Middle
layer also secured with
20 NE
0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
gage) double-strand steel
wire ties, 24 in. on center.
Screws are No. 6 by 1 in.
20 O
for inner layer, No. 6 by
3, W
1-5/8 in. spaced 12 in. on
center for middle layer
E
and No. 8 by 2-1/4 in.
ST I
U EV
for outer layer.
703
G R
704
AU IC
BL
PU
a

APP4-23
705
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel 1-9.1 Minimum W8×35 wide – – – See
columns flange steel column (w/d Note f
and all of ≥ 0.75) with each web
primary cavity filled even with the
trusses flange tip with normal
weight carbonate or
siliceous aggregate
concrete (3,000 psi
minimum compressive
20 NE
strength with 145 pcf ± 3
pcf unit weight).
Reinforce the concrete in
20 O
each web cavity with
minimum No. 4 deformed
reinforcing bar installed
3, W
vertically and centered in
the cavity, and secured to
E
the column web with
minimum No. 2 horizontal
ST I
U EV
deformed reinforcing bar

welded to the web every
18 in. on center vertically.
G R
As an alternative to the
No. 4 rebar, 3/4 in.
diameter by 3 in. long
AU IC
headed studs, spaced at

12 in. on center vertically,
BL
shall be welded on each

side of the web midway
between the column
PU
flanges.
2. Webs or 2.1-1 Carbonate, lightweight 2 1-1/2 1 1
flanges of and sand-lightweight
steel beams aggregate concrete (not
and girders including sandstone,
granite and siliceous
gravel) with 3 in. or finer
metal mesh placed 1 in.
from the finished surface
anchored to the top
flange and providing not
less than 0.025 in.2 of
steel area per foot in
each direction.
706
707
a

APP4-24
708
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
2. Webs or 2-1.2 Siliceous aggregate 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
flanges of concrete and concrete
steel beams excluded in Item 2-1.1
and girders with 3 in. or finer metal
mesh placed 1 in. from
the finished surface
anchored to the top
flange and providing not
2
less than 0.025 in. of
20 NE
steel area per foot in
each direction.
2-2.1 Cement plaster on metal – – 2-1/2b 7/8
lath attached to 3/4 in.
20 O
cold-rolled channels with
0.04 in. (No. 18 B.W.
3, W
gage) wire ties spaced 3
in. to 6 in. on center.
E
Plaster mixed 1:2.5 by
volume, cement to sand.
ST I
U EV
2-3.1 Vermiculite gypsum – 7/8 – –

plaster on a metal lath
cage, wire tied to 0.165
G R
in. diameter (No. 8 B.W.

gage) steel wire hangers
wrapped around beam
AU IC
and spaced 16 in. on

center. Metal lath ties
BL
spaced approximately 5
in. on center at cage
sides and bottom.
PU
709
710
a

APP4-25
711
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings of Steel
Assembliese (continued)
Item Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly Fire Protection Material Used
Number Resistance Times (hr.)
2. Webs or 2-4.1 Two layers of 5/8 in. Type X gypsum – – 1-1/4 –
flanges of wallboardc are attached to U-shaped
steel beams brackets spaced 24 in. on center.
and girders 0.018 in. thick (No. 25 carbon sheet
steel gage) 1-5/8 in. deep by 1 in.
galvanized steel runner channels
are first installed parallel to and on
each side of the top beam flange to
provide a 1/2 in. clearance to the
flange. The channel runners are
20 NE
attached to steel deck or concrete
floor construction with approved
fasteners spaced 12 in. on center.
20 O
U-shaped brackets are formed from
members identical to the channel
3, W
runners. At the bent portion of the U-
shaped bracket, the flanges of the
E
channel are cut out so that 1-5/8 in.
deep corner channels can be
ST I
inserted without attachment parallel

U EV
to each side of the lower flange.
As an alternative, 0.021 in. thick

G R
(No. 24 carbon sheet steel gage) 1

in. × 2 in. runner and corner angles
AU IC
shall be used in lieu of channels,

and the web cutouts in the U-shaped
BL
brackets shall not be required. Each

angle is attached to the bracket with
1/2-in.-long No. 8 self-drilling
PU
screws. The vertical legs of the U-

shaped bracket are attached to the
runners with one 1/2 in. long No. 8
self-drilling screw. The completed
steel framing provides a 2-1/8 in.
and 1-1/2 in. space between the
inner layer of wallboard and the
sides and bottom of the steel beam,
respectively. The inner layer of
wallboard is attached to the top
runners and bottom corner channels
or corner angles with 1-1/4 in.-long
No. 6 self-drilling screws spaced 16
in. on center. The outer layer of
wallboard is applied with 1-3/4 in.-
long No. 6 self-drilling screws
spaced 8 in. on center. The bottom
corners are reinforced with metal
corner beads.
a

APP4-26
712
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Item Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly Fire Protection Material Used
Number Resistance Times (hr.)
2. Webs or 2-4.2 Three layers of 5/8 in. Type X – 1-7/8 – –
flanges of gypsum wallboardc attached
steel beams to a steel suspension system
and girders as described immediately
above utilizing the 0.018 in.
thick (No. 25 carbon sheet
steel gage) 1 in. × 2 in. lower
corner angles. The framing is
located so that a 2-1/8 in. and
2 in. space is provided
20 NE
between the inner layer of
wallboard and the sides and
bottom of the beam,
20 O
respectively. The first two
layers of wallboard are
3, W
attached as described
immediately above. A layer of
E
0.035 in. thick (No. 20 B.W.
gage) 1 in. hexagonal
ST I
galvanized wire mesh is

U EV
applied under the soffit of the

middle layer and up the sides
approximately 2 in. The mesh
G R
is held in position with the

No. 6 1-5/8-in.-long screws
AU IC
installed in the vertical leg of

the bottom corner angles.
BL
The outer layer of wallboard

is attached with No. 6 2-1/4
in.-long screws spaced 8 in.
PU
on center. One screw is also

installed at the mid-depth of
the bracket in each layer.
Bottom corners are finished
as described above.
a
Reentrant parts of protected members to be filled solidly.
b
Two layers of equal thickness with a 3/4-in. airspace between.
c
For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard, gypsum base for veneer plaster of
the same size, thickness and core type is permitted to be substituted for gypsum
wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard, the joints
on the face layer are reinforced, and the entire surface is covered with not less than
1/16-inch gypsum veneer plaster.
d
An approved adhesive qualified under ASTM E119.
e
Generic fire-resistance ratings (those not designated as PROPRIETARY* in the listing)
in GA 600 shall be accepted as if herein listed.
a

APP4-27
713 2. Structural Steel Assemblies

714
715 The provisions of this section contain procedures by which the standard
716 fire-resistance ratings of structural steel assemblies are established by
717 calculations. Use of these provisions is permitted in place of and/or as a
718 supplement to published fire resistive assemblies based on ASTM E119.
719 The installation of the fire protection material shall comply with the
720 applicable requirements of the building code, the referenced approved
721 assemblies, and manufacturer instructions.
722
723 The weight-to-heated-perimeter ratios (W/D) and area-to-heated-perimeter
724 ratios (A/P) shall be determined in accordance with the definitions given in
725 this section. As used in these sections, W is the average weight of a shape
726 in pounds per linear foot and A is the area in square inches. The heated
727 perimeter, D or P, is the inside perimeter of the fire-resistant material or
728 exterior contour of the steel shape in inches, as defined for each type of
729 member.
20 NE
730
731 User Note: These procedures establish a basis for determining the fire
732 resistance rating of steel construction assemblies as a function of the
20 O
733 thickness of fire-resistant material, the weight, W, or area, A, and the
734 applicable heated perimeter, D or P, of the fire protection material or
735 structural steel member. The W/D and A/P ratios are equivalent and
3, W
736 mutually convertible section properties that represent their thermal inertia.
737 W/D has conventionally been used for open wide-flange shapes, while A/P
E
738 has been used for closed hollow structural sections.

ST I
739
U EV
740 The heated perimeter, D or P, is a function of the configuration of the steel

741 fire protection material installation, which can be in either a contour or box
G R
742 profile, together with the nature of the heat exposure on the steel member.
743 The latter is typically characterized as either an all-around exposure of the
AU IC
744 steel shape, as for an interior column, or as a 3-sided exposure of a floor

745 beam supporting a concrete floor. Tabulations of W/D and A/P values for
746 these cases and for the standard rolled steel shapes are available from
BL
747 multiple sources, including AISC Design Guide 19 (a free download for
748 members from www.aisc/org/dg) and other publications.
PU
749
750 2.1 Steel Columns
751
752 The fire-resistance ratings of columns shall be based on the size of the
753 member and the type of protection provided in accordance with this
754 section.
755
756 The application of these procedures for noncomposite steel column
757 assemblies shall be limited to designs in which the fire-resistant material is
758 not designed to carry any of the load acting on the column.
759
760 Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing elements shall not be embedded in
761 required fire-resistant materials, unless fire-endurance test results are
762 available to establish the adequacy of the resulting condition.
763
764 User Note: The International Building Code requires fire resistance rated
765 columns to be protected on all sides for the full column height, including
766 connections with other structural members and protection continuity
767 through any ceilings to the top of the column.
768

APP4-28
769
770 2.1.1 Gypsum Wallboard Protection
771
772 The fire resistance of columns with weight-to-heated perimeter ratios
773 (W/D) less than or equal to 3.65 lb/ft/in. and protected with Type X
774 gypsum wallboard is permitted to be determined from the following
775 expression for a maximum column rating of 4-hours:
776
0.75
  W′  
R = 130   D  
777 h (A-4-24)[a],[b]
 
 2 
778
.
779 𝑅 = 96 (A-4-24M)[a]
780
20 NE
781 where
782 D = inside heated perimeter of the gypsum board, in. (mm)
783 R = fire resistance, minutes
20 O
784 W = nominal weight of steel shape, lb/ft (kg/m)
785 h = total nominal thickness of Type X gypsum wallboard, in. (mm)
3, W
786
787 and
E
W ′ W 50 h
788 = + (A-4-25)[a],[b]
D 144
ST I
D
U EV
789
790 = + 0.0008ℎ (A-4-25M)[a]
791
G R
792 For columns with weight-to-heated-perimeter ratios (W/D) greater than

793 3.65 lb/ft/in., the thickness of Type X gypsum wallboard required for
AU IC
794 specified fire-resistance ratings shall be the same as the thickness deter-
795 mined for W/D = 3.65 lb/ft/in.
BL
796
797 User Note: This equation has been developed and long used for steel
PU
798 column fire protection with any Type X gypsum board. Since Type C
799 gypsum board has demonstrated improved fire performance relative to
800 Type X board, these provisions may also be conservatively applied to
801 column protection with any Type C gypsum board. The supporting test
802 data and accompanying gypsum board installation methods limit the
803 computed fire resistance rating of the steel column to a maximum of 3-
804 hours or 4-hours, as specified in the next section.
805
806 The gypsum board or gypsum panel products shall be installed and
807 supported as required either in UL X526 for fire-resistance ratings of four
808 hours or less, or in UL X528 for fire-resistance ratings of three hours or
809 less.
810
811 User Note: The attachment of the Type X gypsum board protection for the
812 steel columns must be done in accordance with the referenced UL assem-
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection
b

APP4-29
813 blies. UL X526 is applicable only when exterior steel covers are installed
814 over the gypsum board. Otherwise, UL X528 describes the more general
815 gypsum board installation.
816
817 2.1.2 Sprayed and Intumescent/Mastic Fire-Resistant Materials
818
819 The fire resistance of columns protected with sprayed or intumes-
820 cent/mastic fire-resistant coatings shall be determined on the basis of
821 standard fire-resistance rated assemblies, any associated computations and
822 limits as provided in the applicable rated assemblies.
823
824 The fire resistance of wide-flange columns protected with sprayed fire-
825 resistant materials is permitted to be determined as:
826
 W  
827 R = C1   + C2  h (A-4-26)[a],[b]
  D  
828
20 NE
829 𝑅= 𝐶 +𝐶 ℎ (A-4-26M)[a]
830
20 O
831 where
832 R = fire resistance, minutes
3, W
833 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in.
834 D = heated perimeter of the column, in.
E
835 C1,C2 , C3, and C4= material-dependent constants prescribed in speci-
836 fied rated assembly.
ST I
U EV
837 W = weight of columns, pounds per linear foot

838
839 The material dependent constants, C1, C2, C3, and C4 shall be determined
G R
840 for specific fire-resistant materials on the basis of standard fire endurance
841 tests. The computational usage for each correlation, protection product and
AU IC
842 its material-dependent constants shall be limited to the range of their

843 underlying fire test basis reflected in the selected rated assembly.
BL
844
845 User Note: The fire resistance rated steel column assemblies, published
846 by UL and by other test laboratories, will often include such interpolation
PU
847 equations and specific constants that depend on the particular fire protec-
848 tion product. The applicability limits of each given design correlation
849 relative to the column assembly, sprayed fire-resistant protection product,
850 W/D, rating duration, minimum required thickness, and the like must be
851 followed to remain within the range of the existing fire test data range.
852
853 The fire resistance of HSS columns protected with sprayed fire-resistant
854 materials is permitted to be determined from empirical correlations similar
855 to Equation A-4-25 expressed in terms of A/P values, wherein A is the area
856 in in.2 (mm2) and P is the heated perimeter. The applicability limits
857 specified in the rated column assembly for each correlation and its
858 material-dependent constants shall be followed.
859
860 User Note: A/P is a directly convertible and equivalent steel section
861 property to W/D which has traditionally been used in fire resistive compu-
a
tection
b

APP4-30
862 tations for HSS sections. Similar to W/D for open wide flange shapes,
863 tabulation of A/P values for standard closed shapes with contour and box
864 protection applications are available from multiple sources, including
865 AISC and the published literature. The applicability limits of each given
866 design correlation relative to the column assembly, sprayed fire-resistant
867 protection product, A/P, rating duration, minimum required thickness, and
868 the like must be followed to remain within the range of the existing fire test
869 result range .
870
871 2.1.3 Noncomposite Columns Encased in Concrete
872
873 The fire resistance of noncomposite columns fully encased within concrete
874 protection is permitted to be determined from the following expression:
875
876 R = Ro (1 + 0.03m) (A-4-27)[a],[b]
877
878
20 NE
879 where
 h1.6    
0.7 0.8
W   H [a],[b]
880 Ro = 10   + 17  0.2  × 1 + 26    (A-4-28)
20 O
D 3, W  kc    pc cc h ( L + h )  
881
. . .
882 𝑅 = 73 + 0.162 1 + 31,000 (A-4-28M)[a]
E
. ( )
883
ST I
U EV
884
885 R = fire endurance at equilibrium moisture conditions, minutes
886 Ro = fire endurance at zero moisture content, minutes
G R
887 m = equilibrium moisture content of the concrete by volume, percent

888 W = average weight of the column, lb/ft (kg/m)
AU IC
889 D = heated perimeter of the column, in. (mm)

890 h = thickness of the concrete cover, measured between the exposed
BL
891 concrete and nearest outer surface of the encased steel column sec-
892 tion, in. (mm)
893 kc = ambient temperature thermal conductivity of the concrete, Btu/hr ft
PU
894 °F. (W/m K)

895 H = ambient temperature thermal capacity of the steel column, Btu/ ft °F
896 (W/kJ m K)
897 = 0.11W (0.46 W)
898 pc = concrete density, lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
899 cc = ambient temperature specific heat of concrete, Btu/lb °F (kJ/kg K)
900 L = interior dimension of one side of a square concrete box protection,
901 in. (mm)
902
903 When the inside perimeter of the concrete protection is not square, L shall
904 be taken as the average of its two rectangular side lengths (L1 and L2). If
905 the thickness of the concrete cover is not constant, h shall be taken as the
906 average of h1 and h2.
907
908 User Note: The variables in these equations are illustrated in the figure
a
tection
b

APP4-31
909
910
911
912 For wide-flange columns completely encased in concrete with all reentrant
913 spaces filled, the thermal capacity of the concrete within the reentrant
20 NE
914 spaces is permitted to be added to the ambient thermal capacity of the steel
915 column, as follows:
pc 
20 O
916 H = 0.11W +  c c  ( b f d − As ) (A-4-29)[a],[b]
 144 
3, W
917 𝐻 = 0.46𝑊 + (𝑏 𝑑 − 𝐴 ) (A-4-29M) [a]
, ,
918
E
919 where:
ST I
920 bf = flange width of the column, in. (mm)

U EV
921 d =depth of the column, in. (mm)

922 As = area of the steel column, in.2 (mm2)
923
G R
924 User Note: It is conservative to neglect this additional concrete term in the
925 column fire resistance calculation.
AU IC
926
927 In the absence of more specific data for the ambient properties of the
BL
928 concrete encasement, it is permitted to use the values provided in Table A-

929 4.3.2.
PU
930
931
Table A-4.3.2[c]
Ambient Properties of Concrete Encasement
for Steel Column Fire Resistance
Normal Weight Light Weight
Property
Concrete Concrete
0.95 Btu/hr ·ft ·°F 0.35 Btu/hr · ft ·°F
Thermal conductivity, kc
(1.64 W/m K) (0.61 W/m K)
Specific heat, cc 0.20 Btu/lb °F 0.20 Btu/lb °F
(840 J/kg K) (840 J/kg K)
a
tection
b
c

APP4-32
3 3
Density, pc 145 lb/ft 110 lb/ft
3 3
(2300 kg/m ) (1800 kg/m )
Equilibrium (free) moisture
4% 5%
content (m) by volume
932
933
934 User Note: The estimated free moisture content of concrete given in Table
935 A-4.3.2 may not be appropriate for all conditions, particularly for older
936 concrete that has already been in service for a longer time. For these and
937 similar situations of uncertainty, it is conservative to not rely on this
938 beneficial effect of the free moisture and to assume the concrete is
939 completely dry with m=0 for fire resistance of Ro.
940
941 2.1.4 Noncomposite Columns Encased in Masonry Units of Concrete
942 or Clay
943
944 The fire resistance of noncomposite columns protected by encasement with
20 NE
945 concrete masonry units or with clay masonry units is permitted to be
946 determined from the following expression:
947
20 O  Te1.6     ( As d mTe )  
0.7 0.8
W  
948 R = 0.17   + 0.285  0.2   1.0 + 42.7   
3, W
D   K     ( 0.25 p + Te )  
E
949 (A-4-30) [a]
950
ST I
U EV
.
. .
951 𝑅 = 1.22 + 0.0027 . 1.0 + 1249 ( . )
G R
952 (A-4-30M)
953
AU IC
954 where
955 R = fire-resistance rating of column assembly, hours
BL
956 W = average weight of column, lb/ft (kg/m)

957 D = heated perimeter of column, in. (mm)
958 Te = equivalent thickness of concrete or clay masonry unit,
PU
959 in accordance with ACI 216.1, in. (mm)

960 K = thermal conductivity of concrete or clay masonry unit, Btu/hr · ft ·
961 °F (see Table A-4.3.3).
962 As = cross-sectional area of column, in.2 (mm2)
963 dm = density of the concrete or clay masonry unit, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) p =
964 inner perimeter of concrete or clay masonry protection, in. (mm)
965
966 The thermal conductivity values given in Table A-4.3.3 as a function of the
967 concrete or clay masonry unit density is permitted for use with this
968 encasement protection formulation.
969
970 User Note: Equation A-4-30 is derived from Equation A-4-27 assuming m
971 = 0, cc = 0.2 Btu/lb °F, h = Te, and L = p/4. The following cross-sections
972 illustrate three different configurations for concrete masonry units or clay
973 masonry unit encasement of steel columns, along with the applicable fire
974 protection design variables.

APP4-33
975
976
977 d = depth of a wide flange column, outside diameter of pipe column,
978 or outside dimension of hollow structural section column, in. (mm)
979 tw = thickness of web of wide flange column, in. (mm)
980 w = width of flange of wide flange or hollow structural section, in. (mm)
981
20 NE
Table A-4.3.3[a]
Thermal Conductivity of Masonry Units for
20 O
Steel Column Encasement
Unit Density, Unit Thermal Conductivity
3 3
3, W
dm, lb/ft (kg/m ) K, Btu/hr ft °F (W/m K)
Concrete Masonry Units
80 (1280) 0.207 (0.358)
E
85 (1360) 0.228 (0.395)
ST I
90 (1440) 0.252 (0.436)

U EV
95 (1520) 0.278 (0.481)

100 (1600) 0.308 (0.533)
105 (1680) 0.340 (0.589)
G R
110 (1760) 0.376 (0.651)

115 (1840) 0.416 (0.720)
120 (1920) 0.459 (0.795)
AU IC
125 (2000) 0.508 (0.879)

130 (2080) 0.561 (0.971)
BL
135 (2160) 0.620 (1.07)

140 (2240) 0.685 (1.19)
145 (2320) 0.758 (1.31)
PU
150 (2400) 0.837 (1.45)

Clay Masonry Units
120 (1920) 1.25 (2.16)
130 (2080) 2.25 (3.89)
982
983
984
985
986 2.2 Composite Steel-Concrete Columns
987
988 The fire resistance rating of columns acting compositely with concrete
989 (concrete-filled or encased) is permitted to be based on the size of the
990 composite member and concrete protection in accordance with this section.
991
992 2.2.1 Concrete-Filled Columns
993
994 The fire resistance rating of hollow structural section (HSS) columns filled
995 with unreinforced normal weight concrete, steel-fiber-reinforced normal
a

APP4-34
996 weight concrete or bar-reinforced normal weight concrete is permitted to

997 be determined in accordance with the following expressions:
998
999 (A-4-31)[a]
.
𝐷
0.58𝑎(𝑓 + 2.9)𝐷
𝑅= 𝐶
𝐿 − 3.28
1000 (A-4-31M)[a]
.
𝐷
𝑎(𝑓 + 20)𝐷
𝑅= 𝐶
60(𝐿 − 1000)
1001
1002 R = fire resistance rating in hours
1003 a = constant determined from Table A-4.3.4
1004 f’c = 28-day compressive strength of concrete, ksi(MPa)
1005 Lc = column effective length, ft (mm)
1006 D = outside diameter for circular columns, in. (mm)
20 NE
1007 = outside dimension for square columns, in. (mm)
1008 = least outside dimension for rectangular columns, in. (mm)
1009 C = compressive force due to unfactored dead load and live load, kips
20 O
1010 (kN)
1011
3, W
1012 The application of these equations shall be limited by all of the following
1013 conditions:
E
1014 1. The required fire resistance rating R shall be less than or equal to the
1015 limits specified in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.
ST I
U EV
1016 2. The specified compressive strength of concrete, f′c , the column

1017 effective length, Lc, the dimension D, the concrete reinforcement ratio,
1018 and the thickness of the concrete cover shall be within the limits speci-
G R
1019 fied in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.

1020 3. C shall not exceed the design strength of the concrete or the reinforced
AU IC
1021 concrete core determined in accordance with this Specification.

1022 4. Two minimum 1/2 in.(12.7 mm) diameter holes shall be placed
BL
1023 opposite each other at the top and bottom of the column and at maxi-
1024 mum 12-ft on center spacing along the column height. Each set of vent
1025 holes should be rotated 90° relative to the adjacent set of holes to re-
PU
1026 lieve steam pressure.

1027
1028 User Note: Concrete-filled hollow structural sections (HSS) can effective-
1029 ly sustain load during a fire exposure without benefit of any external
1030 protection for the steel HSS. The concrete infill mass provides both an
1031 increased capacity for absorbing the heat caused by the fire and loadbear-
1032 ing strength to thereby extend the column fire resistance duration. Research
1033 conducted at the National Research Council of Canada has provided a
1034 basis for establishing an empirical equation to predict the standard fire
1035 resistance of concrete-filled round and square HSS section for commonly
1036 used story heights and steel sections. This empirical equation was derived
1037 from and can only be used within the allowable range of design variables,
1038 as given, and is not applicable to lightweight concrete infill.
1039
a
tection

APP4-35
1040 The fire performance of a concrete-filled HSS column is improved when

1041 heat absorption occurs as the moisture in the concrete is converted to
1042 steam. The heat absorbed during this phase change is significant, however
1043 the resulting steam must be released to prevent the adverse effects of an
1044 internal pressure build-up within the HSS column. Thus, vent holes must
1045 be provided in the steel section, as indicated in the given limitation #4.
1046
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

APP4-36
1047
Table A-4.3.4 Values of Constant a for Normal
Weight Concrete
Reinf. a
Aggregate Concrete Fill
Ratio
Type Type Circular Sq. or Rect.
(%)
Columns Columns
siliceous unreinforced NA 0.070 0.060
steel-fiber-
siliceous 2% 0.075 0.065
reinforced
steel-bar- 1.5 – 3 0.080 0.070
siliceous
reinforced 3–5 0.085 0.070
carbonate unreinforced NA 0.080 0.070
steel-fiber-
carbonate 2 0.085 0.075
reinforced
steel-bar- 1.5 - 3 0.090 0.080
carbonate
reinforced 3–5 0.095 0.085
1048
Table A-4.3.5 Limits for the use of Equation A-4.25
20 NE
Parameters
Parameter Concrete Fill Type
20 O
Unreinforced steel-fiber- steel-bar
reinforced reinforced
R (hours) ≤2 ≤3 ≤3
3, W
fc’ (ksi) 2.9 – 5.8 2.9 – 8.0 2.9 – 8.0
Lc (ft) 6.5 – 13.0 6.5 – 15.0 6.5 – 15.0
E
D (round) (in) 5.5 – 16.0 5.5 – 16.0 6.5 – 16.0
D (sq. or rect.) (in) 5.5 – 12.0 4.0 – 12.0 7.0 – 12.0
ST I
2% of concrete 1.5 – 5%
U EV
Reinf. (%) NA
mix by mass of section area
Concrete cover (in) NA NA ≥ 1.0
1049
G R
Table A-4.3.5M. Limits for the use of Equation A-

4.25MParameters
AU IC
Parameter Concrete Fill Type

unreinforced steel-fiber- steel-bar-
BL
reinforced reinforced
R (hours) ≤2 ≤3 ≤3
fc’ (MPa) 20 – 40 20-55 20-55
PU
Lc (mm) 2000 – 4000 2000 - 4500 2000 - 4500

D (round) (mm) 140 – 410 140 - 410 165 - 410
D (sq. or rect.) (mm) 140 – 305 102 - 305 175 - 305
2% of concrete 1.5 – 5%
Reinf. (%) NA
mix by mass of section area
Concrete cover (mm) NA NA ≥ 25

APP4-37
1050 2.2.2 Composite Columns Encased in Concrete

1051
1052 The fire resistance of composite columns fully encased within normal
1053 weight or lightweight concrete and with no unfilled spaces is permitted to
1054 be determined as the lesser of Equation A-4-30 and the values in Table A-
1055 4.3.6.
1056
Table A-4.3.6 Minimum size and concrete
cover limits for fire resistance of composite
steel columns encased in concrete with no
unfilled spaces
Fire Resistance Minimum Concrete Minimum Column
Rating, hrs Cover, h, in. (mm) Outside Dimension, in. (mm)
1 1 (25) 8 (200)
2 2 (50) 10 (250)
3 2 (50) 12 (300)
4 2 (50) 14 (350)
20 NE
1057
1058 User Note: The fire resistance ratings and requirements in Table A-4.3.7
1059 were directly adapted from the ACI 216.1 provisions for conventional bar-
20 O
1060 reinforced concrete columns. Substitution of an embedded structural steel
1061 shape for steel bar reinforcement should not reduce the fire resistance of
3, W
1062 the loadbearing concrete parts of column, and the R computed for the same
1063 but assumed non-composite steel column accordingly verifies the fire
E
1064 resistance of the loadbearing steel shape. The concrete cover, h, is defined
ST I
1065 identical to that used for non-composite steel columns encased in concrete.
U EV
1066
1067 2.3 I-Shaped Beams and Girders
1068
G R
1069 The fire-resistance ratings of beams and girders shall be based upon the
1070 size of the element and the type of protection provided in accordance with
AU IC
1071 this section.

1072
BL
1073 These procedures establish a basis for determining resistance of structural

1074 steel beams and girders that differ in size from that specified in approved
1075 fire-resistance-rated assemblies as a function of the thickness of fire-
PU
1076 resistant material and the weight (W) and heated perimeter (D) of the beam
1077 or girder.
1078
1079 The beams provided in approved fire-resistance-rated assemblies shall be
1080 considered to be the minimum permissible size. Other beam or girder
1081 shapes is permitted to be substituted provided that the weight-to-heated-
1082 perimeter ratio (W/D) of the substitute beam is equal to or greater than that
1083 of the minimum beam specified in the approved assembly.
1084
1085 User Note: In the past, the substitution of larger beams for the minimum
1086 required sizes has been permitted based upon the thickness of web and
1087 flange elements, W/D ratio, or the beam size designation. Extensive fire
1088 research has shown that the heat transfer to a protected steel beam or girder
1089 is actually a direct function of the W/D ratio. As a result, beam substitu-
1090 tions should be more directly based upon W/D ratios. The significance of
1091 the thickness of web and flange elements and beam size is inherently
1092 included in the determination of W/D ratios.
1093 It is acceptable and conservative to protect a larger steel beam or girder,
1094 which has a greater W/D value than the W/D of the minimum member size

APP4-38
1095 specified in an approved assembly, with the thickness of fire protection

1096 material required for the minimum member size.
1097
1098 2.3.1 Sprayed and Intumescent/Mastic Fire-Resistant Materials
1099
1100 The provisions in this section apply to beams and girders protected with
1101 sprayed or intumescent/mastic fire-resistant materials.
1102
1103 Larger or smaller beam and girder shapes protected with sprayed fire-
1104 resistant materials are permitted to be substituted for beams specified in
1105 approved unrestrained or restrained fire-resistance-rated assemblies,
1106 provided that the thickness of the fire-resistant material is adjusted in
1107 accordance with the following expression:
1108
1109 h2 = h1 [(W1 / D1) + 0.60] / [(W2 / D2) + 0.60] (A-4-32)[a],[b]
1110
1111 ℎ = ℎ (𝑊 /𝐷 ) + 0.036 / (𝑊 /𝐷 ) + 0.036 (A-4-32M) [a]
20 NE
1112
1113 where:
1114 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in. (mm)
20 O
1115 W = weight of the beam or girder, lb/ft (kg/m)
1116 D = heated perimeter of the beam, in. (mm)
3, W
1117
1118 Subscript 1 refers to the substitute beam or girder and the required
E
1119 thickness of fire-resistant material.
1120 Subscript 2 refers to the beam and fire-resistant material thickness in the
ST I
U EV
1121 approved assembly.

1122
1123 The use of this Equation is limited to the following conditions:
G R
1124
1125 1. The weight-to-heated-perimeter ratio for the substitute beam or girder
AU IC
1126 (W1/D1) shall be not less than 0.37 (customary units) or 0.022 (SI
1127 units).
BL
1128 2. The thickness of fire protection materials calculated for the substitute
1129 beam or girder (T1) shall be not less than 3/8 in. (10 mm).
1130 3. The unrestrained or restrained beam rating shall be not less than 1
PU
1131 hour.
1132 4. Where used to adjust the material thickness for a restrained beam, the
1133 use of this procedure is limited to sections classified as compact.
1134
1135 User Note: This substitution equation based on W/D for beams protected
1136 with spray-applied fire resistive materials was developed by UL with the
1137 given limitations. The minimum W/D ratio of 0.37 prevents the use of this
1138 equation for determining the fire resistance of very small shapes that have
1139 not been tested. The 3/8-in. (10 mm) minimum thickness of protection is a
1140 practical application limit based upon the most commonly used spray-
1141 applied fire protection materials.
1142
1143 The fire resistance of beams and girders protected with intumescent or
1144 mastic fire-resistant coatings shall be determined on the basis of standard
a
tection.
b

APP4-39
1145 firre-resistance raated assembliees, and associaated computatioons and limits as

1146 prrovided in the applicable
a rateed assemblies.
1147
1148 2..4 Trusses
1149
1150 Th he fire resistan
nce of trusses with
w members individually pprotected by firre-
1151 reesistant materials applied on nto each of thhe individual tr truss elements is
1152 peermitted to bee determined for each mem mber in accorrdance with tthe
1153 Appendix
A 4, Section 4.3.1. Thhe protection thhickness of truuss elements thhat
1154 caan be simultan neously exposeed to fire on alll sides shall bee determined ffor
1155 th
he same weig ght-to-heated perimeter
p ratiio (W/D) ass columns. T The
1156 prrotection thick kness of truss elements that directly suppoort floor or rooof
1157 asssembly is perrmitted to be determined fo or the same w weight-to-heateed-
1158 peerimeter ratio (W/D)
( as for beams
b and girders.
1159
1160 User
U Note: Forr trusses, appliccation of the column
c fire ressistance equatiion
1161 is more technically correct th han the beam equation,
e sincee truss membeers
20 NE
1162 arre predominan ntly axially loaded
l and will
w require laarger protectiion
1163 th
hicknesses thann beams. Also,, most truss ellements can bee exposed to ffire
1164 onn all four sidees simultaneou usly. As a ressult, the heateed perimeter aand
20 O
1165 prrotection thick
kness of most truss memberss should be deetermined in tthe
1166 saame manner ass for columns.. However, an n exception is included for ttop
1167 chhord elements that directly suupport floor orr roof construcction. The heatted
3, W
1168 peerimeter and protection thickkness of such elements
e may bbe determined in
1169 th
he same manneer as for beams and girders, or they may bbe conservativeely
E
1170 deetermined in th
he same manneer as for column ns.
ST I
1171
U EV
1172 2..5 Concrete Floor

F Slabs on Steel Deck
1173
G R
1174 Foor composite concrete

c floor slabs
s on trapezoidal steel deckking wherein tthe
1175 up
pper width of the
t deck rib is equal to or greeater than its bbottom rib widdth,
AU IC
1176 th
he fire resistance rating, baseed on the therm
mal insulation criterion for tthe
1177 un
nexposed surfaace temperaturre, shall be peermitted to be calculated usiing
1178 th
he following eqquation:
BL
1179
1180 𝑅 =𝑎 +𝑎 ℎ +𝑎 ℎ +𝑎 𝑙 +𝑎 𝑙 +𝑎 𝑚+𝑎 ℎ +
PU
1181 𝑎 ℎ ℎ + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑚+𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 +
1182 𝑎 ℎ 𝑚+𝑎 𝑙 𝑙 +𝑎 𝑙 𝑚+𝑎 𝑙 𝑚 (A-4-333)
1183
1184
1185
1186 where
w
1187 R = fire resistance rating in minutes
m
1188 h1 = concrete slab thickness above steel deeck, in (mm)
1189 h2 = depth of steel deck, in (mm)
(
1190 l1 = largest up
pper width of deck
d rib, in (mm
m)
1191 l2 = bottom wiidth of deck ribb, in (mm)
1192 l3 = width of deck
d upper flannge, in (mm)

ural Steel Build
O
APP4-40
1193 m = moisture content of the concrete slab. Range of applicability is

1194 between 0% (0.0) and 10% (0.1)
1195
1196 The coefficients 𝑎 to 𝑎 are shown in Table A-4.3.7.
1197
1198
TABLE A-4.3.7 Coefficients 𝒂𝟎 to 𝒂𝟏𝟔 for use
with Equation A-4-33
Coefficient Value
Coefficient Normal-weight concrete Lightweight concrete
𝑎 38.6 min 68.7 min
𝑎 -5.08 min/in (-0.2 min/mm) -36.58 min/in (-1.44 min/mm)
𝑎 −1.45 min/in (−0.057 min/mm) -2.79 min/in (-0.11 min/mm)
20 NE
𝑎 −3.30 min/in (−0.13 min/mm) −12.70 min/in (−0.5 min/mm)
𝑎 −2.08 min/in (−0.082 min/mm) 20.07 min/in (0.79 min/mm)
20 O
𝑎 -118.1 min
3, W -784.2 min
2 2 2 2
𝑎 4.06 min/in (0.0063 min/mm ) 8.84 min/in (0.0137 min/mm )
2 2 2 2
E
2 2 2 2
ST I
U EV
2 2
𝑎 0 -2.39 min/in (-0.0037 min/mm )
𝑎 263.1 min/in (10.36 min/mm) 444.5 min/in (17.5 min/mm)

G R
2 2 2 2
AU IC
2 2
𝑎 0 -3.42 min/in (-0.0053 min/mm )
BL
𝑎 0 91.44 min/in (3.6 min/mm)

2 2 2 2
𝑎 -0.65 min/in (-0.001 min/mm ) -0.97 min/in (-0.0015 min/mm )
PU
𝑎 0 42.42 min/in (1.67 min/mm)
𝑎 0 -66.04 min/in (-2.6 min/mm)
1199
1200 User Note: If moisture content values are not available, m = 4% and 5%
1201 can be used for normal-weight concrete and lightweight concrete, respec-
1202 tively, consistent with Annex D of Eurocode 4. Dry conditions (m = 0%)
1203 will yield the most conservative fire resistance rating.
1204
1205 2.6 Composite Plate Shear Walls
1206
1207 For unprotected composite plate shear walls meeting the requirements of
1208 Chapter I and Section 4.3.2.6, the fire resistance rating is permitted to be
1209 determined in accordance with Equation A-4-34.
1210
⁄
. .
1211 𝑅 = −18.5 + 15 −1 (A-4-34)
⁄
. .
1212 𝑅 = −18.5 + 15 −1 (A-4-34M)

APP4-41
1213
1214
1215 where R is the fire rating in hours, Pu is the applied axial load in kips (kN),
1216 and L, tsc, and Pn are as defined in Chapter I.
1217
1218 The use of Equation A-4-34 shall be limited to walls satisfying all the
1219 following conditions:
1220 1. Wall slenderness ratio (L/tsc) is less than or equal to 20
1221 2. Axial load ratio (Pu/Pn) is less than or equal to 0.2
1222 3. Wall thickness, tsc, is between 8 in. and 24 in. (200 mm and 600 mm)
1223
1224 3. Restrained Construction
1225
1226 For floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings, a
1227 restrained condition exists when the surrounding or supporting structure is
1228 capable of resisting forces and accommodating deformations caused by
1229 thermal expansion throughout the range of anticipated elevated tempera-
20 NE
1230 tures. Cast-in-place or prefabricated concrete floor or roof construction
1231 secured to steel framing members, and individual steel beams and girders
1232 that are welded or bolted to integral framing members shall be considered
20 O
1233 restrained construction.
1234
1235 4. Unrestrained Construction
3, W
1236
1237 Steel beams, girders and frames that do not support a concrete slab shall be
E
1238 considered unrestrained unless the members are bolted or welded to

ST I
1239 surrounding construction that has been specifically designed and detailed
U EV
1240 to resist effects of elevated temperatures.

1241
G R
1242 A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the end span of
1243 multiple spans shall be considered unrestrained unless the wall has been
AU IC
1244 designed and detailed to resist effects of thermal expansion.

1245
BL
PU

APP5-1
1 APPENDIX 5
2 EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

3
4 This appendix applies to the evaluation of the strength and stiffness of existing
5 structures by structural analysis, by load tests, or by a combination of structural
6 analysis and load tests when specified by the engineer of record or in the contract
7 documents. Load testing in accordance with this appendix applies to static vertical
8 gravity load effects.
9
10 The Appendix is organized as follows:
11
13 5.2. Material Properties
14 5.3. Evaluation by Structural Analysis
15 5.4. Evaluation by Load Tests
20 NE
16 5.5. Evaluation Report
17
20 O
19
20 These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of an existing steel
3, W
21 structure is specified for (a) verification of a specific set of design loadings or
22 (b) determination of the available strength of a load-resisting member or
E
23 system. The evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis (Section
24 5.3), by load tests (Section 5.4), or by a combination of structural analysis and
ST I
U EV
25 load tests, when specified in the contract documents by the engineer of record
26 (EOR).
27
G R
28 5.2. MATERIAL PROPERTIES

29
AU IC
30 For evaluations in accordance with this appendix, steel grades other than
31 those listed in Section A3.1 are permitted.
BL
32
33 1. Determination of Required Tests
34
PU
35 The EOR shall determine the specific tests that are required from Sections
36 5.2.2 through 5.2.6 and specify the locations where they are required. The use
37 of applicable project records is permitted to reduce or eliminate the need for
38 testing.
39
40 2. Tensile Properties
41
42 Tensile properties of members shall be established for use in evaluation by
43 structural analysis (Section 5.3) or load tests (Section 5.4). Such properties
44 shall include the yield stress, tensile strength and percent elongation. Certified
45 material test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a
46 testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as
47 applicable, are permitted for this purpose. Otherwise, tensile tests shall be
48 conducted in accordance with ASTM A370 from samples taken from
49 components of the structure.
50
51 3. Chemical Composition
52

APP5-2
53 Where welding is anticipated for repair or modification of existing structures,

54 the chemical composition of the steel shall be determined for use in preparing
55 a welding procedure specification. Results from certified material test reports
56 or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in
57 accordance with ASTM procedures are permitted for this purpose. Otherwise,
58 analyses shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A751 from the
59 samples used to determine tensile properties or from samples taken from the
60 same locations.
61
62 4. Base Metal Notch Toughness
63
64 Where welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as defined in Section
65 A3.1d are critical to the performance of the structure, the Charpy V-notch
66 toughness shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Section
67 A3.1d. If the notch toughness so determined does not meet the provisions of
68 Section A3.1d, the EOR shall determine if remedial actions are required.
69
20 NE
70 5. Weld Metal
71
72 Where structural performance is dependent on existing welded connections,
20 O
73 representative samples of weld metal shall be obtained. Chemical analysis
74 and mechanical tests shall be made to characterize the weld metal. A
75 determination shall be made of the magnitude and consequences of
3, W
76 imperfections. If the requirements of Structural Welding Code—Steel, AWS
77 D1.1/D1.1M, are not met, the EOR shall determine if remedial actions are
E
78 required.
ST I
79
U EV
80 6. Bolts and Rivets

81
G R
82 Representative samples of bolts shall be visually inspected to determine

83 markings and classifications. Where it is not possible to classify bolts by
AU IC
84 visual inspection, representative samples shall be taken and tested to

85 determine tensile strength in accordance with ASTM F606/F606M and the
86 bolt classified accordingly. Alternatively, the assumption that the bolts are
BL
87 ASTM A307 is permitted. Rivets shall be assumed to be ASTM A502 Grade

88 1 unless a higher grade is established through documentation or testing.
PU
89
90 5.3. EVALUATION BY STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
91
92 1. Dimensional Data
93
94 All dimensions used in the evaluation, such as spans, column heights, member
95 spacings, bracing locations, cross-section dimensions, thicknesses, and
96 connection details, shall be determined from a field survey. Alternatively, it
97 is permitted to determine such dimensions from applicable project design or
98 fabrication documents with field verification of critical values.
99
100 2. Strength Evaluation
101
102 Forces (load effects) in members and connections shall be determined by
103 structural analysis applicable to the type of structure evaluated. The load
104 effects shall be determined for the loads and factored load combinations
105 stipulated in Section B2.
106

APP5-3
107 The available strength of members and connections shall be determined from
108 applicable provisions of Chapters B through K and Appendix 5 of this
109 Specification.
110
111 2a. Rivets
112
113 The design tensile or shear strength, φRn, and the allowable tensile or shear
114 strength, Rn/Ω, of a driven rivet shall be determined according Section J3.6,
115 and driven rivets under combined tension and shear shall satisfy the
116 requirements of Section J3.7,
117
118 where
119 Ab = nominal body area of undriven rivet, in.2 (mm2)
120 Fnt = nominal tensile strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
121 (MPa)
122 Fnv = nominal shear strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
123 (MPa)
20 NE
124
Table A-5.3.1
Design Strength of Rivets
20 O
Nominal Tensile Nominal Shear
Description of Strength, ksi (MPa) Strength, ksi (MPa)
3, W
[a] [b]
Rivet
E
A502, Grade 1, hot-
45 (310) 25 (170)
driven rivets
ST I
[a]
U EV
Static loading only.

[b]
Refer to Note [b] of Table J3.2.
125
G R
126 3. Serviceability Evaluation

127
AU IC
128 Where required, the deformations at service loads shall be calculated and
129 reported.
130
BL
131 5.4. EVALUATION BY LOAD TESTS

132
PU

134
135 This section applies only to static vertical gravity loads applied to existing
136 roofs or floors.
137
138 Where load tests are used, the EOR shall first analyze the structure, prepare a
139 testing plan, and develop a written procedure for the test. The plan shall
140 consider catastrophic collapse and/or excessive levels of permanent
141 deformation, as defined by the EOR, and shall include procedures to preclude
142 either occurrence during testing.
143
144 2. Determination of Load Rating by Testing
145
146 To determine the load rating of an existing floor or roof structure by testing, a
147 test load shall be applied incrementally in accordance with the EOR's plan.
148 The structure shall be visually inspected for signs of distress or imminent
149 failure at each load level. Measures shall be taken to prevent collapse if these
150 or any other unusual conditions are encountered.
151

APP5-4
152 The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as the maximum applied test
153 load plus the in-situ dead load. The live load rating of a floor structure shall
154 be determined by setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D + 1.6L, where D is
155 the nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load rating for the structure.
156 For roof structures, Lr, S or R shall be substituted for L,
157
158 where
159 Lr = nominal roof live load
160 R = nominal load due to rainwater or snow, exclusive of the ponding
161 contribution
162 S = nominal snow load
163
164 More severe load combinations shall be used where required by the applicable
165 building codes.
166
167 Periodic unloading is permitted once the service load level is attained, and
168 after the onset of inelastic structural behavior is identified, to document the
20 NE
169 amount of permanent set and the magnitude of the inelastic deformations.
170 Deformations of the structure, such as member deflections, shall be monitored
171 at critical locations during the test, referenced to the initial position before
20 O
172 loading. It shall be demonstrated, while maintaining maximum test load for
173 one hour, that the deformation of the structure does not increase by more than
174 10% above that at the beginning of the holding period. It is permissible to
3, W
175 repeat the test loading sequence if necessary to demonstrate compliance.
176
E
177 Deformations of the structure shall also be recorded 24 hours after the test
ST I
178 loading is removed to determine the amount of permanent set.

U EV
179
180 Where it is not feasible to load test the entire structure, a segment or zone of
G R
181 not less than one complete bay representative of the most critical condition
182 shall be selected.
AU IC
183
184 3. Serviceability Evaluation
185
BL
186 When load tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded incrementally to
187 the service load level. The service test load shall be held for a period of one
PU
188 hour, and deformations shall be recorded at the beginning and at the end of
189 the one-hour holding period.
190
191 5.5. EVALUATION REPORT
192
193 After the evaluation of an existing structure has been completed, the EOR
194 shall prepare a report documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate
195 whether the evaluation was performed by structural analysis, by load testing,
196 or by a combination of structural analysis and load testing. Furthermore, when
197 testing is performed, the report shall include the loads and load combination
198 used and the load-deformation and time-deformation relationships observed.
199 All relevant information obtained from design documents, material test
200 reports, and auxiliary material testing shall also be reported. The report shall
201 indicate whether the structure, including all members and connections, can
202 withstand the load effects.

APP6-1
1 APPENDIX 6
2 MEMBER STABILITY BRACING

3
4
5 This appendix addresses the minimum strength and stiffness necessary for bracing
6 to develop the required strength of a column, beam, or beam-column. The appendix
7 is organized as follows:
8
10 6.2. Column Bracing
11 6.3. Beam Bracing
12 6.4. Beam-Column Bracing
13
14 User Note: Stability requirements for lateral force-resisting systems are provided
15 in Chapter C. The provisions in this appendix apply to bracing that is not generally
20 NE
16 included in the analysis model of the overall structure, but is provided to stabilize
17 individual columns, beams and beam-columns. Guidance for applying these
18 provisions to stabilize trusses is provided in the Commentary.
20 O
19
21
3, W
22 Bracing systems shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
23 Appendix, as applicable. Where such a system braces more than one
E
24 member, the strength and stiffness of the bracing shall be based on the sum of
ST I
U EV
25 the required strengths of all members being braced and consider the
26 flexibility of all components in the system. The evaluation of the stiffness
27 furnished by the bracing shall include the effects of connections and
G R
28 anchoring details.
29
AU IC
30 User Note: More detailed analyses for bracing strength and stiffness are
31 presented in the Commentary.
BL
32
33 A panel brace (formerly referred to as a relative brace) controls the angular
34 deviation of a segment of the braced member between braced points (that is,
PU
35 the lateral displacement of one end of the segment relative to the other). A
36 point brace (formerly referred to as a nodal brace) controls the movement at
37 the braced point without direct interaction with adjacent braced points. A
38 continuous bracing system consists of bracing that is attached along the entire
39 member length.
40
41 The available strength and stiffness of the bracing members and connections
42 shall equal or exceed the required strength and stiffness, respectively, unless
43 analysis indicates that smaller values are justified.
44
45 Columns, beams and beam-columns with end and intermediate braced points
46 designed to meet the requirements in Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4, as applicable,
47 are permitted to be designed based on lengths Lc and Lb, as defined in
48 Chapters E and F, taken equal to the distance between the braced points.
49
50 In lieu of the requirements of Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4,
51
52 (a) The required brace strength and stiffness can be obtained using a second-
53 order analysis that satisfies the provisions of Chapter C or Appendix 1,
54 as appropriate, and includes brace points displaced from their nominal
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings ####, 2022

APP6-2
55 locations in a pattern that provides for the greatest demand on the brac-
56 ing.
57 (b) The required bracing stiffness can be obtained as 2/φ (LRFD) or 2Ω
58 (ASD) times the ideal bracing stiffness determined from a buckling
59 analysis. The required brace strength can be determined using the
60 provisions of Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4, as applicable.
61 (c) For either of the above analysis methods, members with end or
62 intermediate braced points meeting these requirements may be designed
63 based on effective lengths, Lc and Lb, taken less than the distance be-
64 tween braced points.
65
66 User Note: The stability bracing requirements in Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4
67 are based on buckling analysis models involving idealizations of common
68 bracing conditions. Computational analysis methods may be used for greater
69 generality, accuracy and efficiency for more complex bracing conditions. The
70 Commentary to Section 6.1 provides guidance on these considerations.
71
20 NE
72 6.2. COLUMN BRACING
73
74 It is permitted to laterally brace an individual column at end and intermediate
20 O
75 points along its length using either panel or point bracing.
76
77 User Note: This section provides requirements only for lateral bracing.
3, W
78 Column lateral bracing is assumed to be located at the shear center of the
79 column. When lateral bracing does not prevent twist, the column is
E
80 susceptible to torsional buckling, as addressed in Section E4. When the

ST I
U EV
81 lateral bracing is offset from the shear center, the column is susceptible to
82 constrained-axis torsional buckling, which is addressed in the commentary to
83 Section E4.
G R
84
85 1. Panel Bracing
AU IC
86
87 The panel bracing system shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
BL
88 section. The connection of the bracing system to the column shall have the
89 strength specified in Section 6.2.2 for a point brace at that location.
90
PU
91 User Note: If the stiffness of the connection to the panel bracing system is
92 comparable to the stiffness of the panel bracing system itself, the panel
93 bracing system and its connection to the column function as a panel and point
94 bracing system arranged in series. Such cases may be evaluated using the
95 alternative analysis methods listed in Section 6.1.
96
97 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, the
98 required shear strength of the bracing system is:
99
100 Vbr = 0.005Pr (A-6-1)
101
102 and, the required shear stiffness of the bracing system is:
103
1  2P 
104 βbr =  r  (LRFD) (A-6-2a)
φ  Lbr 
105
 2P 
106 β br = Ω  r  (ASD) (A-6-2b)
 Lbr 

APP6-3
107
108 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
109
110 where
111 Lbr = unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm)
112 Pr = required axial strength of the column within the panel under consid-
113 eration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
114
115 2. Point Bracing
116
117 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, the
118 required strength of end and intermediate point braces is
119
120 Pbr = 0.01 Pr (A-6-3)
121
122 and, the required stiffness of the brace is
123
20 NE
1  8P 
124 βbr =  r  (LRFD) (A-6-4a)
φ  Lbr 
20 O
 8P 
125 βbr = Ω  r  (ASD) (A-6-4b)
 Lbr 
3, W
126
E
127 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
128
ST I
U EV
129 where
130 Lbr = unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm)
131 Pr = largest of the required axial strengths of the column within the
G R
132 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load
AU IC
134
135 When the unbraced lengths adjacent to a point brace have different Pr Lbr
BL
136 values, the larger value shall be used to determine the required brace stiffness.
137
138 For intermediate point bracing of an individual column, Lbr in Equations A-6-
PU
139 4a or A-6-4b need not be taken less than the maximum effective length, Lc,
140 permitted for the column based upon the required axial strength, Pr.
141
142 6.3. BEAM BRACING
143
144 Beams shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis at
145 points of support. When a braced point is assumed in the design between
146 points of support, lateral bracing, torsional bracing, or a combination of the
147 two shall be provided to prevent the relative displacement of the top and
148 bottom flanges (i.e., to prevent twist). In members subject to double curvature
149 bending, the inflection point shall not be considered a braced point unless
150 bracing is provided at that location.
151
152 The requirements of this section shall apply to bracing of doubly and singly
153 symmetric I-shaped members subjected to flexure within a plane of symmetry
154 and zero net axial force.
155
156 1. Lateral Bracing
157

APP6-4
158 Lateral bracing shall be attached at or near the beam compression flange,
159 except as follows:
160
161 (a) At the free end of a cantilevered beam, lateral bracing shall be attached at
162 or near the top (tension) flange.
163 (b) For braced beams subject to double curvature bending, bracing shall be
164 attached at or near both flanges at the braced point nearest the inflection
165 point.
166
167 It is permitted to use either panel or point bracing to provide lateral bracing
168 for beams.
169
170 1a. Panel Bracing
171
172 The panel bracing system shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
173 section. The connection of the bracing system to the member shall have the
174 strength specified in Section 6.3.1b for a point brace at that location.
20 NE
175
176 User Note: The stiffness contribution of the connection to the panel bracing
177 system should be assessed as provided in the User Note to Section 6.2.1.
20 O
178
179 The required shear strength of the bracing system is
180
3, W
M C 
181 Vbr = 0.01 r d  (A-6-5)
E
 ho 
ST I
182
U EV
183 and, the required shear stiffness of the bracing system is

184
1  4M r Cd 
G R
185 βbr =   (LRFD) (A-6-6a)

φ  Lbr ho 
AU IC
186
 4M r Cd 
BL
187 βbr = Ω   (ASD) (A-6-6b)

 Lbr ho 
188
PU
189
190 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
191
192 where
193 Cd = 1.0, except in the following case:
194 = 2.0 for the brace closest to the inflection point in a beam subject to
195 double curvature bending
196 Lbr = unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm)
197 Mr = required flexural strength of the beam within the panel under
198 consideration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
199 mm)
200 ho = distance between flange centroids, in. (mm)
201
202 1b. Point Bracing
203
204 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam, the
205 required strength of end and intermediate point braces is
206

APP6-5
M C 
207 Pbr = 0.02  r d  (A-6-7)
 ho 
208
209 and, the required stiffness of the brace is
210
1  10 M r Cd 
211 βbr =   (LRFD) (A-6-8a)
φ  Lbr ho 
 10 M r Cd 
212 βbr = Ω   (ASD) (A-6-8b)
 Lbr ho 
213
214 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω= 2.00 (ASD)
215
216 where
217 Lbr = unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm)
218 M r = largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
20 NE
219 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD
220 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
221
20 O
222 When the unbraced lengths adjacent to a point brace have different M r Lbr
223 values, the larger value shall be used to determine the required brace
3, W
224 stiffness.
225
E
226 For intermediate point bracing of an individual beam, Lbr in Equations A-6-
ST I
227 8a or A-6-8b need not be taken less than the maximum effective length, Lb ,
U EV
228 permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, M r .
229
G R
230 2. Torsional Bracing

231
AU IC
232 It is permitted to attach torsional bracing at any cross-section location, and it

233 need not be attached near the compression flange.
BL
234
235 User Note: Torsional bracing can be provided as point bracing, such as cross-
236 frames, moment-connected beams or vertical diaphragm elements, or as
PU
237 continuous bracing, such as slabs or decks.

238
239 2a. Point Bracing
240
241 About the longitudinal axis of the beam, the required flexural strength of the
242 brace is:
243
244
0.024 M r L
245 M br = (A-6-9)
nCb Lb
246
247
248
249 and, the required flexural stiffness of the brace is:
250
βT
251 βbr = (A-6-10)
 βT 
1 − β 
 sec 

APP6-6
252
253 where
2
1 2.4 L  Mr 
254 βT =   (LRFD) (A-6-11a)
φ nEI yeff  Cb 
2
2.4 L  Mr 
255 βT = Ω   (ASD) (A-6-11b)
nEI yeff  Cb 
3.3E  1.5ho tw3 tst bs3 
256 βsec =  +  (A-6-12)
ho  12 12 
257 and
258
259 φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 3.00 (ASD)
260
261 User Note: Ω = 1.52 φ = 3.00 in Equations A-6-11a or A-6-11b, because the
262 moment term is squared.
20 NE
263
264 βsec can be taken equal to infinity, and β br = βT , when a cross-frame is
20 O
265 attached near both flanges or a vertical diaphragm element is used that is
266 approximately the same depth as the beam being braced.
3, W
267
Iyeff = effective out-of-plane moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
E
269
270 = Iyc + (t/c)Iyt
ST I
U EV
271 I yc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-axis, in.4
272 (mm4)
273 I yt = moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis, in.4
G R
274 (mm4)
275 L = length of span, in. (mm)
AU IC
276 M r = largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
BL
277 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD
278 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
Mr
PU
279 = maximum value of the required flexural strength of the beam

Cb
280 divided by the moment gradient factor, within the unbraced
281 lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD load
283 bs = stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners, in. (mm)
284 = twice the individual stiffener width for pairs of stiffeners, in.
285 (mm)
286 c = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme compressive fibers,
287 in. (mm)
288 n = number of braced points within the span
289 t = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme tensile fibers, in.
290 (mm)
291 tw = thickness of beam web, in. (mm)
292 tst = thickness of web stiffener, in. (mm)
293 βT = overall brace system required stiffness, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad)
294 βsec = web distortional stiffness, including the effect of web transverse
295 stiffeners, if any, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad)
296

APP6-7
297 User Note: If βsec < βT, Equation A-6-10 is negative, which indicates that
298 torsional beam bracing will not be effective due to inadequate web
299 distortional stiffness.
300
301 User Note: For doubly symmetric members, c = t and Iyeff = out-of-plane
302 moment of inertia, Iy, in.4 (mm4).
303
304 When required, a web stiffener shall extend the full depth of the braced
305 member and shall be attached to the flange if the torsional brace is also
306 attached to the flange. Alternatively, it is permissible to stop the stiffener
307 short by a distance equal to 4tw from any beam flange that is not directly
308 attached to the torsional brace.
309
310 In Equation A-6-9, Lb need not be taken less than the maximum unbraced
311 length permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, Mr.
312
313 2b. Continuous Bracing
20 NE
314
315 For continuous torsional bracing:
316
20 O
317 (a) The brace strength requirement per unit length along the beam shall be
318 taken as Equation A-6-9 divided by the maximum unbraced length
319 permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, M r .
3, W
320 The required flexural strength, M r , shall be taken as the maximum
E
321 value throughout the beam span.
322 (b) The brace stiffness requirement per unit length shall be given by
ST I
U EV
323 Equations A-6-10 and A-6-11 with L n = 1.0.

324 (c) The web distortional stiffness shall be taken as:
325
G R
3.3 Et w3
326 β sec = (A-6-13)
AU IC
12ho
327
BL
328 6.4. BEAM-COLUMN BRACING

329
330 For bracing of beam-columns, the required strength and stiffness for the axial
PU
331 force shall be determined as specified in Section 6.2, and the required strength
332 and stiffness for flexure shall be determined as specified in Section 6.3. The
333 values so determined shall be combined as follows:
334
335 (a) When panel bracing is used, the required strength shall be taken as the
336 sum of the values determined using Equations A-6-1 and A-6-5, and the
337 required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the values determined
338 using Equations A-6-2 and A-6-6.
339
340 (b) When point bracing is used, the required strength shall be taken as the
341 sum of the values determined using Equations A-6-3 and A-6-7, and the
342 required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the values determined
343 using Equations A-6-4 and A-6-8. In Equations A-6-4 and A-6-8, Lbr
344 for beam-columns shall be taken as the actual unbraced length; the
345 provisions in Sections 6.2.2 and 6.3.1b, that Lbr need not be taken less
346 than the maximum permitted effective length based upon Pr and M r ,
347 shall not be applied.
348

APP6-8
349 (c) When torsional bracing is provided for flexure in combination with panel
350 or point bracing for the axial force, the required strength and stiffness
351 shall be combined or distributed in a manner that is consistent with the
352 resistance provided by the element(s) of the actual bracing details.
353
354 (d) When the combined stress effect from axial force and flexure results in
355 compression to both flanges, either lateral bracing shall be added to both
356 flanges or both flanges shall be laterally restrained by a combination of
357 lateral and torsional bracing.
358
359 User Note: For case (d), additional guidelines are provided in the Com-
360 mentary.
361
362
363
20 NE
364
365
20 O
366
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU

APP7-1
1 APPENDIX 7
2 ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR

3 STABILITY
4
5
6 This appendix presents alternatives to the direct analysis method of design for
7 stability defined in Chapter C. The two alternative methods covered are the
8 effective length method and the first-order analysis method.
9
11
12 7.1. General Stability Requirements
13 7.2. Effective Length Method
14 7.3. First-Order Analysis Method
15
20 NE
16 7.1. GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
17
18 The general requirements of Section C1 shall apply. As an alternative to the
20 O
19 direct analysis method (defined in Sections C1 and C2), it is permissible to
20 design structures for stability in accordance with either the effective length
3, W
21 method, specified in Section 7.2, or the first-order analysis method, specified
22 in Section 7.3, subject to the limitations indicated in those sections.
E
23
ST I
24 7.2. EFFECTIVE LENGTH METHOD

U EV
25
26 1. Limitations
27
G R
28 When using the effective length method, the following conditions shall be
29 met:
AU IC
30
31 (a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
BL
32 columns, walls or frames.

33
PU
34 (b) The ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift

35 (both determined for load and resistance factor design (LRFD) load
36 combinations or 1.6 times allowable strength design (ASD) load combi-
37 nations, with stiffness not adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in all
38 stories is equal to or less than 1.5.
39
40 User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order drift in a story
41 may be taken as the B2 multiplier, calculated as specified in Appendix 8.
42
43 2. Required Strengths
44
45 The required strengths of components shall be determined from an elastic
46 analysis conforming to the requirements of Section C2.1, except that the
47 stiffness reduction indicated in Section C2.1(a) shall not be applied; the
48 nominal stiffnesses of all structural steel components shall be used. Notional
49 loads shall be applied in the analysis in accordance with Section C2.2b.
50
51 User Note: Since the condition specified in Section C2.2b(d) will be
52 satisfied in all cases where the effective length method is applicable, the
53 notional load need only be applied in gravity-only load cases.

APP7-2
54
55 3. Available Strengths
56
57 The available strengths of members and connections shall be calculated in
58 accordance with the provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable.
59
60 For flexural buckling, the effective length, Lc, of members subject to
61 compression shall be taken as KL, where K is as specified in (a) or (b), in the
62 following, as applicable, and L is the laterally unbraced length of the
63 member.
64
65 (a) In braced-frame systems, shear-wall systems, and other structural
66 systems where lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads does not
67 rely on the flexural stiffness of columns, the effective length factor, K, of
68 members subject to compression shall be taken as unity unless a smaller
69 value is justified by rational analysis.
70
20 NE
71 (b) In moment-frame systems and other structural systems in which the
72 flexural stiffnesses of columns are considered to contribute to lateral
73 stability and resistance to lateral loads, the effective length factor, K, or
20 O
74 elastic critical buckling stress, Fe, of those columns whose flexural
75 stiffnesses are considered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance
76 to lateral loads shall be determined from a sidesway buckling analysis of
3, W
77 the structure; K shall be taken as 1.0 for columns whose flexural stiff-
78 nesses are not considered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance
E
79 to lateral loads.
ST I
80
U EV
81 Exception: It is permitted to use K = 1.0 in the design of all columns if

82 the ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift
G R
83 (both determined for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load
84 combinations) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.1.
AU IC
85
86 User Note: Methods of calculating the effective length factor, K, are
87 discussed in the Commentary.
BL
88
PU

91 points.
92
93 User Note: Methods of satisfying the bracing requirement are provided in
94 Appendix 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing
95 that is included in the design of the lateral force-resisting system of the
96 overall structure.
97
98 7.3. FIRST-ORDER ANALYSIS METHOD
99
100 1. Limitations
101
102 When using the first-order analysis method, the following conditions shall be
103 met:
104
105 (a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
106 columns, walls or frames.
107

APP7-3
108 (b) The axial forces in nominally horizontal members in moment frames are
109 not larger than 0.1FeAg with Lc taken as the unbraced length of the
110 member.
111
112 (c) The ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift
113 (both determined for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load
114 combinations, with stiffness not adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in
115 all stories is equal to or less than 1.5.
116
117 User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order drift in a story
118 may be taken as the B2 multiplier, calculated as specified in Appendix 8.
119
120 (d) The required axial compressive strengths of all members whose flexural
121 stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the
122 structure satisfy the limitation:
123
124 αPr ≤ 0.5Pns (A-7-1)
20 NE
125
126 where
127 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
20 O
128 Pr = required axial compressive strength under LRFD or ASD load
3, W
130 Pns = cross-section compressive strength; for nonslender-element
131 sections, Pns = Fy Ag , and for slender-element sections,
E
132 Pns = Fy Ae , where Ae is as defined in Section E7, kips (N)
ST I
133
U EV
134 2. Required Strengths

135
G R
136 The required strengths of components shall be determined from a first-order

137 analysis, with additional requirements (a) and (b) given in the following. The
138 analysis shall consider flexural, shear and axial member deformations, and all
AU IC
139 other deformations that contribute to displacements of the structure.

140
BL
141 (a) All load combinations shall include an additional lateral load, Ni, applied
142 in combination with other loads at each level of the structure:
PU
143
144 Ni = 2.1α( Δ L)Yi ≥ 0.0042Yi (A-7-2)
145
146 where
147 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
148 Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combina-
149 tion or ASD load combination, as applicable, kips (N)
150 Δ L = maximum ratio of Δ to L for all stories in the structure
151 Δ = first-order interstory drift due to the LRFD or ASD load
152 combination, as applicable, in. (mm). Where Δ varies over
153 the plan area of the structure, Δ shall be the average drift
154 weighted in proportion to vertical load or, alternatively, the
155 maximum drift.
156 L = height of story, in. (mm)
157
158 The additional lateral load at any level, Ni, shall be distributed over that
159 level in the same manner as the gravity load at the level. The additional
160 lateral loads shall be applied in the direction that provides the greatest
161 destabilizing effect.

APP7-4
162
163 User Note: For most building structures, the requirement regarding the
164 direction of Ni may be satisfied as follows: (a) For load combinations
165 that do not include lateral loading, consider two alternative orthogonal
166 directions for the additional lateral load in a positive and a negative
167 sense in each of the two directions, same direction at all levels; (b) for
168 load combinations that include lateral loading, apply all the additional
169 lateral loads in the direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the
170 combination.
171
172 (b) The nonsway amplification of beam-column moments shall be included
173 by applying the B1 amplifier of Appendix 8 to the total member mo-
174 ments.
175
176 User Note: Since there is no second-order analysis involved in the first-
177 order analysis method for design by ASD, it is not necessary to amplify ASD
178 load combinations by 1.6 before performing the analysis, as required in the
20 NE
179 direct analysis method and the effective length method.
180
181 3. Available Strengths
20 O
182
183 The available strengths of members and connections shall be calculated in
184 accordance with the provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable.
3, W
185
186 The effective length for flexural buckling of all members shall be taken as
E
187 the unbraced length unless a smaller value is justified by rational analysis.
ST I
188
U EV
G R
191 points.
192
AU IC
193 User Note: Methods of satisfying this requirement are provided in Appendix
194 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing that is
195 included in the analysis of the overall structure as part of the overall force-
BL
196 resisting system.

PU

APP8-1
1 APPENDIX 8
2 APPROXIMATE ANALYSIS
3
4
5 This appendix provides approximate analysis procedures for determining the
6 required strength of structural members and connections.
8
9 8.1. Approximate Second-Order Elastic Analysis
10 8.2. Approximate Inelastic Moment Redistribution
11
12 8.1. APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ELASTIC ANALYIS
13
14 Second-order effects in structures may be approximated by amplifying the
15 required strengths determined by two first-order elastic analyses. The use of
20 NE
16 this procedure is limited to structures that support gravity loads primarily
17 through nominally vertical columns, walls or frames, except that it is
18 permissible to use the procedure specified for determining P-δ effects for any
20 O
19 individual compression member. This method is not permitted for design by
20 advanced analysis using the provisions of Appendix 1.
3, W
21
22 1. Calculation Procedure
E
23
24 The required second-order flexural strength, Mr, and axial strength, Pr, of all
ST I
U EV
25 members shall be determined as:

26
27 Mr = B1Mnt + B2Mlt (A-8-1)
G R
28
29 Pr = Pnt + B2Plt (A-8-2)
AU IC
30
31 where
BL
32 B1 = multiplier to account for P-δ effects, determined for each member

33 subject to compression and flexure, and each direction of bending
34 of the member in accordance with Appendix 8, Section 8.1.2. B1
PU
35 shall be taken as 1.0 for members not subject to compression.

36 B2 = multiplier to account for P-Δ effects, determined for each story of
37 the structure and each direction of lateral translation of the story
38 in accordance with Appendix 8, Section 8.1.3.
39 Mlt = first-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
40 due to lateral translation of the structure only, kip-in. (N-mm)
41 Mnt = first-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
42 with the structure restrained against lateral translation, kip-in. (N-
43 mm)
44 Mr = required second-order flexural strength using LRFD or ASD load
46 Plt = first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
47 due to lateral translation of the structure only, kips (N)
48 Pnt = first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
49 with the structure restrained against lateral translation, kips (N)
50 Pr = required second-order axial strength using LRFD or ASD load
52
53 User Note: Equations A-8-1 and A-8-2 are applicable to all members in all
54 structures. Note, however, that B1 values other than unity apply only to
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ##, 2022

APP8-2
55 moments in beam-columns; B2 applies to moments and axial forces in

56 components of the lateral force-resisting system (including columns, beams,
57 bracing members and shear walls). See the Commentary for more on the
58 application of Equations A-8-1 and A-8-2.
59
60 2. Multiplier B1 for P-δ Effects
61
62 The B1 multiplier for each member subject to compression and each direction
63 of bending of the member is calculated as:
64
Cm
65 B1 = ≥1 (A-8-3)
1 − αPr Pe1
66 where
67 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
68 Cm = equivalent uniform moment factor, assuming no relative transla-
69 tion of the member ends, determined as follows:
70
20 NE
71 (a) For beam-columns not subject to transverse loading between
72 supports in the plane of bending
73
20 O
74 Cm = 0.6 − 0.4 ( M1 M 2 ) (A-8-4)
3, W
75
76 where M1 and M2, calculated from a first-order analysis, are
E
77 the smaller and larger moments, respectively, at the ends of
78 that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending
ST I
U EV
79 under consideration. M 1 M 2 is positive when the member is

80 bent in reverse curvature, and negative when bent in single
81 curvature.
G R
82
83 (b) For beam-columns subject to transverse loading between
AU IC
84 supports, the value of Cm shall be determined either by analy-

85 sis or conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases.
BL
86
87 Pe1 = elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of
88 bending, calculated based on the assumption of no lateral transla-
PU
89 tion at the member ends, kips (N)

π2 EI *
90 = (A-8-5)
( Lc1 )2
91 where
92 EI* = flexural rigidity required to be used in the analysis (=
93 0.8τbEI when used in the direct analysis method, where
94 τb is as defined in Chapter C; = EI for the effective
95 length and first-order analysis methods)
96 E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000
97 MPa)
98 I = moment of inertia in the plane of bending, in.4 (mm4)
99 Lc1 = effective length in the plane of bending, calculated
100 based on the assumption of no lateral translation at the
101 member ends, set equal to the laterally unbraced length
102 of the member unless analysis justifies a smaller value,
103 in. (mm)
104

APP8-3
105 It is permitted to use the first-order estimate of Pr (i.e., Pr = Pnt + Plt ) in

106 Equation A-8-3.
107
108 3. Multiplier B2 for P-Δ Effects
109
110 The B2 multiplier for each story and each direction of lateral translation is
111 calculated as:
112
1
113 B2 = ≥1 (A-8-6)
αPstory
1−
Pe story
114 where
115 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
116 Pstory = total vertical load supported by the story using LRFD or ASD
117 load combinations, as applicable, including loads in columns
118 that are not part of the lateral force-resisting system, kips (N)
20 NE
119 Pe story = elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction
120 of translation being considered, kips (N), determined by side-
121 sway buckling analysis or as:
20 O
H L
122 = RM (A-8-7)
ΔH
3, W
123 and
124 H = total story shear, in the direction of translation being consid-
E
125 ered, produced by the lateral forces used to compute ΔH, kips
ST I
126 (N)
U EV
127 L = height of story, in. (mm)

128 RM = 1 – 0.15 (Pmf /Pstory) (A-8-8)
G R
129 Pmf = total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of
130 moment frames, if any, in the direction of translation being
131 considered (= 0 for braced-frame systems), kips (N)
AU IC
132 ΔH = first-order interstory drift, in the direction of translation

BL
133 being considered, due to lateral forces, in. (mm), computed

134 using the stiffness required to be used in the analysis. (When
135 the direct analysis method is used, stiffness is reduced ac-
PU
136 cording to Section C2.3.) Where ΔH varies over the plan area
137 of the structure, it shall be the average drift weighted in pro-
138 portion to vertical load or, alternatively, the maximum drift.
139
140 User Note: RM can be taken as 0.85 as a lower bound value for stories
141 that include moment frames, and RM = 1 if there are no moment frames
142 in the story. H and ΔH in Equation A-8-7 may be based on any lateral
143 loading that provides a representative value of story lateral stiffness, H
144 /ΔH.
145
146 8.2. APPROXIMATE INELASTIC MOMENT REDISTRIBUTION
147
148 The required flexural strength of indeterminate beams comprised of compact
149 sections, as defined in Section B4.1, carrying gravity loads only, and
150 satisfying the unbraced length requirements provided below, is permitted to
151 be taken as nine-tenths of the negative moments at the points of support,
152 produced by the gravity loading and determined by an elastic analysis
153 satisfying the requirements of Chapter C, provided that the maximum
154 positive moment is increased by one-tenth of the average negative moment
155 determined by an elastic analysis. This moment redistribution is not

APP8-4
156 permitted for moments in members with Fy exceeding 65 ksi (450 MPa), for
157 moments produced by loading on cantilevers, for design using partially
158 restrained (PR) moment connections, or for design by inelastic analysis using
159 the provisions of Appendix 1.2. This moment redistribution is permitted for
160 design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD) and for design according to
161 Section B3.2 (ASD). The required axial strength shall not exceed 0.15φcFyAg
162 for LRFD or 0.15FyAg/Ωc for ASD, where φc and Ωc are determined from
163 Section E1, Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2), and Fy = specified
164 minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa).
165
166 The laterally unbraced length, Lb, of the compression flange adjacent to the
167 redistributed end moment locations shall not exceed Lm determined as
168 follows.
169
170 (a) For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped beams with the
171 Iyc of the compression flange equal to or larger than the Iyt of the tension
172 flange loaded in the plane of the web
20 NE
173
  M   E 
174 Lm = 0.12 + 0.076  1     ry (A-8-9)
  M 2    Fy
20 O

175
176 (b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams bent about
3, W
177 their major axis
178
E
  M   E   E 
ST I
179 Lm = 0.17 + 0.10  1     ry ≥ 0.10   ry (A-8-10)

U EV
  M 2    Fy   Fy 
180
G R
181 where
182 Fy =specified minimum yield stress of the compression flange, ksi (MPa)
AU IC
183 M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)

184 M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
BL

186 ( M1 M 2 ) is positive when moments cause reverse curvature and negative
PU
187 for single curvature

188
189 There is no limit on Lb for members with round or square cross sections or
190 for any beam bent about its minor axis.
191
192

APP X-1
1 APPENDIX X Comment [HC1]:

New Appendix is proposed.
2 DESIGN OF FILLED COMPOSITE MEMBERS WITH
3 HIGH-STRENGTH MATERIALS
4
5
6 This appendix provides methods for calculating the design strength of filled
7 composite members with high-strength materials. These provisions shall be used in
8 lieu of Sections I1.2, I1.3, I1.4, I2, I3, and I5. Other provisions of Chapter I shall
9 apply.
10
11 X.1. RECTANGULAR FILLED COMPOSITE MEMBERS
12
13 1. Limitations
14
15 For rectangular filled composite members, the following limitations shall be
16 met:
20 NE
17
18 (a) The area of the steel section shall comprise at least 1% of the total
19 composite cross section.
20
20 O
(b) Concrete shall be normal weight, and compressive strength, fc' , shall not
3, W
21 exceed 15 ksi (103 MPa).
E
22 (c) The specified minimum yield stress of steel shall not exceed 100 ksi (690
23 MPa).
ST I
U EV
24 (d) The maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio for compression steel

25 elements shall be limited to 5.00 E Fy .
G R
26 (e) Longitudinal reinforcement is not required. If longitudinal refinforcement

27 is provided, it shall not be considered in the calculation of available
AU IC
28 strength.
29
BL
30 2. Compressive Strength
31
PU
32 The available compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with

33 Section I2.2b with the following modifications:
34
35 Pno = Fcr As + 0.85 fc' Ac (A-X-1)
36
37 Fcr = 1.0 − 0.075λFy (A-X-2)
38
39 where
40 λ = largest width-to-thickness ratio of compression steel elements
41
42 3. Flexural Strength
43
44 The available flexural strength shall be determined in as follows:
45
46 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
47
48 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined as 90% of the moment
49 corresponding to a plastic stress distribution over the composite cross-section
APP X-2
50 assuming that steel components have reached a stress of either Fy in tension or

51 Fcr in compression, where Fcr calculated using Equation A-X-2, and concrete
52 components in compression have reached a stress of 0.85 fc' , where fc' is the
53 specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa).
54
55
56 4. Combined Flexure and Axial Force
57
58 The interaction of flexure and compression shall be limited by Equations I5-
59 1a and I5-1b where the term cp is determined using Equation A-X-3 and cm is
60 determined using A-X-4.
 
0.075  0.3   f c' 
61 c p = 0.175 − + λ    (A-X-3)
B  Pn P   Fy 
H  no 
62
20 NE
2
  Fy   f c' 
max
 P  B
63 cm = 0.6 + 0.3  n  + 0.6λ      (A-X-4)
 Pno  H   Fy   Fy 
64 where
20 O
65 B = flange width of rectangular cross section
66 H = web depth of rectangular cross section
3, W
67 Fymax = maximum permitted yield stress of steel = 100 ksi (690 MPa)
68 Pn = nominal axial strength calculated in accordance with Section X.1.1
E
69 t = flange thickness
ST I
70
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU


2022aisc360 Prone Draft PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022aisc360 Prone Draft PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SUMMARY OF MAJOR CHANGES IN PUBLIC REVIEW ONE OF AISC 360-22

Supersedes the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION

Chicago, Illinois 60601-6204

American Institute of Steel Construction

FOR COMMITTEE USE ONLY

initial publication of this edition.

Printed in the United States of America

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xxxx,2022

26 Afc Area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2) ............................................. G2.2

27 Afg Gross area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section

34 Ag Gross area of eyebar body, in.2 (mm2) ............................................... D6.1

36 Agv Gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2) ................................................J4.2

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

81 Cv1 Web shear strength coefficient........................................................... G2.1

84 C1 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of encased composite

86 C2 Edge distance increment, in. (mm) ........................................... Table J3.5

88 compression member ......................................................................... I2.2b

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

110 Fcr Critical stress, ksi (MPa)........................................................................E3

141 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa) .................................... D2

143 (MPa) ................................................................................................ I8.2a

146 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of HSS member material, ksi

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

166 H Flexural constant ....................................................................................E4

191 Iy Moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4(mm4).................................... F2.2

Effective out-of-plane moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4) ............. App. 6.3.2a

197 J Torsional constant, in.4 (mm4) ...............................................................E4

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

222 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1

247 MB Absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced segment, kip-in.

248 (N-mm) ................................................................................................. F1

249 MC Absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced

251 Mc Available flexural strength, φMn or Mn/Ω, determined in accordance with

253 Mc Available flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I3,

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

303 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations,

310 (N-mm) ............................................................................................. F10.2

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

357 Pno Nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of length

362 Pp Nominal bearing strength, kips (N) ....................................................... J8

367 combinations, kips (N)....................................................................... C2.3

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

413 Required strength using ASD load combinations ............................. B3.2

416 Rg Coefficient to account for group effect ............................................. I8.2a

418 Rn Nominal strength ............................................................................... B3.1

420 Rn Nominal slip resistance, kips (N) .........................................................J1.8

423 Rn Nominal strength of the connected material, kips (N) .......................J3.10

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

468 U Shear lag factor ..................................................................................... D3

478 Vc Available shear strength, φVn or Vn/Ω, determined in accordance with

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

522 bf Width of flange, in. (mm) .................................................................. B4.1

523 bfc Width of compression flange, in. (mm) .............................................. F4.2

526 bp Smaller of the dimension a and h, in. (mm)....................................... G2.4

533 E7.1 ..................................................................................................... E7.1

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

582 sections, in. (mm) .............................................................................. B4.1

584 hf Factor for fillers ..................................................................................J3.8

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

634 s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive

637 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.2a

639 t Thickness of wall, in. (mm) ................................................................ E7.2